GIFT OF Dr. Horace Ivie >UC»-vY"- >T- --.>t-,- ^/^ ^^/' Cy. -'oi.U Jf:..^ ^lW^s>rniy (Charles W. Wendte OTTO'S F E E :^ C H CONYERSATION GRAMMAR. REVISED BY FEKDINAND BOCIIER INSTRUCTOR LN FRENCH AT HARVARD COLLEGE. BOSTON: S. R. URBINO, 13 SCHOOL STREET. NEW YORK: F. W. CHRISTEKN. PHILADELPHIA: F. LEYPOLDT. BALTIMORE: J. S. -WATERS. CINCINNATI: R. CLARKE & CO. 18G4. Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1864, by S. R. URBINO, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the District of Massachusetts. EDUCATION DEFT GIFT OF PREFACE. The first edition of Dr. Emile Otto's " French Conversation Grammar " appeared at Heidelberg in 1859. A second edition was issued in 1863, upon which this first American edition is based. The pres- ent editor has not hesitated in making such changes as he deemed proper in the body of the work, abandon- ing, among other things, the names of the Latin cases, genitive, dative, etc., which, although they may be of help to the German student, can only confuse the Amer- ican learner. The names of the tenses have also been changed, and, it is hoped, simplified. A few lessons have been added to Part I., and the chapter upon the Past Participle has been re-written. The preliminary lesson upon Pronunciation is also entirely new, and an English and French Vocabulary of the words ^that occur in the Themes has been added. Boston, August, 1864. 924164 CONTENTS PRONU^^ClA|T]to>J. :;,';';. ;','_; l.j I ,.;, Paob. The Alphabet 13 Division of Syllables H Syllabic Accent, or Stress 14 Accents — Orthographic Marks 15 Simple Vowels 15 Compound Vowels 18 • Diphthongs 18 Nasal Vowls 19 Consonants.— General Rules ?l Consonants. — Special Rules 5f2 Linking of Final Consonants t 2(5 Observations on E mute 26 3?A.I2.T I. LsBsov. Pack. I. The Article 28 II. Formation of the Plural .30 III. Case — .4 — D^ 33 IV. Prepositions 36 V. The Partitive Article 39 VI. Further use of de 42 VII. Proper Nouns 44 VIII. Conjugation of avoir, to liave — affirmatively 48 IX. Idiomatic use of avoir 51 X. Conjugation of etre, to be — affirmatively 54 XI. Negations. — Tlie Negative and Interrogative forms of the Aux- iliaries 57 IX X , CONTENTS. Ltsaos. Fagi. XII. Demonstrative and Interrogative Adjectives .62 XIII. Possessive Adjectives 64 XIV. Cardinal Numbers 67 XV. Ordinal Numbers 71 XVI. Indefinite Adjectives 75 XVII. Adjeotives. — Foraaatioaoftlie feminine and of the plural .... 78 XVIII. tie place of Adjt?fct;lve,3.., 82 XTX. Degrees of Compjjj-isQn 80 ;Xi5,',^&iilJ'.rV«r?^s. -'■i^'irst Cciviuga.tion. — Donner 88 Reading Lesson : Le chameau et le chat 95 XXI. Remarks on the Orthograpliy of some Verbs of the First Conjuga- tion 96 XXII. Second Conjugation : Fiiiir 100 Reading Lesson : Le Moineau et ses Petits 104 XXIII. Third Conjugation : Vendre 105 Reading Lesson: Le roi de Perse 110 XXIV. Disjunctive Personal Pronouns 110 Reading Lesson : Le Rosier 113 XXV. Conjunctive Personal Pronouns 114 Reading Lesson: Suite du Rosier 118 XXVI. Demonstrative Pronouns 119 XXVII. Interrogative Pronouns 122 XXVIII. Possessive and Relative Pronouns 125 XXIX. Indefinite Pronouns 129 Reading Lesson : Puissance de la Concorde 132 XXX. Passive and Neuter Verbs 133 XXXI. Reflective Verbs 138 Reading Lesson: Le Sansonnet 144 XXXII. Impersonal Verbs 145 Reading Lesson : Productions de divers climats 150 XXXIII. Formation of Adverbs 151 XXXIV. Adverbs of Place and of Time 155 XXXV. Adverbs of Number, of Quality, of JS'egation, etc 158 XXXVI. Conjunctions .162 Reading Lesson : Lafitte 166 XXXVII. Conjunctive Phrases 167 XXXVIII. Irregular Verbs, — First Class 170 XXXIX. Irregular Verbs. — First Class continued 174 XL. Irregular Verbs. — First Class continued 177 XLI. Irregular Verbs. — First Class continued ISO CONTENTS. XI liESBOK. FaOI. XLII. Irregular Verbs. — Second Class 183 XLIir. Irregular Verb's. — Third Class 188 XLIV. Irregular Verbs. — Thu'd Class continued 189 XLV. Irregular Verbs. — Third Class continued 194 XL VI. Defective Verbs 197 Alphabetical List of Irregular and Defective Verbs 199 XL VII. How to render do, did, shall, will, etc 201 Supplementary Tenses 203 PA.RT II. Elision .205 I. On the Gender of Substantives 206 II. Plural of Nouns 214 Reading' Lesson: Le Castor -. 216 III. Use of the Article 218 Heading Lesson : Demosthfene 226 IV. Special use of de and a 228 V. Peculiarities in the use of names of Countries, Towns, etc. . . . 235 Reading Lesson : Charles XII 238 VI. Possessive Adjectives 239 Reading Lesson : Eudamidas 242 Til. Numerals 244 VIII. Adjectives 246 Reading Lesson : L'elephaut ., 253 IX. 1. Personal Pronouns 255 2. Particular use of en and y 258 3. The supplying Pronouns le,la,les 260 Reading Lesson : L'elephant {continuation) 262 X. Interrogative Pronouns 263 Reading Lesson : Servilius se defend devant le peuple 266 XI. Relative Pronouns *. . . i 267 Reading Lesson : Suite de "Servilius," 272 XII. Indefinite Pronouns 274 XIII. Indefinite Pronouns, continued 278 XIV. Adverbs 284 Reading Lesson : Le Connetable de Bourbon et Bayard 288 XII CONTENTS. IiiBioir. Paoi. XV. Syntax of Negations 289 Reading Lesson : Le Connetable de Bourbon et Bayard. (Suite) . 295 XVI. Kemarks on some Prepositions . . .^ 296 XVII. Different uses of the Coiyunction que 307 Readings Lesson: Le Connetable de Bourbon et Bayard. (Fil) . 311 XVIII. Use of the Tenses of the Indicative 313 Reading Lesson : Alexandre Selkirk 324 XIX. The Subjunctive Mood 325 Reading Lesson : Alexandre Selkirk, (Suite) .336 XX. The Infinitive 338 •♦ " preceded by rfe 342 ' " " preceded by a 347 " " preceded by other Prepositions 354 Reading Lesson : Alexandre Selkirk. (Suite) 355 XXI. The Present Participle 357 Reading Lesson : Gesler conduit Tell a Kusnach 360 XXII. The Past Participle 363 XXIII. The Participle Absolute . 367 Reading Lesson : Gesler conduit Tell a Kusnacli 369 XXIV. Government of Verbs 371 XXV. Idiomatical Expressions . 380 English Vocabulary of the Words that occur in the Themes 385 FRENCH GRAMMAR PRONUNCIATION THE ALPHABET. 1. The written French alphabet is the same as the English. W and K are found only in words borrowed from other languages. The names of the letters are given below in the French spelling as they are of little or no value to the beginner. In the new names the e in he, ke, de, gue, etc., is only sounded enough to allow the utterance of the consonant that precedes it, as in globe, cake, raade, fatigue ,• j is sounded as s in pleosiire. The vowels have their normal French sounds. — W when spoken of is called double V. OLD NAMES. NEW NAMES. OLI ) NAMES. NEW NAMES. A a a a N n. enne ne B b U be C c 06 ke (se) P P p4 pe D d d6 de Q q ku ' ke E e 6 e B r erre re F f effe fe S s esse se (ze) a g g^ gue(je) T t te te H h ache he U u u u I i i i V V v^ ve J J ji je X X ics kse K k ka ke Y y igrec i L 1 elle le Z z zede ze M m emme me 13 14 PRONUNCIATION. DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 2. Words are generally divided as in English ; but whenever it is possible .q. syllable must l^ffii} with a consonant. Hence, verbal and other teitainaiions ibcginmag with a vowel nrnst be joined to the conspf^aaji Jt)h.^t: precedes ;, tl\iis m'-wer, but ai-me-rai ; chan-ter^ chari-t^Vai, '(^dn4^-ron^r « • « • , ^ - -^ As to X equal to gs, cs, its compound nature prevents its separation from the vowel that precedes : hence the following division ex-em-ple. In writing, silent k apparently begins a syllable, as in in-h€-rent ; but in the spoken syllables, silent h has no value whatever ; and a consonant be- tween a vowel and a silent h is separated from that vowel in the spoken though not in the written language ; hence the following divisions. Written. Pronounced. in-hu-main i-nhu-main in-ha-bi-le i-nha-bile in-he'-rent i-nhe-rent bon-heur bo-nheur If these words were pronounced according to the written divisions, they would begin with a nasal sound ; but they do not. (See Nasal vowels, 37.) SYLLABIC ACCENT, OR STRESS. ♦ As compared with English, French is generally said to have no syllabic accent. Such a stress of voice as is heard in the words ac^cent and accentf does not occur in French ; but the following rule explains the uniformity of the English accent on the last syllable in words newly introduced from the French, such as barouche, surtout, machine, fatigue, etc. 3. In French each syllable of a word must be pronounced smoothly, the voice resting upon the last, unless it ends in e mute, in which case the syllable before the last is slightly accented. Ex. constitution, indubitable. ' ACCENTS — SIMPLE VOWELS. 15 ACCENTS, — ORTHOGRAPHIC MARKS. 4. Three orthographic marks, the acute ('), {h^ grave Q), and the circumflex (*), have received the name of accents. These marks never affect a syllable ; they can only modify the sound of a vowel over which they are placed. Sometimes they have a mere ortho- graphic value. They must never be neglected in writing. 5. The ACUTE (') is used only over the vowel e (e"), which then has the sound of a in date. Ex, ete, donne. 6. The Grave Q) or open accent is used principally over e (e), which then has the sound of e in ehb or of e in there. 'Ex. f eve, pere. Over a and u it is only used to distinguish words otherwise similarly spelled, and does not affect the pronunciation. Ex. la, the ; la, there ; a, has ; a, to ; ou, o**; ou, where. 7. The Circumflex (") is used over all the vowels, which are then long. Ex. age, cote, sur. The circumflex denotes that a contraction has taken place ; thus age and sur were formerly spelled aage and seur. Often an s has been dropped in modern French which still remains in the English word taken from the old French. Ex. ile, isle; hate, haste; foret, forest ; tempete, tempest. 8. The Cedilla is placed under the c (9) when it has the sound of s before a, 0, u. Ex. fa^ad^, gargon, regu. 9. The DiiERESis (" Trema) is used over e, i, and u; in which case these letters do not coalesce with the preceding vowel, but be- gin a new syllable. Ex. haiir, Noel, aigue, are pronounced horir. No-el, ai-gu-e, (the last e is silent.) ' SIMPLE VOWELS. A. 10. A long has the sound of a in far. Ex. ame, soul ; pate, paste; cas, case. 11. Short a differs from long a principally in quantity. It has 16 PRONUNCIATION. the sound of a in tHe Interjection ha ! pronounced quick. Ex. la, the ; patte, paw. A is silent in Saone, taon, aout, aoriste, Cura9ao. E. 12. E unaccented, when it ends a syllable in the middle of a ■word, and in the monosyllables ce, de, je, le, me, ne, que, se and te, has the indistinct sound of e in Battery. Ex. lever, to raise; re- gard, look. 13. E unaccented final is mute. Ex. table, table. 14. E with an acute accent (e) has the sound of a in date. Ex. ete, summer ; donne, given. E unaccented takes the sound of € {a in date) before final d, r, z, mute, also at the beginning of a word before a double consonant. Ex. pied, foot ; donner, to give ; assez, enough ; eflfet, effect ; et, and, is always pronounced ^. 15. E with the grave (e) or with the circumflex accent (e) is more or less open, varying between e in ebb, and e in where. Ex. reve, dream ; -phre, father ; foret, forest ; apres, after. E unaccented takes the sound of e (e in ebb) when preceding c,f, I, r, s, t, or X in the same syllable and in the middle of a word before any double consonant. Before r, the sound is more open than before the other letters. Ex. fer, iron; dessert, dessert; terre, earth; tendresse, tenderness ; sonnette, bell ; chef, chief; mes, my ; est, is ; esprit, spirit. In the last words the e is pronounced by many persons very nearly like ^ especially in rapid conver- sation. Even e often loses its broad, long sound. 16. E takes the sound of French a mfemme, solemiel, indemniser, and in all adverbial terminations in emment. 17. E is silent between g and a or o. Ex. pigeon, pigeon ; mangeons, (we) eat; mangeant, eating. In these words the e merely serves to prevent g from having the hard sound of g in go. Eor further observations on e mute, see page 26. I. 18. I has only one sound, that of ^ in machine ; — long in vie, life ; rire, to laugh ; ~ short in %x\\, finished ; ici, here. SIMPLE VOWELS. 17 o. 19. 0, when long, has the sound of o in rose. Ex. c6t6, side / dose, dose. 20. short has a sound between the o in roh and the u in ruh. Ex. Rome, robe, mode. 21. before final re or r and a final consonant has the sound of in lord. Ex. aurore, dawn ; alors, then ; bord, border. O is silent in Laon, paon, and faon. u. 22. French u has no equivalent in English. To acquire the sound, place the lips as if about to whistle, leaving the aperture very small; keeping the lips in this position try to utter e as in me. Ex. murmure, murmur. U may be long as in mixr, ripe ; or short as in Tcrtu, virtue. 2S. U is silent after q and between g and e or i. Ex. guide, guide'; question, question; quatre, jfowr; iviiiguQ, fatigue. Exceptions. — U is sounded when the vowel after it is marked with the diseresis, as aigue, acute ; also in arguer, to argue ; aiguille, needle ; aiguiser, to sharpen ; etc. Qu is sounded as in English in a few words directly de- rived from the Latin. These words are alike or nearly alike in French and English. Ex. equateur, equation, quadrupede, etc. In equitation, ubiquite, and a few other words, u retains the proper French sound. 24. Y, initial, or between two consonants, has the sound of French i. ^ Ex. style, style; y, there. 25. Y between two vowels is equivalent to ii, the first i forming a diphthong with the preceding, the second with the following vow- el. Thus, essayer, to try; royal, royal; appuyer, to lean; are pronounced as if written essai-ier, roi-ial, appui-ier. (See ai and ot.) In pays, country ; paysage, landscape / paysan, peasant ; ay is equivalent to ai-i. 18 PRONUNCIATION. COMPOUND VOWELS. AI and EI (ay). 26. Ai and ei are equivalent sometimes to e, sometimes to 6. Ai final is always like e ; in other cases it takes the sound of e, — - whenever e unaccented would have that sound. (See under E.) Ex. reine, queen; j'aimai, I loved ; j'avais, I had; lait, milk. Ay, followed by a vowel, is equivalent to ai-i. Ex. rayer. Ai in the present participle of the verb faire and in tlie corresponding syllables of all the forms derived from it, has the indistinct sound of e in battery. Ex. faisant, je faisais, tu faisais, il faisait, je defaisais, bienfaisant, etc. These forms were all written formerly as they are pronounced : fesant, je defesais, etc.; compare the future of the same verb, which is jeferai and notjuirai. AU. 27. Au and eau sound like o in note. Ex. haut, high; beau, handsome. EU (EU, (ce.) 28. Eu (oeu) has no exact equivalent in English ; it is some- what like the u in fur. It is longer in jeune, fast, peur, fear, cceur, heart, than in jeune, young, feu, fre, and oeuf, egg. CE has the sound of eu before liquid I, — as in ceil, eye. Eu, whenever it occurs in the conjugation of the verb avoir, to have, has the sound of simple French u, so that J'eus, tu eus, il eut, etc., must be'pro- nounced as if written f us, tu us, il ut, etc. ou. 29. Ou has the sound of oo in poor. It is long in roue, wheel ; boule, hall; short in mou, soft; cou, neck. DIPHTHONGS. 30. The vowels i, u, ou, a, preceding a vowel sound, may co- alesce with it and produce a diphthong. These vowel sounds (i, u, ou, o,) are the only ones that can be initial in NASAL VOWELS. 19 a true diphthong ; i. e. one in which two vowels are heard but coalesce into one syllable. 31. In French diphthongs the first vowel (^, u, ou, o) is uttered quick and short and the voice rests upon the second vowel element. The dipthongal combinations are : i-a, i-e (i-ai), — i-o (i-aii), i-eu, i-ou, — o-a, o-e, o-i (wa) , — ou-a, ou-ai, oiv-e^ ou-i, — w-a, u-e, u-i. The e in these combinations is not the e mute. By paying attention to the above remark the diphthongs present no dif- ficulty, as each vowel retains its proper sound, the first being very short ; oi is the only exception. 01. (oy.) 32. Oi is nearly like wa in water ; more accurately oi is equiva- lent to French a preceded by a «^; sound. The a (ah) is more pro- longed in voir, to see ; poire, pear ; than in roi, king ; moi, me. Or, followed by a vowel, is equivalent to oi-i. Ex, royal. NASAL VOWELS. 33. M and N, following a vowel in the same syllable, lose their power as consonants, and form with that vowel a nasal sound which is in every respect a vowel. 34. The nasals form four groups, viz.: — A. E, AI. O. EXT. an, am. am, aim. on, om. eun. en, em. in, im. (ym.) un, iim. To acquire these sounds the organs of speech should be kept in the same position as they are in uttering the simple vowel that is to be nasalized ; the back part of the tongue being raised enough to close the passage between the mouth and the nose. The same is done in English in such words as anger, ink, want ; but in English the nasal sound is not detached from the next consonant, while in French it is. No m or n consonant sound must be heard. To avoid this, the tip of the tongue must be kept motionless and the lips disposed to articulate a vowel. French a, thus uttered, will give an,' — e (ai), (not i in machine) gives in (ain) ; — ogives on; — eu (not French u) gives un (eun). 20 PRONUNCIATION. an am en em ian ien aim ein anm want i-an \ patient. (See special nde for ^e^^.) The nasal sounds may coalesce with a previous ^, u, ou, or o, and form a nasal diphthong, to which all that has been said of the other diphthongs is applicable. 35, The following list presents the nasal combinations. N. B. The English equivalents of the French nasal vowels are all neces- sarily imperfect, as no consonant m or n must be heard in the French sound they are meant to explain. ' dans, lance, manger, vanter. camp, ambre, ample, lampe. en, enfant, mentir, dent, temps, empire, membre, trembler, \ is equivalent to J viande. m 1 fpi^' crin, vin, rincer. im impie, importe, imposer, imbu. ym 1 aw in J thym, nymphe, symphonic, ain ( awger ) sain, bain, saint, crainte. faim, essaim, daim. sein, peindre, feindre, ceinture. ien is equivalent to i-in, rien. (See special rule for ien.) oin '* " " w-in, foin, coin, point, moins. on \ on in ( non, conte, chanson, ronde. om ) song (nom, comte, plomb, compris. ion is equivalent to i-on, action, passion, question. un 1 no equivalent C un, brun, tribun, chacun. um >-in English, French •< parfum, humble, eun ) eu nasal. ( k jeun. The nasal diphthongs ian, ion, are the simple sounds an, on, preceded by a short French i ; oin is in preceded by a t^ sound. All other combinations may be decomposed in the same manner, as ou-in, ou-en, etc. 36. Ien final, and in verbs in enir, is equivalent to i-in or yin, (yan in yankee). Ex. chien, Men, viendrai, tiendront ; in other •cases, when followed by a consonant (not n) , it is equivalent to i-an (yan) nasal. Ex. science, audience, patient, and all words in ient. CONSONANTS. 21 Remark. In compound words, as hientot, chiendent, ten retains the sound of the primitive words hien, chien. 37. M and N are not nasal when double or wlien between two vowels or a vowel and a silent h. Ex. annee, innocent, homme, line, inoui, inutile, inhumain. , Exceptions. The nasal sound is heard in ennui and its derivatives ; in emmener and all words beginning in emm ; in enivrer and enorgiieillir. 38. Ent in the third person plural of verbs is silent. Ex. ils aiment, they love ; ils unirent, etc. In other cases ent final is equivalent to nasal an. Ex. content, contented ; president, 'presi- dent ; — while in the verbs, ils content, they relate, ils president, they preside, ent is silent. 39. En and em in a few foreign names have the sound of in. Ex. Mentor, Benjamin, Memphis. Em final, and sometimes am and im in foreign proper names, are not nasal. Ex. Jerusalem, Abraham, Selim. Um in words that still preserve their Latin form is not nasal, u having the sound of o. Ex. album, triumvir. In many other foreign words m and n final are not nasal. 'EiX.Edeny Hymen, amen, etc. CONSONANTS. * GENERAL RULES. 40. Final consonants are silent except c, f, I, r. Ex. etait, apres, croix, pronounced as if written etai, apre, croi. Remark. When several consonants occur at the end of a word with no vowel after them, they are all silent, except c, f, I, r. Ex. est,faits, ils, dards, pronounced as if written e,fai, il, dar. Exceptions. In foreign proper names the final consonant is generally sounded. Ex. Brutus, Job. 41. A double consonant is pronounced as one letter. Ex. ahhe, frapper, pronounced as if written a-he, fra-per. 42. B, c, d, f, 1, m, n, p, (ph,) q, v, and z are pronounced as in English. 22 PRONUNCIATION. Exceptions to the above general rules wril be given under the various let- ters. 43. In English, consonants in the middle or at the beginning of words are often silent, as p and I in psalm ; g in phlegm ; I in calm. In French, consonants in a like position retain their proper sound. Thus in psaume, fiegme, calme, the p, the g, and the I are fully sounded. SPECIAL RULES. B final is pronounced in radouh, rumb. C has the sound of g in second and its derivatives. 44. C is pronounced as c in facade. Ex. gargon, legon. 45. Ch has the sound of ch in machine. Ex. chaise, chercher. Ch in many words derived from the Greek and in several proper names has the sound of k. Ex. chaos, cJioeur, Michel-Ange. But ch has the sound of sh in Achille, patriarche, archeveque. It is silent in almanach. Cc before e, i, and y is equivalent to h-s- Ex. acces, accident. C final is silent after n. Ex. banc. It is silent in accroc, broc, clerc, eslomac, lacs, tabac. 1) final is heard in sud. Dd. Two d's are heard v/hen ad precedes a syllable beginning with a d. Ex. addition. * - F final is silent in clef, chef-cToeuvre, bomfs, ceufs ; though sounded in chef, baiuf, mif. F is silent in neuf, nine, only when the next word begins with a consonant, before a vowel it has the sound of u. Ex. neuf homines. G before a, o, u, sounds like g in game. Ex. gargon. 46. G before e, i, and y, sounds like s in pleasure. Ex. genre, gihet, general. 47. Gn has a liquid sound something like ni in union. Ex. agneau, magnijique. This sound is produced with the body, not with the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth. G is hard before n at the beginning of a word. Ex. gnomon ; also in stag- nant, inexpugnable, and in several words in eg and ig that seldom occur. Gg. Two g's are heard in suggerer : the first hard, the last like s in pleasure. G final is sounded in joug. CONSONANTS. 23 48. H is said to be mute or aspirate. When mute it is' entirely disregarded in pronunciation, and the vowel that comes after it is pronounced with the preceding consonant, or causes the preceding vowel to be elided as if no letter intervened. Ex. Vhomme, deux habits. 49. When h is aspirated no real aspiration i^ heard as in Eng- lish ; but the vowel that comes after it is pronounced strongly. H aspirate prevents linking and elision. Ex. le heros, deux heros. 50. There are about 300 words beginning with h aspirate. These comprise many marine terms, foreign words, and the words in the following list, and their derivatives. Remark . The derivatives of h&os — heroine, Mroique, heroism, — are not as- pirated. But hahlear,haine, hausser, etc., follow the anology of" their prim- itives habler, hair, haut, which alone are given in the list. habler hameau hargneux hennir hache hanche haricot Henri hagard hangar haridelle heraut haie hanneton hamais herisson haillons hanter harpe herisser hair harangue harpie heron haire haras hasard heros hale harasser hate herse halle harceler haut heurter hallebarde hardes have hibou hallier hardi havre hideux halte hareng havresac hierarchie homard houblon houx huraer honte houille huche huppe horde houlette huee hure hers houppe huguenot hurler hotte housse huit hussard 51. J is pronounced like s in pleasure; it is never silent nor double. Ex. dejd, joujou. L when not liquid sounds as in English. Ex. livre. 52. Ill not initial, and il final, have a liquid sound somewhat like // in William, brilliant. This sound, still prevalent in the southern 24 PRONUNCIATION. and central parts of France, has been softened down to nearly a y in the north and especially in Paris, so that there, ill in taiUeur is scarcely more audible than i in pat en. l^x. JUle, famille, gentille, 53. The vowel that precedes liquid ill or il, retains its proper sound and does not coalesce with the i ; ue and ce are then equivalent to eu. Ex. muraille, patrouille, orgueil, oeil. 54. Ill is not liquid, that is, I retains its proper sound, in words that begin with il. Ex. illustre, illisihle ; also in mille, ville, tran- quille, pupiUe, Achille, osciller, vaciller, etc. II is not liquid in mil, Jil, civil, profiL L final is silent in haril, chenil, coutU, four nil, fusil, gril,gentil, sourcil,per- sil, outil. It is also silent in soul, pouls, fils, and in the terminations auld, ault, ould, oult. M and N, when not nasal, are pronounced as in English. Ex. manier. M is silent in damner, automne, and their derivatives. P is silent in bapteme, sept, compte, dompter, exempter, sculpter. Q is always followed by ic except in coq and cinq, when it sounds like k. CEor qu see u, 23.^ 55. R is rolled, but with less force at the end than at the begin- ning of a syllable. Ex. grand, sceur ; rr and rh are generally pro- nounced with more force than r alone. Ex. arriver, rhume. In the future and conditional of the verbs acquerir, to acquire, courir, to run, mourir, to die, the two r's must be distinctly heard to distinguish them from other forms that have but one r. Thus nous courrons, vous acquerrez, ils mourraient, must not be pronounced like nous courons, vous acqu^rez, ilts mouraient. R final is generally pronounced, but final er is equivalent to ^. Ex. parler, aimer. In monosyllables in er the r is sounded, Ex.j^r, cher, mer. It is also sounded in amer, enfer,hier, hiver, and in a few words of foreign origin, as magister, etc. R is silent in monsieur. 56. S is generally sounded as in English ; but in words ending isme, asme, etc., it has not the sound of z. Ex. prisme, miasme. - 57. S between two vowels has the sound of z. Ex. rose, base^ vase. S has also the sound of z in words compounded with the Latin proposi- CONSONANTS. 25 tion trans, followed by a vowel. Ex. transitif, transition. It has the samo sound before h, d, v, and after /. Ex. presijhtere, svelte, balsamique. As s initial has the hissing sound as in English, — when a word beginning with an s takes a prefix, the s, though between two vowels, retains its hiss- ing sound. Ex. vraisemhlable ("compounded of vrai and semblable), mono- syUahe. * Sck is generally pronounced like sh. Ex. schisme. It has the sound of st in a few words. S final is sounded in words that have been taken from Greek and Latin without any change of orthography. Ex. atlas, blocus, gratis, etc. S is also sounded in cens, en-sus, mats, moeurs, vis, Bheims,Jils, sens (^in some of its meanings), lis (not \n fleur-de-lis) , tons (when used without a noun). T is generally sounded as in English. 58. In words corresponding in form to those in which t has in English an sh sound, it has in French the sound of ss. This occurs in tial, tiehtier, tion, not initial or preceded by x or s. Ex. partial, essentiel, initier, nation. But bestial, bastion, mixtion, have the pure t sortnd. 59. T has also the sound of s in words in tie, that have in Eng- lish cy, or tia, in which t sounds like sh. Ex. prophetie, democra- tie, minvtie, initier, — also in balbutier. In other words in tie and tier, t retains the proper sound. Ex. moitie, metier. Th is never pronounced as in English, but always like t alone, as paih€- tique. T final is heard in brut, chut, correct, dot, direct, deficit, fat, exact, net, sus- pect, strict. In sept and huit, t is silent only when they precede a noun com- mencing with a consonant. Ex. huit gargons. In Christ, s and t are both pronounced; but in Jesus-Christ they are both silent. In vi7igt, tis pro- nounced only in the series between 20 and 30. Ex. vingt-cinq. X has the sound oi gs in words beginning with x ox ex before a vowel or an h mute. Ex. Xavier, exil, exhumer. In a few proper names x has the sound of ss. Ex. Bruxelles, Auxerre; it has also this sound in soixante, — and in six and dix when standing alone. In dix-huit and dix-neuf, x sounds like z. X in other cases has the sound of ^s. Ex. luxe, Aix-la-Chapdle. Z is pronounced in gaz. When final in proper names it has the sound of s. Ex. Metz, Suez, etc. 26 PRONUNCIATION. LINKING OF FINAL CONSONANTS. 60. The final consonant of a word, closely connected in senses witli the next word beginning with a vowel or silent h must general- ly be carried over. " In that case s and x are sounded like z ; d like t, and g (seldom linked) like h. Ex. un grand homme, vous avez, Us ont, aux armes. No general rule can be given embracing all the cases in which a final con- sonant must be thus linked. In poetry and in impressive reading, the link- ing must be made in many cases where it would sound unnatural and af- fected in daily conversation. It may be stated in general terms that the more closely connected the words are in sense, the more imperative it is to link them together in pronunciation. Certain words, such as et, riz, clef, plomb, hup, etc., can never be linked. Words ending in a nasal sound are seldom linked, except short words that recur frequently, such as on, en, un, mon, ton, son, hien, hon, etc. When a nasal n is linked, either the nasal sound is heard and an additional n pronounced before the next vowel, or the nasal is dropped altogether, thus un homme, on a, as if written un nhomme, on na ; or u-nhomme, o-na. In rapid speech the nasal sound almost always disappears ; many omit it altogether. In some combinations, such as hon homme, hien heureux, it is never heard. ^- OBSERVATIONS ON ^ MUTE. We have seen that e unaccented when final is mute, and that in the words ce, de, je, le, me, ne, que, se and te, and when it terminates a syllable not final, it has the indistinct sound of e in battery. In rapid utterance, however, even this feeble sound is not heard whenever the articulation connected with it can he distinctly uttered without it. Hence the following rule : — ^ 61 . E unaccented ending a syllable is silent whenever the con- sonant before it can be pronounced either with a vowel that precedes or one that comes after it in the next syllable or word. Practice and oral teaching only can make this law of euphony perfectly clear. In the following examples the e*s printed in italics are not pro- nounced. 27 Yoilk \e chemin de fer. Je le sais. Je ne te le donne pas. Beaucoup de monde. Je ne me le propose pas. Etre attentif. Noble ardeur. There is the railway. I know it. I do not give it to thee. Many persons. I do not propose it to myself. To be attentive. Noble ardor. In the last two examples the r and I that precede the e are virtually car- ried over to the next word as if no e intervened, and tr and bl were final. Note. Care must be taken not to pronounce tre, dre, hie, pie, a-e, etc., as they are in English, that is as ter, der, hd, pd, etc., in order, temple, noble. In French the I and r must not be separated by any intervening sound from the consonant that precedes. Ex. ordre, aimabk, quatre, nacre, peuple. I. PREMIERE LE9ON, THE ARTICLE. 1. In the French language there are only two genders, viz., the masculine and the feminine. This distinction applies also to inanimate objects, which are either masculine or feminine. 2. The definite article has a peculiar form for each gender : le before a masculine, la before a feminine substantive ; les is the plu- ral of both genders. Ex. : — Masc. Le roi, the king. Fern. La reine, the queen. le pere, the father. la mere, the mother. 3. Le and la in the singular lose their vowels and take the apos- trophe (/') before a noun beginning either with a vowel or h mute. Ex. : — Masc. Uami, the friend. Fern. L'amie, the (female) friend. I'homme, the man. Vhistoire, (the) history. 4. The indefinite article, answering to the English a or an, is un for the masculine ; une for the feminine. Ex. : Masc. Un roi, a king. Fern. Une reine, a queen. un pere, a father. une mere, a mother. un ami, a friend. une amie, a (female) friend. VOCABULARY. Le livre, the book. un chapeau, a hat, bonnet. le pain, the bread. la rose, the rose. le cheval, the horse. lajleur, the flower. le chien, the dog. la plume, the pen, feather. I'oncle, the uncle. la tante, the aunt. V enfant, the child. une poire, a pear. Vor, the gold. une pomme, an apple. unjardin, a garden. et, and. 28 THE AETICLE. 29 S. Tai, I have. -^t-je, have 1 1 tu as, thou hast. as-tu, hast thou ? e7 a, he has. a-^^7, has he ? e//e a, she has. a-t-elle, has she 1 PI. nous avons, we have. avons-nous, have we ? 170MS avez, you have. avez-vous, have youl 27s onf, they have. ont-ils, have they ? eZ/es ont, they (fcm) have. ont-elles, have they ? Remark 1 . J*ai is for Je ai. The e of /e, I, is elided when the verb begins with a vowel or silent h. 2. Observe the hyphen by which the verb and pronoun are always joined in interrogations. 3. The t in a4-il, a-t-elle, is merely euphonic. It is inserted to prevent the hiatus between two vowel sounds, when the third person singular of a verb ends in a vowel, and is followed by il, die, on. 4. The use of the 2d person singular is much more frequent in Trench than in English. It generally denotes familiarity and intimacy. In ad- dressing inferiors, it denotes authority ; in poetry, its use is the same as in English. 5. When, in a question not beginning with an interrogative pronoun or an adverb, the subject is expressed by a substantive, it must begin the sen- tence, and the pronoun still be put after the verb. Ex. : — U enfant a-t-il f has the child ? La mere a-t-elle ? has the mother ? READING EXERCISE 1. J'ai le livre. Tu as un livre. J'ai la rose. As-tu la rose ? II a le cheval. EUe a le pain. Le perea un cheval. La mere a un jardin. L'enfant a une poire. Nous avons un chien. Avez- vous un chapeau ? lis ont un oncle et une tante. Elles ont une tante. L'enfant a-t-il une plume ? La mere a-t-elle la fleur ? Le roi a-t-il un cheval ? II a le cheval. Les amis (j>lu.) ont les livres. Les enfants ont les plumes. THEME 1. 1. I have the horse. 2. I have a friend. 8. Thou hast the book. 4. He has a dog. 5. She has the bonnet. 6. The father has a garden. 7. The mother has the rose. 8. The king has the gold. 30 II. DEUXIEME LEpON. 9. The uncle has a friend. 10. "VVe have the bread. 11. You have a pear. 12. They (w2a5c.) have an apple. 13. Thej (fern.) have a flower. 14. Has the friend a horse ? 15. The friend has a horse and a dog. CONVEESATION. Ai-je la rose ? As-tu le pain ? A-t-ellelafleur? L 'enfant a-t-il le livre ? Avez-vous un cheval ? L 'enfant a-t-il une poire ? Yous avez la rose. J'ai le pain. Elle a la fleur. II a le livre. Nous avons un cheval et un chien. L'enfant a une poire et une pomme. II. DEUXIEME LE9ON. FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 1. General Rule. The plural is formed in French as in Eng- lish, by the addition of an s to the singular. Ex. : — Le roi, Plur. les rois. la pomme, Plur. les pommes. le livre, les livres. Venfant, les enfants. riiomme, les hommes. Vami, les amis. EXCEPTIONS. 2. Nouns ending in s, x, z, in the singular, remain unchanged. Lejils, the son. Plur. les Jils, the sons. la noix, the walnut, le nez, the nose. les noix, the walnuts. les nez, the noses. 3. Words ending in au, eu, form their plural by adding x instead of s, as : — Le chapeau, the hat (yr bonnet. Plur. les chapeaux. le feu, the fire. les feux. le lieu, the place. les lieux. FORMATION OP THE PLUEAL'. 31 Bemakk. Seven nouns in ow take x in tlie plural, viz. : Le cTiou, the cabbage. le pou, the louse. le bijou, the jewel. le genou, the knee. le caillou, the pebble. le joujou, the plaything. le hibou, the owl. Plural : les choux, les bijoux, les cailloux, etc. The others ending in ou follow the general rule and take s in the plural, as : le cloii, the nail ; plur. les clous ; le trou, the hole ; plur. les. trous, etc. 4. Nouns ending in al, ail, change these terminations into aux, to form the plural, as : Le cheval, the horse. Plur. Les chevaux. Vanimal, the animal. les animaux. le travail, the work. les travaux. Kemabk. This rule, however, has a few exceptions, which follow the general rule, simply taking s in the plural, as : le bal, the ball ; le camaval, the carnival ; le portail, the doorway ; le gouvernail, the helm ; V^ventail, the fan, etc. Plur. les bals, les camavals, etc. 5. The following words form their plural irregularly. (The first three have also a regular plural. See Part ii, L. ii.) Le del, heaven. Plur. Les deux, heavens. VcbH, the eye. les yeux, the eyes. I'aJieul, the great-grandfather. les aieux, the ancestors.. le b€tail, the cattle. les bestiaux, the cattle. VOCABULARY. Le canif, the penknife. lejeu, the play, game. lefrere, the brother. la souris, the mouse. la soeur, the sister. le mm, the name. la porte, the door, gate. le chameau, the camel. la maison, the house. le couteau, the knife. le chateau, the castle. mon, ma, my. le paJais, the palace. vu, seen, ou, or. un tableau, a picture. deux, two. trois, three. le chat, the cat. quatre, four, cinq, five. le g€n€ral, the general. le bras, the arm. la mix, the walnut. 32 II. DEUXIEME LECON. Void, here is, this is, here are, these are. Voila, there is, that is, there are, those are. Void is compounded of the imperative of voir, to see, and id, here. It means therefore literally, see here. Voila means see there. They both gov- ern the objective case. Ex. me void, here am I ; literally, Behold me here. S. J^avais, I had. Avais-je, had II tu avais, thou hadst. avais-tu, hadst thou ? il avait, he had. avait-il, had he ? die avait, she had. avait-dle, had she ? PI. nous avians, we had. avions-nous, had we 1 vous aviez, you had. aviez-vous, had you ? lis avaient, they had. avaient-ils, had they? elles avaient, they had. avaient-elles, had they? HEADING EXERCISE 2. Nous avwis Tin canif. Yous aviez deux canifs. Mon frere a les couteaux. La maison a deux portes. Avais-je les noix ? Aviez- vous les joujoux ? Oui, nous avions les joujoux. Le roi avait trois chateaux. La reine a les bijoux. Voici quatre souris. Les enfants avaient trois pommes. Mon oncle avait deux chevaux. Ma tante a cinq tableaux. Les cbameaux ont une bosse {hump). Ma mere a deux soeurs et trois freres. THEME 2. 1. I have three brothers. 2. (The)* man has two arms. 3. I had four horses. 4. Hadst thou the flowers? 5. I had the roses. 6. There are the apples, the pears, and the walnuts. 7. There are also the games and the pictures. 8. Have you seen the houses, the castles, and the gardens? 9. My uncle has four pictures. 10. I have seen five horses and two camels. 11. The children have three mice. 12. Have you seen the games of the {des) children? * In the Themes, words placed in parentheses ( — ) must be expressed in French, though redundant in English. English words printed in italics must be omitted in French. CASE. 33 13. Has my aunt three dogs or three cats? 14. She has three dogs and two cats. 15. The eye is blue (est hleu). 16. I have two eyes. 17. My brother has two knives, and I have two penknives. CONVERSATION. Avez-vous tin canif ? Avais-je les couteaux ? As-tu vu les chameaux 1 Avez-vous aussi vu les cha- teaux? Avez-vous les bijoux ? Les enfants ont ils les habits (coats) ou les chapeaux? Avaient-ils vu les feux ? Avez-vous les tableaux ? Mon pere art-il un chat ? Combien de (how many) freres avez-vous ? Combien de soeurs avez-vous ? Avez-vous vu les amis ? J'ai deux canifs. Vous aviez les couteaux. J'ai vu les chameaux et les che- vaux. J'ai vu les chateaux et les pa- lais. Ma tante a les bijoux. Les enfants ont les habits et les chapeaux. Ils avaient vu les feux. Je n'ai pas (not) les tableaux. II a un chat et un chien. J'ai trois freres. J'ai deux soeurs. Nous n'avons pas vu les amis. III. TROISIEMB LE9ON CASE — ^ — i)^. 1. French nouns have no variation of termination to indicate case ; the nominative and objective are, as in English, ahke in form, and the possessive is expressed by the preposition de (of) and its object. 2. The possessor must, in French, follow the object possessed. .34 III. TROISIEME LEgON. and be preceded by the article, e. g. The king's throne, must be transposed as if it were, the throne of the king ; Le trone du roi. 3. The preposition de (of, from,) appears either unchanged or contracted with the article. A contraction takes place whenever de occurs before the article le or les ; in the first case, it takes the form du (singular) , in the second des (plural) . Ex. S. du roi (instead of c?e le roi,) of the king, or the.king's. dupere (instead of Je lepere,) of the father, or the father's. PI. des rois (instead of de les rois,) of the kings, or the kings'. des meres (instead of de les meres,) of the mothers. 4. Before la and V, de remains unaltered, as : — de la mere, of the mother, or the mother's. de Vami, of the friend, the friend's. de Vhomme, of (the) man, the man's. 5. Before the indefinite article un, une, an apostrophe is put in- stead of the e oi de, as : — d'un roi, of a king. d*une reine, of a queen. d'un ami, of a friend. d'une amie, of a female friend. 6. Before le, the preposition k (to) is contracted with this article to au ; and before les into aux ; as : — au (a le) roi, to the king. aux (a les) rois, to the kings. au " frere, to the brother, aux " freres, to the brothers. 7. The definite article must be used in French before all nouna used in a general sense or denoting a whole species of objects, though in English the article is not employed j as : — Man, Vhomme, nature, la nature. life, la vie. summer, V €t€. fortune, la fortune. dinner, le diner. Hence, of man, of life, of fortune, etc., are to be translated in French de Vhomme, de la vie, de la fortune, etc. ; to man, to life, to nature, etc., a Vhomme, a la vie, a la nature. 8. In French the article is to be repeated before each substantive of a sentence, as : — case/ *35 The salt, pepper and vinegar, — Je sd, lepoivreet le vinaigre. The men, women and children, — les hommes, lesfemmes et les enfants. VOCABULARY. Dieu, God. lafenetre, the window. le cre'ateur, the creator. le cousin, the cousin. le monde, the world. la cousine, the cousin, f. I'ennemi, the enemy. laJiUe, the daughter. le sommeil, sleep. la ville, the town. Vimage, f. the image. je donne, I give. la mort, death. le voisin, the neighbor. lafeuiUe, the leaf. est, is. (belongs) sont, are. a qui, to whom, whose "? out, yes. non, no. Voiseau, the bird. Monsieur, Sir. rofre, your. Madame, Madam. I'arbre, the tree. Mademoiselle, Miss. BEADING EXERCISE 3. Le pere de I'enfant. La mere des enfants. La porte de la mai- son. Les portes des maisons. Les fenetres du palais. Le chat est un animal. Les chats sont les ennemis des souris. Le sommeil est I'image de la mort. Le chateau est au roi et a la reine. Je donne la plume h I'enfant. Je donne le jeu aux enfants. Le jar- din est aux freres et aux soeurs. Les images des rois. Les feuilles des arbres. Les fenetres de la maison. THEME 3. 1. The father of the son. 2. The mother of the daughter. 3. The mother of the children. 4. The door of the house. 5. The gates of the town. 6. The houses of the towns. 7. The windows of the houses. 8. God is the creator of the world. 9. The dog is the enemy of the cat. 10. I give the book to the brother. 11. I give the coats to the brothers and sisters. 12. The dog is the friend of man. 13. The feathers of the birds. 14. My cousin's bonnet. 15. My cousins' bonnets (the bonnets of my cousins). 16. Sleep is the brother of death. 17. Of the trees of the garden. 18. The 36 IV. QUATillEME LEgON. eyes of tlie horses are large {grands). 19. The friend's name, 20. The windows of the castle. 21. The neighbor's house and garden. 22. I give the roses to the sister of the general. 23. Give (donnez) the pen to the father. CONVERSATION. Ai-je le livre du cousin ? Tu as le livre du cousin. As-tu I'image de la tante ? A-t-il vu le jardui du roi ? Les enfants ont-ils les jeux ? Oui M — * j'ai I'image de la tante. Non M — il a yu le chateau du roi. Oui M — les enfants ont les jeux. Qui (who) a les ciseaux (scis- Voici les ciseaux de votre soeur. sors) de ma soeur? Elles sont a I'enfant. EUes sont aux enfants du voisin. II est au roi et a la reine. Voila le chien de I'oncle. A qui sont les noix ? A qui sont les poires ? A qui est ce (this) jardin ? Avez-vous vu le chien de I'on- cle? A qui sontces (these) roses ? Elles sont a ma cousine. IV. QUATRIEME LE9ON. PREPOSITIONS. 1. The following list includes the French prepositions of most frequent occurrence. d, to, at, in. dans, in, into. par, through, by apres, after. de, of, from. parmi, among. * This M — , which will always be inserted after Oui and Non should be read Monsieur, Madame, or Mademoiselle, as the case may require. PREPOSITIONS. 37 ava/nt, before, (time). devant,hQiore>,(j^\2iQ,B) . pendant, during. avec, with. derriere, behind. pour, for. chez, at, with, at the en, in. sans, without. house of. entre, between. sous, under. contre, against. envers, vers, towards, sur, on, upon. As to the contraction of a and le into au, of a and les into aux, of de with le into du, of de with les into c?es, see page 34. 2. After prepositions no article is used whenever the noun is taken in a wide and indeterminate sense, and forms with the preposition a sort of ad- verbial phrase, as : avec plaisir, with pleasure ; sans erainte, without fear. 3. Chez means at the house of. It governs the noun or pro- noun as any other preposition. Ex. chez mot, at my house, (at the house of me); chez vous, at your house; chez mon oncle, at my uncle's, (at the house of my uncle). Tor remarks on the employment of some prepositions, see P. ii., L. 16. VOCABULARY. La cour, the court, yard. recole, f. the school. le maitre, the master, teacher. I'eau, f. the water. la main, the hand. lapluie, the rain. le toit, the roof. oil, where. S. Je suis, I am. tu es, thou art. il est, he is. die est, she is. PI. nous sommes, we are. vous etes, you are. ilssont, they are. dies sont, they are. la cliamhre, the room. V€glise, f. the church. la nuit, the night. lejour, the day. la cuisine, the kitchen. la poche, the pocket. demeure, lives, notre, our. qui, who, whom 1 Suis-je, am I ? es-tu, art thou 1 est-il, is he ? est-dle, is she 1 sommes-nous, are we 1 etes-vous, are you ? sont-ils, are they ? sont-dles, arc they 1 38 IV. QUATRIEME LEgON. READING EXERCISE 4. Je suis dans la eour. L'oiseau est sur le toit. Es-tii au jardin (dans le jardin) ? Louis est chez mon pere. Les chevaux sont de- vant la porte. Apres la pluie. Pendant la nuit. Avant le jour. L'enfant est sous I'arbre. Parmi les enfants. Nous sommes der- riere les arbres. Us sont entre la porte et la fenetre. Ce livre est pour mon frere. Ma tante est a F^glise. Sans argent (money.) Avec les chevaux de mon oncle. Contre I'ennemi. Notre ami demeure k Paris dans la maison de sa tante. THEME 4. I. In the yard. 2. During the night. 3. I am before the house. 4. Louis is in the garden. &: Are you in the yard ? 6. Before night. 7. I speak (je parle) of the house, — of the coat, — of the flowers, — of my father, — of my mother. 8. The two knives are in my pocket. 9. Where are the cats? 10. They are in the kitchen. 11. The birds are on the roof. 12. The thi-ee children of my cousin (m.) are in (the) town. 13. Against tlie rain. 14. With my father. 15. Without a master. 16. Louis is in his (so) room. 17. The book is for my sister. 18. Between the two win- dows. 19. Under the roof of the house. 20. Are they before the door of the church ? 21. No; they are behind the church. 22. The children are at (the) school. CONVERSATION. Ou est Louis ? II est dans la cour. Oil est mon fils ? II est au jardin. Oil sont les enfants? Ilsjouent (j>lay) devant la mai son. Votre cousine est-elle a I'ecole ? Non M — , elle est a I'eglise. Etes-vous dans le jardin ? Non M — , nous sommes dans la cour. Ton pere est-il au jardin ? Non M — , il est dans sa cham- bre. Sont-ils a la fenetre ? Oui M — , ils sont a la fenetre. Avez-vous vu les canards Nous avons vu les canards ct les (ducks), dans la cour ? oies (geese). THE PARTITIYE ARTICLE. 39 V. CINQUIEME LEOON. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE 1. The partitive article answers to the English some or any, ex- pressed in French by du before a noun mascuhne beginning with a consonant, by de la before a noun feminine beginning with a conso- nant, and by de V before a noun of either gender beginning with a vowel or an h mute. Ex : — Du pain, some or atiy bread. de la hiere, some beer. dxi vin, (some or any) wine. de la viande, some meat. de V argent, some money (Silver). de Vhuile, some oil. In the plural the partitive article is des for both genders. Ex. Des livres, (some) books. desjieurs, flowers. des enfants, children. des roses, roses. Some is not always used in English, whereas du, de la, de V, des, must always be expressed in French. 2. In questions the English use any instead of sonfie ; in French it must be rendered by the sam'fe article, as : — Have you any bread 1 avez-vous dupain ? Is there any watei 1 y a-t-il de I'eau ? 3. The partitive article must be used whenever in English some or any is expressed or understood before a substantive ; it must be repeated before every substantive in a sentence. Ex. : — • Have you bread and cheese 1 Avez-vous du pain et dujromage ? Bring me some mustard, oil and vinegar. Apportez-moi de la moutarde, de Vhuile et du vinaigre. 4. However, when the substantive is preceded by an adjective, the simple preposition de or c?' takes the place of the partitive article, in the singular as well as in the plural, as : — S. debon vin, some or any good wine. de bonne viande, some or any good meat. de mauvais cafg, some or any bad coffee. d* excellentefarine, some or any excellent flour. 40 V. CINQUIEME LEgON. PI. de bons Uvres, some or any good books. de hdles Jleurs, some or any beautiful flowers. £f excdlents vaisseaux, some or any excellent vessels. VOCABULARY. Lafariney the flour. lefer, (the) iron. U argent, m. silver. le papier, the paper. I'encre, f. the ink. lefromage, the cheese. U gar^on,* the boy. fc plomh, the lead, /e seZ, the salt. le canard, the duck. I'cBuf, m. the egg. ily a, there is, there are. S J^aurai, I shall have tu auras, thou wilt have. il aura, he will have. die aura, she will have PL nous aurons, we shall have. vous aurez, you will have. ils auront, they will have. dies auront, they will have. le fruit, the fruit. le Sucre, the sugar. Ze caf^, the cofibe. fo prune, the plum. Ze beurre, the butter. Ze crayon, the pencil, /e Soulier, the shoe. Ze ias, the stocking. achete, boaght. que, what, wais, but. Za, there, six, six. c'esf, this is, that is. Aurai-je, shall I have ? auras-tu, wilt thou have ? aura-t-il, will he have ? aura-t-elle, will she have 1 aurons-nous, shall we have ? aurez-vous, will you have ? auront-ils, will they have ? auront-dles, will thev have 1 KEADmG EXERCISE 5. J'avais de la farine et du sel. Aviez-vous aussi du sel ? Le roi a de For et de I'argent. H a aussi des bijoux. Tu auras du fromage. Louis a achete du papier et de Fencre. Nous aurons des livres, des plumes et des crayons. Avaient-elles des fleurs et des fruits ? Je donne a ton cousin des noix et des pommes. Dans la cour il y a des canards. Mon cousin avait des chevaux et des chiens. Ma cousine aura des chats, mais ma tante aura des oiseaux. Dans les jardins il y a des arbres, des fruits et des fleurs. * Gargon means waiter and bachelor as well as boy. fore generally prefixed in speaking of a young boy. Petit, small, is there- PREPOSITIONS. 41 THEME 5. 1. We liad some butter and (some) cheese. 2. You had butter and eggs. 3. Here is (L. ii.) bread. 4. There is some bread. 5. My father bought lead and iron. 6. The child has flowers. 7. My cousin (/.) will have some flour and bread. 8. There are eggs 'and fruits. 9. The man has sugar and coffee. 10. The queen has gold and silver. 11. I gave (to) the boys books, pencils and pens. 12. They will also have some paper and ink. 13. Louis has horses and dogs. 14. My sister will have shoes and stockings. 15. I give (to) the boy stockings, clothes, (habits) and hats. 16. Have you (any) friends (m). 17. They (f.) will have friends (f ). 18. At my uncle's (L. iv. 3.) house there are books and pictures. 19. Will you haye (voulez-vous) some money? 20. No; give me (wo^) some bread. 21. Eead (lisez) good books. 22. This is bad coffee. 23. We have seen beautiful roses. CONVERSATION. Avons-nous de la farine ? Avons-nous aussi du sel ? Aurons-nous du beurre et du pain? Qu'avez-vous Ik (there) ? A-t-elle des crayons ? Les enfants ont-ils des poires ? Qu'as-tu sous le bras (arm) ? Pour qui sont ces livres ? Ta sceur a-t-elle du sucre ? Ton cousin a-t-il du papier ? Qui a du fromage ? Y a-t-il des fruits ? Qu'y a-tril chez mon oncle ? Nous avons de la farine. Nous avons aussi du sel. Non M — , mais vous aurez des fruits. Nous avons de la viande et du pain. Non M — , mais elle a des plumes. Non M — , ils ont des pommes. J'ai des livres. Ils sont pour mon maitre. Elle a du sucre et du cafe. Mon cousin a du papier, des plumes et de I'encre. Le gargon a du fromage. Oui M — , il y a des fruits. II y a des livres et des images. 42 VI. SIXIEME LEgON. YI. SIXIEME LE9ON FURTHER USE OF DE. De is used without the article. 1. After nouns expressing measure, weight, number, as : TJne houteille de vin, a bottle of wine. Une livre de sucre, a pound of sugar, Un morceau de pain, a piece of bread. Une paire de has, a pair of stockings . 2. After adverbs of quantity. Assez, enough. moins, less. beaucoup, much, many, a great many, ne — rien, nothing. a great deal. quelque chose, something. comhien, how much, how many. trop, too, too much, too many. guere, but little, but few. trop peu, too little, too few. peu, little, few. tant, so much, so many. plus, more. autant, as much, as many. Ex. : — Assez de vin, wine enough, {assez before the noun). Comhien d' argent, how much money 1 Tant de Jleurs, so many flowers. Trop defautes, too many mistakes. Remark. But after hien, much, many, and la plupart, most, the article must be used. Ex. : — Bien des hommes, many men. La plupart du temps, most of the time. 3. After pas, point, Jamais, de alone must be used instead of the partitive du, de la, des. Ex, r — Je n'aipasde sucre, I have no sugar. N'avez-vous point d'encre, have you no ink? 4. De is used as a connective of a word denoting a material. Une bague d'or, a gold ring. Une miller d' argent, a silver spoon. Une bourse de- sole, a silk purse. Une table de hois, a wooden table. Un chapeau de velours, a velvet bonnet. PREPOSITIONS. VOCABULARY. - Une feuille, & sheet. I'aune, f. the ell, yard. un verre, a glass. une douzaine, a dozen. le th€, tea. la hotte, the boot. une hoite, a box. la pei-sonne, the person la montre, the watch le hois, the wood. le drap, the cloth. que, than. rejM, received. hu, drunk. 43 READING EXERCISE 6. Voici Tine bouteille de vin. Nous avons trois livres de sucre. Nous aurons aussi deux livres de cafe. La reine avait beaucoup de bijoux. Aviez-vous assez d'argent ? Mon oncle aura une douzaine de bas. Avez-vous re^u la boite de crayons? Yous aurez une feuille de papier. Aviez-vous assez de pain ? Les enfants avaient moins de poires que de noix. Je donne assez d'argent h mon fils. II a bu trop de vin. Nous aurons une chaine d'argent. Yous au- rez une montre d'or. Ma mere a un chapeau de velours. La plu- part des hommes sont heureux. THEME 6. 1. I have a dozen (of) pens. 2. Thou wilt have a sheet of pa- per. 3. She has cheese and butter enough. 4. We had a glass of wine. 6. I shall have also a piece of meat and two glasses of wine. 6. He had a bottle of oil. 7. We had two pounds of sugar, six pounds of coffee, and five pounds of tea. 8. You will have a great many pencils and books. 9. I have bought a dozen stockings and two pairs of shoes. 10. In this {cette) box there are six yards of cloth. 11. I had a silver watch and a gold ring. 12. This is a wooden table. 13, How many persons have you seen (vues) ? 14. We have seen few persons. 15. My cousin had a wooden box. 16. Have you drunk a bottle of wine? 17. Give me a sheet of paper. 18. My brother will have something. 19. My sis- ter has bought two gold rings and three silver spoons. 20. The child has as many pears as (que de) apples. 44 VI. SIXIEME LEgON. CONVERSATION. Qu'avez-vous Ik ? Nous avons un verre d'eau. Qu'avez-vous achet^ ? J'ai achete deux livres de sucre. Avez-vous aussi du cafe ? Oui M — , j'ai du cafe. Avez-vous de Fargent, mon Oui mon pere, j'ai de I'argent. fils? Combien d'argent avez-vous ? J'ai six francs. Est-ce assez pour vous? C'est assez pour moi (me). Oil avez-vous vu le maitre de J'ai vu mon maitre de musique musique Avaitril des fleurs ? Combien de chevaux avez-vous ? Avez-vous une paire de bottes ? au jardin. Oui M — , il avait des fruits et des fleurs. ' Nous avons trois chevaux. J'ai une paire de bottes et deux paires de souliers. VII. SEPTIEME LE9ON, PROPER NOUNS. A distinction must be made between names of persons and towns, and names of countries, provinces, mountains, rivers, lakes. 1. The former, as in English, take no article, such are : — Guillaume, William. Henri, Henry. George, George. Jean, John. Vienne, Vienna. Geneve, Geneva. CHRISTIAN NAMES. Frangois, Francis. Elise, Eliza. Hdene, Helen, Ellen. Jeanne, Jane. NAMES OF TOWNS. Lyon, Lyons. Bruxelles, Brussels. PROPER NOUNS. 45 2. We must except from the above rule the names of several Itahan authors before which the article is used : le Tasse, Tasso {dzt Tasse, etc) ; VArioste, Ariosto ; le Dante, Dante ; — titles of books or plays, as : le TeUmaque de Fenelon, VAthalie de Racine^ etc. ; some names of towns, as : le Havre, Havre ; le Gaire, Cairo ; la Nouvelle Orleans, New Orleans. 3. Before proper names of countries, provinces, rivers and moun- tains, the definite article is used in French, as : — iLa jFVance, France. fo Prwsse, Prussia. la Belgique, Belgium. V Europe, Europe. VAngleterre, England. VAfrique, Africa. I'ltalie, Italy. VAsie, Asia. la Suisse, Switzerland. VAm€nque, America. V Allemagne, Germany. la Seine, the Seine. VEspange, Spain. le Rhin, the Rhine. la Suede, Sweden. les Alpes, the Alps, etc. EXCEPTIONS. 4. The names of countries and provinces take no article when they are preceded by the preposition en, which corresponds to both to and in. Ex. : — Je vais en Italie, I am going to Italy. II demeure en Allemagne, he lives in Germany. 5. To and at or in, before names of cities, towns, and vil- lages, are rendered by a. Ex. : — Nous allons a Londres, a Paris, a Bade, etc. We go to London to Paris, to Baden, etc. Mon oncle demeure a Berlin a Lyon, etc. My uncle lives at (in) Berlin, at (in) Lyons, etc. (Further explanations will be given in the second part.) Most names of towns are spelled in French as in English, with a few ex- ceptions ; those that end in e mute are feminine, the rest are masculine. VOCABULARY. Le cahier, the copy-book. la ville, the city, town. la carte, the map. le cours, the course. la fable, the fable. le marchand, the dealer, tradesman. 46 VII. SEPTIEME LEgON. le manteau, the cloak. le n^gociant, the merchant. le gant, the glove. la capitale, the capital. le pays, the country. donnez, give, voire, your. ou, where, lu, read. dlait, was. diez-vous, were you ? i EEADING EXERCISE 7. J'ai le caMer de Frederic. Yoici les fables de La Fontaine. J'ai vu le chateau du roi de Belgique. Donnez la boite d Sophie. Donnez la plume a Henri. Ou est Monsieur H? C'est le cha- peau de mademoiselle Elise. C'est le canif de George. Nous sommes a Paris. Etiez-vous h Vienne ? Mon cousin est en Amerique. Le cours du Rhin est long. Yoici une carte d'AUe- magne. Louis Phillippe, roi de France, est mort (died) en Angle- terre. Yoici les chevaux de Charles. Avez-vous lu les oeuvres (the works) de Comeille ? Domiez ces gants k Henri. THEME 7. 1. William is my friend. 2. I am William's friend (the friend of William). 3. Here is John's brother. 4. Where is my sister Ellen ? 5. She is with Caroline. 6. Where are Eliza's gloves? 7. Speak (parlez) to Henry and Francis. 8. I have received the book from Paris. 9 Brussels is the capital of Belgium. 10. Florence is a city in Italy. 11. I am going to Switzerland. 12. The merchants of New York. 13. My uncle lives in Germany. 14. Are you go- ing (allez-vous) to Berlin or to Yienna? 15. I am going to Frankfort and to Yienna. 16. Paris is the capital of France. 17. Is your aunt in America? 18. Yes; she is in New Orleans. 19. My brother has travelled (voyage) in Russia, in Sweden, and in Germany. 20. This is John's hat. 21. I have seen Geneva, Lyons, and Rome. 22. Give me Mary's copy-book and George's pencil. 23. I have seen the apple-vender (dealer in (de) apples). CONVERSATION. Ou etiez-vous ? J'^tais k Paris. Et ton frere ou etait-il t H etait aussi a Paris. PROPER NOUNS. 4T Us sont sur la table. C'est Bruxelles. Oh sont les gants d'Helene ? Quelle est la capitale *de la Belgique ? Quelle est la capitale de la C'est Berlin. Prusse ? Qui est la ? A qui donnez-vous ces livres ? A qui est ee chapeau? Ou trouve-t-on {is found) beau- coup d'or? Ou trouve-t-on de bon fer ? Les enfants de madame B. Je les (them) donne a Marie. Ce cbapeau est k Guillaume. En Californie. Quels pays ave^vous vus ? Avez-vous lu les poemes de Be- ranger ? Combien de crayons Caroline a-t-elle achetes ? Oil sont les enfants de Ma- dame L ? Donnez moi (me) mes gants s'il . vous plait ( if you please ) . Avez-vous lu cette (this) fa- ble? En Suede (Sweden) et en An- gle terre. J'ai vu la Suisse et I'ltalie. Non M — , mais j'ai lu les poemes de Victor Hugo. Caroline a achete quatre crayons et Jeannette a acbet^ six plumes. Bs sont au jardin. Les voici, M — , (Here they are). Oui M — , j'ai lu toutes (all) les fables de La Fontaine, 48 VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. YIII. HUITIEME LE9ON CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE, — AFFIRMATIVELY. INDICATIVE MOOD. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. PKESENT. J'ai, I have Tuas, thou hast 11 a (elle a, on a). he has Nous avons. we have Vous avez, you have Us ont, they have IMPERFECT. J'avais, / had, was having, or used to have J'ai eu, Tu as eu, II a eu, Nous avons eu, Vous avez eu, lis ont eu, / have had thou hast had he has had we have had you have had they have had COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFECT. J'avais eu, / had had Tu avais, thou hadst Tu avais eu, thou hadst had 11 avait. he had 11 avait eu. he had had Nous avions. we had Nous avions eu. we had had Vous aviez. you had Vous aviez eu. you had had lis avaient. they had lis avaient eu. they had had PRETERITE. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. J'eus, I had J'eus eu, / had had Tu eus, thou hadst, etc. Tu eus eu. thou hadst had 11 cut. he had 11 eut eu, he had had Nous eumes, we had Nous eumes eu. we had had Vous eutes. you had Vous eutes eu. you had had they had had lis eurent. they had lis eurent eu. FUTURE. COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. J'aurai, I shall or will have J'aurai eu, I shall or will have had Tu auras, thou wilt have Tu auras eu, thou wilt have had 11 aura. he will have II aura eu. he will have had Nous aurons. we shall have Nous aurons eu, we shall have had Vous aurez, you will have mey will have Vous aurez eu, you will have had Us auront, lis auront eu, ilmj will have had CONTITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. J'aurais, Tu aurais, II aurait, Nous aurions, Vous auriez, lis auraient, / should have thou wouldst have ha would have we should have you would have tliey would have J'aurais eu, / should have had Tu aurais eu, thou ivoiddst have had II aurait cu, Nous aurions eu, Vous auriez eu, lis auraient eu. he would have had we should have had you would have had they would have had CONJUGATION OF AVOIR. 49 IMPERATIVE MOOD. Aie, have (thou). Ayons, let us have. Ayez, have (ye or you). SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Que j'aie, that I may Que tu aies, that thou mayest Qu'il ait, that he may Que nous ayons, that we may Que vous ayez, that you may Qu'ils aient, that they may IMPERFECT. Que j'eusse, that I might Que tu eusses, that thou mightest Qu'il eut, that he Que nous eussions, that we might Que vous eussiez, that you might Qu'ils eussent, that they might COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que j'aie eu, that I may ' Que tu aies eu, that thou mayest Qu'il ait eu, that he may Que nous ayons eu, that ice may Que vous ayez eu, that you may Qu'ils aient eu, that they may COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. that I might that thou Que j'eusse eu, Que tu eusses eu. Qu'il eut eu, that he might Que nous eussions eu, that we might [might Que vous eussiez eu, that you Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might Avoir, INFINITIVE MOOD. PRESENT. COMPOUND OP THE PRESENT. to have \ Avoir eu, to have had Ayant, PARTICIPLE. PRESENT. COMPOUND. having \ Ayant eu, having had PAST OR PASSIVE. Eu, had It would be a good plan to conjugate the whole verb avoir together with a noun, as ; JTai une pomme, j'avais une pomme, etc. — After that, with the pronoun I' {le), it, and les, them, as : je Vai, I have it; tu Vas, il I'a, etc.; je Ics aurai, tu les auras, etc. 50 VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. VOCABULAEY. • Le temps, time. demain, to-morrow. le courage, the courage. Vencrier, the inkstand. U plaisir, the pleasure. la regie, the ruler. la voiture, the carriage. perdu, lost. la bourse, the purse. aujourd'hui, to-day. hier, yesterday. et, and. si, if. THEME 8. Pres. 1. I have a book. 2. He has a hat. 3. We have a house and (a) garden. 4. They (masc.) have ahorse. 5. They (/em.) have flowers and fruit. — Imperf. 6. I had a friend. 7. Thou hadst a friend. 8. Louisa had two cats. 9. You had money enough. 10. The children had bread. — Pret. 11. He had the courage. 12. You had the pleasure. 13. The son of the king had a carriage. — Put. and Cond. 14. I shall have apples. 15. He would have seen the castle. 16, We shall have some coflfee to-day. 17. We would have some sugar. 18. You will have two horses. 19. They would have an inkstand and a ruler. — Compound Tenses. 20. We have had much trouble (^peine). 21. You have had a great (^grand) pleasure. 22. She has had a great many nuts. 23. They had had two copy books. 24. I shall have paper and pens. 25. You will have had my horse. 26. Charles's sisters will have many flowers. 27. I should have had a great deal of (beaucoup tout,ttoute, I every, all. ;,} not one, no. aucun, e mil, nulle maint, e, many a. qudque, some, any. quelques, pi, some. certain, e, a certain. plusieurs, pi. m. and f. several. divers, f. -es, .) differents, f. -ies, ) ^ different. 76 XVI. SEIZIEME LEgON. Ex. Chague maison, every house. quelques pommes, some apples. toute ville, every town. phisieurs €coliers, several pupils. aucun pays, no country. certains mots, cei'tain words. nulle regie, no rule. differentes enireprises, different en- maint homme, many a man. terprises. quelque argent, some money. 2. Tout has the double meaning of every and all or whole ; in the latter case it is accompanied by an article or a possessive adjec- tive. Toute ville (without article) signifies every town ; toute la ville means all the town or the whole town. The plural of tout is masc. tous, fern, toutes. Ex. : Tous les hommes, all men ; toutes les lettres, all the letters ; Tous ses enfants, all his children. 3. Aucun and nul can only be used of individual things, and an- swer to the English not one. They require the particle ne to be prefixed to the verb. (In most cases the English no is translated point de or pas de.) Ex. : — Je n'ai aucunefaute, I have not one mistake. Je n'ai pas de (or point de)faute, I have no mistake. 4. Quelconque, whatever, takes its place after the noun. Ex. Un livre quelconque, a (any) book whatever. VOCABULAEY. L'€pine, f. the thorn. mortel, -le, mortal. . la chose, the thing. lafemme, the woman. le temps, time, weather. le motif, the motive. la nouvelle, the news. , I'ennemi, m. the enemy. le nom, the name. rare, rare. le paysan, the peasant. froid, e, cold. pretez, lend. le meme, the same. lafaute, the fault, mistake. depuis, since. I'erreur, f. the error. aime, loves. la version, the translation. quelque chose, something. READING EXERCISE J6. Nulle rose n'est sans epines. Notre maitre de musique donne chaque jour six legons. Plusieurs personnes sont arrivees de Vien- ne. Dieu est le pere de tous les hommes. Chaque age a ses plai- sirs et ses chagrins. Tous les hommes sont mortels. Tout ce pays est pauvre. Toute chose a son temps. Je n'ai aucune nouvelle de INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 77 ! mon frere. Je connais quelques families riches dans cette ville. Nous avons re9u aujourd'hui diverses lettres. Plusieurs hommes ont le meme nom. Maint paysan est tres pauvre. On a parle (^spoken) de differentes entreprises. Pretez-moi quelques livres. THEME 16. 1. Every child likes playing (Je jeu). 2. Each town has a church. 3. You have several faults in your translation. 4. Every man is liable {sujet) to error. 5. My brother has found some pen- cils, whose (a qui) are they? 6. The whole night was cold (froide). 7. All the houses of this town are very high (Jiautes). 8. I do not know the names of all animals. 9. John has lost sev- eral pens. 10. The king had different motives. 11. This father has lost all his children. 12. No rule without exception (^excep- tion). 13. Certain books are not good for young people (la jeun- esse). 14. I have not one enemy. 15. Every mother loves her children. 16. All the children love (aiment) their parents. 17. It is rare to (d') have several good friends. CONVERSATION. Ai-je des fautes dans ma ver- Oui, mon ami, vous avez plusieurs sion ? fautes. Quelles sont les fautes ? Les voici. Qui a dit cela (^said so) ? Tous les enfants Font dit. Oil trouve-t-on cette plante? On la (it) trouve dans tous les pays de F Europe. A qui sont ces maisons ? Toutes ces maisons sont a mon on- cle. Quels motifs ave&vous eus ? Nous avons eu divers motifs. As-tu beaucoup de fautes ? Non, M — , je n'ai aucune faute. Qui est mortel ? Tous les hommes sont mortels. A-t-elle trouv^ quelque chose ? Oui, elle a trouve une bourse. Ou avez-vous ete la semaine • J'ai 4te dans plusieurs endroits demiere ? ( places) . A quoi (to what) les hommes lis sont sujets k I'erreur. sont-ils sujets ? 78 XVII. DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. XYII. DIX-SEPTIEME LE9ON ADJECTIVES. — FORMATION OF THE FEMININE AND OF THE PLURAL. 1. General rule. The feminine of adjectives is formed by adding an e to the masculine termination, if this does not end in e mute. Ex. : Petit, small, little, fem. petite ; joli, pretty, fem. jolie; applique, diligent, appliquee, 2. Particular rules. Adjectives which end in e mute are alike in the masculine and feminine gender : facile, easy, fem. /a- die ; sage, wise, fem. sage. 3. Adjectives ending in el, eil, and w, — further, monosyllables ending in s and t, double their final consonant before e mute of the feminine, as: Gruel, cruel, fem. cruelle ; pareil, like, such, i^m. pa- reiUe ; hon, good, fem. bonne ; gros, big, fem. grosse ; has, low, fem. basse ; sot, stupid, fem. sotte. 4. Adjectives which end in f become feminine by changing f into ve, as : vif quick, lively, f. vive ; neuf, new, f. neui-^e ; actif, active, f. active; href, short, f. breve. 5. Adjectives ending in x, change this x into se, as : Heureux, happy, lucky, f. heureuse ; jaloux, jealous, f. jalouse. 6. Adjectives which end in er and et, take in the feminine the grave accent, as : Leger, light, f. legere ; complet, complete, f. com- plete. Those in gu have gue in the fem. to preserve the sound of m (see p. 17, Excep.), as : aigu, acute, f. aigu'e. 7. Of the adjectives ending in c, three change this c into che, viz : Blanc, white, f. blanche ; franc, frank, f. franche ; sec, dry, f. seche. The others ending in c take -que, as: Turc, Turkish, f. turque ; public, pubhc, f. publique ; Grec, Greek, has in the fem. ^recque. ADJECTIVES. 79 8. The following adjectives do not quite agree with the foregoing rules: — Long, long, f. longue. €xpr€s, express, f. expresse. Jrais, fresh, f. fraiche. muet, dumb, mute, f. muette. ^pais, thick, f. €paisse. sujet, subject, f. sujette. doux, sweet, soft, f. douce. malin, wicked, f. maligne, faux, false, i.fausse. h€nin, benign, f. b€nlghe. 9. The following are more irregular in the formation of their fem- inine, as : — Beau (hd), beautiful, f. belle, nouveau (nouvel), new, f. nouvelle. mou (mol), soft, f. moHe. fou (fol), mad, foolish, i.folle. vieux (vieil), old, f. vieille. Note. The forms in parentheses, hd, nouvel, etc., are used before mascu- line nouns beginning with a vowel or h mute, as : un hd arhre, a fine tree ; un nouvel ai-dre, a new order ; unfol espoir, a mad, wild hope. 10. The rules given for the plural of substantives apply also to adjectives. Ex. : — Grand, f. grande ; plur. grands, f. grandes. appliqu€, f. appliqu€e ; plur. appliques, f. appliqu€es. gras, f. grasse, fat ; plur. gras, f. grasses, royal, f. royale, royal ; plur. royaux, f, royales. beau, f. belle, beautiful ; plur. beaux, f. belles, vieux, f. vieille, old ; plur. vieux, f. vieilles. Fm, mou, and bleu make in the plural fous, mous, and bleus. 11. The adjective must agree in gender and number with the substantive which it qualifies, as : — La grande maison, the large house. La maison est grande, the house is large. T-ja jolie rose, the pretty rose. Ces roses sont tr^-jolies, these roses are very pretty. The adjective is more frequently used substantively in French than in English. Ex. Le paresseux, the lazy (one). 80 XVII. DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. VOCABULARY. La m^dedne, the medicine. agrrahle, agreeable. I'ivoire, m. irory. amer, amere, bitter. la violette, the violet. mur, e. ripe. la montagne, the mountain. aimahle, amiable. la liberty, liberty. immortel, -le, immortal. la robe, the dress, gown. cher, chere, dear. I'herbe, f. the grass. obe'issant, e, obedient. vrai, e, true. precieux, -se, precious. la voix, the voice. corps, m. body. utile, useful. READING EXERCISE 17. Cet arbre est tres-gros. Yoici deux gros arbres. La m^decine n'etait pas bonne ; elle etait tres-araere. Nos enfants sont heureux. Yos fiUes ne sont pas beureuses; elles sont tres - malbeureuses. Vous seriez aimable, si (if) vous etiez appliquee. Voici nne tres- jolie maison, elle est encore neuve. Cette eglise est vieille. Yos chevaux sont vieux. Les chateaux royaux sont tres-beaux. Les dents longues et blanches de 1' elephant fournissent (^furnish) rivou-e. La fiUe de notre voisin est muette. lis ne sont pas obeissants. J'avais une oie qui (which) etait grosse et grasse. THEME 17. 1. The rose is pretty; the violets are also pretty. 2. My room is small; your house is large. 3. This news is not true. 4. My father is good; my mother is also good. 5. These geese are big and fat. 6. What beautiful houses ! 7. Henry's books are useful and agreeable. 8. Your windows are very small and low. 9. My body is mortal, but my soul is immortal. 10. Our town is very old. 11. Her sister is not handsome. 12. This house is well situated (hien situee). 13. This apple is not ripe, but these pears are too (trop) ripe. 14. Is this butter fresh ? 15. The grass is very thick. 16. Ivory is white ; my teeth are not so (sz) white. 17. Her voice is very sweet. 18. I have received a long letter from my father. 19. What a foolish (§ 9, Note) hope ! 20. That medicine was very ADJECTIVES. 81 bitter. 21. Louisa's dress is beautiful, but her bonnet is not very beautiful. 22. My shoes are very old. 23. The leaf is dry. 24. My mother is happy ; my sisters are also happy. 25. Your letter was too short. 26. That girl is very foolish and idle. CONVERSATION. Non, elle est immortelle. L'ame de I'homme est-elle mor- telle ? Qui est malade chez vous ? Prend-elle (^does she take) de la medecine ? Qui est arrive ? A-t-il apporte quelque chose ? Etes-vous heureux ? Comment trouvez-vous (^how do you like) cette rose ? Votre robe est-elle vieille ou neuve ? Notre version est-elle longue ? Comment trouvez-vous ces deux ^coliers ? Sont-ils obeissants ? C'est ma tante qui est malade. Oui, M — , elle prend une mede- cine tres-amere. Mon oncle Richard. II a apporte un bel oiseau, un perroquet {parrot). Oh ! non, nous sommes malheU' reux! Je la trouve trfes-belle. Elle n'est pas vieille ; elle est toute neuve. Non, elle n'est pas bien longue. lis sont tres-paresseux. Non, M — , lis ne sont pas obeis- sants. A vez-vous perdu quelque chose ? Oui, Monsieur, j'ai perdu raa vieille casquette {cap). 82 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LEgON. XYIII. DIX-HUITIEME LE9ON. THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 1. General rule. Adjectives generally follow their NOUNS. 2. Particular rules. The following generally precede the substantive : Beau, fine. merchant, wicked. bon, good. mei/leur, better. grand, great, large. moindre, less, least. gros, big. petit, little. jeune, young. saint holy. mauvais, bad. vieux, old. vrai, true. Ex. : — Un beau pays, a fine country. Une grande ville, a large town or city. Un jeune lion, a young lion. Vn mauvais lit, a bad bed. Un meilleur avis, a better advice. Un vieux soldat,. an old soldier, etc. Note. Grand is placed after its noun, when it signifies tall : un homme grand, a tall man. N. B. It is to be observed, that substantives preceded by an adjective, when used in the partitive sense, take only de before them, instead of duj de, la, or des. (See L. v., 4.) Ex. : De bon vin, (some) good wine; de belles Jleurs, beautiful flowers. Note. Exceptions to this rule are : du bon sens, good sense ; des jeunes gens, young men ; des petitspois, green peas ; and other expressions in which the noun and adjective form really but one compound word. 3. Monosyllabic adjectives, except those denoting some physical property (color, taste, form, etc.') , precede the noun. Ex. : Uit long discours, unfol amour. 4. Adjectives qualifying a noun followed by a limiting phrase or clause, precede the noun. Ex. : Vimmoriel auteur du Paradis perdu. THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 83 5. Many adjectives, when taken in their literal sense, follow, when taken figuratively, precede the substantive, as : — FIGURATIVELY. LITERALLY. Un tendre amitie, a tender friend- De la viande tendre, tender meat. ship. mon pmivre enfant, mj "poor child. un enfant pauvre, a poor (indigent) child. un prof and silence, a deep silence. un foss€ profond, a deep ditch. 6. Many adjectives take their place sometimes before, sometimes after the noun, without changing their signification, simply for the sake of euphony or stress. This is mostly to be seen when the ad- jective is preceded by the definite article or by ce, cette. We say, for instance : une verite aff reuse, a frightful truth, but, Vaffreuse or cette affreuse verite: L' inflexible dureM des riches. The inflexible hardness of the rich. Cette affligeante nouvelle se r€pandit dans la ville. This afflicting news spread (soon) in the town. 7. Some adjectives have a different meaning, according as they Btand before or after their noun : — Mon cher ami, my dear friend (de- Un livre cher, a dear book (denoting noting affection). the price). «ti brave homme, a worthy man. un homme brave, a brave (courageous) man. un honnete homme, an honest man. un homme honnete, a civil or polite man. la dernier c ann€e, i\iQ last jQQX {oi a. I'ann^e derniere, last year (the past certain space of time),^ year). VOCABULARY. Le soldat, the soldier. am&icain, e, American. les gens, people. simple, simple. attentif -ve, attentive. modeste, modest. vert, e, green. • vertueux, -se, virtuous. bleu, e, blue. . laborieux, -se, laborious 1 For instance : He spent the last year of his life at Paris, ilpassa la derniert annee de sa vie a Paris, 84 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEMB LEgON. aveugle, blind. nature!, -le, natural. ta musique, the music. le sentiment, the sentiment. noir, e, black. la fum€e, the smoke. remain, e, Roman. incroyable, incredible. Varm^e, f. the army. I'application, f. the application. le malheur, misfortune. deja, already. le vaisseau, the vessel. Note. Adjectives denoting nationality are not written with a capital. Ex.: Lalanguefrangaise. READING EXERCISE 18. J'ai des raisins doux. Ce sont des jeunes gens attentifs. La couleur verte est la couleur de la nature. Notre voisin a un habit bleu et une casquette rouge. Yoici une jeune fille aveugle. You- lez-vous cette petite boite ? EUe a regu une lettre amusante de sa vieille (^old) cousine. Avez-vous de bonne encre? J'aime la musique italienne. Voici deux aunes de drap vert et quatre aunes de drap noir. Les soldats remains etaient tres-braves. Un ete sec est tres-nuisible aux plantes. Mon maitre de musique est un brave homme. Voici de grands vaisseaux americains. Les colibris (humming birds) sont de beaux petits oiseaux. J'aime les jeunes fiUes douces, simples et modestes. THEME 18. 1. France is a fine country. 2. We have a large house. 3. Henry has a bad pen. 4. My aunt is a virtuous woman. 5. She is also very active and laborious. 6. Frank is an attentive boy. 7. Miss B. is an amiable young lady. 8. Is Mr. A. a polite man? 9. Yes, he is very polite. 10. The wasp {la guepe) is a hurtful insect. 11. Our neighbor has three small horses. 12. This is a natural sentiment. 13. The young man studies (etudie) with (an) incredible application. 14. I have bought a round table. 15. Give me some red paper and four black pencils. 16. Yesterday we had an easy translation, but our exercise for to-morrow is difficult. 17. I like the blue sky, (the) high trees and (the) green fields. 18. Have you ripe pears? 19. No, sir, the pears are not yet (jpas encore) THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 85 ripe, but we have ripe cherries. 20. Italian music is very agreea- ble. 21. The French soldiers under Napoleon [the] first were very brave. 22. Here are beautiful flowers and beautiful fruit {pi.). 23. The English have large vessels. 24. The rose, and [the] lily are beautiful flowers. CONVERSATION. Avez-vous des noix mures ? Quand seront-elles mures ? Aimez-vous la musique alle- mande ? Ce marchand a-t-il de bon beurre ? Comment trouvez-vous ces jeunes lions ? Votre theme est-il difficile ? Combien coute cet habit ? Oil est mon cher ami Lucien ? A qui est ce livre amusant ? Qui a perdu une casquette rouge ? Avez-vous de bon pain et du ? Elles ne sont pas encore mures. Dans huit jours. J'aime mieux (better) la musique italienne. Son beurre n'est pas frais, mais sa creme (cream) est fraiche. lis sont tres-beaux. Non, Monsieur, il est facile. II coute cent francs. C'est un habit cher. II est alle au concert. II est k mon oncle. C'est Jules qui I'a perdue. Voici un gros morceau de pain et du fromage. 86 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON. XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LE9ON DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 1. The comparative is formed by placing tbe adverb plus, more, before an adjective. The superlative by placing the article before the comparative, as : Haut, e, high; comp. plus haut, higher; sup. le plus haut, the highest; fern, haute, comip. plus haute, sup. la plus haute. Mauvais, e, bad ; comp. plus mauvais, e, worse ; sup. le plus mauvais, f. la plus mauvaise, the worst. Rem. When a possessive adjective is placed before the superlative, the article le, la, les, is dropped, as : Mon plus jeune fr ere, my youngest brother. 2. There is in French also a lower and lowest degree which is ef- fected by the words moinSy less, for the comparative degree, and le moins, f. la moms, the lest, for the superlative, as : Cruel, -le, cruel ; comp. moins cruel, f. moins crudle, less cruel or not so cruel; sup. le moins cruel, f. la moins crudle, the least cruel. 3. The following adjectives have an irregular comparison : Bon, f. bonne, good; comp. meilleur, e, better; sup. le meilleur, f. la meil- leure, the best. (Mauvais, e, in the sense of wicked}, comp. pire, worse; sup. lepire, f. la pire, the worst. (Petit, e,); comp. moindre, less ; sup. le moindre, f. la moindre, the least. Petit and mauvais are also regular. 4. As before an adjective is rendered aussi ; as after it, and than are both translated que. Ex. : — // est aussi heureux que moi, he is as happy as I am. Charles est plus fort que sonfrere^ Charles is stronger than his brother. 5. In after a superlative and before the name of a place is ren- dered by de and not by dans. Ex. : Les plus belles eglises de Paris, the finest churches in Paris. DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 87 VOCABUIARY. La ^oZ?anc?e, Holland. fon, e, strong. Vaheille, f. the bee. chaud, warm. le m€taly the metal. encore, still. Velephant, the elephant. toujours, always. « Jidele, faithful. Vautre, the other. peupU, e, peopled, populous. le matin, the morning. lepays, the country. le soir, the evening, pesant, e, heavy. court, short. READING EXERCISE 19. L'Europe est plus petite que I'Asie. L*AUemagne est plus fer- tile que la Hollande. L'abeille est rinsecte le plus utile. L'or est le metal le plus pesant. Ta robe est moins belle que la robe de ta goeur. Monsieur S est un homme tres-fort. Son frere ain^ (elder) est encore plus fort ; c'est I'liomme le plus fort que (that) je con- naisse. L'elephant est le plus grand de tons les animaux terrestres. Les livres d'Emilie sent plus amusants que les notres (ours). Les cbats sont moins fideles que les cbiens. Ces pommes-ci sont meil- leures que vos poires. Les notres sont les meilleures. Votre tante est plus laborieuse que sa fiUe. Londres et Paris sont les villes les plus grandes et les plus peuplees de TEurope. THEME 19. 1. Tbe morning was warm; the evening was warmer. 2. This cbureb is higher than the other. 3. Mary is the happiest girl in the world. 4. She is prettier than Louisa ; she is the prettiest of the sisters. 5. This house is not so (si) old as (que) the other. 6. This mountain is very high, higher" than all the other mountains of this country. 7. The 22d [of] June is the longest, and the 22d of December the shortest day of the year. 8. The rose is the finest of all (the) flowers. 9. This wine is worse than water. 10. Have you any (de) better wine? 11. Yes, the red wine is better. 12. My wine is the best. 13. John is my best friend. 88 XX. VINGTIEME LECON, CONVERSATION. Mademoiselle Marie, etes-vous Oh ! heureuse ? Votre voisin est^il malheureux ? Quel est le metal le plus utile ? Quels metaux sont les plus pe- sants ? Quelle est la plus attentive de toutes vos ecolieres ? Quel est le plus fort d,es ani- maux terrestres. Quel est le mois le plus froid de I'annee ? Yotre robe est-elle aussi belle que la robe de Julie ? Le tigre est-il cruel ? Ou trouve-t-on le meilleur fer ? oui, je suis tres-heureuse, plus heureuse que ma soeur. II est moins malheureux que son frere qui est en Amerique. , C'estlefer? L'or, le platine et le plomb sont les plus pesants. C'est Madeleine, la fllle de Mon- sieur B. C'est I'elephant; c'est le plus grand et le plus fort de tons les animaux terrestres. C'est le mois de Janvier. Non, elle est moins belle. Oui, c'est le plus cruel de tons les animaux. Le meilleur fer se trouve (is found) en Suede. XX. VINGTIEME LE9ON REGULAR VERBS. — FIRST CONJUGATION.— DONNER. 1. There are in French three regular conjugations, viz. : in er, ir, and re. Verbs in -oir belong to the irregular ones, as their root undergoes manifold changes.* The Infinitive mood is to be considered as the radical part or * Only six other verbs are coujugated like recevoir, which is often given as the model of one conjugation. They will all be found L. XL. REGULAR VERBS. 89 ground-form on which the conjugation depends. What precedes the ter- mination er, ir, or re, is the root, which, with regular verbs, always remains unaltered. To this are added the different terminations, by which persons, tenses, and moods are distinguished, «nd which are common to all the verbs of that same conjugation. FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. '-■ 2. There are primitive tenses and derived tenses. The primitive tensea are : the infinitive, the participle present, the past participle, the present indica- tive, the pretei'ite. 3. From the present infinitive are formed : the future, by adding ai, and the conditional, by adding ais, as : Inf. donner: Fut. je donnerai, and Cond. je donnerais; finir : Fut. je finirai, Cond. je finirais. In the third conju- gation the final e is dropped : vendre: Fut. je vendrai, Cond. je vendrais. 4. From the participle present are formed : the present of the subjunctive, by changing ant into e, as : donnant: queje donne; finissant: que je finisse ; vendant : que je vende ; and the Imperfect Indicative by changing ant into ais, as : finissant: jefinissais, e?c. 5. With the participle past are formed all the compound tenses, by means of the auxiliaries avoir or etre, as : Part, past ; donn€, fini, vendu — ; j'ai donn€, j' avals fini, j'aurai vendu, etc. 6. From the present of the Indicative, viz. : from its 1st person singular and the 1st and 2d persons plural, the Imperative is formed, by suppress- ing the pronouns je, nous, vous, as: donne (give), donnons, donnez; finis {^n- ish), finissonSjfinissez, etc. 7: From the pretente is formed the Subjunctive imperfect, by changing the final ai into asse for the verbs of the first conjugation, and is into isse for the second and third conjugations. Ex.: je donnai: que je donnasse; je finis: que je finisse ; je vendis : queje vendisse. CONJUGATION OF DONNER,-^TO GIVE. INDICATIVE. PBESENT TENSE. Je. donne, I give, nous donnons, we give. tu donnes, thou givest. vous donnez, you give. il donne, he gives, lis donnent, ) ^. n 1 7 . 1, H ?• *hey give, elle donne, she gives. elles donnent, J 90 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. IMPERFECT. Je donnais, I gave or was giving, nous donnions, we gave. tu donnais, thou gavest. vous donniez, you gave. il donnait, he gave. ils donnaient, they gave. PBETEKITE. Je donnai, I gave or did give. nous donnames, we gave. tu donnas, thou gavest. vous donnates, you gave. il donna, he gave. ils donnerent, they gave. Je donnerai, I shall give. nous donnerons, tf^e shall give. tu donneras, ^Aoi« wilt give. vous donnerez, yoz« will give. il donnera, ^e will give. Ds donneront, ^Aey will give. CONDITIONAL. Je donnerais, I should give. nous donnerions, we should give. tu donnerais, etc. vous donneriez, etc. il donnerait, etc. ils donneraient, e^c. IMPERATIVE. Donne, give. donnons, let us give. (donnes-en),* ^iVe (o/'^V). donnez, y^^;e. INFINITIVE. Donner, to give. (de or ^ donner) , to give. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je donne, that I {may) give, que nous donnions, that we (may) que tu donnes, etc. que vous donniez, etc. Igive. qu'il donne, etc. qu'ils donnent, etc. * The Impei-ative mood of the first conjugation talces an s, in the singular, when followed by en (of it, of them, some), or 1/ (to or of it, to them). Ex. : offres-ertf offer some, penses-y, think of it. REGULAR VERBS. 91 IMPERFECT. Que je donnasse, that I (mighty que nous donnassions. que tu dollnasses, etc. [^ive. que vous donnassiez. qu'il donnat, etc. qu'ils donnassent. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. PAST. DoxmSiUi, giving. Dunne, f. donnee, given. (en donnant) , hy or in giving, etc. COMPOUND TENSES. In active verbs these are formed with the Part, past and the auxiliary avoir, to have. INFINITIVE. Avoir donne, to have given. INDICATIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. J'ai donne, I Jiave given. tu as donne, tkou hast given. il a donne, he has given. n-ms avons donne, ive have given, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. J'avais donnd, / had given, etc. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. J'eus donne, I had given, etc. COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. J'aurai donne, / shall have given, etc. CONDITIONAL. J'aurais donne, ) r ? 7^ r ' 1 1 should have giv^n. J'eussc donne', 92 ~ XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. SUBJUNCTIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que j'aie donne, tliat I (may) have given, etc. Que tu aies donne, that thou (mayest) have given, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que j'eusse donne, that I (might) have given, etc. PARTICIPLE. Ayant donne, e, liaving given. Remark 1 . There is but one way to render the expressions : I give, I do give, I am giving ; viz. : je donne : — / was giving ; je donnais, etc. 2. In the interrogative and negative form the auxiliary do is not ex- pressed. (See also the 11th Lesson, 4.) Ex. : INTERROGATIVELY. Est-cc que je donne, do I give ? donnons-nous, do we give ? donnes-tu, dost thou give ? donnez-vous, do you give ? donne-t-il, does he give f donnent-ils, ] ^^ ^^^^ ^.^^ , donne-t-elle, does she give ? donnent-elles, ) NEGATIVELY. Je ne donne pas, / do not give. tu ne donnes pas, thou dost not give. 11 ne donne pas, fie does not give, etc. NEGATIVE-INTERROGATIVE. Est-ce que je ne donne pas, do I not give ? ne donnes-tu pas, dost thou not give ? ne donne-t-il pas, does he not give? 3. The forms donn€ je (acute on the e), donnais-je, donnai-je, are little used, except in poetry and in studied prose ; they are replaced by Est-ce que (is it that) prefixed to the common form, as: est-ce queje donne, do I give; est-ce que je donnais, did I give (was I giving), etc. The future and condi- tional donnerai-je, donnerais-je are more common, though est-ce que may be used in all cases to form an interrogation, especially in common conversa- tion, as : est-ce que je donnerai, shall I give ; est-ce qu'il donne, does he give ; est-ce que vous donnez, est-ce que- tu ne donnes pas, etc. REGULAR VERBS. 93 COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Ai-je donne 1 as-tu donne ? a-t-il donne'? etc. Je n'ai pas donne, tu n'as pas donne, etc. N'ai-je pas donne ? n'as-tu pas donne ? etc. Conjugate in the same manner : parler, to speak ; porter, to carry, to take ; admirer, to admire ; aimer, to love, etc. , VOCABULARY. Le prochain, the neighbor. magnijique^ magnificent. apporter, to bring. manger, to eat. tomber, to fall. chercher^ to look for. Vescalier, m. the stairs. trouver, to find. la sant€, health. penser, to think. le coeur, the heart. jouer, to play, pleurer, to cry. le canif, the penknife. arriver, to arrive. les gens, the people. » prier, to pray. la chasse, the chase. I'autre, the other. le chasseur, the hunter. pas encore, not yet. la poste, the post-office. READING EXERCISE 20. Aimez Dieu et votre prochain. Les parents aiment leurs enfants. Portez cette lettre k la poste. Tu porteras cette robe k ta soeur. J'apporterai ees livres k mon maitre. Apportez-lui {Mm) aussi cette boite. L'enfant tomba de I'escalier. J'ai pense a mon ami. Pensez a votre cousin. Jouons. Nous cberchions longtemps votre chien. Yous ne le (Mm) trouverez pas. Les jeunes gens parlaient souvent de leurs amis. Les chasseurs parlerent de la chasse. Tu ne mangeras pas cette poire-ci ; elle n'est pas mure. Qui a mange I'autre '^ N'admirez-vous pas cette magaific[ue couleur ? THEME 20. 1. I love my father. 2. Thou lovest ^hy mother. 3. He loves his sister. 4. We love our parents. 5. Do you like flowers ? 6. I give an apple to my brother. 7. We were speaking of your aunt. 8. I admired the beautiful palace of the king. 9. We played yes- terday. 10. The child cried. 11. The children cried. 12. The 94 XX. VTNGTIEME LECON. boy will look for his copy-book. 13. The boys will look for their copy-books. 14. I have found my knife. 15. Have you found your gloves? 16. We have not found our gloves. 17. Play, my child, 18. Eat these apples. 19. Do not eat these pears ; they are not ripe. 20. She would fall. 21. We should admire your garden. 22. They would have eaten some bread and butter. 23. I think that our friends will arrive to-day. 24. They will ar- rive to-morrow. 25. Will you take this letter to the post-office ? 26. Pray [to] God every morning and every evening. 27. Why do you cry ? 28. Why have you not brought your money ? 29. I have not brought my purse. CONVERSATION. Avez-vous cherche votre mon- Je la (it) cherche encore. tre d'or ? Qu' avez-vous apporte ? Voulez-vous (will you) manger du pain ? Yotre mere parle-t-elle fran- ^ais ? Quel comraandement Jesus- Christ a-t-il donne ? Qui est notre prochain ? Qui portera cette lettre a la poste, Antoine ou Theodore ? Qu' apporte le chasseur? Avez-vous aussi ete a la chasse ? A quoi pensez-vous ? A quel jeu joucrons-nou^ de- main ? Que chcrchcz-vous ? Qu'admirez-vous la? J'ai apporte les gants de Ma- demoiselle Mathilde. J'ai deja mange un gros morceau de pain. Oui, elle parle fran9ais et anglais. II a dit : Aimez Dieu et votre prochain. Tous les hommes. Ce sera Theodore. II apporte deux lievres, Oui, Monsieur, nous avons et^ k la chasse hier. Je pense a mon theme frangais. Nous jouerons a la balle (hall). Jo cherche mes gants. Nous admirons ce magnifique vaisseau anglais. REGULAR VERBS. 95 READING LESSON. LE CHAMEAU ET LE CHAT. Le chat au chameau. Soyez le bieu-venu, mon frere. Le chameau. Comment, moi (/) ton frere ! Le chat. Oui, certes. Yoyez un pen (see a little) : ne puls-je pas {cannot I) faire une aussi jolie bosse que vous ? Le chaineau. Cela pent (can) etre ; mais peut-elle aussi porter autant que la mienne {mine) ? Le chat. La sotte deraande ! donnez-moi seulement {only) votro petit paquet, je le porterai, comme si ce n'etait rien. Le chameau. Mais penses-y bien : n'est-il pas trop gros pour toi {you) f Le chat. Ah ! quel conte ! donnez-moi, vous dis-je, donnez. Le chameau. C 'est bien; approche un peu, le voiR. Le chat. Ah ! quelle charge ! je suis eerase ! Le chameau. Tu as ce que {what) tu m^rites ! Celui qui veut entreprendre de grandes choses, doit {must) au- paravant eprouver ses forces. Le chameau, the camel. le chat, the cat. le bien-venu, e, welcome. comment, how. cej-tes, to be sure. /aire, to make. une bosse, a hump. la demands, the question. le paquet, the pack. comme si, as if. y, of it (to it). le conte, the tale. approche)-, approach. la charge, the weight. €cras€, crushed. m€riter, to deserve. entreprendre, to undertake. auparavant, before. €prouver, to try. la force, the strength. 96 XXI. VINGT ET UNIEME LEgON. XXI. YINGT ET UNIEME LE9ON. HEMARKS ON THE ORTHOGRAPHY OF SOME VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. Some regular verbs in -er are, for the sake of euphony, liable to the fol- lowing modifications : 1 . Some verbs ending in -ter, as : jeter, to throw ; rejeter, to throw back ; and those polysyllabic verbs ending in eler, as : appeler, to call; renouveler, to renew, etc.; double the t or Z, when they are followed by an e mute. This is the case in some persons of the Present, Future, and Imperative, viz.: — PRESENT. IMPERATIVE. FUTURE. Je je^te — nous jetons. Jefte. Je je^ferai. tuje^tes — vousjetez. ^ /)/. jetons. tujetteras. il jefte — ils je«ent. jetez. etc. J'appeffe — nous appelons. Appe/Ze. J'appeZferai. tu appeZ/es — vous appelez. pi. appelons. tu appeZ/eras. il appe/Ze — ils appeZZent. • appelez. etc. Except the verb acheter, to buy, and a few others that seldom occur, which never double the t, but take the grave accent e : Pres. J'achete, tu achetes, il achete, nous achetons, vous achetez, ils ache tent, Fut. J'acheterai. Imper. achete, pi. achetez. 2. Dissyllabic verbs ending in -der, as ; geler, to freeze, and all others that have an e mute in the last syllable but one, such as : semer, to sow ; memr, to lead ; lever to lift up, take the grave accent,^, when the final con- sonant of the root is followed by an e mute : Infinitive: Mener, to lead, to conduct. Pres. Je mene, tu menes, il mene, nous menons, vous menez, ils menent. Imperf. Je menais, tu menais. Fut. Je menerai, tu meneras. Imp. mene, menons, menez. The same change takes place with those verbs which have ^ in the last syllable but one. They, however, retain the ^ in the Future and Condi- tional. ORTHOGRAPHY OF SOME VERBS. 97 Infinitive: ^sperer, to hoi^e. Pres. J'espere, tu esperes, il espere, nous esperons, vous esperez, ils es- perent. Zmperf. J'esperais. Imper. Espere, esperons, esperez. Fut. J'espererai. Verbs in e'ger retain the e, as : je proMge. 3. In verbs ending in -ger, as : juger, to judge ; partager, to share, divide, the e is retained in those tenses where g is followed by the vowels a or o, in order to give the g the same soft sound as in all other tenses and persons. Ex.: Infinitive: Manger, to Q2ii. Pres. Je mange ; pi. nous mangeons. P. pr. Mangeant. Impf. Je mangeais, tu mangeais, il mangeait, nous mangions, vous man- giez, ils mangeaient. Pret. Je mangeai, tu mangeas, il mangea, nous mangeames, vous man- geates, ils mangerent. Imp. Mangeons. 4. In verbs ending in -cer, as : commencer, to begin, a cedilla must be placed under the c, when this letter is followed by a or o. Ex. : — Infinitive: Placer, to place. Pres. Je place, tu places, etc.; pi. nous plapons, etc. Imp/. Je plapais, tu pla^ais, il plapait, nous placions, vous placiez, ils plafaient. Imper. Plafons, etc. Pret. Je plajr ai, tu plazas, il plaf a, nous plaf ames, etc. 5. Verbs ending in -ayer, -oyer, -uyer change the y into i, whenever the letter y would be immediately followed by an e mute. Such are : — Payer, to pay. employer, to employ. effrayer, to frighten. essuyer, to wipe. Pres. Je paie, tu pa^es, il pa/e, pi. nous payons, vous payez, ils paient. Part. pr. Payant. J'emploie, tu emploies, il emploie, pi. nous employons, vous em- ployez, ils emploient. P. pr. Eraployant. , J'essuie, tu essuies, etc.; pi. ils essuient. Impf. Je payais, etc.; pi. nous payions, vous payiez, etc. J'employais, etc.; pi. nouns employions, etc. J'essuyais, etc.; pi. nous essuyions, etc. Fut. Je paierai, etc.; j'emploierai, etc.; j'essuierai, etc. ^ Imper. l^sde — payez. Emploie — employez. Essuie — essuyez. 6. Verbs which in the Infinitive end in -ier, as : prier, to pray ; crier, to cry, are in some cases spelled with a double it. This takes place in the 1st 7 98 XXI. VINGT ET UNIEME LEgON. and 2d persons plural of the Imperfect of the Indicative, and of the Present of the Subjunctive : — Infinitive:- Ouhlier, to forget. Ind. Imperf. pi. nous oubliVons, vous oubhVez, ils oubliaient. Svhj. Pres. pi. que nous pruons, que vous pnVez, etc. VOCABULARY. La vertu, virtue. la force, strength. la heaut€, beauty. le bt-uit, the noise. pr€ferer, to prefer. la servante, the servant. Vamiti€, f. friendship. la chamhre, the room. le vent, the wind. le chemin; the way, road. la pluie, the rain. nettoyer, to clean. la terre, the earth. la pierre, the stone dever, to bring up, to educate. la cuisiniere, the cook. s€cher, to dry. poss^der, to possess. 6jew, well. lejardinier, the gardener. READING EXERCISE 21. Le sage prefere la vertu a la beaute. L'amitie se paie {is paid) par Famitie. Les parents elevent leurs enfants. II gelera cette nuit. II a gele. Elle achete un livre. Les vents sechent la terre trempee (wet) par la pluie. Nous achetons des fruits. Vous acheteriez cette maison, si elle n'etait pas si chere. Appelez Jean. Nous partageons avec nos amis tout ce que (all that) nous avons. Ce jeune homme emploie bien son temps. Nous emploierons toutes nos forces. Cela m'effraie. Ce bruit m'a effray^. La ser- vante nettoie les chambres, Les maitres aiment les ecoliers qui emploient bien leur temps. THEME 21. 1. The boy throws a stone. 2. You always throw (throw al- ways) stones. 3. Call thy brother. 4. Call the servant. 5. I shall call John. 6. The cook buys eggs. 7. I buy a horse. 8. My father will also buy a horse. 9. Where dost thou take ^ this iiorse? 10. I hope to see you (vous voir) to-morrow. 11. What 1 Mener is applied to what moves of itself, joorier, to what is carried by lifting from the ground. ORTHOGRAPHY OF SOME VERBS. 99 do you hope? 12. We hope nothing, 13. What are you eatmg there {la) ? 14. The child ate an apple. 15. You ate walnuts. 16. I placed the books on the table* 17. I pay everything (tout). 18. Thou payest nothing. 19. Let us well employ iour time. 20. My sons pay [for] what (ce que) they buy. 21. My uncle pos- sesses a large garden. 22. The gardener cleans the ways. 23. Wipe your tears (larmes). 24. The dog frightens the children. 25. We wiped the table. 26. I prefer coffee to tea (the). CONVERSATION. Qui a appel4 ? Avez-vous nettoye les chemins ? Qui me protegera (protect) ? Nettoies-tu la chambre ? TroTlvez-vous cela cher? Que mangeais-tu? Oil mene-t-on ce cheval ? Crois-tu (do you think) qu'il gele cette nuit? Acheterez-vous du th^ ou du cafe? Ou achetez-vous cette farine ? Qui a jete cette pierre ? Que fit (did — do) un jour un pere ? Ton pere a appele. Pas encore; je les nettoierai ce soir. Dieu te protegera. Je nettoie toute la maison. J'appelle cela tres-cher. Je mangeais des noix. On le mene chez le marechal-fer- rant (farrier). H a deja gele. Je n'aime pas le the, j'acheterai du cafe. Chez le meunier (miller) . Je crois que c'est Richard. II partagea ses biens entre ses trois fils. 100 XXII. VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON. XXII. yiNGT-DEUXIEME LE9ON. SECOND CONJUGATION: FINIR. INDICATIVE. PKESENT TENSE. Je finis, I finish. nous finissons, we finish. tu finis, thou finishest. vous finissez, you finish. TX^mt, he finishes. ilsfinissent, ) 7 ^ ' % qVlq %mt J she finishes. ellesfinissent, J IMPEKFECT. Je finissais, I finished (was fin- nous finissions, we finished. tu finissais, etc. [ishing) . vous finissiez, etc. il finissait, etc. ils finissaient, etc. PRETERITE. Je finis, I finished (did finish), nous finimes, we finished. tu finis, etc. vous finites, etc. il finit, etc* ils finirent, etc. FUTURE. Je finirai, I shall finish. nous finirons, we shall finish. tu finiras, etc. vous finirez, etc. il finira, etc. ils finiront, etc. CONDITIONAL. Je finirais, I should finish. nous finirions, we should finish. tu finirais, etc. vous finiriez, etc. il finirait, cte. ils finlraient, etc. INFINITIVE. Finir, to finish. de or a finir, to finish. SECOND CONJUGATION. 101 IMPERATIVE. Finis, finish. finissons, let us finish. finissez, finish. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je finisse, that I (may) fin- que nous finissions, that we finish. que tu finisses, etc. [ish. que vous finissiez, etc. qu'il finisse, etc. qu'ils finissent, etc. IMPERFECT. Que je finisse, that I (might) que, n. finissions, that we (might) que tu finisses, etc. \_finish. que vous finissiez, etc. [finish. qu'il finit, etc. qu'ils finissent, etc, PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. PAST. Y'missdiTii, finishing. Fini, f. ^nie, finished. en finissant, hy finishing. COMPOUND TENSES, INFINITIVE. Avoir fini, to have finished. INDICATIVE. '.,.,. ' ' COMPOUND OP THE PRESEl^T,' '. *'* * V * '•' > J'&i&m, I have Jimshed. ,' ' ' - ^ '!''»"'*"'*'? tu as fini, thou ha^t finished. •,•/''. J ,, i ! » > ^ ^ *', 5 ' > i\ a. fva\, he has finished. nous avons fini, we have finished, etc. COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFECT. J'avais fini, / had finished, etc. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. J'eus fini, / had finished, etc. COMPOUND OP THE FUTURE. J'aurai fini, / shall have finished, etc. 102 XXII. VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON CONDITIONAL. T, ^ . ' >• I should have finished, etc. J eusse nm, ) SUBJUNCTIVE. C03IP0UND OP THE PRESENT. Que j'aie fini, that I (may) have finished, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que j 'eusse fini, that I (might) have finished, etc. PAETICIPLE. Ayant fini, having finished, etc. Conjugate in the same manner : hdtir, to build ; choisir, to choose ; remplir, to fill, etc. Rem. 1. The verb hair, to hate, loses in the Present and Imperative sin- gular its diaeresis. Otherwise it is quite regular and retains the two dots. Pres. Je hais, tu hais, il hait, nous ha'issons, vous haissez, etc. Imper. Hais; pi. ha'issons, haissez. Pret. Je hais, I hated. Rem. 2. The yerhfieurir, to flourish, has a second form for the Imperfect tense : Jeflorissais; and also a second for the Part, present : florissant, e, — both of which are only used in a figurative sense, as : une ville fiorissante, etc. VOCABULARY. Nourrir, to feed, nourish. saisir, to seize. ; / '., ob^ivj to rth^y, rendre, to render, return. reniplir, to fili, f^fil. la tdche, the task. ,, .;; , 6fli% to build. ■ ^ la pomme de terre, the -potsito. > ' *' .'' , , , , J'eusse vendu, \ ^ '^"^ ^"^^ ^^^' ^• PARTICIPLE. Ayant vendu, having sold, SUBJUNCTIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. •Que j'aie vendu, that I (may) have sold, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que j'eusse vendu, that I (might) have sold, etc. Conjugate after this model : perdre, to lose ; attendre, to wait, to expect ; r€pondre, to answer, etc. Rem. 1. The verb hattre, to beat, is regularly conjugated, except that in the singular of the Present Indicative and in the Imperative it loses one t. Pres. Je bats, tu bats, il bat, nous battons, vous battez, etc. Imp. bats. Part, battu. Rem. 2. The verb rompre, to break, is conjugated in the Pres. Indicative as follows : Je romps, tu romps, il rompt, nous rompons, etc. (All the rest is regular.) Rem. 3. The verb rire, to laugh, is of the 3d conjugation : Pres. Je m, tu ris, il rit, nous rions, etc. But the Part, past is ri, and the Pret. Je ris, tu ris, il rit, nous rimes, vous rites, ils rirent. Put. Je rirai, etc. Rem. 4. Conclure, to conclude, is regular, as:. Pres. Je conclus, tu con- clus, il conclut, nous concluons, etc. Put. Je conclurai. Except that in the Preterite, it has je conclus (not Je concluis). 9 108 XXIII. VINGT-TEOISIEME LE^ON, VOCABULARY. La bague, the ring. droit, e, right. r€pandre, to spread, to shed. les amies, the arms. le bruit, the report; the noise. la sagesse, wisdom. la mort, death. la Grece, Greece. d€fendre, to forhid, to defend. I'honneur, m. the honor. entendre, to hear. perdre, to lose. furner, to smoke. attendre, to wait for, expect. r^pondre, to answer. unpen, a little. le sang, the blood. 'le tonnerre, the thunder. Voeil, the eye. le travail, the work. gauche, left. desirer, to wish. READING EXERCISE 23. J'ai vendu mon cheval. Nous avons vendu nos chevaux. Je perdis hier ma bourse. Yous perdites voire bague. La vieille femme vendait des cerises. Nous vendions du fromage et du beurre. On a r^pandu le bruit de la mort du roi. II est defendu de fumer ici. Qui defend cela ? Entendez-vous le bruit ? Qui a battu mon chien? H bat son cheval. Repondez-moi (me), mon fils. Re- ponds h ton maitre. Je repondis que j'etais malade. Ce tyran cruel a repandu beaucoup de sang innocent. Jules a deja perdu son oeil gauche, il perdra aussi son ceil droit. Tu perds ton argent. Nous perdons tout notre temps. Le bataillon prit les armes et de- fendit la ville. Socrate repandit beaucoup de sagesse k Athenes et dans toute la Grece. Pourquoi riez-vous ? Je ne ris pas. Je n'ai pas ri. THEME 23. 1. I sell my dogs. 2. My friend sells his horses. 3. We sell our houses. 4. I defend my honor. 5. Do you defend your friends ? 6. Thou losest thy time. 7. You lose your time. 8. I lost my money. 9. My brother has lost his cane. 10. He will lose everything. 11. The pupils will lose their places. 12. We expect a letter from our grandfather. 13. Do you also expect a letter? 14. No, sir, I expect nothing. 16. James {Jacques) and William expect (a) good news. 16. We have waited an hour. THIRD CONJUGATION. 109 17. Wait a little. 18. Why don't you wait? 19. Do you hear the music? 20. I hear nothing. 21. I did not hear the thunder. 22. Have you answered (to) her letter? 23. I have not yet an- swered. 24. I shall answer to-morrow. 25. Answer me (moi), 26. When {quand) I heard the thunder, I came down from the mountain. 27. The poor children have lost their father. 28. They will lose also their mother ; she is very ill. 29. Do not break my stick. CONVERSATION. Qui a perdu cette bourse ? A-t-il aussi perdu de I'argent ? Pourquoi perdez-vous votre temps ^ jouer ? A quoi (at what) jouez-vous ? Qui defend les brebis {sheep) ? As-tu fini ton travail ? Ton frere a-t-il fini sa version ? Avez-vous entendu le bruit du vent (wind) f Qui a defendu de manger de ces pommes? Comment etes-vous descendu ? Pourquoi salissez-vous vos mains ? Pourquoi ne punit-on pas ce m^chant enfant. Qui {whom) attendez-vous ? Attendicz-vous quelqu'un(some one) ? Je crois (/ think) que Jules a perdu une bourse. Je crois qu'il a perdu deux francs. Nous n'avons rien k faire {to do) , nous avons fini notre tache. Nous battens le cerceau {hoop). Le chien du berger {shepherd) . Oui, M — , mon travail est fini. Je ne crois pas; il la {it) finura demain. Le vent est terrible. Notre mere I'a defendu ce matin. Je suis descendu par I'escaliet {stairs). Nous nettoyons la cage de nos oiseaux. II sera puni apres la le9on. J'attends Monsieur le professeur. J'attendais mon cousin de Paris. 110 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. READING LESSON. • LE ROI DE PERSE. Un roi de Perse certain jour Chassait avee toute sa cour ; II eut soif, mais dans cette plaine On ne trouvait point de fontaine, Pres de Ik seulement ^tait un grand jardin Rempli de beaux cedrats, d'oranges, de raisins : "A Dieu ne plaise que j'en mange !" Bit le roi ; " ce jardin courrait trop de danger : Si je me permettais d'y cueillir une orange, Mes visirs aussitot mangeraient le verger." Cei-iain jour, one day. le cedrat, the lemon. chasser, to go a hunting. a Dieu ne plaise, God forbid. la soif, thirst. courrait, would run. seulement, only. pei-mettre, to permit. la plaine, the plain. cueillir, to gather, y, there. la fontaine, fountain, spring. aussitot, immediately. pres de la, in the neighborhood. le verger, the orchard. XXIY. VINGT-QUATRIEME LE9ON DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.^* With personal pronouns it must be observed whether they are intimately connected with or governed by a verb, as : I speak, we go, I give you, etc. ; if this be the case, they are conjunctive (pronoms conjoints) ; or if they are em- ployed by themselves or with a preposition; in this case they are termed dis- junctive (pronoms disjoints). We begin with the latter. 1. The disjunctive personal pronouns are: moi (I or me), toi (thou or thee), nous (we or us), vous, (you), lui (he or him), elle (she or her), eux (they or them, masculine), elles (they or them, * See p. II, L.*ix. ^ DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Ill feminine), and soi (self, one's self). These pronouns, it will be perceived, do not change their form to indicate case, the nominative and objective being the same. Ex. : Qui a dit cela ? Moi, ltd, elk, nous, etc. Who lias said this ? I, he, she, we, etc. Cest pour moi, pour toi, pour die, etc. That is for me, for thee, for her, etc. Je parle de toi, de vous, d'dles, d'eux, etc. I speak of thee, of you, of them, of them, etc. Nous pensons a lui, a vous, a eux, etc. We think of him, of you, of them, etc. 2. All these disjunctive pronouns may take the word -meme, pi. -memes, whenever in English the word selfia joined to a pronoun. Ex. : — S. moi-meme, (I) myself. PI. nous-memes, ourselves. toi-meme, thyself. vous-memes, yourselves. lui-mime, himself. eux-memes, \ tijej^g^lves. dle-meme, herself. elles-memes, ) soi-meme, one's self. 3. When a stress is laid upon personal pronouns, they are often preced- ed by c'est, c'€tait, etc., as in English : — S. c'est moi, it is I. PI. c'est nous, it is we. c'est toi, it is thou. c'est vous, it is you. c'est lui, it is he. ce sont eux, > .. . . j^ c'est die, it is she. ce sont dies, y The verb etre following ce is put in the plural only when the pronoun or noun which follows that verb is in the third person plural : c'€taient mes amis ce sont eux, but, c'est nous. 4. Soi is only used of mankind in a general sense, and of inanimate ob- jects in the singular. Ex.: — Doit-on toujours penser a soi, ought one always to think of one's self T VOCABULARY. Inconstant, inconstant. la pdote, the ball. ressembler, to resemble. venez, come. envoyer, to send. casser, to break. demeurer, to live. sorti, gone out. la corbeille, the basket. ag^, old. Vaimant, m. the loadstone. ni — ni, neither, nor. attirer, to attract. 112 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. READING EXERCISE 24. Qui dit (says) cela ? Moi, — lui, — elle, — eux-memes, — elles- m^mes. Penses-tu h moi ? Je pense k toi. Je pense a vous, — a elles, — a eux. Je n'ai pas pense k toi, mon pauvre enfant. L'homme inconstant ne ressemble jamais h lui-meme. Nous nous souvenons (we remember) de vous, — de lui, — d'elles, — d'eux. Envoyez- moi de Fargent. Sans moi, elle serait tombee. Je suis plus grand que toi, — que lui, — qu'elle. Qui a 4t4 ici, lui ou elle ? Venez avec moi, — avec nous. Joue avec lui. Jouez avec elles. On parle de nous. Tu paries de lui et d'elle. Nous parlons souvent (often) de vous. Je defends mon honneur moi-meme. L'aimant attire le fer h soi. Nous nous moquons (we mock at) d'eux. Ah ! vous vous moquez de nous ! THEME 24. 1. My brother and I (we) have heard the noise. 2. Who will have the ball, thou or he ? 3. Who has broken the stick ? 4. Not I ! 5. You and he, (you) were not attentive. 6. She and Emily have gone out. 7. Who has gone out with them ? 8. Come with me. 9. Come to our house (c^es; wows) . 10. Who speaks of me ? 11. I speak of you. 12. You speak of her and of her sister. 13. For whom is the medicine? 14. It (elle) is for yourself. 15. Does she live with you ? 16. She lives with us. 17. He is older than I. 18. I think of (a) you. 19. You do not think of me. 20. Youal\vays'* think of yourself. 21. One must not (il ne faut pas) always think of one's self. 22. Have you brought the book yourself? 23. Yes, I myself. 24. Does she play with us ? 25. She plays with them (m.) 26. Is it himself? 27. Yes, it is him- self. 28. It is I ; it is not he. CONVERSATION. Qui a difcela ? Moi. — Lui. — Elle. Quivientla? C 'est nous. Pensez-vous h, vos amis ? Je pense souvent a eux. * In French, the adverb usually follows the verb. DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 113 Est-elle tombee ? Pour qui sont ces bottes ? A qui pensez-vous ? De qui parle-t-on ? Qui a apport^ cette corbeille ? Qui a fait cela ? Est-elle arrivee seule ? Qui a ecrit (written) cette lettre ? Que fait raimant ? Qui a battu cet enfant ? Qui est venu avec toi ? Ou demeure-t-il ? Est-ce vous qui avez perdu cet argent ? Heureusement non ! mais sans moi elle serait tombee. EUes sont pour moi. Je pense a vous et a votre mere. On parle d'eux, — d'elles. Ma soeur elle-meme. Ni lui, ni elle, ni nous, ni eux. Non, elle est arrivee avec moi. Mon pere lui-meme. H attire le fer h. soi. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est Leopold. Mon amie Jules. II demeure chez son oncle. Non, ce n'est pas moi, c'est ma cousine Emilie. READING LESSON. LE ROSIER. (The rose-hush.) " Qui veut (toill) me donner un petit arbre pour mon jardin ?" disait Frederic a ses freres et h sa soeur. Leur pere leur (them) avait donne a chacun un petit coin de terra a planter. " Ce n'est pas moi ! " dit Auguste. — " Ni moi ! " s'^cria Louis. — " Ce sera moi ! " dit la bonne Charlotte ; " de quelle espece le (^0 veux-tu?" "Je voudrais (^I should like) avoir un rosier," repondit Fre- deric ; ** le-mien est tout jauni." " C'est bon," repliqua Charlotte. Puis elle prit (then she took) une pelle et alia (went) le retirer de terre. " Que vois-je (what do Isee)V' dit Frederic, " tu n'en as toi- meme que (only) deux, et encore (besides) il y en a un si petit I Du moins ne me donne pas le plus grand." 114 XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME LEgON. *' Non, non ! " s'ecria sa soeur, " il pourrait encore (could again) se secher ; je puis jouir du plaisir de le voir fleurir dans ton jardin." (To he continued.) Chaciin, e, each. puis, then. un petit coin de terre, a corner of land, la pelle, the spade. ni moi, nor I either. retirer, to take out. s'^crier, to call out, to cry. du mffins, at least. I'espece, f. the sort, kind. secher, to dry. le mien, mine, tout, quite. se se'cher, to get dry, to wither* jauni, e, yellow, withered. jepuis, I can (from pouvoir). r€pliquer, to reply. jouir, to enjoy, voir, to see. XXY. YINGT-CINQUIEME LE9ON, CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. These are/e (T),nous (we), tu (thou), vous (you), il (he), plu. Us (they, m.), elle (she), plu. elles (they, f.).* Unlike the disjunctive personal pronouns, these, except vous and nous, vary to express different cases. Je has me when used either as the direct or indirect object of the verb : tu has te m the same cases. Of him, of her, of them, of it (m. or f.), are each represented by the pronoun en, generally referring to things : to him, to her, each by lui: to them (m. or f.), by leur. The objective case (direct object) of il, is le (him), and of elle, is la, (her): les (them) is the obj. plu. of both genders. POSITION OF CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. General Rule. Conjunctive pronouns precede the verb except in the Imperative affirmative. In the interrogative form the subject comes after the verb. * For on, of which se is used as the object and soi as the disjunctive, see Pai't ii. li. XII. CONJUNCTIVE PEESONAL PEONOUNS. 115 SPECIAL RULES. A. WITH ONE PRONOUN. 1. The nominative cases je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, Us, or elles, usually precede the verb of which they are the subject : in an inter- rogative sentence, however, they are placed immediately after the verb. Ex. : — Je pense, I think. nous parlons, we speak. tu esperes, thou hopest. vous jouez, you play. ■Interrogative: Finis-tu, dost thou finish ? Vient-elle, does she come ? 2. The direct and indirect objects are placed immediately before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one. Ex. : — Tu me dis, you tell me. Je vous donne, I give you. Elle m'a r^pondu, she has answered me. Charles nous a dit, Charles has told us. 3. If the sentence is negative, ne is put directly after the subject, before the governed pronoun, as : Je ne vous donne pas, I do not give you. Vou^ ne les avez pas vus, you have not seen them. Elle ne m'a pas repondu, she has not answered me. Charles ne nous avail pas dit, Charles had not told us. 4. In the interrogative form, the object begins the sentence, then follows the verb with its subject. If the question is a negative one, ne begins the sentence : Me connaissez-vous, do you know me ? Me bldme-t-il, does he blame me ? Les vois-tu, do you see them ? Vous a-t-il repondu, has he answered you ? Ne vous a-t-il pas repondu, has he not answered you ? 6. When the verb is in the Imperative affirmative, the governed pronouns are put after it, in French as in English. In this case me 116 XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME LEgON. and te are changed into moi and toi for the du-ect and indirect objects. Ex. : — Donnez-moi, give me. Apportez-lui, bring (to) him. Mangez-les, eat them. Parlez-leur, speak to them. 6. But when the Imperative is negative, the governed pronoun precedes the verb. Ex. : — Ne me donnezpas, do not give me. Ne lui apportez pas, do not bring him. Ne les mangez pas, do not eat them. Ne leur parlez pas, do not speak to them. B. WITH TWO PRONOUNS. 1. When a verb, which is not in the Imperative affirmative, governs two pronouns, they are both placed immediately before the verb, so that the indirect object comes first, and the direct follows. Ex.: — Je te le donne, I give it to thee (you). Vous Vapporte-t-elle, does she bring it to you ? Ne nous Vapportera-t-il pas, will he not bring it to us 1 On vous le dira, they will tell (it) you. On ne vous le dira pas, they will not tell (it to) you. 2. An exception to the foregoing rule are the two indirect objects, lui (to him, to her), and leur (to them), which always follow the other governed pronoun. Ex.: — Je le lui donne, I give it to him or her. Je ne le lui donne pas, I do not give it him. La lui donne-t-dle, does she give it him 1 La leur donnera-t-il, will he give it to them? Je ne la leur ai pas donn€, I have not given it to them. Ne le lui donnez pas, do not give it him. Pourquoi ne la leur pretez-vous pas, why do you not lend it to them ? 3. Of two personal pronouns governed by the Imperative affirma- tive the indirect object always stands last : Donnez-le-moi, give it me. Apportez-les-lui (leur), bring them to him (to them). 4. If the Imperative is negative, both of them precede the verb CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 117 according to § 6, and lui and leur follow the direct object, according toB, §2. Ex. : — Ne me le donnez pas, do not give it me. Ne la lui apportez pas, do not bring it to him. Ne les leur envoyez pas, do not send them to them. \ VOCABULARY. •» Pardonner (k),* to paxdon. tailler, to cut, mend. prefer (a), to lend. louer, to praise; to let. r^compenser, to reward. accompagner, to accompany. corriger, to correct. je promets, I promise. €couter, to listen to. Vhistoire,/. history; la v&it€, the truth. volontiers, willingly. READING EXERCISE 25. Je vous entends. II me pardonnera. Elle m'a pardonne. Al- fred m'a prete un livre amusant. Pretez-moi votre livre. Je vous le preterai. II me le donne. Tu me Fas donne. Elle me les don- nerait, si elle les avait encore. Vous a-t-il pardonne ? Lui as-tu dit (told) cela ? Je le lui ai dit. Leur a-t-on repondu ? Appelez ces ecoliers. Je les recompenserai ; je leur donnerai de belles images. Tu les leur donneras demain. Ne te loue pas toi-meme. On ne se loue pas soi-meme. Elle ne vous ecoute pas. Elle ne m'a pas ecout^. Nous ecoutera-t-il ? Vous ne me dites pas la verite. Je vous la dis. Cette plume est trop molle ; voulez-vous avoir la bonte (kindness) de me la tailler ? Je vous la taillerai vo- lontiers. THEME 25. 1. I praise thee. 2. Thou praisest me. 3. Do you play? 4. Do you hear? 5. Do you hear me ? 6. I hear you. 7. I do not sell my house. 8. I do not sell it. 9. Do you sell your horses ? 10. I do not sell them. 11. We hear thee. 12. I call him. 13. Will you accompany me? 14. My father will accompany you. * This mark (a) denotes that the verb after which it is placed takes an indirect personal object. 118 XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME LEgON. 15. Have you mended my pen? 16. I have mended it. 17. Lend me a pencil. 18. Lend him a pen. 19. Do not give him my book. 20. Do not give it him. 21. I promise you. 22. I promise it [to] you. 23. Tell {dites-) him (to him). 24. Tell them. 25. Tell it him. 26. Do not tell it [to] them. 27. I should give you some money, if you were more industrious. 28. Has she given him the gloves? 29. She has given them to him. 30. She has not given them to him; she has given them to his brother. 31. Your translation is badly done (malfaite) ; correct it (^fem.). 32. Pardon (me) my mistakes. 33. Have you cor- rected them ? 34. Yes, I have (corrected them) . CONVERSATION. M'entendez-vous ? Oui, je vous entends. Ne m'entendez-vous pas ? Je ne vous ai pas antendu. Me pardonnerez-vous ? Je ne vous pardonnerai pas. De qui avez-vous refu ce livre C'est Alfred qui me I'a prete. amusant ? Youlez-vous preter ce livre k Je le lui preterai volontiers. ma soeur ? Qui veut cette plume ? Donnez-la-moi, s'il vous plait (if you please). Les aimez-vous ? Oui, je les aime beaucoup. Dites-vous la verite ? Je la dis toujours. Qui vous accompagnera ? Mon cousin m'aceompagnera jus- qu'a (as far as) Bruxelles. Vous a-t-on raconte (told) une Oui, notre grand'mere nous a ra- histoire ? conte une tres-belle histoire. EEADING LESS05?. SUITE DU RO SIER. Frederic, transportc do joie, emporta le rosier; et Charlotte le suivit plus joyeuse encore que lui. Le jardinier avait vu le trait d'amitic de la petite fiUe. II alia chercher (he went for) un beau sureau d'Espagne. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 119 ** Voulez-vous que je mette (^piit) ceci a la place de votre rosier? " demanda-t-il h Charlotte. ** Si vous n'en avez pas besoin." " Non," r<^pondit-il, *' je n'en ai pas besoin." — II le planta. Le mois de Mai suivant, le rosier de Frederic porta les plus belles roses, et tous les matins, Charlotte recevait un bouton h. moitie ou- vert, pour le mettre dans ses cheveux. Le sureau prit (took) racine aussi et devint (hecame) bient6t si grand et si epais que Charlotte y trouva de Fombrage dans la grande chaleur du jour. Transports, enraptured. emporter, to carry off. le suivit, followed him. joyeux, joyful. le trait, the trait. I'amHiS, friendship. un sureau d'Espagne, a lilac-tree, ceci, this. demander, to ask. un bouton, a bud. la moiti€, half. ouvert, open, opened. la racine, the root. hlentot, soon. I'omhrage, the shade. la chaleur, the heat. XXYI. YINGT-SIXIEME LE9ON DExMONSTRATiVE PRONOUNS. . These are : masculine. feminine. Celui, celle, that. pi. ceux, ceJles, those. cdui-ci, celle-ci, this, the lattef. {)1. ceux-ci, celles-ci, these. cdui-la. celle-la, that (one), the former. pi. ceux-la. celles-la, those. 2. The pronouns he, she, they, preceding a relative, must be translated by celui, celle, ceux, celles. Ex. : celui qui, he who ; celle qui, she who ; ceux qui, celles qui, they who. 120 XXVI. VINGT-SIXIEME LEgON. 3. Celui, ceTle, ceux, celles, are used with the preposition de.voc Btead of the English possessive case, when the governing noun is not expressed. Ex. : mon chapeau et celui de monfrere, my hat and my brother's ; ma plume et celle de ma soeur, my pen and my sister's. Eemark. Cdui, celle, ^c, are used only before a relative or the prepo- sition de; in all other cases celui-ci, celle-ci, cdui-la, celle-la, Sfc, must be used. Ex. : J^ai cdui-ci, je n'ai pas cdui-la, I have this one, I have not that one. 4. Ce, which we have seen as an adjective, is also a pronoim. It is then invariable, meaning this, that, it. — It is used before the relative, as : ce qui (subj.), ce que (obj,), that which (what) ; ce dont, that of which. For the use of ce or il before the verb to be, see Kule after the vocabulary of Lesson xv. See also Lesson xxiv. 3. 5. The compounds of ce, ceci, this, and cela, that, are used abso- lutely, without reference to any particular noun. Ex. : Je ne veux pas ceci, je veux cela. I do not want this, I want that. Ce gueje dis, what I say. Que dites-vous de cela, what do you say of that ? Est-ce la voire plume, is this your pen 1 Cest ma plume, that is my pen. Sont-ce la vos gants, are these your gloves ? Ce sont mes gants, these are my gloves. 6. In place of de and a with ce, ceci, cela, ceux-ci, and ceux-la, two other conjunctive pronouns are used, viz. : en and y. En ia rendered in English by some, of it, of them, about it, about them, etc. T corresponds to the English to it, to them, in it, in them, there, therein, etc. Ex. : — Void du jamhon : en voulez-vous 9 Here is ham, will you have some 1 J'eti prendrai un petit morceau. I shall take a little piece of it. Votre pere est-il aujardin ? Qui, il y est. Is your father in the garden ? Yes, he is there. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 121 Ty vais aussi, I am going there also. Donnez-m'en — donnez-lui-en. Give me some — give him some. Y penses-tu, do you think of that 1 Je lui en ai donne, I have given him some of them (it). VOCABULARY. Le porte-feinlle, the pocket-book. la recompense, the reward. lapeur, fear. b€nir, to bless. Vdme, the soul. perse'cuter, to persecute. la noblesse, nobility. souhaiter, to wish. le corps, the body. enrichir, to enrich. commode, comfortable. V agriculture, f. agriculture. le conqu&ant, the conqueror. egalement, equally. jaune, yellow. tout de suite, directly. joU, e, nice, pretty. promet, promises. le commerce, the commerce. READING EXERCISE 26. Yoici mon porte-feuille et celui de mon pere. Yoici mes gants et ceux de ma soeur. Youlez-vous ceux-ci ou ceux-la? Celui qui remplit ses devoirs est un honnete homme. Youlez-vous ceci ou cela ? Ceux qui sont contents, sent toujours heureux. Heureux ce- lui qui trouve un vrai ami ! Je prefere la noblesse de I'ame h. celle de la naissance {birth). On croit (^believes) ce qu'on espere. Ce que vous dites me fait pour. Qui vient la ? C'est moi. — Ce sont eux. Ce qui est beau n'est pas toujours utile. Ne parlez pas de ce qui ne vous regarde (concern) pas. Alexandre-le-Grand et Jules Cesar furent de grands conquerants; celui-la mourut dans-sa jeunesse, celui-ci fut assassine (murdered). THEME 26. 1. Here is your hat and your brother's. 2. I shall sell my house and my uncle's. 3. We speak of these, you speak of those. 4: Give me that one. 5. This is my pen. 6. These (ce) arc your pen- cils. 7. Is this the garden of your aunt? 8. Are these the shoes 122 XXVII. VINGT-SEPTIEME LEgON. of your sister? 9. No, these are the shoes of my cousin Eliza. 10. This ink (cette encre-ci) is blacker than that, 11. These gloves are white, those are yellow. 12. I prefer the beauty of the soul to that (y.) of the body. 13. Agriculture and commerce are equally use- ful to man; the former nourishes us, the latter enriches us. 14. My mother prefers this house to that ; this is smaller, but that is more comfortable. 15. Have you (any) butter ? 16. Yes, I have some. 17. Give me some. 18. Here is black cloth. 19. I shall take ten yards of it {fen prendrai . . .). 20. Were you at the theatre yesterday? 21. Yes, I was there. 22. Is your master in that room? 23. Yes, he is there. XXYII. VINGT-SEPTIEME LE9ON. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. They are : 1. lequel f. laquelle, which (of) ? 2. qui, who? que and quoi, what ? 1. Lequel is used either without a noun, or is at least separated from it by de ; but it agrees with it in gender and number. When the pronoun which is used interrogatively, it is always expressed by lequel^ laquelle, etc., as: — Void deux appartements, leqiid choisirez-vous ? Here are two apartments, which will you choose ? Une de ses sanirs est marie'e. Laquelle est-ce ? One of his sisters is married. Which is it ? Laquelle de vos ecolieres est malade ? Which of your pupils is ill ? ■ The same contractions take place in the article le compounded with qud, as when used by itself: thus, by contraction with the prepositions a and de, arc formed auquel, auxquels, auxquelles, duquel, desquelsf and desquelles. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 123 2. The interrogative pronoun quC^ is only used of persons. Ex.: — Qui est la, who is there? A qui-pretez-vous cela, to whom do you lend this ? Qui clierchez-vous, whom are you looking for? Pour, qui est ce crayon, for whom is this pencil ? 3. Whose, when used interrogatively, must be rendered in French by a qui. Ex. : — Whose book is this ? a qui est ce livre ? 4. Que and quoi are neuter.''^ Quoi, what, is disjunctive, and used either by itself or after a preposition, as : — ' De quoi parlez-vous, of what are you speaking ? Sur quoi, upon what ? Avec quoi, with what ? 5. Que, what, is conjunctive, and is only used before verbs : it never follows a preposition. Ex. : — Que voulez-vous, what do you wish or want ? Que dit-on, what do people say ? Que demande-t-il, what does he ask ? VOCABULARY. Mari€, e, married. le cahier, the copy-book. lev^, got up, risen. la niece, the niece. Jrapper, to strike, to beat. le porte-plume, the penholder. KGADING EXERCISE 27. Lequel de vos fils est malade ? Laquelle de vos soeurs est ma- riee ? Lesquels de vos ^coliers n'ont pas fait leurs themes ? Yoici plusieurs canifs : lequel voulez-vous acheter ? Qui est arrive ? Qui a trouve ma bourse ? De qui avez-vous parle ? A qui est la gram- maire que vous avez k la main ? Que souhaitez-vous, Monsieur ? Qu'avez-vous port4 h la poste ? Quoi ! vous etes dejk leve ! A quoi pensez-vous done ? Auquel de ces ecoliers avez-vous promis une recompense ? * The neuter gender is recognized as existing in French only by very few gram- marians. But que and quoi, the pronoun ce, and sometimes le, are certainly neither masculine nor feminine. 124 XXVII. VINGT-SEPTIEME LEgON. THEME 27. 1. Which of your horses have you sold? 2. Which of these col- ors is the finest? 3. Which of my copy-books will you have? 4. To 'which of your nieces do you write {ecrivez-vous) a letter ? 5. Wliich of your pupils are the most diligent ? 6. Here are several pictures, which will you choose? 7. Who is at (a) the door? 8. Whom do you love most {le mieux) ? 9. From whom have you received this ring? 10. To whom do you speak? 11. To whom will you give this nice pen-holder? 12. What do you carry under your arm {bras) 'I 13. With what has he beaten the dog? 14. What ! ^re you still {encore) in bed (au lit) ? CONVERSATION. Lequel de ces deux porte-feuil- les est a vous ? Laquelle de ces deux robes preferez-vous ? Est-ce Ik votre bague ? SontKje Ih, vos gants ? Avez-vous re9u ma lettre ? Le commerce est-il utile aux bommes ? Quelle maison vendez-vous ? A qui donnerez-vous ce canif ? Voici du jambon et du pain, en voulez-vous ? Avez-vouz apporte les verres ? Madame votre mere est-elle a la maison {or chez elle) ? Celui que vous avez a la main. Je prefere celle-ci h celle-la. Oui, M — , c'est ma bague d'or. Non, M — , ce ne sont pas mes gants, ce sont ceux de ma cou- sine. Je n'ai re^u ni la v6tre {yours) ni celle de votre pere. Oui, tres-utile ; il les enrichit. J'ai deux maisons a vendre, celle de mon oncle et celle de mon grand-pere. Je le donnerai a Guillaume. Merci, nous en avons deja. Non, M — , je n'y ai pas pensd. Oui, M — , elle y est. POSSESSIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 125 XXYIII. YINGT-HUITIEME LE9ON, POSSESSIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 1. The possessive pronouns : are formed from the possessive adjec- lives mon, ton , son, etc. They are : — SING PLUR. Masc. Fern. Masc. Fern. le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine. le tien, la ticnne. les tiens, les tiennes, thine. le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes. Us, hers, its, le notre, la notre, les notres, ours. le votre, la votre. les votres, yours. le leur, la lour. les leurs, theirs. These are not, as in English, of the same gender as the possessor. They agree in gender and number with the object possessed. Ex. : — Cette dame a mon crayon et le sien. That lady has mv pencil and hers. Avez-vous ma montre ou la votre ? Have you my watch or yours ? J^ai la mienne, I have mine. Ma sceur a la sienne, my sister has hers. 2. The interrogative pronouns qui, quoi, and lequel, serve at the same time as relative pronouns, when they have a reference to some other noun or pronoun preceding. 3. As a relative qui is a subject and que the direct object. Qui and que are used for persons and things of both genders and num- bers. Ex. : — Un enfant qui pleure, a child that cries. Laporte qui est ouverte, the door which is open. Le voyageur que fai quitt^, the traveller whom I have left. Le chapeauquej'ai achet€, the hat (which) I have bought. Les maisons que vous avez vues, the houses (which) you have seen. The relative que, whom, which, or that, is sometimes understood in Eng- lish, but it must always be expressed in French. 126 XXVIII. VINGT-HUITIEME LEgON. 4. Dont, whose, of which, is used for persons and things of both genders and numbers ; but de qui, from whom or of whom, which is sometimes required instead of dont, has only reference to persons. Remark. When dont signifies whose the noun "which it limits must be preceded by the article ; if the noun is the object of a verb it must come after that verb, and not immediately after dont as in English. Ex. : — Je connais lafemme dont vous avez requ la lettre. I know the woman whose letter you have received. Je connais lafemme de qui vous avezregu la lettre. I know the woman from whom you have received the letter. L'homme — /es hommes dont vous parlez. The man — the men of whom you speak. La lettre — les Itttres dont vous parlez. The letter — the letters of which you speak. 5. After prepositions, qui refers to persons, lequel, to things and animals. Ex. : — Le niarchand avec quifai voyage. The merchant with whom I travelled. But : L'arhre sur lequel (not sur qui) je montai. The tree upon which I climbed. La clef avec laquelle on ouvrit la porte. The key with which they opened the door. Voila Vhoinme a quifai pret€ mon livre. Tliere is the man to whom I have lent my book. C'est le chien auquel vous avez donne a manger. That is the dog to which you gave to eat. 6. Lequel, laquelle, etc., must also be used instead of qui in the Nominative, when the relative is separated from its noun by another Bubstantive to which it might seem to relate. Ex. : — La tante de mon ami laquelle demeure a Paris. My friend's aunt who lives at Paris. (qui demeure a Paris might relate to man ami.) 7. That which, and what, meaning the thing which, are ex- POSSESSIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 127 pressed by ce qui for the Nominative, and ce que for the Objective. All that'll rendered : Nom. tout ce qui, Obj. tout ce que. Ex. : — What renders men miserable, is cupidity. Ce qui rend les hommes mis^rables, c'est la cupidity. I like all that is fine, faime tout ce qui est beau. Do what I tell yoxi,fait€s ce quej'e vous dis. VOCABULARY. L'agr^ment, m. the comfort, inviter, to invite. pleasure. chdtier, to chastise. le tigre, the tiger. demeurer, to live. le talent, the talent. vanter, to praise. I'amiral, the admiral. fertiliser, to fertilize. la victoire, the victory. d^chirer, to tear. le propri€taire, the owner. gagner, to win, gain. les moeurs, f. the manners. s'appelle, is called. le repas, the meal, tout, adv. quite. cdebre, celebrated. trop, adv. too much. aussi, as. maintenant, — a pr€sent, now. n€gliger, to neglect. READING EXERCISE 28. Men fr^re est aussi grand que le tien. Ma soeur est du mSme Hge que la v6tre. Vos roses sent tres-belles, mais elles sent moins belles que les miennes. Nos chiens sent aussi fideles que les leurs. Chaque plante a sa propriete {peculiarity) ; la violette a la sienne, les roses ont les leurs. Le petit gar9on dont le pere est mort, de- meure maintenant chez nous. Les moours des anciens peuples ^taient tres-differentes des ndtres. La ville a ses agrements, et la campagne a les siens. Le marchand que vous avez vu hier chez moi, et chez qui demeure mon ami E.. , est parti pour Paris. THEME 28. 1. Your house is finer than mine, but my garden is finer than yours. 2. I have read (lu') your letter and his. 8. Do you prefer your knife to mine? 4. Yes, I prefer mine to yours. 6. Which bonnet is thine ? 6. Your rooms are more spacious {grandes) than 128 XXVIII. VINGT-HUITIEME LEgON. ours, but ours are higher. 7. I think (trouve) your garden very small. 8. I beg your pardon (/e vous demande pardon) , Sir, it is not smaller than yoTirs; it is quite as {aussi) large as that of my neigh- bor. 9. Where is your pen and where is mine ? 10. Which one? ,11. That which I have made {taillee) this morning. 12. The man of whom you are speaking, is dead (rnort). 13. Is this the book (which) you have lost ? 14. No, it was a French book. 15. You speak of the lady whose husband {le mari) has been so ill. 16. The horse to which you have given some drink {a ooire) is mine. 17. The window upon which you lean {vous vous appuyez) is broken. CONVERSATION. Trouvez-vous mon jardin plus grand que le votre ? Est-il aussi plus petit que celui de votre tante ? Comment s'appelle cet amiral qui a remporte la victoire de Trafalgar? Que fait le tigre ? Ta soeur est-elle plus agee que la mienne ? Quel age a-t-elle done ? Avec quoi le voleur a-t-il ouvert (opened) la porte ? Comment s'appelle le fleuve dont les eaux fertilisent I'Egypte? Avez-vous reellement une bonne intention ? Au contraire, je le trouve plus pe- tit que le mien. Non, le sien est moins grand. Le nom de ce celebre amural an- glais est Nelson. n dechire la main qui le chatie. EUe est plus jeune que la votre. EUe a pnze ans et demi. II I'a ouverte avec une fausse clef. Ce fleuve s'appelle le Nil. Je vous assure que mon intention est aussi bonne que la votre. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 129 XXIX. YINGT-NEUYIEME LE9ON, INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 1. These are used by themselves, without a noun. They are : — On or Von, one, they, people. Chacun, f. chacune, each, every-one. • Aucun, f. aucune (with ne), uone, not one. Qudqu'un, f. quelqu'une, some one, somebody, anybody, pi. quelquee- uns, f. quelques-unes, some. Personne, (with ne), nobody. L'un, e — I' autre, the one — the other, pi. les iins (unes) — les metres, the ones — the others. L*un (I'une) et I'autre, both. L'un (I'une) on I'autre, either. Ni l'un (I'une) ni I'autre, neither. L'un (I'une) I'autre, — pi. les uns (les unes) les autres, each other, one another. Un autre, f. une autre, another. D'autres, pi. others, other people. Autrui, others, another. Td, f. telle, many a man. Plusieurs, several. Laplupart, most, followed by de with the def. art., as : Laplupart des kommes, most men. Qmconque, whoever. Tout, f. toute, all, everything, pi. tons, toutes, all. Qudque chose, f. something, anything : when followed by de and an adj. it is masc. Rien (with ne), nothing. Le, la mime, the same. 2. L^on is used for euphony instead of on after et, ou, ou, si, unless the next word begins with 1} also after que if the next word begins with Si c OT q. Ex. : si Von voit, if one sees ; et Von dit, and they say. But : si on le voit, not si Von le voit. L'on is also sometimes used after mais, ni, qui, and other vowel sounds. 8 130 XXIX. VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON. 3. Several of the indefinite adjectives have been enumerated hero again among the indefinite pronouns, because they may be used as such, viz. : aucun, plusieurs, tout, and le mhne. Ex. : — Combien de plumes avez-vous, how many pens have you 1 Je n'en ai auctine, I have none. J'en ai plusieurs, I have several. Avez-vous appel€ tons les enfants, have you called all the children 1 Oui, je les ai appd€s tons, yes, I have called them all. 4. When personne and rien are used by themselves, they do not take ne, but they retain their negative meaning, as : Qui avejz-vous rencontre? Personne. Whom have you met ? Nobody. VOCABULARY. Le defaid, the fault. ' chanter, to sing. le ve)-be, the verb. bldmer, to blame. le camarade, the comrade. rire, to laugh. la confiance, the confidence. arriver, to arrive. venu, come (part. p.). gdler, to spoil. me'chant, e, naughty. secourir, to assist. jaloux, -se, jealous. nuire, to hurt, injure. r^gulier, -ere, regular. je veux, I will. rencontrer, to meet. pourri, e, rotten. READING EXERCISE 29. On chante, on joue et Ton danse. Tout le monde vent (wishes) 6tre heureux. Chacun veut avoir raison. L'un etait riche, I'autre etait pauvre ; l'un et I'autre etaient malheureux. Les unes dan- saient, les autres jouaient. Ne blamez pas les travaux d'autrui. Avez-vous vu quelqu'un? Je n'ai vu personne. Nous avons quelque chose de meilleur. Tel rit aujourd'hui qui ne rira plus de- main. Chacun a ses defauts. Tout le monde (everybody) a son faible (weakness). La plupart de ces pommes sont pourries. Ne savez-vous (^do you know) rion de nouveau? Nous ne savons (kriow) rien. Nous n'avons rencontre personne. Quiconque salira ses cahiers, sera puni. Donnez-moi quelquos-unes de vos belles poires. Quelques-uns de mes camai-ades sont malades. INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 131 THEME 29. 1. One is happy when one is contented. 2. They speak of peace {dela 'paix), 3. They say so (Ze). 4. Everybody likes him. 5. Eveiy one thinks of himself (a so^) . 6. Everybody has his [own] faults. 7. Somebody has told {dii) it to me. 8. Those apples are fine, I will take some. 9. Whoever knows {corv- nait) this man, has little (joew de) confidence in him. 10. No- body knows that woman. 11. Henry thinks of {a) nobody. 12. (The) one arrives, the other sets out (^part ). 13. These two girls love one another. 14. I do not know them all, but I know several of them (en). 15. Most verbs are regular. 16. The princes were jealous of one another. 17. Will you have anything ? 18. I thank you, I will have (^je ne veux) nothing. 19. These people (gens) speak ill (mal) of one another (i. e. the one of the other). CONVERSATION. Que fait-on \k ? Qui a dit cela ? Qui veut ce papier ? Vos deux neveux sont-ils riches ? As-tu vu quolqu'un dans ce jardin ? Qu'y a-t-il de nouveau ? Ou sont vos deux fils ? Voulez-vous quel que chose ? Avez-vous retrouve les lettres perdues ? Avec qui etes-vous venu ? Qui est la ? Avez-vous toutes les boites ? On joue et Ton danse. Tout le monde le dit. Chacun le veut. L'un est riche, I'autre est pauvre. Non, je n y ai vu personne. Je ne sais (know) rien du tout (at all). lis sont partis tons les deux. (Us sont partis Fun et I'autre.) Non, merci ; je ne veux rien. J 'en ai retrouve quelqucs-unes ; la plupart sont perdues. Je ne suis venu avec personne. Personne. Je n'en ai aucune. 132 XXIX. VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON. Comment etaient les princes ? Avez-vous d'autres plumes ? Avez-vous rencontre quel- qu'un ? lis etaient jaloux Fun de fautre (or les uns des autres.) Non, ce sont encore les memes. Je n'ai rencontre personne. BEADING LESSON. PUISSANCE DE LA CONCORDE. Un homme qui avait douze fils, les fit (had them) rassembler au- tour de son lit de mort, et comme (as) ils attendaien't sa derniero benediction, il leur montra un faisceau de fleches et ordonna a cha- cun d'essayer de les rompre ainsi liees, toutes a la fois. Aucun d'eux ne put (could) y parvenir. II leur dit ensuite de faire le memo essai, en les prenant (hy taking them) I'une apres I'autre. Ils les rompirent de cette maniere avec facilite. Le pere les rendit alors attentifs a cet embleme du pouvoir de la concorde. *' Ob- servez, mes enfants," leur dit-il, " qu'aussi longtemps que vous resterez unis, personne ne pourra (will he able) vous vaincre." a la fois, at once. parvenir, to succeed. Le pouvoir, the power, might. rassembler, to assemble. autour de, round, about. le lit de mort, the death-bed. la benediction, the blessing. un faisceau, a bundle. lafleche, the arrow. rompre, to break. pinsi lie, thus bound together. ensuite, at length, finally. I'essai, the attempt. la facility, (the) easiness. alors, then. V embleme, the emblem. unir, to unite. vaincre, to conquer, vanquish. PASSIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. 133 XXX. TRENTIEME LE9ON. PASSIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. 1. Passive verbs are formed, in French as in English, by joining the Participle past of an active verb to the auxiliary verb etre, to be ; for instance, of the verb donner, the passive voice is etre donne, to be given ; of Jinir : etre jini, to be finished, etc. The Participle past varies according to the gender and number of the noun or pro- noun which stands as the nominative to the verb. CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. INFINITIVE. Etre hue, to be praised. INDICATIVE. PRESENT TENSE. Je suis loue or louee, / am praised, tu es loue or louee, thou art praised. il est loue, he is praised. elle est louee, she is praised. nous sommes loues or louees, we are praised. vous etes loues or louees, you are praised. ils sont loues, ") elles sont louees, I ^% «^^ P^«^'^^- IMPERFECT. J*^tais loue or louee, / was praised, etc. PRETERITE. Je fus loue or louee, / was praised, etc. FUTURE. Je serai loue or louc'e, / shall be praised, etc. 134 CONDITIONAL. Je serais loue or louee, 1 should be praised, etc. IMPERATIVE. Sois lou^ or lou^e, be praised. soyons loues or louees, let us be praised. soyez loues or louees, be praised. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je sois loue or louee, that / (may) be praised, etc. IMPERFECT. Que je fusse lou^ or louee, that I (might) be praised, etc. PARTICIPLE. Etant \ovl4 or louee, being praised. COMPOUND TENSES. INFINITIVE. Avoir ^te lou^, e, to have been praised. ^^^ INDICATIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. J'ai 4t4 lou^, e, I have been praised, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. J*avais 4t4 loue, e, I had been praised, etc. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. J'eus ete loue, e, / had been praised, etc. COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. J'aurai 4t4 loue, e, I shall have been praised, etc. CONDITIONAL. J'aurais ete lou^, e, J'eusse ete ;e lou^, e, } i loue e \ ^ should or I would have been praised, etc. PASSIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. 135 SUBJUNCTIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que j'aie ete loue, e, that I (may) have been praised, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que j'eusse ete loue, e, that I (might) have been praised. PARTICIPLE. Ayant ete loue, e, having been praised. 2. The English preposition h/, with the passive voice, is to be ren- dered by de, when the verb denotes a, sentiment or an inward act of soul, and hy par, when it expresses an outward action. Ex.: He is esteemed by everybody, // est estime de tout le monde ; the city of Troy was taken by the Greeks, La ville de Troie fut prise par les Grecs. NEUTER VERBS. 8. There are about six hundred neuter verbs in French, of which about five hundred and fifty are conjugated with avoir in the com- pound tenses. Of the remainder, some take either etre or avoir, according as the idea expressed is condition or state, or action. 4. The following neuter verbs invariably require etre : Aller, to go. venir, to come. arriver, to arrive, to happen. devenir, to become. choir, to fall (rarely used). intervenir, to intervene. d€c€d€r, to decease. parvenir, to succeed. €clore, to hatch. provenir, to arise. mourir, to die. revenir, to come back. naitre, to be bom. survenir, to happen. '• tomber, to fall. » Examples: COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Je suis arrive or arrivee, Z have (am) arrived. tu es arriv^ or arrivee, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. J'etais arrive or arrivee, / had arrived, etc. 136 XXX. TRENTIEME LEgON. COMPOUND OP THE FUTURE. Je serai arrive or arrivee, I shall have arrived, etc. CONDITIONAL. Je serais arrive or arrive'e, I should have arrived, etc. 5. Accourir, cesser, croitre, dechoir, dege'nerer, descendre, disparaitre, echapper, ech^r, empirer, entrer, grandir, monter, partir, passer, perir, tester, sortir, vieillir, and a few others, are conjugated with avoir when it is the action or fact, with etre when it is the state or condition expressed by the verb, which is uppermost in the mind. Ex. : La riviere a mont€ rapidement, the river has risen rapidly. II est mont^, he has (is) gone up. VOCABULARY. La bataille, the battle. offenser, to offend. la hi, law. envoyer, to send. le voleur, the thief. mordre, to bite. le voyageur, the traveller. ' blesser, to wound. lejlatteur, the flatterer. d^molir, to demolish. la langue, the language. rebdtir, to rebuild. la cour, the court. maltraiter, to treat ill, abuse. le chemin, the road. enlever, to take away. vertueux, -se, virtuous. sauver, to save. inconnu, unknown. attaquer, to attack. Tester, to remain. assassin^, murdered. tuer, to kill. parce que, because. enrag€f mad. EEADING EXERCISE 80. Men fils Theodore est aim4 et loue de ses maitres, parce qu'il est appliqu^ et attentif. Gustavo Adolphe, roi de Suede, fut tue h. la bataille de Lutzen, a I'age de trente-sept ans. Si vous 6tes ver- tueux, vous serez aimes et estimes de tout le monde. Ayez soin que les lois soient ponctuellement observees. Quiconque les trans- gresse, sera puni. Le soldat qui a et^ blesse, est mort. La mai- son qui a ete demolie, a ete rebatie. Ce pauvre chien est bien maltraite par son maitre. Hier je fus attaque par un voleur. Mon argent, ma montre, tout me fut enleve. Deux des voyageurs sont restes en chemin ; ils ne sont pas encore arrives. PASSIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. i3r THEME 30. 1. I am loved by my parents. 2. Mr. Bell is esteemed by everybody. 3. The French language is spoken at all the courts of Europe. 4. Charles was bitten by a mad dog. 5. That dog must {doit) be killed. 6. This ring was given me by my gi-andfather. 7. By whom was this letter written (Jcrite) ? 8. It was written by a little boy. 9. Frederic has been punished by his teacher. 10. Have you been invited to the ball? 11. No, sir, I have not been invited. 12. I shall perhaps (^peut-etre) be invited to-morrow. 13. This letter must be sent to the post-office. 14. Flatterers are not esteemed. 15. The child has not been saved. 16. It would have been saved, if it had cried for help {au secours). 17. The castle was built in the year 1620. 18. Those brave soldiers will be praised and rewarded. 19. Will Mr. B.'s garden be sold ? 20. It is already sold. CONVERSATION. Etes-voTis aim^s de vos amis ? Nous avons toujours ^te aimes de J tons nos amis. 1^ Croyez-vous que mes ordres Je ne le crois pas. soient executes ? Par qui as-tu ^te offense ? , Par un homme inconnu. Les bons rois sont-ils aimes ? lis sont toujours aimds et es- times. Ces objets seront-ils vendus? Non, M — , ils ne seront pas ven- Par qui Henri IV fut-il assas- II fut assassin^ par Ravaillac. sine (murdered) ? Dans quelle annee ? Quel fut le sort de Charles X ? Par qui ces jeunes gens ont-ils ^te blames? Henri IV. fut assassine en 1610. Ce roi fut exile {banished) de France en 1830. Je crois qu'ils ont et^ blames par leur maitre. 138 XXXI. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEgON. La bataille de Leipsic fut-elle Tr^s-sanglante. Beaucoup de sanglante (bloody) ? soldats et d'officiers furent tues, et encore {still) un plus grand nombre furent blesses. Voyez cette pauvre fille ! Qu'a- Elle a ete mordue par un chien t-elle done ? enrage. N'a-t-on pas tu^ ce chien? On ne I'a pas encore tue, mais il sera tue tout de suite. Que va-ton (are they going) Elk sera demolie et puis rebatie faire de cette vieille maison? h neuf (anew). Avez-vous bien dormi ? Non, je n'ai pas bien dormi. XXXI. TEENTE ET UNIEME LE9ON REFLECTIVE VERBS. Some verbs are called reflective, because their subject and object are the same person or thing, so that the subject acts upon itself, and is, at the same time, the agent and the object of the action. Reflective verbs, therefore, have always, besides the subject, another personal pronoun, viz. : me, te, se, myself, thyself, himself, herself, itself, for the singular ; nous, vous, se, ourselves, yourselves, them- selves, for the plural. But it frequently happens that in English the second pronoun is only implied, whereas it must be expressed in French. Ex. : to repent, se repentir ; Pres. I repeat, je me repens, etc. Observe that all reflective verbs, without exception, are conjugat- ed with the auxiliary etre, as : I have hurt myself, je me suis bless e, and not^e m'ai blesse. The conjugation of the following verb may serve as a model for all the reflective verbs. REFLECTIVE VERBS. 139 Se rejouir, to rejoice, INDICATITE. PRESENT TENSE. Je me r^jouis, I rejoice. tu te rejouis, thou rejoicest. il (elle) se rejouit, he (she) rejoices, nous nous rejouissons, we rejoice. vous vous rejouissez, you rejoice. ils (elles) se rejouissent, they rejoice, IMPEEPECT, Je me r^jouissais, / rejoiced, etc. PRETERITE. Je me rejouis, / rejoiced, etc. FUTURE. Je me r^jouirai, I shall rejoice, etc CONDITIONAL. Je me r<^ouirais, I should rejoice, etc IMPERATIVE. Rejouis-toi, rejoice. rejouissons-nous, let us rejoice. rejouissez-vous, rejoice. SUBJUNCTIVK PRESENT. Que je me rejouisse, that I (may) rejoice, etc IMPERFECT. Que je me rejouisse, that I (might) rejoice, etc PARTICIPLE. Se (me, te, etc.) rejouissant, rejoicing, COMPOUND TENSES. INFINITIVE. S'^tre r^joui, e, to have rejoiced,. 140 XXXI. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEgON* INDICATIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT, Je me suis rejoui, e, / have rejoiced. tu t'es rejoui, e, thou hast rejoiced. il s'est rejoui, he has rejoiced. elle s'est rejouie, she has rejoiced. nous nous sommes rejouis, ies, we have rejoiced. vous vous etes rejoui(s), ie{s^, you haverejoiced. lis se sont rejouis, ") eUes se sont rejouies, I '% ^^^ ^^>'^^- COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFECT- Je m'etais rejoui, e, / had rejoiced. tu t'etais rejoui, e, thou hadst rejoiced, efc. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. ' Je me fus rejoui, e, I had rejoiced, tu te fus rejoui, e, etc. COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. Je me serai rejoui, e, / shall have rejoiced, tu te seras rejoui, e, etc. CONDITIONAL, Je me serais rejoui, e, I should have rejoiced^ tu te serais rejoui, e, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT, Que je me sois rejoui, e, that I (may) have rejoiced' que tu te sois rejoui, e, etc. qu'il se soit rejoui, (qu'elle se soit rejouie), eta, COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que je me fusse rejoui, e, that I (might) have rejoiced,' que tu te fusses rejoui, e, etc. PARTICIPLE. S'^tant (m*etant, etc.) rejoui, e, having rejoiced. REFLECTIVE VERBS. 141 WITH INTERROGATION^ PRESENT. (Me fejouis-je), better: est-ce que je me rejouis, do I rejoice f te rejouis-tu {or est-ce que tu te rejouis), dost thou rejoice"? se rejouit-il [or est-ce qu'il se rejouit) ? etc. nous rejouissons-nous ? etc. vous rejouissez-vous ? etc. se rejouissent-ils (elles) "? etc. COMPOUND OP THE PRESENT. Me suis-je rejoui, e, liave I rejoiced 1 t'es-tu rejoui, e, hast thou rejoiced ? s'est-il rejoui, has he rejoiced ? s'est-elle rejouie, has she rejoiced ? nous sommes-nous rejouis, ies, have we rejoiced.f WITH NEGATION. PRESENT. Je ne me rejouis pas, / do not rejoice* tu ne te rejouis pas, etc. il (elle) ne se rejouit pas, etc. nous ne nous rejouissons pas, etc. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT' Je ne me suis pas r^oui, e, / have not rejoiced* tu ne t'es pas rejoui, e, etc. il (elle) ne s'est pas rejoui, e, etc. nous ne nous sommes pas rejouis, ies, €tc% IMPERATIVE. Ne te rejouis pas, do not rejoice. ne nous rejouissons pas, let us not rejoice ne vous rejouissez pas, do not rejoice^ INFINITIVE. Ne pas se rejouir, not to rejoice. ne pas s'etre rejoui,' e, not to have rejoiced* WITH NEGATION AND INTERROGATION PRESENT. Est-ce que je ne me rejouis pas, do I not rejoice f ne te rejouis-tu pas, dost thou not rejoice? ne se rejouit-il pas, does he not rejoice ? etc. 142 XXXI. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEgON. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Ne me suis-je pas rejoui, e, have I not rejoiced? ne t'es-tu pas rejoui, e ? etc. ne s'est-il (-elle) pas rejoui, e? etc. ne nous sommes-nous pas rejouis, ies ? etc. Many verbs, neuter or passive in English, have in French the reflective form. The principal are : — S'affliger, to he sorry. se figurer, J . /. s'apercevoir, to petxeive. s'imaginer, ) *^ ^' s'approcher, to come near. se hater, K , r . , \, ,,', (to make haste. 8 arreter, to stop. se depecher, ) s'asseoir, to sit down. se lever, to rise, to get up. se baisser, to stoop. se marier, to marry. se coucher, to go to bed. se moquer, to mode, scoff. se depecher, to make haste. se plaindre, to complain. s'ecrier, to exclaim, cry out. se promener, to take a vxdk, s'en aller, to go away. se repentir, to repent. s'endormir, to fall asleep. se reposer, to rest. s'enrhumer, to catch cold. se soumettre, ko submit. s'entretenir, to discourse with. se souvenir, to remember. s'etonner, to wonder. se taire, to be silent. s'eveiller, to awake. se tromper, to be mistaken. se fier, to trust. . se vanter, to boast, Ex. — I rise, I get up, je me Teve. I have risen or got up, je me suis lev€. We have perceived, nous nous sommes apergus, etc. Observe also these expressions : — How are you, comment vous portez-vous ? I am well, je me porte Men. I am mistaken, je me trompe. I have been mistaken, je me suis iromp^. He is silent, il se tait. VOCABULARY. La conduit^, the behavior. vaillamment, bravely. la foret, the forest. fondre, to cast. le boulet, the ball. bien, well ; mieux, better. le titre, the right. se venger de, to revenge on. la Boheme, Bohemia. se conduire, to behave. REFLECTIVE VERBS. 143 tard, late. se distinguer, to distinguish. U mal, the evil. enfermer, to shut in. se rendre, to surrender. sauver, to save. se coucher, to go to bed. READING EXERCISE 31. Vous vous trompez, Monsieur. Je me suis trompe aussi. H y a {it zs) tres-longtemps que nous ne nous (each other') sommes vus. Le general Ostermann s'est distingue beaucoup a Fafiliire (battle) de Culm. S'il ne s'etait pas defendu si vaillamment, I'ar- mee alliee aurait ete enfermee dans les montagnes de la Boheme. Dans une bataille ou les boulets ennemis volaient (Jiew) autour de lui, Napoleon s'ecria : Le boulet qui doit (is to) me tuer, n'est pas encore fondu (cast) . Pourquoi vous etes-vous leve si tard ? Je me suis lev^ a sept heures, Ne vous affligez pas tant, mes amis ; habituez-vouz a souffi'ir avee courage les maux de la vie. Vous auriez ^te sauve, si vous vous etiez refugie au camp. THEME 31. 1. I rejoice greatly (beaucoup) to see you (de vous voir). 2. Charles has wounded himself with a penknife. 3. The enemies have surrendered. 4. A good Christian does not revenge himself on (de) his enemy. 5. The soldier has distinguished himself; he will be rewarded. 6. Get up ! 7. I shall get up directly. 8. Has my brother got up ? 9. He (has) got iip at six o'clock. 10. Be not sorry, children, exclaimed he, we shall all be saved ! 11. You are mistaken, Sir. 12. Yes, it is true (vrai), I have been mista- ken. 13. Why do you rejoice at the (du) misfortune of others ? 14. When do you go to bed ? 15. I go to bed at eleven o'clock; but yesterday I went (have gone) to bed at ten o'clock. 16. Make haste ! 17. Where is your mother? 18. She is not at home (a la maison) ; she is taking a walk. 19. I have taken a walk this morning. 20. When will you take a walk? 21. I shall take a walk this evening. 22. How are you to-day ? 23. I am well, but my brother is not well. 24. I (have) stopped at the gate (porte). 25. Rest a little, and come near the fii-e (du feu). 144 XXXI. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEgON. CONVERSATION. Vous vous ^tes trompe, mon ami, Je ne me suis pas tromp^. n'est-ce pas ? Quand vous coucherez-vous, mcs Nous nous coucherons tout de enfants ? suite. A quelle heure vous etes-vous Je me suis couch^ h dix heures. couch^ hier? Et votre fiere ? Mon frere s'est coucht^ a onze heures. Monsieur votre pere est-il deja Oui, il s'est leve aujourd'hui leve ? de bonne heure {early) . Ou etes-vous done restes si long- Nous nous sommes ^gares temps? (^went astray) dans la foret. Ta soeur s'est-elle lavee {wash- Je crois qu'elle ne s'est pas en- ed) ? core lavee. Qui s'est lave dans cette eau ? Moi. Pourquoi vous etes-vous leves si Nous ne nous sommes pas eveil- tard? l^s plus tot {earlier). Qui veut se promener avec moi ? Ma soeur et moi. Vous §tes-vous bien amuse ? Oui, assez {pretty) bien. BEADING LESSON. LB SANSONNET. Le vieux chasseur Maurice avait dans sa chambre un sansonnet qu'il avait elev^, et qui avait appris {learned) a articuler quelques mots. Quand il disait par exemple : ** Sansonnet, ou es-tu? " I'oi- seau r4pondait toujours : *' Me voila ! " Le petit Charles, fils du voisin, aimait beaucoup I'oiseau et lui faisait {paid) souvent des visites. Un jour il vint voir le sansonnet pendant que le chasseur etait absent ; il s'empara bien vite de I'oi- seau, le mit {put it) dans sa poche et voulait s'esquiver avec son larcin. Mais dans ce moment le chasseur entra chez lui. II crut {thought) IMPERSONAL VERBS. 145 faire plaisir au petit gar9on en demandant (by ashing') comme de coutume : " Sansonnet, ou es-tu ? " — "Me voila ! " cria de toutes ses forces (his might) Foiseau qui etait cache dans la poche du petit gar9on. C'est ainsi que le petit voleur ftit trahi. Le sansonnet, the starling. vite, quick. le mot, the word. - la poche, the pocket. me voila, here I am. s'esquiver, to run away, il vint, he came. le larcin, the larceny. ■pendant que, whilst. de coutume, as he used to do» s'emparer, to lay hold of trahir, to betray. X3;XII. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LE9ON. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 1. Verbs which are always impersonal form their compound tenses "by means of the auxiliary avoir. The principal axe : Neiger, to snow ; Pres. il neige, it snows. pleuvoir, to rain ; il pleut, it rains. greler, to hail ; il grele, it hails. tonner, to thunder ; il tonne, it thunders. faire des Eclairs, to lighten ; il fait des (fclairs, it lightens. gder, to freeze ; il gele, it freezes. d€geler, to thaw ; il d€gele, it thaws. importer, to matter ; il importe, it matters. Third singular negative is n'importe, no matter. 2. Other verbs may become impersonal. Ex. : // suffit, it suffices. il convient, it is convenient. il semble, it seems. il arrive, it happens (takes etre), il vaut mieux, it is better. il s'agit, it is tlje question, etc. il me tarde, I long. il reste, there remains. 10 146 XXXir. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEgON. MODF.T-R OF CONJUGATION. 1, Neiger, to snow. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVB. Present. II neige. Qa'il neige. Imperfect. // neigeait. qu'il neigedt. Preterite. // neigea. Future. II neigera. " Comp. of Pres. II a neigd". qu'il ait neig€. " " Imp. II avail neig^. qu'il eut neig€. " ** Pret. // eut neig^. ** " Put. H aura neig^. Interrogatively : Neige-t-il ? neigeait-il ? a-t-il neig^f etc. Pres. E neig&rait. Pres. Neigeant. CONDITIONAL. Comp. II aurait neigd". PARTICIPLE. Comp. Ayant neig€. Indic. COND. 2. H y a, there is, there are, INFINITIVE MOOD. Y aTOir, there to he. II y a, there is, there are. II y avait, > . . _, ^ ' >■ there was, there were. II y eut, > 11 y aura, there will be. II y a eu, there has or have been. II y avait eu,} . x. i -u --/ y there had been. 11 y eut eu, ) II y aurait, there would be. U y aurait eu, there would have been. Y a-t-il, is there 1 are there ? II 7i'y a pas, there is or are not. N'y a-t-il pas, is or are there not ? Qu'il y ait, that there (may) be. Qu'il y eut, that there (might) be. Comp. of Pres. Qu'il y ait eu, that there (may) have been. " Imp. Qu'il y eut eu, that there (might) have been. Present. Imperfect. Preterite. Puture. Comp. of Pres. Imp. « Pret. Present. Comp. Interrogatively : Negatively : Negat. interrogat. : SuBj. Present. Imperfect. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 147 Note 1. This verb in English is used in the plural, when followed by a plural substantive; in French, it remains always in the singular; as. There are birds which, etc. ; il y a des oiseaux qui, etc. Note 2. It often happens that the verb il y a is rendered ago, these, or for these. Ex. : I saw him two months ago. Je I'ai vu il y a deux niois. II y a huit jours que je suis malade. I have been ill these eight days. 77 est is also used impersonally, particularly in poetry, in the sense of ay a. 3. 11 fait froid. Present, II fait froid, it is cold. Imperfect. II faisait froid, \ . ■D . '. Ti j:. y • j 1 It was cold. Preterite. II fit froid, 3 ,. Future. II fera froid, it will be cold, etc. Comp. of Pres. II a fait froid, it has been cold, etc. Thus other expressions denoting the state of the weather : // fait heaUy it is fine weather ; il fait chaud, it is warm ; il fait jour, it is daylight , etc. The English "i< is said" is rendered in French, on dit. 4. II faut. INFINITIVE : Falloir, to he needful, necessary. Indic. Present. // faut, it is necessary. Imperfect. II 'fallait, ) ^^ ^^ necessary. Preterite. II fallut, ) Future. // faudra, it will be necessary. Comp. of Present. II a fallu, it has been necessary. " « Imperfect. Tl avait fallu, | .^ ^^ ^^^^ necessary. " " Preterite. // eut fallu, ) *' " Future. E aura fallu, it will have been necessary. CoND. Present. //yauc^raif, it would be necessary, (... ought to). Comp. II aurait fallu, it would have been necessary. INTERRO G ATI VELY. Faut-il? fallait-il? fallitt-il? a-t-il fallu ? (is it necessary 1 was it necessa- ry "? has it been necessary ?) Sub J. Present. Qu'il faille, that it (may) be necessary. Imperfect. Qu'il fallut, that it (might) be necessary. Comp. of Present. Qu'il ait fallu, that it (may) have been necessary. " " Imperfect. Qu'il eut fallu, that it (might) have been necessary. 148 XXXII. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEgON. PARTICIPLE. Present, wanting. Compound. AyantfaUu. Eem. 1. The verb falloir is absolutely impersonal throughout all its tenses. When its subject is a personal pronoun, as : / must, you must, etc., we may add, for the first person me, for the second te, for the third /mi, in the plural nous, vous, leur. More frequently, however, que with the Sub- junctive mood is preferred. Ex. : — I must read : il mefaut lire, or il faut queje Use. thou must read : il te faut lire, or il faut que tu Uses. he must read : 7 , , . ^ H faut qu'il Use. she must read : | ^ ^"'>"* ^^^^' «^ j il faut qu'elle Use. we must read : il nous faut lire, or il faut que nous lisions. you must read : il vous faut lire, or ilfaut que vous Usiez. they must read : il leur faut lire, or il faut qu'ils lisent. I have been obliged to, read : il m'a fallu lire, etc. 2. "When the subject is a noun, que with the Subjunctive mood must be used. It must further be observed that, when the verb falloir is used in the Present or Future tense, the following verb must be put in the Present of the Subjunctive ; but when it is in the Imperfect, Preterite or Conditional, the verb following it must be rendered by the Imperfect of the Subjunctive. Ex.: — The boy must work, il faut que le gargon tj-avaiUe. The boy will be obliged to work. - // faudra que le gargon travaille. The soldiers were obliged to retire. Jl fallait or il fallut que les soldats se retirassent. 3. "When the verb il faut is followed immediately by a noun substantive, it signifies to want ; here also one of the pronouns me, te, lui, nous, vous, leur, according to the person, must be inserted. Ex. : — I want (must have) a hat, il me faut un chapeau. He wants some money, il lui faut de Vargent. We want some bread, il nous faut du pain. Did you want some books, vous fallait-il des Uvres ? VOCABULARY. Le compte, the account, bill. la chaise, the chair. la redingote, the coat. cesser, to leave off, to cease. le depart, the departure. quitter, to leave. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 149 la rue, the street. dessiner, to draw. le sort, (the) fate. - partir, to set out, depart. la chambre, the room. honnete, honest. manquer, to be wanting. mecontent, e, discontented. gouverner, to govern. sagenyint, adv. wisely. READING EXERCISE 32. II pleut. Je crois qu'il pleuvra demain. J'entends tonner. II vaut mieux {it is better) qu'il pleuve. II a neige toute la nuit. II y a des hommes qui sont toujours mecontents. II fait chaud ; il faisait trop chaud dans votre chambre. II n'y avait ni hommes, ni femmes, ni enfants. II faut partir. II vous faut partir. II fallait venir plus tot (^earlier'). Ne faudra-t-il pas lui pardonner ? 11 faut que Charles reste a la maison. II fallut que Charles restat h la maison. II me fallut lui pardonner. II y aura cette annee beaucoup de cerises. II faut que les enfants obeissent a I'instant (^instantly) . II y a eu de (a^) tout temps des flatteurs. II a fallu qu'elle payat son compte. 11 y a un Dieu qui gouverne tout sagement. Qu'est-ce qu'il vous faut ? II me faut une autre cham- bre. THEME 32. 1. Does it snow? 2. No, it does not snow, it rains. 3. It is cold to-day. 4. I shall not leave the room. 5. Yesterday it was (has been) very cold, and it (has) snowed a great deal {beaucoup). 6. It thunders and lightens. 7. There are too many chairs in this room. 8. There was much wine on the table. 9. Is there money in the purse? 10. There are six francs (francs') [in it]. 11. There will be a great many nuts this year. 12. There are streets in London, which are very long. 13. It is necessary to begin. 14. It was necessary to set out. 15. You must begin. 16. He must read. 17. We were obhged to set out. 18. He has been obliged to speak. 19. The boy must work. 20. The girls must draw. 21. My father has been obliged to go to Paris. 22. Your uncle will be obliged to leave London. 28. The soldiers were obliged to leave the town. 24. I want a good pen. 25. Do you want an- 150 XXXII. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEgON. other room ? 26. Yes, I want a larger room. 27. What do you| want ? 28. I want or I must have {dA /') money. CONVERSATION. Quel temps fait-il aujourd'hui ? II fait beau (mauvais) temps. Pleut-il ? Oui, il pleut tres-fort. Pleuvra-t-il ? Jq ne crois pas qu'il pleuve. La pluie a-t-elle cesse ? Pas encore ; il pleut sans cesse. Que vous faut-il ? II me faut une redingote neuve. Y a-t-il assez de vin ? Oui, Monsieur, il y en a assez. Y avait-il de I'argent dans cette * II y avait deux francs, bourse ? As-tu paye le compte ? Oui, il m'a fallu le payer. Faut-il que je me leve mainte- Oui, il faut vous lever tout de nant ? suite. Vous a-t-il fallu partir de si Le depart ^tait fix4 a quatre bonne heure (so early) ? * heures et demie. Qui a payd le diner ? Mon pere I'a paye. Faut-il lui rendre {return) Par- Oui, rendez-le-lui. gent ? READING LESSON. PEODUCTIONS DE DIVERS CLIMATS. La providence a si sagement arrange toutes choses, que chaque climat fournit aux habitants ce qui leur est le plus indispensable. Dans les contrees polaires il fait si froid, qu'il ne pent y croitre ni fruits, ni cereales, ni legumes. La nature y a supplee par la grande quantite de poissons que Ton peche dans la mer et dans les lacs, et par I'abondance des quadrupedes qui, a la verite (indeed), sont la plupart (mostly) sauvages et feroces, mais qui fournissent aux habitants, aguerris (accustomed) a les poursuivre a la chasse, de tres-belles fourrures, de la chair mangeable, des os et des nerfs qu'ils emploient pour leurs arcs (hows) et pour divers ustensiles. FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 151 Les peuples des climats chauds ont le ver a sole {silkworm), qui se nourrit des feuilles du murier et qui leur file {spins) un le- ger tissu dont on fait des etofFes convenables a la temperature du pays. Le cotonnier porte des gousses renfermant le coton dont le tissu fournit egalement (likewise) les plus beaux vetements. Et pour preserver les habitants de la zone torride de I'inflammation d'un sang trop echauffe, leurs campagnes et leurs jardins leur fournissent les oranges, les citrons et les olives qui les rafraichissent. Fournir, to supply, furnish. la chair, the flesh, meat. le besoin, the need, want. I'os, the bone. la co7itr^e, the region. Vustensile, the tool. croitre, to grow. le murier, the mulberry-tree. les c^re'ales, corn. Jiler, to spin. Idger, light. les legumes, vegetables. le tissu, the texture. pecker, to fish. convenable, convenient, fit. sauvage, wild. le cotonnier, the cotton-plant. feroce, ferocious. la gousse., the pod, husk. aguerris, hardened. le vetement, clothing. jjoursuivre, to pursue. €chauffe, heated, hot. lafourrure, fur, pelt. rafraichir, to cool, refresh. XXXIII. TRENTE-TROISIEME LE9ON. FORMATION OF ADVERBS. Most of the French adjectives become adverbs by adding the syl- lable -ment, according to the following rules : — 1. Adjectives ending in a vowel, simply add the final syllable •ment, as : — Facile, easy ; adv. facilement, easily. poli, polite ; adv. poliment, politely. vrai, true ; adv. vraiment, truly. 152 XXXIII. TRENTE-TROISIEME LEgON. 2. Adjectives which do not end in a vowel, add the syllable 'ment to their feminine termination, as : — Haul, f. haute, high ; adv. hautement, aloud. doux, f. douce, soft, mild ; adv. doucement, softly. franc, f. fmnche, fraxik; Sid\. franchement, frankly, freely, heureux, f. heureuse, happy ; adv. ketireusement, happily. So also the adjectives, nouveau, new ; fou, foolish, and mou, soft ; adv. nouvellement, follement, molleinoit. 3. Adjectives which end in -ant or -ent, become adverbs by changing the final -ant into -amment, and -ent into -emment, as : — Constant, constant ; adv. constamment. prudent, prudent ; adv. prudemment. patient, patient ; adv. patiemment. Exceptions to this rule are : lent, slow, adv. lentement ; and present, pres- ent, adv. pr€sentement, actually, at present. 4. The following adjectives take an e accented before the final -ment. Profond, deep, profondement; commode, comfortable, commodement ; commun, common, communement ; precis, precise, precisement; enorme, enormous, enormement ; expres, express, expressement ; impuni, unpunished, impunement. 5. All these derived adverbs, as well as some others, are com- pared, as: — COMP. SUP. Facilement, plus facilement, le plus facilement. commodement, moins commodement, le moins commodement. souvent, often ; plus souvent, le plus souvent. lonr/temps, long ; plus longtemps, le plus longtempsi loin, far ; plus loin, le plus loin. 6. The following adverbs are irregular in the formation of their comparatives and superlatives : — COMP. SUP. Bi'en, well; mieux, hetter; le mieux, (the) beat. mal, badly ; pis, worse ; le pis, the worst. peu, little ; moins, less ; le moins, the least. beaucoup, mnch; plus, more; le plus, nxost. tant mieux is rendered : so much the better. tant pis, so much the worse. FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 153 7. When either le phs or le inoins qualifies a verb, adverb, or participle not used adjectively, le retains the masculine form. Ex. : Une lettre €crite leplas soigneusement. 8. The following adjectives are used adverbially without taking an addi- tional termination, as : — Vite, quick, fast. foH, very. expres, purposely. haut, loudly. soudain, suddenly. bus, in a low voice. droit, straightways. VOCABULARY. L'etat, m. the state. ponctuellenient, punctually. fdcM* sony, angry. avoiier, to confess. €gal, equal. entretenu (part.), entertained, gend'reusement, generously. propre, clean. [amused. €loquevimcnt, eloquently. rarement, seldom. €ternel, eternal, agir, to act. malheureusernent, unfortunately. marcher, to walk. modestement, modestly. negb'ger, to neglect. probablement, likely. occupd", occupied. extremement, extremely. dessiner, to draw. la fortune, property. oublier, to forget. READING EXERCISE 33. Vous le trouverez facilement. Les gens paresseux negligent ordinairement lears affaires. Agissez genereusement envers vos ennemis. Dieu a sagement distribu^ ses dons. Parlez modestement de vos merites. Get homme a parle tres-eloqnemment. Henri IV. etait constamment occupe de la prosperite de ses etats. Le voleur marcha doucement ; il avait probablement peur d'etre entendu. Je suis extremement faebe d'apprendre cette nouvelle. Nettoyez mieux vos habits. "Vous n'etes pas proprement habille. Ne mar- chez pas si lentement. Les enfants qui aiment passionnement le jeu, negligent souvent leurs taches (tasks). • When meaning, sorry, it takes de before its obj. : meaning, angry, contre. 154 XXXIII. TRENTE-TROISIEME LEgON. THEME 33. 1. This pupil learns {apprend) easily, but lie forgets as (aussi) easily that which ho learns. 2. The king has generously pardoned (to) his enemies. 3. Nobody is constantly happy in this world. 4. The name of Shakspeare will live (vivra) eternally. 5. Speak frankly. 6. My brother is constantly occupied. 7. Confess freely your faults. 8. Unfortunately I have not found him at home. 9. Speak softly. 10. The artist plays admirably (well). 11. I have seldom received letters from my brother-in-law (jbeau-frere) . 12. Everybody must punctually observe the laws. 13. If you fulfil faithfully your duties, you will be esteemed by {de) everybody. 11. You have stayed longer than your brother. 15. The little girl draws very well ; she draws better than her sister. CONVERSATION. Comment parle cet homme ? Avez-vous des nouvelles de votre frere a Paris ? A-t-il perdu quelque chose ? Monsieur M. est-il fache ? Pourquoi est-il fache ? Comment faut-il agir ? (^How must people act ? ) Charles, tu es malade ; qu'as-tu ? Vous etes probablement le frere de Monsieur Richard ? II parle tres-eloqaemment et tres-franchement. B m'ecrit (writes) rarement. Heureusementjesais (know) par un de ses amis qu'il se porte bien. II a probablement perdu une partie de sa fortune. Oui, il est extremement fache. U est fache centre son fils qui a ete me chant. II faut toujours agir prudem- ment et honnetement. J'ai mal a la tete (head-ache) ; mais heureusement ce n'est pas grand'chose {conse- quence). Non, Madame, mais je suis son cousin. ADVERBS OF PLACE AND OF TIME. 155 Comment ce general a-t-il agi en- II agi tres-genereusemont. vers ses ennemis ? Pourquoi marchez-vous si lente- J'ai mal au pied. ment? Cette loi est-elle observee ? Elle est ponctuellement obser- vee de tout le monde. XXXIV. TRENTE-QUATRIEME LE9ON. ADVERBS OF PLACE AND OF TIME. 1. The principal adverbs of place are : Ou, where 1 whither ? par oil, which way 1 id, here, d'ici, hence. la, there, de la, thence. la-Ixis, there below, yonder. y, there, therein. par id, this way. par la, that way. par-d, par-la, here and there. fa et la, to and fro. ailleurs, elsewhere. dessous, underneath. dessus, above. en haut, up, up stairs. en bos, down stairs, below. quelque pnirt, somewhere. 2. The principal adverbs of time Quand, when ? aujourd'hui, to-day. hier, yesterday. avant-hier, the day before yesterday. demain, to-morrow. within, inside. d'ou, whence? dedans, en dedans, dehors, without, out of doors. derriere, behind. devant, before. dega, en dega, on this side. dda, en dela, on that side. pres, aupres, near. proc/ie, close by. alentour, round, about. partout, everywhere. nuUe part, nowhere. jusgu'a, as far as. jusgu'oit, how far ? loin, far, far oiF. are : un jour, one day. autrefois, jadis, formerly. auparavant, previously, before. alors, puis, then. apres, after, afterwards. 156 XXXIV. TRENTE-QUATEIEME LEgON. apres-demain, the day after to-mor- row. enjin, at last, at length. tot, soon, plus tot, sooner. bientot, soon, trap tot, too soon. tantot, by and by. aussitot, directly. turd, late. d'abord, at first. d^sormais, ) , « , , ^ ^ ('henceforth. dorenavant, ) des-lors, from then. depuis, since. When and m wAzcA are rendered by ou jusqu'a, until. ensuite, aftcnvards. a present, } ( now, at present. maintenant, ) guelquefois, sometimes. souvent, often. longtemps, long. tou jours; always. dernierement, I , ^ , - , ^ C lately, of late. naguere, ) deja, already. encore, still, yet. jamais, ever, ne jamais, never. , after a noun signifying time ox place. PLACE OF ADVERBS. Rem. 1. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally placed immediately after the verb which it modifies : She always cries, die pleure toujours. I often take a walk with my friend. Je me promene souvent avec mon ami. Rem. 2. When the verb is in a compound tense, the adverb generally comes between the auxiliary and the participle ; as, Je I'ai toujours respects, I have always esteemed him. Je me suis souvent promen^ avec mon maitre. I have often taken a walk with my master. N. B. — Hier, avant-hier, aujourd'hui, demain, apres-demain, tantot, tot, and tard, always follow the participle, unless placed before the auxiliary. VOCABULARY. Le temps, the weather. le village, the village. la grammaire, the grammar. content, satisfied. U chemin de fer, the railroad. le hrouillard, the fog, mist. I'ouvrage, m. the work. diner, to dine. venir, to come. laisser, to leave. BEADING EXERCISE 34. Le temps est fort doux aujourd'hui. Mon cou8iii est enfin arriv^. Tj' autre jour je me suis egare dans la foret. Travaillez d'abord et ADVERBS OF PLACE AND OF TIME. 157 ensuite jouez. Avez-vous jamais vu un enfant comme celui-la ? En effet, il est extremement gros. Le brouillard aura bientot disparu. D'ou venez-vous maintenant, et oil avez-vous ete Lier ? Yoyez-vous ce village la-bas? Eh bien (well), j'y ai ete hier et aujourd'hui. J'y vais quelquefois. M'avez-vous apporte la grammaire dont je vous ai parle ? Youlez-vous venir diner avec nous demain ? De- main je ne serai pas ici, mais apres-demain ou plus tard. Enfin mon ouvrage est fini. THEME 34. 1. Where is my brother? 2. He is not here; he is elsewhere; he is perhaps yonder. 3. I will go (^firai) that way. 4. Carry all that up stairs. 5. How far did you go yesterday ? 6. I went as far as London. 7. I shall go nowhere to-day. 8. That village is not far ; do you see (yoyez-vous) it yonder ? 9. Where is my grammar? 10. I have left it somewhere. 11. Is Edward here? 12. No; he is below. 13. My friend will not stay here long. 14. I saw (have seen) your sister yesterday at the play {au spectacle). 15. He will always be satisfied. 16. Come back (revenez) soon. 17. Did you know [have you known (connu)~\ him formerly? 18. Yes, I have known him long. 19, Whence does the letter come ? 20. It comes from America. 21. Your dog is out of doors. 22. How is (s<3 porte) your aunt to-day ? 23. She is better to-day than [she was] yesterday. 24. I hope you will dine with us to-morrow. 25. I shall go soon into the country (a la campagne). 26. We expected him the day before yesterday. 27. Formerly there were no railroads. 28 . Henceforth I shall be very diligent. 158 XXXy. TBENTE-CINQUIEME LEgON. XXXV. TRENTE-CINQUIEME LE9ON ADVERBS OF NUMBER, OF QUANTITY, OF NEGATION, ETC. The adverbs of number are : PremVerement, firstly. deiixiemement, ) , ( secondly. secondeinent, ) troisiemement, thirdly. giiatriemement, fourthly. cinquiemement, fifthly. sixiemement, sixthly, etc. comhien de fois, how often 1 tine fois, once. deux fois, twice. trois fois, three times, etc. The prmcipal adverbs of quantity and comparison are Comment, how ? combien, how much ? how many "? beaucoup, much, many. bien (with du, de V, des following) a great deal oi' many. trop, too much, too many. tant, so much, so many. assez,* enough, pretty. peu, little, un peu, a little. ne — guere, hardly. bien, ^ tres, > very, /ort, ) plus, more. davantage, still more. moins, less. IZ'^fait, [q^ite, wholly, entirely. presque, almost. environ, 1 , , ( about. a peu pres, ) si, so. ai}isi, thus. aussi, as. €galement, likewise. autant, as much, as many. d'autant plus, so much the more. plutot, rather. surtout, above all. au plus, tout au plus, du moins, au moins, at least. ihment, \ ( only. — Que, ) ^ at most. ne — que. mime, even. pas mime. not even. pas seulement. The adverbs of affirmation and negation are : Oui, jes. Si, yes. ne — pas, not. certes, certainly. ne — plus, no more. peut-itre, perhaps. non plus, nor — either. * Assez precedes in French the noun or adjective it limits. Ex. : Assez de vin, assez bon. See p. 32. ADVERBS OF NUMBER, OF QUANTITY, ETC. 159 eertainement, | ^^^^„.„|,^ ^^ ^^ „„^^ «e — point, not (at all). not at all. I certainly, to be sure. assurement, ) pas du tout, non, no. point du tout, presque jamais, scarcely ever. ne — rien, nothing. There are many adverbial locutions ; those most in use are : A peine, scarcely. tout a coup, suddenly. en effet, really. tout d'un coup, all at once. sur le champ, directly. a droite, to the right. peu a peu, by degrees. , a gauche, to the left. dans peu or sous peu, soon. ensemble, together. a dessein, on purpose. pele-mele, pell-mell. en meme temps, at the same time. d'avance, beforehand, in advance. a la fois, at once, at a time. sans doute, no doubt. de bonne heure, early. tout a I'heure, 1 directly, imnj^diate- de meilleure heure, earlier. tout de suite, ) ly. a bon march€, cheap. par hasard, by chance. a fond, thoroughly. en attendant, meanwhile. par an, yearly, par jour, daily. de temps en temps, > from time to par mois, monthly. de temps a autre, j time. OF NEGATION. 1. Not is translated into French by ne, which is placed before the verb, and pas or point after it, in simple tenses. Ex. : Je ne veux pas, I will not, I do not wish. Je ne sais pas, I do not know. 2. In compound tenses, ne comes before the auxiliary, and pas after it. Ex.: Je n'ai pas vu, I have not seen. Elk n'a pas parl€, she did not speak. Point is merely a stronger negative than pas, as : II n*ai point parU, I did not speak (at all). 3. Ne is employed without pas, if there is in the sentence a pronoun or adverb expressing negation, such as personne, nul, rien, jamais, ni, ne — plus, ■point, guere. Ex. : Je ne connais personne, I know nobody. Je ne veux rien, I wish for nothing. Je ne sais plus, I know no more. Elle n'a jamais dit cela, she never said so. 4. If one of the negations is followed by a noun in the partitive sense, this noun is simply preceded by de : 160 XXXV. TRENTE-CINQUIEME LEgON. Affirmative : Tai du pain, I have some bread. s^ Negative : Je n'ai pas de pain, I have no bread. Affirmative : Avez-vous de V argent, have you any money ? Negative : Je n'ai point d'argent, I have no money. 5. "With the infinitive, ne — pas, ne — point, ne — rien, etc., are generally not separated, as : Ne pas se venger, not to revenge one's self. Ne plus €crire, to write no more. Ne rien manger, to eat nothing. 6. Without a verb, the negatives stand without ne, as : Pas a la fois, not at once. Pas moi, not I. Pas beaucoup, pas trop, pas tant, pas aujourd'hui, 7. Non plus, nor — either, requires the full negation ne — pas before it, as: . Je ne le veux pas non plus, nor will I have it either. 8. If nor — either is connected only with a noun or pronoun, without a verb, the noun or the pronoun is preceded, in French, by ni, as : Nor Charles either, ni Charles non plus. 9. Observe the expression ne — que for only, as : Je n'ai que deux soeurs, I have only two sisters. U n'a qu'un morceau de pain, he has only a piece of bread. Elle n'a apport^ qu'une assiette, she brought but one plate. U enfant n'a que dix ans, the child is only ten years old. U n'est que six heures, it is only six o'clock. VOCABULARY. La fois,* f. the time. inout, e, unheard of. le crime, the crime. amicalement, friendly. travailler, to work. €viter, to shun. laconique, laconic. la soci€t€, the society. refuser, to refuse. merci, thank you. READING EXERCISE 35. Ce crime est fout-a-fait inoui. Comment vous portez-vous ? Je me porte tres-bien. Combien d'aunes de ce drap vous faut-il ? H m'en faut beaucoup; il m'en faut au moins trente aunes. Vous etes-vous promene longtemps ? Je me suis promene environ deux * Wlien the noun times denotes repetition, as the number of times, it is trans- lated by fois. ADVERBS OF NUMBER, OF QUANTITY, ETC. IGl heures ; peut-etre un peu moins. Votre tante va-t-elle souvent au spectacle ? Elle n'y va {goes) presque jamais, et mon oncle n'y va pas du tout. Monsieur, vous avez peu de fautes dans votre traduc- tion. Combien en ai-je ? Vous en avez moins que votre frere ; vous n'en avez que deux ou trois, tout au plus quatre. J'ai appris (lear7ied) ma lecon par coeur. Habillez-vous tout de suite. C'est en vain que vous cherchez a le sauver. Marchez a droite ; moi, je marclierai a gauche. Sans doute, cela vaut mieux. J'ai acbete ce tableau a bon marche. THEME 35. 1. How much sugar have you bought? 2. How many lessons a {par) week have you ? 3. You eat too much ; you must eat less. 4. That young man works too much. 5. Give him a little money. 6. Give me more time. 7. There were many ladies, and we had a great deal of pleasure. 8. Have you not played enough? 9. I think (that) you will not have it. 10. Mr. A. is a very laconic man; he always answers yes or no. 11. It is better not to refuse him. 12. I have only one brother, and my cousin has only one sis- ter. 13. She is only five years old. 14. I have never seen her. 15. She never comes to our house (chez nous). 16. We certainly shall go out (sortirons) together. 17. My father has bought a horse very cheap. 18. Have you seen anybody ? 19. I have seen nobody. 20. The thunder-storm came on suddenly. 21. I got up early; earlier than my brother. 22. You must always shun the society of these bad people. 23. Go (allez) to the right. 24. I shall go to the left ; we shall arrive at the same time. CONVERSATION. Comment trouvez-vous le temps Je le trouve fort beau (or bien aujourd'hui ? beau) . Voici du jambon. En voulez- Donnez-m'en un peu, s'il vous vous ? plait ( please) . En voulez-vous davantage ? Non, merci, j'en ai assez. 11 162 XXXVI. TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON. Sere:&-vous chez vous (at home) demain matin? A quelle heure avez-vous dm4 hier? Dinerez-vous aujourd'hui a la meme heure ? Que ferez-vous (will you do) pendant ce temps ? Avez-vous fait cela a dessein ? Avez-vous fini votre theme ? Que fait cette petite fille Ik-bas ? Connaissez-vous cet ouvrage (work) ? Avez-vous lu (read) ce livre ? Quand voulez-vous venu- jouer avec moi ? Comment vous portez-vous ? Et Monsieur votre pere, com- ment se porte-iril ? Assur^ment, je serai chez moi toute la journee (day). Hier j'ai dine a cinq heures pre- cises. , Non, aujourd'hui je ne dmerai qu'a six heures. Je me promenerai en attendant. Non, je ne I'ai pas fait expres. Je ne I'aurai guere fini avant sept heures. Elle cherche des fraises (straw- herries) . Cet ouvrage m'est tout-a-fait in- connu. Je I'ai lu plus de deux fois. Je finirai d'abord ma tache et apres, nous jouerons. Je me porte a merveille. II se porte assez bien. II est sorti hier pour la premiere fois. XXXYI. TRENTE-SIXIEME LE9ON CONJUNCTIONS. The principal simple conjunctions are : — Et, aild. et — et, both — and. ou, or. ou — ou, either — or. pouHant, yet, still. n^amnows, nevertheless. si, if, whether. sinon, if not. CONJUNCTIONS. 163 ni — ni, neither — nor. comme, as. que, that, than (after a comp.). or, now. car, for. done, consequently, then. mats, but. puisque, since, as. cependant, ) toutefois, "> quoique (with the Subj.), though, however. 1. Among these simple conjunctions, only one governs the Sub- junctive mood, viz. : quoique, though or although. Ex. : quoique Je sois malade, though I am ill. Por the Subjunctive after que, see P. II. L. 19. 2. Si denotes a condition or supposition : sHl vient, if he comes ; si V0U& voulez, if you like. When si is followed by an Imperfect or Pluperfect, those tenses are always in the Indicative mood. (See P. II. L. 19.) If I had, si favais ; If I were, si f€tais ; If I had seen him, si je I'avais vu. Note. The i in si is cut off before il and its, but nowhere else, as : s'il avait, but si elle avait, etc. 3. The conjunction ni — ni requires ne before its verb, and the noun which follows it takes no article, if used in the partitive sense, as: — Je n'ai ni pere ni mere, I have neither father nor mother. 4. The conjunction que serves to connect two ideas so as to form of the two one sentence, as : Je crois que vous avez raison, I believe you are right. In English the conjunction that is almost always understood, whereas que is not only always expressed in French, but repeated before each mem- ber of the proposition, as : — Je crois que vous avez raison et que vous rdussirez. I think you are right and that you will succeed. 5. When a conjunction governs several verbs, it is placed before the first verb only, and que is used before the other verbs. Ex. : As he is diligent and takes pains, comme il est applique et quHl prend de la peine. 164 XXXYI. TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON. 6. Done is often used like the English anxiliary do, to urge or incite. Ex.: Taisez-vous done, do be silent. It is also used interrogatively : C^est done vous qui avez fait eela? VOCABULARY. Plier, to bend. le hien, the good. lever, to lift up. plus — plus, the more — the more. r^oile, f. the star. plus — moins, the more — the less. €puis€, e, exhausted. mains — moins, the less — the less. ayare, avaricious. soil — soit,hQ,\t — or. sayaw^, learned. tantot — faji^d^, sometimes — some- rompre, to break. times, now — then. habiter, to inhabit. ni — non plus, nor — either. READING EXERCISE 3R. L'ambition et I'avarice sont deux grandes sources du malheur hu- main. Les discours impies (^impious) gatent a la fois I'esprit et le coeur. Cette eau est froide comme de la glace. Votre tableau est precieux, mais il ne me plait (please') pas. II arriva comme je sortais. EUe n'est ni laide ni belle. Vous vous amusez, et cepen- dant le temps fait (^Jlies). Cet homme est tres-fort, et pourtant il ne peut pas lever ce fardeau (weight). Ou vous me paierez, oa vous irez en prison. Donnez-moi de I'eau, s'il vous plait. Martin est encore bien jeune. n^anmoins il est fort sage. Bienheureux sont ceux qui aiment la paix, car ils seront appelles les enfants de Dieu; Vous ne le savez pas ? Ni moi non plus. Tantot il veut une chose, tantot il en veut une autre. THEME 36. 1. Gold and silver are metals. 2. Silver is less useful than iron. 3. Mr. A. is very inconsistent (inconsequent) ; he is sometimes of one opinion (avis, m.) and sometimes of another. 4. I like you, as I know (sais) that you are always attentive. 5. This man is es- teemed by everybody, even by his enemies. 6. I am very glad to see that you do not love flattery. 7. Some one has done it, either you or your brother. 8. The more you will work, the more you will gain. 9. This horse may be very strong, nevertheless it does not CONJUNCTIONS. 165 please me. 10. The longer the days (are) (constr. the more the d. are long), the shorter (are) the nights. 11. Though he said (^dit) (that) he had no appetite, yet he ate all the meat and bread. 12. Nobody knows whether the stars are inhabited or not. 13. The reed bends, but does not break. 14. Do not bend the bow too much, otherwise it will break. 15. The more I sang, the less em- barrassed I was. 16. If you do {faites} it, you will be punished. 17. He appeared (^paraissaii) very modest, although he was very learned. 18. In order to be learned, you must study much. 19. I punish him as he deserves (it). 20. You must stay at home, since you are not quite well. 21. When he had done speaking (^Jini de parler), he was quite exhausted. 22. If I had had faith- ful friends, I should not be m unhappy. 23. You will be happy, if you do your duty (devoir') . 24. I was sleeping when your ser- vant entered (entra). CONVERSATION. Etes-vous heureux, mon ami ? Je le serais, si' j'avais de bons livres. Si ce n'est que cela, je peux Je vous en serais tres-oblige. vous en donner. En voulez- vous ? Quelles sent les deux grandes L'ambition et I'avarice. sources du malheur des hommes ? Que faiton souvent, quand on On fait souvent des sottises. est jeune ? Que dit Jesus-Christ de ceux II dit qu'ils seront appeles " en- qui aiment la paix ? fants de Dieu." Que veut cet enfant ? II veut tantot ceci, tantot cela. Comment trouvez-vous cette EUe n'est ni belle ni laide. demoiselle ? Ne pouvez-vous pas lever cette Je ne peux pas la lever, quoique pierre ? je sois tres-fort. 166 XXXVI. TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON. Comment Dieu traite-t-il les hommes ? Quelle propriete a le roseau ? Quand faut-il forger le fer ? II les traite comme un pere traite ses enfants. II (se) plie et ne rompt pas. Quand il est cbaud. EEADENG LESSON. LAFITTE. Lorsque Jacques Lafitte vint (came) a Paris, il se presenta chez M. Perregaux dans I'esperance d'obtenir une place ; mais le banquier lui annonga qu'il etait dans I'impossil^lite de satisfaire a sa demande, puisque les bureaux etaient au complet. Lafitte, decourage par ce refus, s'eloignait tristement, lorsqu'en traversant la cour de I'botel, il aperQut a terre une ^pingle ; il la ra- massa et la piqua sur sa mancbe. M. Perregaux ayant vu Taction du jeune soUiciteur, en fut frappe (struck) , et pensa qu'il devait etre done d'un esprit d'ordre et d'economie. II le fit rappeler et lui dit qu'il pouvait compter sur une place dans sa maison. En efFet, pen de jours apres, le jeune Bayonnais entra cbez le ricbe banquier, et chacun salt que, plus tard, il est devenu un bomme ricbe et cele- bre. L'esp&ance, hope. ramasser, to pick up. le bureau, the office. la manche, the sleeve. s'eloigner, to retire. done, endowed. une epingle, a pin. en effet, indeed. CONJUNCTIVE PHRASES. 167 XXXYII. TRENTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. CONJUNCTIVE PHRASES. Most of these are adverbs or prepositions united with que or de. Some require the following verb in the Indicative mood, others in the Infinitive, and others again in the Subjunctive. 1. Conjunctive phrases with the Indicative : — Ou bien, or, else. Aussi bien que, as well as. ni — non plus, neither, nor either. aussitot que au contraire, on the contrary. des que, j ^^ ^^^^ ^^' non seulement — mats encore, not dememe que,\ only — but also. ainsi que, y deplus, moreover. au reste, ") autant que, as much as. du teste, ) "^ "^ ^• apres que, after, after that. de la, hence it follows. quand mime, although. a peine — que, scarcely — as. si toutefois, if however. c'est pourquoi, therefore. c'est-a-dire, namely. par consequent, consequently. c'est que, "> comme si, as if. r because. ? a ^i_ • .-, parce que, ) de meme, thus, in the same way. tandis que, whereas. sans cela, otherwise, else. pendant que, while, whilst. depuis que, since. tant que, as long as. tout — que, however — as. 2. With the Injinitive mood: — AJin de, in order to, to. de peur de, ") a moins de, unless. de crainte de, | ^^ ®^ avant de, before. loin de, far from. au lieu de, instead of. plutot que de, rather than. 3. With the Subjunctive mood: — AJin que, ") . non que, not that. pour .que, ) ^^^^' ^^ ®*^^^ *^^** nonobstant que, notwithstanding avant que, before. that. a moins que, t Y , pour peu que, however little. que — ne, y un ess, till. powryu ^-ue, provided (that). t Those marked with a f require ne before the following verb. 168 XXXVII. TRENTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. hien que, ") though, quelque — que, however — though. quoique, > although. sans que, without that. jusqu'a ce que, till, until. si ce n'est que, unless, till. loin que, far from. soit que, whether — or. 4. Besides the above-mentioned conjunctions, there are other con- junctive expressions (locutions conjonctives), which have been borrowed from other classes of words, and to which the conjunction que is added. Such are : A condition que, on condition that de peur que,* t 7 ^^^^ de crainte que,*^ ) * de maniere que, ) , ^ >• so as to, so that de or en sorte que, ) au cos que, in case that.* .... suppose que, supposing that.* .... malgrd' que, for all that, notwithstanding.* toutes les fois que, as often as. peut-etre que, perhaps that attendu que, considering that a ce que, according as, as far as, etc. N. B. — Those marked with an * govern the subjunctive. VOCABULAEY. La suite, the consequence. pret, ready. la machine a vapeur, the engine. la princesse, the princess. la m€moire, the memory. la guerre, war. occuper, to occupy. amhitieux, ambitious. mettre, to put, place. Ve'ducation, f. education. preserver, to preserve. regarder, to look at. READING EXEKCISE 37. Aussitot que la machine k vapeur fut construite (built) , elle tut mise en mouvement (^put in motion), pour Fessayer. Quelque grande que soit cette faute, il faut cependant la pardonner. Des qu'il me vit (saw) il courut (ran) k moi. Pendant que nous etions occupes a faire notre tache, on cria au feu (^fire) ! La memoire de Henri lY . sera toujours chere aux Frangais parce qu'il mettait sa gloire k les rendre heureux. Que le ciel vous preserve d'un pareil CONJUNCTIVE PHRASES. 1^9 (jsucJi) malheur ! Le malado ne boit (^drinks) ni ne mange. Tant que ma mere sera a la campagne, je resterai avec elle. Tandis que nous parlons, le temps fuit. Depuis que j'ai perdu moa pere, tout me manque. THEME 37. 1. I am not sorry, on the contrary, I am very glad (hien aise) to {de) have done it. 2. I will play, as soon as I (shall) have finished my exercise. 3. There will always be wars among men, as long as they are ambitious. 4. After (thai) you were gone (sorti), I began writing (« ecrire). 5. As soon as my education is finished, I shall go to Italy. 6. In order to learn well, wo must {on doit) study with a great dpal of attention. 7. In order to gain friends, we must be honest. 8. It will be impossible to learn French, unless you be {Inf.) diligent. 9. Let us pray, before we begin {Inf.). 10. Bather than study, he loses his time. 11. Far from blaming you, I praised you. 12. Come here, that I may speak to you. 13. Send me your book, (in order) that I may read it. 14. I will be ready before they come. 15. Unless you accom- pany me, I will not take a walk. 16. Cato killed himself, lest he should fall into (entre) the hands of Caesar. 17. Though that young man is not very diligent, [yet] he improves. 18. Before you begin an action, consider well its consequences. 19. You will never be respected unless you fulfil your duties. 20. He will give it to you, on condition that you give it back to him. 21. They beat him so that they almost killed him. 170 XXXVIII. TRENTE-HUITIEME LEgON. XXXYIII. TRENTE-HUITlfeME LE9ON. IRKEGULAR VERBS. — FIEST CLASS. Those verbs are commonly called irregular which deviate from the three regular conjugations. This deviation is of three kinds. 1. Such verbs as take the termination corresponding to the ending of their Infinitive mood, but change their root. Ex. : Of the verb cotidre, to sew, the radical is coud-, this final d is, in some persons and tenses, changed into s, for instance in the plural : nous cous-ons, we sew. These are the least difficult, and are therefore put in the first class. 2. Verbs which preserve their radical syllable throughout unchanged, but take flexions that do not accord with the ending of their Infinitive* For instance, the verb cour-tr, to run, ending in -ir, ought to take the flex- ions of the second conjugation (Jinir). But this is not the case; it takes the flexions of the third conjugation (vendre) ; the Present is not je couris^ tu courts, etc., but je cours, tu cours, etc. ; P. p. couru like vendu. Verbs of this kind we assign to the second class. 3. A certain number of verbs offer both these anomalies at the same time; i. e. they undergo some changes in their root, and are conjugated with other flexions than those corresponding with the ending of their Infin- itive. For instance, the verb mourir, to die, ought, according to its Infini- tive termination, -ir, to take the flexions of Jimr. This is not the case ; it is, in most tenses, conjugated like vendre; and, besides, its root mour- is, in certain tenses and persons, changed into meur-, as : Pres.je meurs, tu meurs, etc. Such verbs, among which are included those ending in -oir, consti- tute the third class. To facilitate the study of the irregular verbs, it is essential to dis- tinguish the primitive tenses from the derived ones. The latter have generally a regular inflexion, whereas the former alone are subject to irregularity. As already mentioned, the primitive tenses are : 1. 77i£ Infinitive mood. 2. The Participle present. 3. The Participle past. 4. The Present of the Indicative nwod. 5. The Preterite. IRREGULAR VERBS. * 171 From these the other tenses and moods are derived, as it is explained, L. XX. The derivative tenses are formed regularly, and therefore seldom mentioned in the following list. To aid the pupil's memory, the following hints will prove useful : 1. The Present of the Subjunctive may be found by dropping the jfinal nt of the third person plural Indicative, as : from Us ^crivent — que f€crive ; from Us prennent — que je prenne; from Us brnvent — que je hoive. 2. The plural of the Present Indicative, the Participle Present and the Imperfect of the Indicative have the same radical, as : nous mourons, we die; P. pr. mourant; Imperf. je mourais; — nous craignons ; P. pr. craignant; Imperf. ye craignais ; -^nous allons ; P. pr. allant; Imperf. faUais, etc. 3. The Future and Conditional are formed from the Infinitive ; the fol- lowing, however, have an irregular formation, — je courrai (instead of courirai), je mourrai, je verrai, j'enverrai, j'acquerrai, je pourrai, je saurai, je voudini, U faudra, je viendrai, je tiendrai, je ferai, and j'irai. 4. When the Participle past ends with the sound of i {i, is, it,) the Pre- terite generally ends in is. Ex. : Part. p. sorti, gone out; Pret. je sortis ; — Part. p. dit, said; Pret.je dis; — Part. p. pris, taken ; Pret.Je pris, etc. 5. But when the Participle past ends in u, the Preterite usually ends in us. Ex. : P. p. cru, believed; Pret.je cms; P. p. lu, read; Pret. je lus; — P. p. connu, known ; Pret. je connus, etc. A LIST OF ALL THE IRREGULAR VERBS ACCORD- ING TO THE THREE CLASSES OF IRREGULARITY. FIRST CLASS. Containing the verbs in -re which take the terminations of the third conjugation, but whose radical is somewhat changed. a. (1 — 7. Insertion of an s.) 1. Luire, to shine. Part. pres. luisant. Part, past, \m. Pres. Je luis, tu luis, il luit, nous lui^ons, reus luisez, ils luisent. Subf. Pres. Que je luise. Imperf. Je luisais. Pret. wanting. Put. Je luirai. Conjugate in the same manner : Reluire, to glitter. 2. Suffire, to suffice. P. pr. suffisant. P. p. suffi, Pres. Je suffis, tu suffis, il suffit, nous suffisons, etc. 172 XXXVIII. TRENTE-HUITIEME LEgON.' Suhj. Prcs. Que je suffise. Imperf. Je suffisais, , Pret. Je suflBs, tu suffis, il suffis, nous suffimes, etc. Put. Je suffirai. In the same manner : Confire, to preserve, to pickle ; and circoncire, to ' circumcise, except in the Part. past. The Participle of the former is conjit, of the latter circoncis. 3. Nuire, to hurt. P. pr. nui^ant. P. p. xmi. Pros. Je nuis, tu nuis, il nuit, nous nuisons, vous nuisez, ils nui- sent. S}ihj. Pres. Que je nui^e. Imperf. Je nuisais, Pret. Je nuisis. Fut, Je nuirai. 4. Cuire, to boil, to bake (bread). P. pr. cuisant. P, p. cmt. Pres. Je cuis, tu cuis, il cuit, nous cuisons, etc. Pret. Je cuisis. Fut. Je cuirai. Thus also : Recuire, to boil once more. 5. Conduire^ to conduct, to lead. Se conduire, to betave. P. pr. conduisant. P. p. conduit. Pres. Jo conduis, tu conduis, il conduit, nous conduisons, etc. Pret. Je conduisis. Fut. Je conduirai. Thus : Recondiiire, to reconduct, to see home ; -d^duire, to deduct ; enduire, to plaster ; induire, to lead into ; introduire, to introduce ; produire, to pro- duce ; reprodtiire, to produce again ; reduire, to reduce ; s€duire, to seduce ; traduire, to translate. 6. Instruire, to instruct. P. pr. instruisant. P. p. instrui^. Pres. J'instruis, tu instruis, il instruit, nous instrui«ons, vous in- strui«ez, ils instruisent. Pret. J'instruisis. Fut. J'instruirai. In the same manner : Construire, to build ; d^ruire, to destroy. 7. Dire, to say, to tell. P. pr. disant. P. p. d\t. Pres. Je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous disons, vous dites^ ils disent. JSuhf. Pres. Que je disc. Pret. Je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous dimes, vous dites, ils dirent. Imperf. Suhj. Que je disse. Fut. Je dirai. Imper. Dis, disons, dites. IRREGULAR VERBS. 173 Conjugate in the same manner : redire, to say again, to object. As for the other compounds of dire, viz. : Contredire, to contradict ; df^- dire, to unsay; and se dedire, to retract; interdire, to forbid ; medire, to slan- der ; and pr€dire, to foretell, they do not form their second person plural of the Present Indicative with the termination -tes, but -sez, as : vous contre- disez, voits m^disez, vous interdisez, etc. — Alaudire, to curse, takes ss in the fol- lowing forms : Pres. plur. nous maudissons, vous matidissez, Us maudissent. Part. pr. maudissaiit. Impcrf. je maudissais. VOCABULARY. Le soleil, the sun. modeme, modem. un rayon, a ray. la peche, the peach. Vespoir, m. hope. la v€rit€, the truth. let dette, the debt. THEME 38. 1. The sun shines. 2. Everything shines (glitters) in that house. 3. It is not suflBcient (it does not suffice) to understand the ancient languages, it is also necessary to study the modern ones. 4. We preserve these peaches with sugar. 5. Have you pickled cucumbers (des concomhres) ? 6. Does he not hurt you in this af- fair? 7. All his property will not suffice to {pour) pay his debts. 8. Where do you conduct this blind [man] ? 9. I conduct him to the physician (^chez le medecin). 10. I instinict (the) youth. 11. We translate English into French. 12. The boys behaved very well. 13. You will hurt me more than any other person. 14. This bread is well baked. 15. What do you say ? 16. I say that you are (have) right. 17. We say the truth. 18. Tell him that I am here. 19. I shall tell (it) him directly. 20. Never contradict any one (^ per Sonne) in (^en) public. 21. We foretold those disasters (desastres), 22. Let us curse nobody. 174 XXXIX. TRENTE-NEUVIEME LEgON. XXXIX. TRENTE-NEUYIEME LE9ON IRREGULAR VERBS. — FIRST CLASS CONTINUED. h. (8 — 17. Change of the final consonant.) 8. Traire, to milk. P. pr. trayant. P. p. trait. Pres. Je trais, tu trais, il trait, nous tra^ons, vous trayez, ils traient. Imperf. Je trayais. Pret. wanting. Fut. Je trairai. Thus also : Distraire, tp distract ; extraire, to extract ; soustraire, to suh' tract, to withdraw. 9. Suivre, to follow. P. pr. suivant. P. p. suivi. Pres. Je suis, tu snis, il sui^, nous suivons, vous suivez, ils sui' vent. SuhJ. Pres. Que je suive. Pret. Je suivis. Fut. Je suivrai. , Imper. Suis, suivons, suivez. Thus : S'ensuivre, to ensue ; poursuivre, to pursue. 10. Vaincre, to conquer. P. pr. vain^-want. P. p. vaincu. Pres. Je vaincs, tu vaincs, il vainc, nous vain^-wons, vous vain- ^wez, ils vaing-went. Pret. Je vain^'z^is. Fut. Je vaincrai. Imper. Vaincs, vaingz^ons, vain^'z^ez. In the same manner : Convaincre, to convince. 11. Coudre, to sew. P. pr. cou^ant. P. p. cousu. Pres. Je couds, tu couds, il coud, nous cousons, vous cousez, ils consent. Subj. Pres. Que je couse. Pret. Je cousis. Fut. Je coudrai. "^ Thus : Decoudre, to unsew ; recoudre, to sew over again. 12. Moudre, to grind. P. pr. mouZant. P. p. mou?u. Pres. Je mouds, tn mouds, il moud, nous mou/ons, vous mou/ez, ils moufent. Suhj. Pres. Que je raoufe. Pret. Je moulus. Fut. Je moudrai. IRREGULAR YERBS. 175 In the same manner: Emoudre, to grind (knives, etc.), to sharpen, and remoudre, to grind again. 13. Resoudre, to resolve, P. pr. reso^vant. P. p. lesolu (or r^sous). Pres. Je r^sous, tu r^sous, il resout, nous resolvons, vous resolvez, lis resolvent. Suhj. Que je resolve. Pret. Je msolus, tu tqsoIus, etc. Put. Je resoudrai. Imper. Resous, resolvons, resolvez. Thus ! Absoudre, to absolve, and dissondre, to dissolve. These two compounds have no Preterite, and make their Participles : a6- souSy f. absoute, and dissous, f. dissoute. 14. Peindre, to paint. P. pr. pei^want. P. p. pein^. Pres. Je peins, tu peins, il point, nous pei^wons, vous pei^wez, ils pei^went. Suhj. Que je pei^^ie. Imperf. Je pei^Tzais. Pret. Je pei^/iis, tu pei^Tzis, il pei^mt, nous pei^rmmes, etc. Put. Je peindrai. Imper. Peins, pei^wons, peiywez. Thus : Ceindre, to gird. Feindre, to feign ; depeindre, to depict. Teindre, to dye ; deteindre, to discharge color ; atteindre, to attain, to reach ; e'teindre, to extinguish. Restreindre, to restrain. Enfreindre to infringe, to trans- 15. Craindre, to fear. P. jor. craiywant. P. jo. crain^. jPres. Je crains, tu crains, il craint, nous crai^wons, etc. Pret. Je crai^rwis. Put. Je craindrai, etc. Thus also : Plaindre, to pity ; se plaindre, to complain ; contraindre, to compel, to constrain. 16. Joindre, to join. P. pr. joi^want. P. p. pint. Pres. Je joins, tu joins, il joint, nous joi^Tzons, vous joi^wez, ils joiynent. Suhj. Que je joiy?2e. Pret. Je joignis. Put. Je joindrai. Thus : Rejoindre, to rejoin ; enjoindre, to enjoin ; disjoindre, to disjoin ; Poiridre, to dawn, break ; Oindre, to anoint. 17. Ecrire, to write. P. pr. ecrivant. P. p. ecri^. Pres. J'ecris, tu ecris, il 6crit, nous ecrivons, vous ecri^^ez, ils ^crivent, Suhj. Que j'ecrive, etc. 176 XXXIX. TRENTE-NEUVIEME LEgON. Pret. J'ecrivis, tu ecrivis, il ecrivit, etc. Fut. J'ecrirai. Imper. Ecris, ecrirons, ecrivez. Thus : De'crire, to describe ; circonscrire, to circumscribe ; inscrire, to in- scribe; prescrire, to prescribe, to order; rear ire, to write again, to answer; souscrire, to subscribe ; transcrire, to transcribe. VOCABULARY. La vache, the cow. partir, to set out. le pr^ceptew, the tutor. la marcke, course, the course. la difficulte, the difficulty. la cendre, the ashes. la vie, the life. la famee, the smoke. allemand, German. la chandelle, the candle. le meunier, the miller. THEME 39. 1. We milk the cows. 2. Soldiers ! follow me. 3. I will lead you to (the) victory. 4. I shall follow you. 5. This dog follows me everywhere. 6. You did not follow the lessons of your tutor. 7. The enemies were conquered. 8. You conquer all the difficul- ties. 9. That did not convince me. 10. They pursued (Pret.) the slave, but in vain {en vain). 11. She was sewing her gown. 12. These handkerchiefs are badly sewed. 13. I sewed them myself. 14. Does the miller grind the corn? 15. He has not ground it this morning. 16. He will grind it this evening. 17. I fear the rain. 18. We do not fear death ; why should we fear it? 19. I resolved {de) to set out. 20. We pursued our course. 21. I have at last (enfin) convinced him of the greatness of his fault. 22. The wood which is burnt ( qu'on hrule) resolves itself (se) into (en) ashes and smoke. 23. We pity the unfortunate. 24. You paint. 25. The young girl feigned to be ill. 26. Put out the candle and go to bed (aUez vous coucher). 27. The servant feared (de) to displease his master (a son maitre). 28. Chai-les wrote his trans- lation last night (Jiier an soir). IRREGULAR VERBS. 177 XL. QUARANTIEME LE9ON nmEGULAR VERBS. -^ FIRST CLASS CONTINUED. c. CI8 — 26. The vowel of the root is changed into u, in the Part, past and in the Preterite. ) *18. Lire, to read. P.pr. lisant. P.p. lu. Pres. Je lis, tu lis, il lit, nous lisons, vous lisez, ils llsent. Pret. Je lus, tu lus, U lut, nous lumes, vous lutes, etc. Imperf. Suhj. Que je lusse. Fut. Je lirai, tu liras, il lira, etc. Thus also : dire, to elect ; r^elvre, to reelect ; relirey to read over again. 19. Poire, to drink. P. pr. huvant. P. p. hu. Pres. Je bois, tu bois, il boit, nous bwvons, vous bwvez, ils boii'ent. Suhj. Que je boire, que tu boives, qu'il boive, que nous bw^ions, que vous bwviez, qu'ils boii;ent. Imperf. Je buvais. Pret. Je bus, tu bus, il but, nous bumes, vous butes, ils burent. Fut. Je boirai, tu boiras, etc. Imper. Bois, bwvons, bwvez. 20. Croire, to believe, to think. P. pr. croyant. P. p. cru. Pres. Je crois, tu crois, il croit, nous croyons, vous croyez, ils croient. Suhj. Que je crole, que tu croies, qu'il croie, que nous crqyions, que vous crqyiez, qu'ils croient. Pret. Je cms, tu crus, il crut, nous criimes, vous crutes, ils crurent. Fut. Je croirai, etc. Faire accroire qch. a qn., to make one believ©. , N. B. accroire is only used in the Infinitive. 12 178 XL. QUARANTIEMB LEgON. 21. Crottre, to grow. P. pr. croissant. P. p. cru. Pres. Je crois, tu crois, il croit, nous croi«5ons, vous croissez, ils croi^sent. Pret. Je crus, tu crus, il crut, nous crumes, etc, Fut. Je croitrai, etc. Thus : Accroitre, to increase j d^croitre, to decrease ; rearoitre, to grow again. 22. Plaire, to please. P. pr. plaisant. P. p. plu. Pres. Je plais, tu plais, il plait, nous plaisons, vous plaisez, ils plaisent. Suhj. Que je plaice, etc. Pret. Je plus, tu plus, il plut, nous plumes, vous plutes, ils plu- rent. Fut. Je plairai, tu plairas, etc. Thus : Se complaire, to delight in ... ; d^plaire, to displease. (S'il voiuf plait — if you please.) 23. Taire, to conceal. P. pr. taisant. P. p. tu. Pres. Je tais, tu tais, il tait, nous taisons, vous taisez, ils taisent. /Subf. Que je taise, que tu taises, qu'il taise, etc. Pret. Je tus, tu tus, il tut, nous tumes, vous tutes, ils turent. Fut. Je tairai. Thus : Se taire, to be silent. Pres. Je me tais, I am silent. Imper. Tais-toi, taisez-vous. Pret. Je me tus, I was silent. Comp. of the Pres. Je me suis tu, I have been silent. 24. Paraitre, to appear. P. pr. paraissant. P. p. paru. Pres. Je parais, tu parais, il parait, nous paraissons, vous parais- 5ez, il parai^sent. Suhj. Que je parai^se. Pret. Je parus, tu parus, il parut, etc. Fut. Je paraitrai. Thus : Apparaitre, to appear ; comparaitre, to appear before the judge ; disparaitre, to disappear ; reparaitre, to reappear. 25. Paitre, to graze. P. pr. paissant. Like paraitre, but no Pret. Thus : Repaitre, to feed ; with the Pret. Je repus. Part. repu. 26. Connaitre,* to know. P. pr, connaissant. P. p. connu. * Connattre ia used in connection with knowledge obtained through one of the five senses, — savoir in other cases. IRREGULAR VERBS. 179 Pres. Je connais, tu connais, il connait, nous connaissons, vous connabsez, etc, Pret. Je connus. Put. Je connaitrai. Thus : M^connaitre, to mistake, not to acknowledge ; reconnoitre, to recog- nize, to know again, to acknowledge. VOCABULARY. La conduite, the conduct. le jour, the daylight. triste, sad. sombre, dark. le traitement, the treatment. impossible, impossible. THEME 40. 1. What are you reading there? 2. Why did you read my let- ter? 3. I have not read it, and I shall not read it. 4. Head over again your lesson. 5. Dost thou drink water ? 6. No, 1 drink "wine and water. 7. When you are thirsty, what do you drink? 8. We drink fresh water. 9. Do you believe that ? 10. No, I do not believe it. 11. I thought (that) you had written your exercise, but I see (je vois) that I am mistaken. .12. She gi'ows every day. 13. These trees have grown T2i^\A\j (rapidement) . 14. He did not believe what I said. 15. I (have) thought that we would be here before six o'clock. 16. The young gentleman pleased by his conduct. 17. Be silent, Frederick. 18. Tell (to) your sister, if you please, to bring me her French grammar. 19. Do you know my brother? 20. No, I do not know him. 21. You appear sad, what is the matter with you {qu^ avez-vous) ? 22. Such a treatment (has) appeared to me very cruel. 23. The daylight has disap- peared. 1 80 XLI. QUABANTE ET tJNIEME LEgON. XLI. QUARANTE ET UNlfiME LE9ON IRREGULAK VERBS. — FIRST CLASS CONTIISTJEI). 27. Fcdre, to do, to make. P. pr. fai^ant.* P. p. fait. Pres. Je fais, tu fais, il fait, nous faisons, vous faites, ils font. Pres. Suhj. Que je fasse, que tu fasses, qu'il fosse, que nous fassions, que vous fassiez, qu'ils fassent. Imperf Je -faisais (fesais) , tu faisais, il faisait, etc. Pret. Je fis, tu fis, il fit, nous fimes, vous files, ils firent. Imperf. Suhj. Que je fisse, que tu fisses, qu'il fit, que nous fis- sions, que vous fissiez, qu'ils fissent. Fut. Je ferai, tu. feras, etc. Imper. Fais, fm'sons, faites. Conjugate in the same manner the compounds of fairs, viz. : d^faire, to undo, to loosen ; contrefaire, to counterfeit; rcfaire, to do again; sattsfaire, to satisfy ; surfaire, to exact, ask too much. 28. Mettre, to put. P. pr. mettant. P. p. mis. Pres. Je mets, tu mets, il met, nous mettons, vous mettez, ils mettent. Pres. Suhj. Que je mette. Imperf. Je mettais. Pret. Je mis, tu mis, il mit, nous mimes, vous mites, ils mirent. Imperf Suhj. Que je misse, que tu misses, qu'il mit, etc. Put. Je mettrai, tu mettras, etc. Thus : Admettre, to admit ; commettre, to commit ; demettre, to turn out ; omettre, to omit ; patnettre, to permit, to allow ; promettre, to promise ; com- promettre, to compromise, to expose ; remettre, to put again, to replace, to hand over ; soumettre, to submit ; transmettre, to transmit, to send. Se mettre a signifies to begin, as : U enfant se mit a pleurer, the child began crj'ing. 29. Prendre, to take. P. pr. prenant. P. p. pm. ♦For the pronunciation of faisant&rxd its derivatives see p. 18. IRREGULAR VERBS. 181 Pres. Je prends, tu prends, il prend, nous prewons, vous prewez, ils prewnent. Pres. Suhj. Que je pre?iwe, que tu prenwes, qu'il prewTie, que nous prewions, que vous premez, qu'ils prewnent. Imperf. Je prewais. Pret. Je pris, tu pris, il prit, nous primes, vous prites, ils pri- rent. Imperf. Suhj. Que je prisse. Fut. Je prendrai. Imper. Prends, prewons, prewez. Conjugate in the same manner the compounds of •prendre: Apprendre, to learn ; de'sapprendre, to unlearn ; rapprendre, to learn over again ; compren- dre, to understand ; entreprendre, to undertake ; m€prendre, to mistake ; re- prendre, to take again, to reply, to chide-; surprendre, to surprise. 30. N'attre* to be born. P. pr. naissant. P. p. ne. Pres. Je nais, tu nais, il nait, nous nai«sons, vous naissez, ils nais^ent. Imperf. Je naissais. Pret. Je naquis (I was bom), tu naquisj il naquit, nous naquu mes, vous naquites, ils naquirent, Fut. Je naitrai, tu naitras, etc. Thus also : Renaitre, to be bom again. Remark. When the person used as subject of the verb is living, the present instead of the past of the auxiliary is used with the past participle. Ex. : Mon pere est n€ en Angleterre, My father (still living) was born in England. 31. Vivre, to live. P. pr. vivant. P. p. vecu. Pres. Je vis, tu vis, il vit, nous vivous, vous vivez, ils vivent. Suhj. Que je vive ; hence the expressions : Vive ! pi. vivent ! long live ! Imper. Vis, vivons, vivez. Imperf. Je vivais. Pret. Je vecus, tu vecus, il vecut, nous vecumes, etc. Fut. Je vivrai. Thus also : Survivre {a qn.), to survive; revivre, to live again. * Verbs marked thus * take etre for an auxiliary, instead of vent. Suhj. Que je serve. Pret. Je servis. Fut. Je servirai. Thus also : Desservir, to clear the table ; se servir de, to make use of, to use. 35. Dormir, to sleep. P. pr. dormant. P. p. dormi. Pres. Je dors, tu dors, il dort, nous dormons, vous dormez, ils dorment. Suhj. Que je dorme. Pret. Je dermis, etc., like servir. Thus : Endormir, to lull asleep ; s'endormir, to fall asleep ; se rendormir, to fall asleep again. 36. Partir, to set out, to leave. P. pr. partant. P. p. parti. Pres. Je pars, tu pars, il part, nous partons, etc., like servir. Thus : Repartir, to set off again, to reply. Not to be confounded with r€partir, to distribute, which is regular. 184 XLII. QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LEgON. 37. Mentir, to lie. P. pr. mentant. P. p. menti, Pres. Je mens, tu mens, il ment, nous mentons, etc., like servir Thus also : D^nientir, to give tho lie. 38. Sejitir, to feci, to ^nell. P. pr. sentant. P. p. senti.. Pres. Je se?is, tu se7is, il 5ew^, nous scntons, etc., like servir. Thus : Consentir, to consent ; pressentir, to foresee ; rsssentir, to feel. 39. aSc repeniir de qch., to repent. P. j9r. se repentant. P.p. repenti. - Pres. Je me repens, I repent, etc., like sentir. 40. Sortir, to go out. P. pr. sortant. P. j9. sorti. Pres. Je sor^, tu sors, il sort, etc., like servir. Thus : Ressortir, to go out again. Ressortir, to resort, and cissortir, to assort, are regularly conjugated like j^niV. 41. Courir, to run. P. j^r. courant. P. p. courw. Pres. Je cours, tu cours, il court, nous courons, vous courez, ils courent. Suhj. Que je coure. Pret. Je qomtus, tu courus, il courut, nous courumes, vous cou- rutes, ils counirent. Fut. Je courrai, tu courras, il courra, nous courrons, vous cour- rez, ils courront. Imper. Cours, courons, courez. Thus : Accourir, to run to ; concourir, to compete ; discounr, to dis- course ; encourir, to incur ; parcourir, to run over ; recourir, to have re- course ; secourir, to relieve, to assist. 42. CueilUr, to gather. P. pr. cueillant. P. p. cueilli. Pres. Je cueillc, tu cueilles, il cueille, nous cueillons, vous cueil- lez, ils cueillent. Suhj. Que je cueille. Pret. Je cuoillis. Imper. Cueille,. cueillons, cueillez. Fut. Je cueillerai. Thus : AccueiUir, to receive ; recueillir, to gather. 43. Offrir, to offer. P. pr. offrant. P. p. offert. Pres. J'offre, tu oSves, il offre, nous offrons, etc. Pret. J'offi'is. Imper. Offre, ofirons, offi-ez. Fut. J'ofirirai. IRREGULAR VERBS. 185 44. Souffrir, to suffer. P. pr. souffrant. P. p. souffert, Pres. Je souffre, tu souffres, etc.,. like offrir. 45. Ouvrir, to open. P. pr. ouvrant. P. p. ouvert. Pres. J'ouvre, etc., like offrir. Thus : Rouvrir, to open again ; entr'ouvnr, to open a little. 46. Couvrir, to cover. P. pr. couvrant. P. p. convert. Thus : D€couvrir, to discover ; recouvrir, to cover over. 47. TressailUr, to start, to tremble. P. pr. tressaillant. P. p. tressailli. Pres. Je tressaille, tu tressailles, il tressaille, etc. Pret. Je tressaillis, etc. Fut. Je tressaillerai and je tressaillirai. Thus : Assaillir, to assault. ^ 48. SailUr, to put out, project. P. pr. saillant. P. p. sailli. Pres. third person, il saille, pi. ils saillent. Like tressaillir / but it is used only in the third person singular and plural. Saillir (=ja{ll{r), to gush, is regular. VOCABULARY. ^ Du mouton, mutton. fatigu^, tired. la voiture, the coach. la violette, the violet. m^priser, to despise. la livre, the pound". THEME 42. 1. The enemy flee. 2. Let us shun these places. 3. "^e clothe the poor. 4. The young girl was clad in black. 5. I cannot meet hun ; he shuns me. 6. Avoid bad company. 7. Your friend, Mr. A., does not serve me well. 8. I made use of your coach. 9. Tell me what he has done to you ; but, above all {surtout) , do not lie. 10. He who lies deserves to be despised. 11. I go out every day. 12. D,o not go out, Robert ; it is too cold. 13. If I were as ill as you, I would not go out of my room. 14. I feel the cold. 15. Do not make any (^de) noise, for my mother is asleep (sleeps). IG. I-hope she will sleep better io-ijigh^ (^cette nuit). 17. If I do 186 XLIII. QUARANTE-TEOISIEME LEgON. not walk a little, I shall fall asleep. 18. Do you not repent of what {de ce que) you have done? 19. I always repent when I have done wrong (maT). 20. Do not run so fast (vite), you will be tired. 21. They always run when they go to see then: aunt. 22. I ran faster than you. 23. If she is unhappy, I shall relieve her. 24. For whom are you gathering these violets? 25. I gather them for my mother. 26. The young lady has been received with the greatest kindness. 27. I always offer him my services. 28. He offered me a hundred pounds for my garden. 29. What are you doing there ? 30. I cover the plants with (de) snow. XLIII. QUARANTE-TROISIEME LE9ON. IRREaULAR VERBS. — THIRD CLASS. (49 — 53. Verbs in ir changing their radical vowel and taking the flexions of the third Conjugation.) 49. Mourir* to die. P. pr. mourant. P. p. mort. Pres. Je meurs, tu meurs, il meurt, nous mourons, vous mourez, ils meurent. Suhj. Que je meure, que tu meures, qu'il meure, que nous mourions, que vous mouriez, qu'ils meurent. Imper. Meurs, mourons, mourez. Pret. Je mourns, tu mourns, il mourut, nous mourumes, vous mourutes, ils moururent. Fut. Je mourrai, tu mourras, il mourra, etc. Thus also : Se mourir, to be near dying, to be fainting. Pres. Je me meurs, etc. 50. BouilUr, to boil, neut. v. P. pr. bouillant. P. p. bouilli. Pres. Je bous, tu hous, il hout, nous bouillons, vous bouillez, ils bouillent. • Suhj. Que je bouille. IRREGUI.AR VERBS. 187 ' Pret. Je bouillis. Fut. Je bouilk'rai. To boil, as an active verb, is rendered faire houillir, as : To boil potatoes, faire houiUir des pomm.es de terre. 51. Venir* to come. P. pr. venant. P. p. yenu. Pres. Je viens, tu v^ens, il v^ent, nous venons, vous venez, ils v^ennent. Pres. Suhj. Que je v^enne, que tu v^ennes, qu'il v*enne, que nous vcnions, que vous veniez, qu'ils viennent. Imperf. Je venais. Pret. Je vins, tu vins, il vmt, nous vinmes, vous vmtes, ils vm- rent. Imperf. Suhj. Que je vinsse, que tu vinsses, qu'il vmt, que nous vinssions, etc. Put. Je viendrai, tu vtendras, etc. Cond. Je vtendrais. Imper. Viens, venons, venez. Conjugate in the same manner: Convenir, to agree, to suit ; devenir* to become ; intervenir* to intervene ; parvenir* to attain, to reach ; pr^venir, to be beforehand with, to inform ; provenir* to arise, spring from, to pro- ceed ; se souvenir y to remember ; survenir* to happen ; subvenir, to relieve ; revenir* to come back (again). 52. Tenir, to hold. P. pr. tenant. P. p. tenw. This verb is conjugated like venir, as : Pres. Je tiens, tu t^ens, il tient, nous tenons, vous tenez, ils iien- nent. Suhj. Que je tienne. Pret. Je tins, tu tins, il tint, nous ttmnes, vous tzntes, ils tin- rent. Fut. Je tiendrai. Imper. Tiens, tenons, tenez. Thus also : Appartenir, to belong ; s'abstenir, to abstain ; contemr, to con- tain ; ddenir, to detain; entretenir, to keep up ; rnaintenir, to maintain ; o6- tenir, to obtain ; retenir, to retain ; soutenir, to sustain, uphold, support. 53. Acquerir, to acquire. P. pr. acquerant. P. p. acqms. Pres. J^acquiers, tu acqmers, il acqmert, nous acquerons, vous acquerez, ils acqmerent. Pres. Suhj. Que j'acqm'ere, que tu ac- quteres, qu'il acquiere, que nous acqu^rions, que vous acqueriez, qu'ils acqmerent. 188 XLin. QUARANTE-THOISIEME LEgON. Pret. J'acquis, tu acqu^s, il acqu^V, nous acqumcs, vous acquJ^e^, ils acquiVen^. J^p/. /S'zfJ;'. Que j'acquisse. Fut. J^acquerrai, tu acquerras, il acquerra, etc. Imper. Acqmers, acquerons, acquerez. Conjugate in the same manner : Conquerir, to conquer ; reconqw^rir, to conquer again ; requerir, to request, and s'enquenr, to inquire. Qu^rir, to seek, is used, in familiar conversation, after aller, venir, envoyer, as : allez qu€rir, go and seek. VOCABULARY. Le chagrin, grief. Vassiduite, f. assiduity. maladie, f. disease, illness. des connaissances, f. knowledge. douloureux, -se, painful. la chaleur, the heat. continuer, to continue. la partie, the part. la parole, the word. THEME 43. 1. Your friend is dying. 2. Mrs. A. died of (c?e) grief. 3. The old general died at Paris of a very painful disease. 4. Take the water off the fire ; it boils. 5. Boil that meat again, it has not boiled long enough. 6. Miss Emily is coming. 7. Dost thou come ? 8. Yes, I come. 9. Why do you not come when I call you? 10. He came to see me every morning. 11. Come back soon. 12. I shall be (come) back in an hour. 13. Mrs. B. would have come to us if it had not rained (plu). 14. I hope you will keep your word and (will) come to-morrow. 15. I maintain, and will always maintain, that you will not be happy without virtue. 16. I agree that Miss L. is the prettiest of the family ; but she is so proud, that I know {sais) not what will become of her (ce qu'elle . . .). 17. My uncle will not come back to-day. 18. Mr. S. will not obtain that situation (^ place). 19. If you study much, you will acquire knowledge. 20. I do not think (that) this color suits (to) your sister. 21. That hat would suit you very well, if you were a little taller. 22. Alexander the Great conquered the greatest part of Asia. 23. Your uncle has acquired a great name in America. 24. The young man did not survive (outlive) (to) that misfortune. 25. You will become a great man, if you continue to study with the same assiduity. I V IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 XLIY. QUARANTE-QUATRlfeME LE9ON. IRREGULAR VERBS. — THIRD CLASS CONTINUED. (54 — 66. Verbs in -wr. Contraction of the root and the terminations, Part, past and Pret. in m.) 64. Devoir, to owe, (ought to). P. pr. devant. P. p. du. Pres. Je dois* tu dots, il doit, nous devons, vous devez, lis doivent. Pres. Suhj. Que je doive. Pret. Je dus, tu dus, il dut, nous diimes, vous dutes, ils durent. Imperf. Suhj. Que je dusse. Put. Je devrai, tu devras, etc. Cond. Je devrais.* Thus also : redevoir. 55. Recevoir, to receive. P. pr. recevant. P. p. regu. Pres. Je regois, tu regois, il regoit, nous recevons, vous recevez, ils re^ozVent. Pret. Je re^ws, tu xq(^us, il iQ(^ut, nous rcQMwes, vous iQ^uteSy ils Te<;uren(. Put. Je recevrai, tu recevras, etc. Thus also : Decevoir, to deceive ; apercevotr, to perceive ; concevoir, to con- ceive ; percevoir, to collect. 56. Dechoir, to fall, to decay. (No P. pr.) P. p. dechu. Pres. Je dechois, tu dechois, il dcchoit, nous dccho^ons, vous dechoyez, ils dechoient. Subj. Que je dechoie. Pret. Je dechus, tu d^chus, il d^chut, nous dechiimes, vous d^- chutes, ils deehurent. Put. Je decherrai, tu decherras, ils decherra, nous dech5 — Voir, except the Pret. and Fut. IRREGULAR VERBS. 191 . 62. Savoir, to know. P. pr. sacAant. P. p. su. Pres. Je sm's, tu sais, il sait, nous savons, vous savez, ils savent. Subj. Que je sache, que tu sac^es, qu'il snche, que nous sac//ions, que vous sacAiez, qu'ils sacAent. Imperf. Je savais, tu savais, etc. Pret. Je sus, tu sus, il sut, nous sumes, vous sutes, ils surent. Put. Je sawrai, tu sawras, etc. Imper. Sache, sachons, sachez. "Wlien the woi'd can means to know how, it is rendered in French by sa?w, instead of poitvoir. Ex.: Saves-vous parler frangais ? Can you speak French ? Note. There is also an old form pf the Pros. Ind. Je sache. The Cond. Je ne saurais (without pas) signifies, I cannot, as : Je ne saurais vous diref I cannot tell you. 63. Valoir, to be worth. P. pr. valant. P. p. valu. Pres. Je vaux, tu vaux, il vaut, nous valons, vous valez, ils va- lent. Sul^. Que je vaille, que tu vailles, qu'il vaille, que nous valions, que vous valiez, qu'ils vaillent: Imperf. Je valais. Pret. Je valus, tu valus, il valut, nous valumes, etc. Put. Je vaudrai, tu vaudras, etc. Cond. Je vaudrais. Observe the expression : II vant mieux, it is better, etc. Conjugate in the §ame manner: prevaloir, to prevail; but it makes the Subj. pres.: Que je private (not pr^vaille), que tu pr^cales, qu'il private, que tious pr€valions, que vous prevaliez, qu'ils prevalent. 64. Vouloir, to be willing. P. pr. voulant. P. p. voulu. Pres. Je veux, tu veux, il veut, nous voulons, vous voulez, ils veulent. Subj. Que je veuille, que tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, que nous voulions, que vous vouliez, qu'ils veuillent. Imper. ( Veuille), veuiUez, be so kind as. Imperf. Je voulais. Pret. Je voulus, tu voulus, il voulut, nous voulumes, etc. Put. Je voudrai, tu voudras, etc. Cond. Je voudrais, I should like to. 192 XLir. QUARANTE'^UATRTEME LE^ON. The first person, je vmx, is mostly used to imply authority, command. Je desire is substituted as a more polite expression for the affinnative. Jo nc veux pas, is used, however, for the neyatice. G5. Voir, to see. P. pr. voyant. P. p. vu, Pres. Je vols, tu vois, il voit, nous voyons, vous voyez, ils voient. Jnipcrf. Jo voyais, tu voyais, etc. Pret. Je vis, tu vis, il vit, nous vimes, vous vites, etc. Put. Je verrai, tu verras, il verra, etc. Imper. Vois, voyons, voyez. Thus : Eerolr, to see again ; entrevolr, to have a glimpse of. For pour- voir and prtfvoir sec No. oO. Alter voir and venir voir cjn. are rendered : to call upon a person. 66. Sasseoir, to sit do\^n. P. pr. s'asscyant. P. p. assis. Pres. Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds, il s'assicd, nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils s^asseient. Or, je m'assois, etc. Jmperf. Je m'asseyais. Or, je m'assoyais, etc. Pret. Je m'assis, tu t'assis, il s'assit, nous nous assimes, vous vous assites, ils s'assirent. Put. Je massicrai, tu Vassieras, il s'assieray etc. Or, je m'as- mierai, tu t'asse/eras, il s'asse/era, etc. Imper. Assze^s-toi, assc^owsrnous, asseye2;-vous. VOCABULARY. Uri panier, a basket. ejoa/s, thick. le danger, the danger. Vherhe, f. the grass. /e ressort, the spring. humide, damp. le beau-frere, the brothcr-in-lavr. Ze bruit, la nouvelle, the report. r€p€ter, to repeat. arreter, to stop. coupable, criminal. I'adresse, f. the direction. /a ^r/ace, the looking-glass. THEME 44. 1. I am to copy my exercise. 2. We must set out. 3. You ought to come at two o'clock. 4. I receive a letter every day. 5. We receive our money from the banker (du banquier). 6. My friend received a basket filled with grapes (c/e raisins^. 7. The IREEGULAB VEPBS. 103 hunter perceived a bird on a tree. 8. They did not perceive the danger. 9. The spring which moves the whole machine is very- ingenious (ingenieux). 10. Does it rain? 11. No, it does not rain; but it will rain this evening. 12. If men do not provide for it (^), God will provide for it. 13. Before he left (avant de par- tir), he provided for («) all. 14. Can you come? 15. I cannot come, but my brother can (come). 16, We could see nothing, for it was dark (il faisait nuit). 17. I could do it myself, if I had time. 18. 3Iay you be happy ! I could do no better. 19. I know that he is your friend, but I did not know that he was your brother- in-law. 20. Do you know why he has (is) not come? 21. No, I do not know (it). 22. When you know {Fut.) your lesson, come and repeat it to me. 23. These pens are worth nothing. 24. It is (vaut) better to be unfortunate than guilty. 25. Can't you see that star? 26. I do not see it'. 27. Sit down there a minute. 28. Wliy do not you sit down? 29. Let us sit upon the grass. 30. I would sit down upon the grass, if it were not so damp. 31. Can you speak French ? 32. I can read, but I cannot speak [it]. 33. Is this report true? 34. I cannot (Cond.) tell (it) you. 35. He does not choose to (will not) eat. 36. If I chose (would), I should tell you where he lives. 37. What would you have me do (that I should do) {Imperf. Suhj.) ? 38. We could have stopped him, if we had chosen. 39. I send you herewith (ci-joint^ the direction of Mr. L. 40. I have found tbe ring which my cousin has lost, and I shall send it to her. 13 194 XLV. QUARANTE-CINQUIEME LEgON. XLY. QUARANTE-CINQUIEME LE9ON. IRREGULAR VERBS. — THIRD CLASS CONTINUED. 67. Rire, to laugh. P. pr. riant. P. p. ri. Pres. Je ris. Imperf. Je riais. Pr^t. Je ris, tu ris, il rit, etc. Fut. Je rirai. 68. Envoyer, to send. P. pr. envoyant. P. p. envoy^. Pres. J'envoie. Imperf. J'envoyais. Pret. J'envoyai. Fut. J^enverrat, tu enyerras, etc. Cond. J'enverrais. 69. Aller* to go. P. pr. allant. P. p. alle. Pres. Je vais, tu vas, il va, nous allons, vous allez, ils vont. Pres. Suhf. Que yaille, que tu ailles, qu'il aille, que nous alliens, que vous alliez, qu'ils aillent. Imperf. J'allais, tu allais, il allait, etc. Pret. J'allai, tu alias, il alia, nous allames, vous allates, ils allerent. Imperf SuhJ. Que j'allasse, que tu allasses, etc. Imper. Va, allons, allez. Perf Je suis alle, I have gone. Fut. J'irai {^I shall go), tu iras, il ira, nous ii-ons, vous irez, ils iront. Cond. J'irais, tu irais, etc. Conjugation of S^en aller, to go away. We give the reflective verb S'en aller, to go away, at full length, because its conjugation is rather difficult on account of its two pronouns. Observe that en is never separated from the objective m', f, s', nous, etc. ; hence it follows, that the compound or Perfect must not be written : Je me suis en all€, but je m'en suis alle, tu t'en es all€, etc. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Je m'en vais, I go away. nous nous en allons,tre go away. tu t'en vas, etc. vous vous en allez, etc. il s'en va, etc. ils s'en vont, etc. IRREGULAR VERBS. 195 Meg. Je ne m'en vais pas. tu ne t'en vas pas, etc. M'en vais-je,^TIT II ELISION. The vowels a, e, i, when final, are sometimes elided before a word beginning with a vowel or h mute ; thus : Vdme, Vhomme, s'il, in- stead of la dme, le homme, si il. Elision of a. A is elided only in the word la. Ex. : Vamitie. Elision of e. E is elided in the nine monosyllables je, me, te, le, de, ne, ce, se and qzie. Ex.: faime; c'est Vhomme quHl nestime jpas. Exceptions. — 1. The vowels of the pronouns le, la,je, and cearc never elided when they come after the verb. Ex. : Ai-je un livre ; est-ce elle. The e in je and ce is not pronounced, however, though the e and a of le and la are in voyez-la aujourd'hui, voyez-le aujourd'hui. ♦ 2. Before out and onze no elision takes place : je crois que out ; le onze. The E is elided in lorsque, when ; puisque, since ; quoique, though, only before il, elle,. on and un. Ex.: lorsquHU puisqu'on, etc. In quelque the e is elided only before un, une, and autre. Ex.: quelqu'un ; quelqu* autre. In entre and presque, e is elided only when they form part of a compound word. Ex.: entr'acte, presqu'Ue. Elision of ^. I is elided only in the conjunction si before il and ils. Ex.: s'^7, sHls. 206 I. PREMIERE LEgON. PREMIERE LE9ON. ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. I. EULES ON THE GENDER OF SIMPLE NOUNS. $1. MASCULINE BY THEIR SIGNIFICATION ARE : 1. The names of all masculine beings, as : Henri, Henry ; Vein' pereur, the emperor ; le maitre, the master ; le Frangais, the Frenchman; le taureau, the bull, etc. 2. The names of metals, trees, shrubs, seasons, months, and dctys, as : le fer, iron ; le chene, the oak ; le printemps, spring ; le joli Mai, (the) fine May ; (Ze) lundi, Monday, etc. 3. All words that are made substantive by prefixing the article, as: le vert, the green (color); le Men, the good; le hoire et le manger, drinking and eating ; le oui et le non, the yes and no. 4. Nouns expressing professions, titles, or qualities which belong generally to men : philosophe, orateur, etc. 5. The names generally used in natural history to designate the different species of animals : un quadrupede, un mammifere, un herbivore, etc. 6. The names employed in Chemistry to designate simple bodies and most of their compounds : Vor, le cuivre, Vhydrogene, Voxy- gene. 7. The names of the decimal nomenclature : le metre, le franc ^ le centime, etc. $2. MASCULINE BY TERMINATION: 1. Nouns ending in a consonant (except those in aison, ion, and. eur). 2. Nouns ending in any vowel except e miibo and e preceded by t or ti. 3. Nouns ending in e mute preceded by }>, g, I (not double), /w, ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 207 r (except rr not preceded by u),s, t (not double), orw (except those in ique) . To any rules for terminations, there will be found many exceptions. These rules are general. Most of the exceptions in common use, the pu- pil will learn as they occur in this grammar. $3. FEMININE BY SIGNIFICATION: 1. All names of female persons and animals, as : Marie, Mary; la reine, the queen ; la Jille^ the girl ; la jument, the mare, etc. 2. The names of fruits, flowers, and herbs, as : la poire, the pear ; la pomme, the apple ; la rose, the rose ; Vherhe, the grass. Except : Le marrm, the chestnut ; le citron, the lemon ; le raisin, the grape ; un ahricot, an apricot ; un (Billet, a pink ; le lis, the lily, and a few more, on account of their masculine termination. 3. The names of countries, places, and rivers ending in e mute, as : la France, la Prusse, Vancienne Rome, la Loire, la Seine, etc. Except : Le Hanovre, le Mexique, le Danube, le Rhone. $ 4. FEMININE BY TERMINATION: 1. Nouns ending with e mute, not included in the masculine ter- minations, as : la vie, life ; Vepee, the sword. 2. Those ending in aison, ion, and eur, as : la maison, the house ; la religion, la grandeur. 3. Those ending in e preceded by t or ti, as : la heaute, beauty. 4. These five words ending in i are feminine : la foi, faith ; la hi, law ; la fourmi, the ant ; la merci, mercy ; Vapres-midi. 5. Most nouns ending in oire (not oir) are feminine, as : la gloire, glory ; Vhistoire, history ; la victoire, victory ; la machoire, the jaw. 6. Gens. This word presents an anomaly in gender. It is masculine, but when an adjective precedes it, that adjective takes the feminine form, if its termination is not e mute. If a definitive, as tout or certain, precedes this adjective, the definitive also takes 208 I. PREMIERE LEgON. the feminine foi-m. In all other cases, gens takes a masculine adjective, as : Toutes les vieilles gens sont soupgonneux^ all old people are suspicious. But, Tous les jeunes getis. II. GENDER OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. This depends upon the manner of their composition. 1. When the first component is a noun, it determines the gender of the whole, as : Le chou-Jleur, the cauliflower ; un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; la fete Dieu. 2. When they consist of a preposition or an adjective and a noun, the gender of the noun remains for the whole, as : Le contre-coup^ the counter-buff; Vavant-hras, m. the fore-arm. 3. Those nouns compounded with a verb and noun are always of the masculine gender, as : Le porte-manieau, the portmanteau : le tire-houchon, the corkscrew ; le porte-feuille, the portfolio (though feuille 4s feminine) . THEME 1. Indicate the gender of the following nouns, by placing an article, either the definite or the indefinite, before them : The horse, — cheval. The pear, — poire. The metal, — metal. A winter, — hiver. Italy, — Italie. The cherry, — cerise. The cherry-tree, — cerisier. The house, — maison. The vapor, — vapeur. The walnut, — noix. A leaf, — feuille. The truth, — verite. The van-guard, — avant-garde. The cart, — charette. The work, — travail. The shell, — coquille. The hat, — cha- peau. The shoe, — Soulier. The honey, — miel. The carpenter, — charpentier. The nurse, — nourrice. The sun, — soleil. The earth, — terre. A year, — annee. The life, — vie. The feast, — fete. The treaty, — traite. The master-key, — passe-partout. The spit, — tourne-hroche. Christianity, — christianisme. III. DOUBLE GENDER OF SOME NOUNS. 1. The following nouns have a double gender : L'aide, m. the assistant. Uaide, f. the help, support. Vaiyle, m. the eagle. VaigUy f. the standard. ON THE GENDEK OF SUBSTANTIVES. 209 Vaune, m. the alder-tree. raune, f. the ell, yard. un couple, a couple, husband and wife, wne couple, a brace, two of a sort. un enseigne, an ensign. une enseigne, a sign. le garde, the keeper. la garde, the guard, watch. le guide, the guide. la guide, the rein in driving. le livre, the book. la litre, the pound. le manche, the handle. la manche, the sleeve. le m€moire, the memorandum. la m(fmoire, the memory. le mousse, the cabin-boy. la mousse., the moss. Vorgue, m. sing, the organ. les orgues, pi. organ, or organs. le page, the page (of a prince). la page, the page (of a book). un paillasse, a merry andrew. une paillasse, a straw-bed. PAques, pi. m. Easter. la pdque, the Passover. le pocle, the stove. la pocle, the frying-pan. le poste, the post, military post. la poste, the post-offce. un somme, a nap, slumber. la somme, the sum. le tour, the trick, turn. la tour, the tower. le trompette, the trumpeter. la trompette, the trumpet. un voile, a veil. une voile, a sail. 2. There are in French some nouns which have no particular form for the feminine, and remain always masculine, even when applied to a woman. Such are : Un auteur, ) , ^ ^, rr ... >• m. and f. an author, a writer. Un ecnvam, ) Un orateur, m. and f. an orator. Un peintre, m. and f. a painter. Un sculpteur, m. and f. a sculptor. Un t€moin, m. and f. a witness. Note. Sometimes the word femme may precede, as : Une femme auteur ^ les Jemmcs poetes. 3. On the contrary, there are a few feminine nouns which apply also to male individuals : La caution, the bail. la basse, the base. la pratique, the customer. la sentinelle, the sentry. IV. FORMATION OF FEMININE APPELLATIONS. 1. Male appellations which are originally adjectives, form their feminine according to the rules on the adjectives (see Part I., L. XVI.), as: 14 210 I. PREMIERE LEgON. MASCULINE. FEMININE. Ze Francais, the Frenchman. La Frangaise, the Frenchwoman. un Russe, a Russian. < une Russe, a Russian lady. un Juif, a Jew. uneJuive, a Jewess. Vepoux, the husband. V€pouse, the wife. le venf, the widower. la veuve, the widow. 2. Those ending in one of the nasal sounds an, on, ten (not ^w), and those in t double their w or ^ before the feminine e, as : Le paysan, the peasant. La paysanne, a peasant woman. le Hon., the lion. la lionne, the lioness. le chr€tien, the Christian. la chr^tienne, the Christian woman. le baron, the baron. la baronne, the baroness. 3. Many nouns ending in e mute form their feminine in esse, as : Le comte, the count. La comtesse, the countess. le negre, the negro. la n€gresse, the negress. le maitre, the master. Za maitresse,\hQ mistress. le prince, the prince. la princesse, the princess. 4. Those in -ewr change this termination into -euse : Lie danseur, the dancer. La danseuse, the dancer, y. fe chasseur, the hunter. Za chasseiise,* the huntress. 5. Many in -teur change it into -trice, as : L'acteur, the actor. L'actrice, the actress. /e bienfaiteur, the benefactor. /a bienfaitrice, the benefactress. Ze tuteur, the guardian. Za tutrice, the guardian, /, 6. The following nouns form their feminine in an irregular way : Le dieu, the god. La de'esse, the goddess. le due, the duke. la duchesse, the duchess. I'empereur, the emperor. I'lmpdratrice, the empress. Ze roi, the king. Za rei'ne, the queen. Ze ^^ros, the hero. Vheroine, the heroine. Ze gouverneur, the tutor. Za gouvemante, the governess. Ze serviteur, the man-servant. Za servante, the maid-servant. ■ Ze pccheur, the sinner. Za p^cheresse, the sinner /. Ze compagnon, the companion. Za compagne, the companion yi Ze ZoM/), the he-wolf. Za Zowye, the she-wolf. Ze wiM/ef, the mule. la mule, the mule J", le dindon, the turkey-cock. la dinde, the turkey-hen. * Chasseresse is a poetical form. ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 211 THEME 2. Form and write the feminine of the following masculine nouns, according to the above rules : The neighbor, le voisin;^ f. — . The hunter, le chasseur ; f. — . The dwarf, le nain ; f. — . The talker, le havard ; f — . The prisoner, le prisonmer ; f. — . The dumb man, le muet ; f. — . The teacher, Vinstituteur ; f. — . The patient, le malade ; f. — . The husband, Vepoux; f. — . The master, le maitre ; i. — . A musician, un musicien; f. — . The founder, le fonda- teur ; f. — . The Englishman, V Anglais ; f. — . The German, VAUemand; f. — . The actor, Vacteur; f. —r-. The inventor, f Vinventeur ; f. — . The liar, le menteur (root ment-, termination -eur) ; f. — . The traitor, le traitre ; f. — . The singer, le clian- teur ; f. — . The idler, le paresseux ; f — . The lion, le lion ; f. — . The tiger, le tigre ; f. — . READING LESSON. Un honn^te pere de famille, charge^ de biens et d'anndes, voulut regler d'avance^ sa succession entre ses trois fils, et leur partager ses biens, le fruit de ses travaux et de son Industrie. II en fit trois portions ^gales, et assigna h. chacun son lot. — Puis il leur dit : " II me reste encore un diamant de grand prix ; je le destine a celui de vous qui saura le mieux le meriter par quelque action noble et g^- nereuse, et je vous donne trois mois pour vous mettre en etat de Tobtenir." Aussitdt les trois fils se dispersent, mais ils se rassemblent au temps prescrit.^ Ils se presentent devant leur juge, et voici ce que raconte I'aine^ : " Mon pere, un Stranger s'est trouve dans des cir- constances qui Font oblige de me confier^ toute sa fortune : il n'avait de moi aucune surete, par 4crit,^ et n'aurait pu produire centre moi aucune preuve du depot ; mais je lui ai tout remis fidelement. Cette fidelity n'est>elle pas quelque chose de louable^? " ** Tu as fait, mon fils," lui repondit le viellard, " ce que tu devais faire. II serait honteux d'en agir autrement, car la probity est un devoir." 1. Laden. 2. Beforehand. 3. Prescribed, appointed. 4. The eldest. 5. To trust. 6. In writing. 7. Laudable. 212 PEEMIERE LEgON. CONVERSATION. Qui VQulut r^gler sa succession ? Un honnete pere de famille. Que fit-il h cet effet (for this pur- II partagea ses biens entre ses pose) ? trois fils. Que lui restait-il ? Un diamant de grand prix. A qui le destina-t-il ? A celui d'entre eux qui ferait une action noble et gene- reuse. Combien de temps leur donna-t-il H leur donna trois mois pour pour cola ? Que firent ensuite les fils ? Quelle avait ete Faction de I'aine ? Que lui dit le viellard ? obtenir ce prix. lis se disperserent, mais au bout du temps present, ils revin- rent a la maison. II avait remis fidelement a, un etranger la fortune que ce- lui-ci lui avait confiee sans re^u {receipt). Tu n'as fait, mon fils, que ce que tu devais faire. FIN Le second fils plaida^ sa cause a son tour, a peu pres en ces termes : " Je me suis trouve, pendant mon voyage, sur le bord d'un lac ; un enfant venait^ imprudemment de s'y laisser^ tomber ; il al- lait se noyer f je Fen ai tire, et je lui ai sauve la vie, aux yeux des habitants d'un village situe au bord de ce lac ; ils pourront attestor la verite du fait."* — "A la bonne beure," interrompit^ le pere. *' mais il n'y a point encore de noblesse dans cette action ; il n'y a que de Fhamanite." Enfin, le dernier des trois freres prit la parole. " Mon pere," dit-il, " j'ai trouve mon ennemi mortel, qui, s'etant egare la nuit, s'etait endormi, sans le savoir, sur le penchant^ d'un abime f le moindre mouvement qu'il eiit fait, au moment de son reveil,^ ne ON THE GENDER OP SUBSTANTIVES. 213 pouvait manquer^ de le precipiter ; sa vie etait entre mes mains ; j'ai pris soin de Feveiller'*' avec les precautions convenables, et I'ai tire de cet endroit^^ fatal." " Ah ! mon fils," s'ecria le bon pere avec transport, et en I'em- brassant tendrement, " c'est k toi, sans contredit,^^ que la bague^^ est due." 1. To plead. 2. Had just fallen. 3. To be drowned. 4, The fact. 5. To inter- rupt. 6. The slope. 7. Abyss. 8. Of his awakening. 9. Fail. 10. To wake. 11. Place, spot. 12. Without doubt. 13. The ring. CONVEESATION. Qu'ayait fait le second fils ? II avait sauve un enfant qui allait se noyer. Qui avait vu cela ? Les habitants d'un village situe au bord du lac. Enfin, quelle avait ^te Faction II avait retire son ennemi endormi du dernier dcs trois freres ? au bord d'un abime, ou le moindre mouvement I'eut pre- cipite. Laquelle de ces trois actions Celle du plus jeune fils. etait la plus noble ? Les actions des deux autres Non, la premiere etait une action n'etaient-elles pas nobles et de justice, la seconde une action genereuses ? d'humanite. Et qu'est-ce queluiditle pere? II s'ecria avec transport : " Moa fils, c'est a toi, sans contredit, que la bague est due." 214 II. DEUXIEME LEgON. II. DEUXIEME LE9ON, PLURAL OF NOUNS. ~ (See Part I. Lesson 2, p. 30.) The general rules on this subject have already been given in the second lesson of Part I. We have to add here the following particulars. 1. Nouns of two and more syllables, ending in -ant and -ent, are spelled by some French writers in the plural -ens and -arts, instead of -ents and -ants, as : momens for moments, enfans for enfants. This orthography, however, is not to be recommended. 2. The following nouns in al and ail do not form their plural in T,ux, but take an s. Le hal, the ball. V^ventail, m. the fan. le cat, callus^ V€pouvantail, m. the scarecrow. le narval, the narwhal. un poi-tail, a portal, front gate. le carnaval, the carnival. le poitrail, the poitrel. le rd'gal, the regale, treat. le serail, the seraglio. le detail, the particulars. rail, garlic (has in Plur. both les le gouvemail, the helm, rudder. ails and les aulx). Plural : Les bals, les cals, les details, les €ventaih, etc. Note. Le h€tail, cattle, makes in the plural les hestiaux. 3. The usual plural of del is cieux, the heavens ; there is, how- ever, a regular plural, les dels, meaning : 1, the testers; 2, the cli- mats ; 3, the skies of pictures. 4. L'ceil, the eye, has in the plural les yeux.- Des ceils de hceuf are oval or round windows. Aieul, has ateuls when it means gfand- fatbers, and a'ieux in the sense of ancestors. 5. How compound words form their plural : — 1. When a word is composed of a substantive and an adjective, Or of two substantives, both take thp- mark of the plural. Ex.: — PLURAL OF NOUNS. 215 Zes heau-s.-freres, the brothers-in-law. Les belles-sceurs, the sisters-in-law. Les chouyi-Jieurs, the cauliflowers. Les chefs-lieux, the chief- towns (of counties). 2. But when a word is composed of two substantives separated by a pre- position, the first alone takes the plural termination. Ex.: — Les ckefs-d'osuvre, the masterpieces. Les arcs-en-cid, the rainbows. 3. When a word consists of a substantive and a verb or preposition, the substantive alone can take the sign of the plural, if requked by the sense. Ex.: — Les tire-hottes, tfie boot-jacks. Les essuie-mains, the towels. Les garde-fous, the balusters. 4. "When there is no substantive in the compound word, none of the components can take the mark of tMfe plural. Ex.: — Les passe-partout {not passe-partouts), the master-keys. Les forte-piano, the pianos. ' 5. The words : la grand'mere, the grandmother ; la grand'tante, grand- aunt ; la grand'rue, the main street ; la grand' route, the highway, — have, in the plural, les grand'meres, les grand'tantes, etc. 6. The following nouns take in the plural another meaning than in the singular : — SINGULAR. PLURAL. Le ciseau, the chisel. les ciseaux, the scissors. la lunette, the telescope. les lunettes, the spectacles. le fer, iron. les fers, the fetters, chains. la grace, grace, pardon. les graces, grace, charms. le gage, the pawn, pledge. les gages, the wages. la mesure, the measure. les mesures, the measures. la viande, meat. les viandes, food. la troupe, the troop. les troupes, the troops. la lumiere, the light. les lumieres, knowledge. I'aboi, the barking. les ahois, agony. la defense, the defence. les d€fenses, the tusks, fangs. 7. Substantives which have no singular in French : — Les annales, f. annals. les gens, m. people. les ancetres, m. ancestors. les hardes, f. clothes. 216' n. DEUXIEME LEgON. les alentours, m. > . las Ugiimes, m. vegetables. les environs, m. ) ^ enviions. ^^^ mathematiques, f. mathematics. les broussailles, f. brushwood. les mate'riaux, materials. les desagr6able. 12. La jpeinture. 13. La poesie. 14. Veiements. 15. Peur, f. III. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE IS OMITTED \ 1. Before the ordinal numbers which come after the names of sovereigns, as : Henry the Fourth, Henri quatre. Louis the Eighteenth, Louis XVIII {dix-huit). George the Third, George trois. 2. Before the ordinal numbers used in quotations, as : Book the first, chapter the fifth. Livre premier, chapitre cinq. 222 III. TROISIEME LEgON. 3. Before plus, used in the sense of the more. Ex. : Plus je la vols, plus je I'aime, the more I see her, the more I love her. IV. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE IS OMITTED IN FRENCH I 1. Before national and professional names, when the subject is a noun or personal pronoun, as : Je suis Anglais, I am an Englishman. Mon pere dlait medecin, my father was a physician. Note. But it is expressed after c'est and void or voila, and also when the noun is qualified. C'est un Anglais, he is an Englishman. Voici un officier, here is an ofiicer. M. Dubois etait un m€decin distingu^, Mr. Dubois was a distinguished phy- sician. 2. It is also omitted in appositions, that is, when a substantive is used to qualify another, as : L'avare, comedie par Moliqfe, the Miser, a comedy by Moliere. Auguste, Jils de M. S., Augustus, a son of Mr. S. Munich, ville d'Allemagne, Munich, a city of Germany. 3. In the title of a book : A French grammar, Grammaire frangaise. A history of England, Histoire d'Angleterre. 4. After the word quel, used to express surprise : What a noise you make ! quel bruit vous faites ! 5. Before the words, quantite, a quantity; nombre, a numbc, force, a great number, when they are used adverbially. Ex, : Je I'ai vu nombre de fois, I have seen him many times. // m'a donn€ quantity de jolies chases. He gave me a great many pretty things. 6. The indefinite article is left out in French and supplied by par, before substantives that denote time, or in mentioning what is paid for salary, wages, etc. : Eive guineas a month, cinq guin^espar mois. So much a lesson, tant par lecon. 7. Sometimes after Jamais, never, as : Jamais g€n€ral ne s'est plus distingu€. Never has a general distinguished himself more. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 223 8. In the following and other expressions, in which the noun and verb are inseparably connneeted : Trouver moyen, to find (a) means. Faire signe, to make a sign. Faire present, to make a present. Mettre Jin, to put an end or stop. Livrer hataille, to fight a battle. Prendre exemple, to take an example. Bendre service, to retider a service. Ne dire mot, to say not a word. THEME 5. 1. Book the tenth, chapter the third. 2.* Charles the Seconc?, king of (c?') Spain, son of Philip the Fourth, left his kingdom (roy- aume) to Philip the Fifth. 3. William the Third, king of Eng- land, married (^epousd) the princess Mary, daughter of James (^Jacques) the Second. 4. Apelles was a painter.^ 5. Socrates'* was a philosopher, Cicero^ an orator (^-teur). 6. Is your father a physician? 7. No, sir; he is a lawyer {avocat), 8. Henry's uncle is a skilful^ physician. 9. Who is that gentleman ?^ 10. He is {c'est) an officer. 11. How much do you charge {demandez- vous) for your lessons? 12. I charge ten francs a lesson. 13. A Grerman Grammar. 14. A Roman history, from the foundation^ of Rome to {jusqu^a) the destructioTi of the Roman empire. 15. What an unhappy situation ! 16. How much does the bookseller^ pay you for your novels?^ 17. He pays me five crowns {ecus) a sheet.^ 18. We went to Cae^z, a large town of Normandy.^^ 19. The Duke of York, a prince of the blood royal. 20. I am read- ing the " Misanthrope," a comedy by Moliere. 21. I shall find a means to satisfy^^ him. 22. He said not a word. 23. Our neigh- bor made us a sign to leave^^ the room. 1. Peintre. 2. Socrate. 3. Ciceron. 4. Habile. 5. Monsieur. 6. Fondation, 1. Lihraire. 8. Roman, m. 9. Feuille. 10. De Normandie. 11. Satisfaire. 12, Quitter. 224 III. TROISIEME LEgON. V. THE ARTICLE IS OMITTED IN BOTH LANGUAGES I 1. In many proverbs, as : Contentenient passe richesse, content surpasses wealth. Pauvrete n'est pas vice, poverty is no disgrace. Mauvaise kerbe croit toujours. 2. In enumerating several substantives in the partitive sense, when summed up by tons or rien, as : Homines, femmes, enfants, tons voulaient le voir. Men, women, children, all wished to see him. 3. After ni — ni, soit — soit, when the nouns are taken in the partitive sense, as : ^ Ni or ni argent, neither gold nor silver. Ni prieres, ni menaces ne pouvaient ['engager a, etc. Neither prayers nor threats could induce him to, etc. Soit crainte, soit ignorance, il ne voulait rien dire. Be it fear or ignorance, he would say nothing. 4. The partitive article is further omitted after prepositions when the noun following forms with them an adverbial phrase, as : Avec plaisir, with pleasure. par jour, daily, a day. avec patience, with patience. ' par an, yearly, a year. avec soin, with care. par mois, monthly, a month. avec deqance, elegantly. sur mer, } . ^ , r bv water bv sea. sans argent, Avithout money. par mer, j *^ ' J ' sans facons, without ceremonies. sur terre, ) , , , . . , ,1 r by land. sans peine, without trouble. par terre, ) sans peril, without danger. sous peine de mort, on pain of death. 5. No article is used before -a substantive which is repeated with a preposition, as : Promesses sur promesses, promises upon promises. De temps en temps, from time to time. De siecle en siecle, from age to age. 6. In the following expressions, where the noun forms but one idea with the verb antecedent, as : Avoir /aim, to be hungry. '^ prendre patience, to have patience. avoir soif, to be thksty. prendre soin, to take care. USE OF THE ARTICLE. 225 avoir soin, to take care. Jaire grace, to grant pardon. avoir peur, to be afraid. /aire attention, to pay attention. avoir bonne mine, to look well. faire grand cas, to value. avoir pitie, to have pity. faire peur, to frighten. avoir honte, to be ashamed. ' faire mention, to mention. avoir raison, to be right. faire fortune, to make one's fortune. avoir tort, to be wi'ong. rendre compt , ' to account for. avoir sujet, to have occasion for. rendre raison, ) avoir dessein, to intend. rendre visite, to visit. avoir envie, to have a desire, a mind. porter envie, to envy. avoir besoin, to want. courir risque, to run risk. avoir coutume, to be in the habit, to demander pardon, to beg one's par- use, don. prendre part, to join. demander grace, to beg for grace. prendre garde, to take care. ajouter foi, to give credit. prendre conge', to take leave. 7. Further, after many verbs which are followed by de, a, or e», as : — Combkr de bienfaits, to load with benefits. Vivre de pain, to live upon bread. Monter a cJieval, to mount (get) on horseback. Monter en voiture, to enter a carriage. Tomber de cheval, to fall from Horseback. Descendre de cheval, to alight. Se mettre a table, to go to dinner. Se lever de table, to rise from dinner. Perdre de vue, to lose sight of. Mourir de faim, to die of hunger. Monrir de froid, to die of cold, to freeze. Trembler de peur, to tremble with fear. Etre malade de chagrin, to be ill with grief. THEME 6. 1. Charity^ begins at home (par soi-meme). 2. Necessity has no law (loi). 3. Games,^ conversatio/i, theatre, nothing diverts (distrait) him. 4. Nobody was satisfied ; father, uncles, aunts and brothers, all thought themselves (se crurent) neglected.^ 5. This man has neither vices nor virtues ; neither talents nor defects.* 6.. 15 226 HI. TROISIEME LEgON. We expected our friend from day to day. 7. It does not suffice to heap (^d'entasser) facts^ upon facts to load^ your memory ; you must exercise' also your judgment.^ 8. I shall do it with pleasure. 9. One florin a day. 10. Ten pounds a year. 11. The poor woman was starving with hunger and (with) cold. 12. You are always right ; I have been wrong. 13. Have pity on (de) my weakness.* 14. The least noise^'^ frightens me. 15. Thoso whu» speak without reflection, are exposed to many (« Men des) errors. 16. I must take leave of you. 17. Many poor people live on (c?e) bread and potatoes only. 18. The king has granted {fait) him [his] pardow. 1. Charite. 2. Jeu^ m. 3. Negliges. 4. Defaut. 5. Le fait. 6. Charger. 7. Exercer. 8. Jugement. 9. Faiblesse. 10. Bruit, va.. READING LESSON. DEMOSTHijNB. Demosthene, jeune homme d'Athenes, avait grande envie de de- venir orateur habile ; mais la nature semblait lui en avoir refuse tous les moyens. D'abord il begayait^ a I'exces ; puis il ne pouvait prononcer la lettre R. ; ensuite il avait une voix desagreable et glapissante,^ et de faibles poumons.^ D'autres ajoutent qu'il avait encore la mauvaise habitude de lever I'epaule^, quand il avait prononce trois ou quatre mots. Aussi, la premiere fois qu'il harangua le peuple, il s'en tira si mal, qu'il fut siffle^. Tout autre que lui aurait a jamais perdu courage. Mais Demos- thene prit patience et resolut, en d^pit^ de la nature, de devenir boa orateur, et il le devint. Ecoutez comment il s'y prit/ Quelquefois il allait au bori de la mer, dans I'endroit ou les vagues^ venaient se briser (break') avec fracas.* La, il debitait^* un discours a haute voix, pour s'accoutumer a dominer le tumulte d'une assemblee populaire. D'autres fois, il mettait dans sa bouche de petits cailloux {peb- bles) ; puis il courait en gravissant^^ une montagne et en declamant, USE OF THE ARTICLE. 227 afin de se contraindre^ a prononcer clairement jusqu'a la moindre syllabe. Enfin, on dit qu'il s'exer9ait a parler dans une cliambre souter- raine,^^ et que pour se mettre dans la necessite de rester longtemps enferme, il s'etait fait raser^'' la moitie de la tete. II se plagait des heures entieres devant un miroir, pour se donner une bonne contenance et des gestes convenables. On dit qu'il se mettait aussi I'epaule nue immediatement sous la pointe d'une epee,^* afin qu'elle le piquat,^'' toutes les fois que, d'apres sa mau- vaise habitude, il ferait son mouvement d'epaule. C 'est par des exercices soutenus^^ de ce genre, joints a une etude profonde des sciences, qu'il se rendit enfin le plus grand orateur qui ait existe ; et aujourd'hui encore, apres tant de siecles,^^ ses ha- rangues sent admirees comme des chefs-d'oeuvre d'eloquence. 1. To stammer. 2. Shrill. 3. Lungs. 4. Shoulder. 5. To hiss. 6. In spite of. 7. To manage. 8. The waves. 9. Noise. 10. To deliver. 11. To climb. 12. To force. 13. Subterranean. 14. To shave. 15. A sword. 16. To sting. 17. Con- tinued. 18. Century. CONVERSATION. « La nature avait-elle favorise Au contraire, elle semblait lui Demosthene? avoir refuse tous les moyens de devenir orateur. Quels di^fauts avait-il done ? II begayait et ne pouvait pronon- cer la lettre r. Comment ^tait sa voix ? Elle etait desagreable et glapis- sante. Comment s'en tira-t-il, lorsqu'il II s'en tira si mal qu'il fut sifB4 pronon9a son premier dis- (hissed). cours ? Fut-il decourage par co resul- Non, il ne perdit pas courage; au tat? contraire, il persista dans son desscin. Et comment s'y prit-il ? " II s'exer9ait continuellement et do differentes manieres. 228 IV. QUATRIEME LEgON. Dites-moi comment. II mettait de petits cailloux dans sa bouche pour se defaire (rid of) de I'habitude de begayer. Esfc-ce qu'il r^ussit dans ses ef- II r^ussit si parfaitement qu'il de- forts ? vint a la fin le plus grand ora- teur qui ait existe. Ses harangues existent-elles en- Oui, elles ont ^te conserv^es, et core ? elles sont encore aujourd'hui ad- mirees comme des chefs-d'oeuvre d'eloquence. lY. QUATRIEME LE9ON. SPECIAL USE OF DE AND A. * In general we may say de is used when made of, composed of, coming from, belonging to, can be understood ; whereas a is employed when for the purpose of is meant. I. DE IS USED : 1. After adverbs of quantity, as : heaucoup, peu, plus, moins, tant, etc. (See Part I. L. 6, p. 42.) 2. Before a limiting word which follows a noun used partitively and preceded by a word denoting quality. Ex. : — II y cut deux hommes de tu^s, there were two men killed. Void qudque chose de plus, here is something more. Void un homme de trop, here is a man too many. J'ai deux chambres de loupes, I have two rooms let. Note. The noun may be understood. Ex.: J'en ai une de lon€e. Or Hen or personne may supply the place of the noun and its preceding word^ Ex.: // n'y a personne de malade chez nous, there is no one sick at our house. Rien de bon, nothing good. SPECIAL USE OF DE AND A. 229 8. As in English, after nouns expressing quantity, number ^ measure, weight, etc., as : — Une quantitede noix, a quantity of walnuts. Unepaire de has, a pair of stockings. Une livre de beurre, a pound of butter. Une piece de toile, a piece of linen. Un morceau de fromage, a piece of cheese. Une main de papier, a quire of paper. Une houteille de vin, a bottle of wine. 4. After adjectives denoting dimension or age, as : ■— A wall twenty feet high : un mur haul de vingt pieds or un mur qui a vingt pieds DE haut or de hauteur. A boy ten years old, un (petit) gargon de dix ans. A table six feet long, une table longue de six pieds or de six pieds de longueur. Note. It may be observed here that with adjectives of dimension, the verb to he may be rendered in French by avoir, as : — This tower is 120 feet high. Cette tour a cent vingt pieds de hauteur. 5. When an English adjective is rendered in French by a noun, the order of the substantives is inverted in English. In French the latter is preceded by c?e. Ex.: — A witty man, un homme d'esprit, A gold watch, une montre d'or. Silk stockings, des has de soie. The Russian Ambassador, Vamhassadeur de Russie, Irish linen, la toile d'Irlande. Spanish wool, la laine d'Espagne. Burgundy wine, le vin de Bourgogne. 6. i>e is used, as in English, after a common noun followed by its proper name . Ex . : — Le royaume d'Espagne, the kingdom of Spain. L'ile de Make, the island of Malta. La ville de Londres, the city of London. Le lac de Geneve, the lake of GcneVa. Except the combinations with mont, rue, place, and e'glise, as : le Mont Blanc, le Mont Etna, rue Richelieu, place Vendome, I'dglise Saint-Sulpice, etc. 230 IV. QUATRIEME LEgON. 7. After many adjectives it takes the place of the English with^ from, of, hy, in, etc. (See L. 8, compl. of adj. 1.) Ex.: — Full of ardor, plein de feu. Greedy after money, avide d'argent. Dresised in black, vetu de noir. I am pleased with my situation. Je suis content de ma position. I am deprived of everything, je suispriv^de tout. 8. JDe is used for than, instead of que, after plus, more, and moins, less, when these adverbs are followed by a numeral adjective or substantive : — H a plus de six ans, he is more than six years old. 9. For in, after a superlative, before the name of a place : — Une des meilleures institutions de Boston, one of the best institutions in Boston. Les gav^ons de notre ^cole, the boys in our school. FRENCH COMPOUND NOUNS WITH DE. ^ 10. English nouns compounded with two substantives are gener- ally rendered in French by two separate substantives joined by de, when one expresses the nature, species, or quality of the other. (Compare p. 240, 2.) In French the order must be altered, the last coming first, and a preposition inserted. Westminster bridge, for instance, must be translated as if it were bridge of Westminster : le pont de Westminster. 1 . Z)e is used when coining from, belonging to, made of can be understood, as: — A toothache, un mal de dents. A headache,,"Mn mal de tete. The town-hall, I'hotel de ville. A sea-fish, un poisson de mer. A feather-bed, un lit de plumes. A holiday, un jour de fete. A gold mine, une mine d'or. , ' The moon-light, le clair de lune. A masterpiece, un chef-d'ceuvre. SPECIAL USE OF DE AND A. 231 2. When in the English word the second component denotes a person or an animal, in French de is always used, as : — A schoolmaster, un maitre d'^cole. A chambermaid, une femme de chamhre. The dancing-master, le maitre de danse. The music-mistress, la maitresse de musique. A saddle-horse, un cheval de sdle. A sea-fish, un poisson de mer. THEME 7. 1. Give me mucli bread and little meat. 2. You must use more prudence. 3. I have bought a quantity of apples and pears. 4. You make too much noise. 5. How many children has your aunt? 6. She has four children. 7. You have eaten too many cherries. 8. We have not bread enough.* 9. Mr. Henry has a great many friends. 10. We had a great deal of pleasure. 11. I bought a pound of cheese. 12. We want a dozen pens, a bottle of ink, and two quires of paper. 13. A great number of friends remained attached^ to me. 14. They have built a wall eighty feet long and ten feet high. 15. How many boys were there killed ? 16. There were six killed (see § 2). 17. How many soldiers were there wounded? 18. There were six books lost. 19. How many were there found? 20. How many rooms are there let in that house? 21. Have you anything good? 22. I have nothing bad. 23. When my sister was a gu-1 of seven years, she hved with my mother in Italy. 24. Have you a gold or a silver watch ? 25. My watch is of gold. 26. Irish linen is as^ good as Dutch^ linen. 27. I prefer Burgundy wine to Spanish wine. 28. The kingdom of Spain is larger than the kingdom of Portugal. 29. The city of Paris is older than the city of Berliw. 30. Is that gentleman* your music- master? 31. No ; he is my writings-master. 1. Attaches. 2. Aussi. 3. D^Hollande. 4. Monsieur. 5. ]^criture,f. * Assez, enough, is placed after the substantive in English, and always before in French. 232 IV. QUATRIEME LEgON. THEME 8. 1. To-morrow is (c'est) a holiday; it will be a day of happi- ness.^ 2. Human life is full of disappointments.^ 8. Mr. E. is a young man endowed* with {d') wit^ and judgment. 4. We were very much pleased with his behavior.^ 6. I was in England, but I have not seen Westminster bridge. 6. Burgundy wine is very dear. 7. Spanish wool is better than German wool. 8. I have sold my gold watch. 9. Mr. B. always wears^ silk stockings. 10. My sisters and I (we) have taken^ a walk by («w) moonlight. li. The battle-field was covered with the dead and dying. 12. This girl is the chambermaid of the Duchess of L. 13. Who are these gentlemen ? 14. One is my music-master, and the other is my sister's dancing-master. 15. Let us go to (allons dans) the dining-room; dinner is served (servi). 16. I shall not dine to- day ; I have a bad^ headache. 1. Fete. 2. Bonheur. .3. Revere. 4. DouL 5. Esprit, 6. Conduite, f. 7. Por- ter. 8. To take a walk = se promener. 9. Violent. II, SPECIAL USE OF a. 1. The preposition a alone (without article) is used after a verb in the following expressions : Condamner a mort, to condemn to death. Fermer a fief, to lock. Tomher a terre, to fall to the floor or ground. Aller a pied, to go on foot, to walk. Aller a cheval, to ride, to go on horseback. Monter a cheval, to get or mount on horseback. Tomher a qenoux, > , . , ^ f >• to kneel down. be mettre a genoux, ) Se mettre a table, to sit down to dinner. 2. When two substantives make a compound word in English, theu- order is inverted in French, and the preposition a intervenes, when the one expresses the use of the other, or when for the pur- pose of, by means of, may be understood : The silk-worm, le ver a soie. SPECIAL USE OF DE AND AT 233 . A milk-pot, un pot a lait.* A teacup, une tasse a tM. A repeater, une montre a repetition. A windmill, un mouUn a vent. A paper-mill, un moulin a papier. A powder-mill (a mill for powder), un moulin a poudre. Gunpowder, de la poudre a canon. A dining-room, une salle a manger. A bedroom, une chambre a coucher. A wineglass, un verre a vin.* A coffee-cup, une tasse a caf€. A steam-engine, une machine a vapeur. A steamboat, un bateau a vapeur. Fire-arms, des armes a feu. 3. If the second word begins with a vowel or h mute, the article is commonly inserted, as : An ink-bottle, une bouteille a Vencre (ox a encre). A water-jug (pitcher), une cruche a Veau (or a eau). 4c. When the compound word denotes a place where certain things are sold or kept in quantities, the article is also used with a, as : The horse-market, le march€ aux chevaux. The fish-market, le march€ aux poissons. The corn-market, la kalle aux bUs. 5. A together with the article is further used to call a dish or drink after its principal ingredient, as : A ^nilk-soup, une soupe au lait. Coffee with milk, du caf€ au lait. A cream-tart, une tarte a la crime. A pancake with herbs, une omelette aux fines herbes. Note. But we say du syrop de groseille, not sr/rop a groseille, currant- syrup, because this is made entirely of currants. 6. To denote the different kinds of hunting, shooting, etc., as : A deer-hunt, la chasse aux chevreuils. Fox-hunting, la chasse aux renards. 7. ^ is generally employed to translate expressions in which with * Un pot de lait, un verre de vin, signify a pot of milk, a glass of wine; pot au lait refers both to the vessel and to its contents. 234 IV. QUATRIEME LEgON. is expressed or could be employed, or when having could be used, Ex.: Une maison a deux ^ages, a two-story house. Un cJiapeau a grands lords, a broad-brimmed hat. Une voiture a deux places, a double-seated carriage. THEME 9. 1. I have bought six teacups ; take^ them into the dining-room. 2. Where is the oiP-bottle ? 3. Who has broken this jlower-pot ? 4. Bring me a wineglass and two teaspoons. 5. Why has he been condemned to death ? 6. He has committed^ a murder. 7. Your room is locked. 8. Is this an ink-bottle ? 9. No ; it is a vinegars-bottle. 10. Let us sit down (mettons-nous) to dinner. 11. Did you observe^ that man with^ black hair ? 12. You must buy another milk-pot. 13. Is this the corn-market'^ 14. I always keep (keep always) fire-arms in my bedroom for my safety during the night ; but I have no gunpowder at present, thus (ainsi) my fire-arms are useless.^ 1. Portez. 2. Huile, f. 3. Commls, P. p. of commettre. 4. Vinaigre, 5. Remar- quer. 6. Aux, pi. 7. Surete, f. 8. Inutile. THEME 10. 1. Whom have you called ? 2. I have been to the fish-market ; however I have bought no fish, because it was too dear.^ 3. I went fox-hunting yesterday, and to-morrow I shall see a deer-hunt. 4. What had you for dessert ? 5. We had cherry-pie'' and a crearr? tart.*^ 6. Can you tell me where the hay-store is? 7. It is near the horse-market. 8. Who invented gunpowder'^ 9. Ber- thold Schwarz, a German monk.* 10. The poor girl has broken a milk-pot, two wineglasses, and several teacups. 11. The Great Eastern is the largest steamship in the (au) world. 12. Call the milk- woman f I must buy a pot of milk. 1. Cher, 2. Gateau. 3. Crime, f. 4. Tourte, f. 5. Moine. 6. Laitikre. NAMES OF COUNTRIES, TOWNS, ETC. 235 Y. CINQUIEME LE9ON. PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NAMES OF COUNTRIES, TOWNS, ETC. (See Part I., L. VII.) 1. As mentioned in the First Part (7tli lesson), the definite ar- ticle is put before the names of countries, provinces, rivers, and mountains. But the names of countries and islands, which have the same name as cities situated in them, such as Naples, Bade, Genes (Genoa), Malte, Gandie, etc., are used without the article. Except, however : le Hanovre and le Luxembourg. 2. Further, the definite article is always retained with names of countries which are only used in the plural, and in those which are compounded with an adjective. Ex.: -^— The productions of India, les productions des Indes. The governor of the Netherlands. Le gouverneur des Pays-has. The queen of Great Britain. La reine de la Grande-Bretagne. 3. In the following cases de only, without the article, is used be- fore names of countries : — 1. "When sovereigns, courts, and titles are spoken of. Ex.: — • La reine d'Angleterre, the queen of England. Le Grand-due de Bade, the grand-duke of Baden. Note. With the names of some countries that are not European, the article is generally used, as : — L'empereur de la Chine, du Br€sil, etc. The emperor of China, of Brazil, etc. However, with Persia, la Perse, and Egypt, VEgypte, only de is used : — Le roi de Perse, the king of Persia. 236 V. CINQUIEME LEgON. 2. WherQ the names of countries hare the meaning of an adjective (see also L, IV. 4), as : — L'argent de France, French money. La soie d'ltalie, the silk of Italy. Du fromage de Suisse, Swiss cheese (de may be omitted). 3. After the verbs : venir, to come ; revenir, to come back, to return ; ar- river, to arrive, and the noun le retour, if the name of the country is femi- nine, as : — // est venu de France, he has come from France. Lorsque je revins d'Espagne, when I returned from Spain. A mon retour d'ltalie, on my return from Italy. But if the same is masculine, the definite article is used, as : — J*arnve du Tyrol, du Mexique, du Portugal, etc. 4. After words, such as empire, royaume (kingdom), ducM, ville, tie (isle), as in English (see L. IV. 6) : — L'empire d'Autriche, the Empire of Austria. La ville de Paris, the city of Paris. 4. Both to and in used after a word signifying going, coming, sending, living, being, etc., before names of countries in the singu- lar, must be rendered in French by the preposition en, without any article. Ex. : — "We are going to America, nous allons en Am&ique. He is to go back to Belgium, il doit retour ner en Bdgique. I send him to Switzerland, je I'envoie en Suisse. My brother is in America, mon frere est en Am€rique. Rouen is in France, Rouen est situ^e en France. 5. If the name of the country be accompanied by an adjective, da7is with the definite article must be used : Dans la Suisse francaise, in French Switzerland. Dans VAllemagne meridionale, in southern Germany. 6. The article is omitted before names of towns, villages, etc., as: — Anvers, Antwerp. Livourne, Leghorn. Athcnes, Athens. Lishonne, Lisbon. Bruxelles, Brussels. Londres, London. Douvres, Dover. Lyon, Lyohs. Geneve, Geneva. Venise, Venice. NAMES OF COUNTRIES, TOWNS, ETC. 237 Note. A few names of towns are preceded by the article : — Le Havre, Havre. la Rochelle, Rochelle. la Ilaie, the Hague. le Caire, Cairo, etc. 7. The names of rivers and mountains are preceded by the defi- nite article, as in English : La Seine, the Seine. le Tibre, the Tiber. le Rhone, the Rhone. le Danube, the Danube. le Rhin, the Rhine. la Moselle, the Moselle. les Alpes, the Alps. le Righi, the Righi. 8. Both to and at or in before names of places are rendered by a. Ex.: — Are you going to Brussels, allez-vous a Bruxelles 9 He was at Rome and Naples, il etait a Rome et a Naples. 9. After partir, to set out, to leave, the preposition pour must be used before names of countries with the article, before names of cities without it : — Nous partirons pour VEspagne et le Portugal. We will set out {or leave) for Spain and Portugal. Elle est partie pour Paris et Lyon. She left for Paris and Lyons. THEME 11. 1. I prefer the wines of Germany to the wines of France. 2. We shall soon go to Switzerland and Italy. 3. Naples may (pent') be called a paradise,^ from its (« cause de sa) beauty and fertility.^ 4. This merchant has bought Italian silk, Spanish wool, and French wines. 5. My grandfather lives in the West Indies.^ 6. I set otlt for Egypt to-morrow. 7. This cheese comes from Switzerland. 8. Cologne is situated* on (swr) the Rhine. 9. The Alps are higtier than the Pyrenees. 10. The emperor of Russia, Peter^ the Great, died at St. Petersburgh in the year (en) 1725. 11. Sicily is the granary^ of (§ 1) Italy, and Italy the garden of Europe. 1. Paradis, m. 2. Fertility. 3. Les Indes occidentales. 4. Situee. 5. Pierre, 6. Grenier.m. . 238 V. CINQUIEME LEgON. READING LESSON. CHARLES XII. (Douze.) Charles XII, roi de Suede, naquit^ a Stockholm le 27 Juin 1682. II perdit sa mere dans sa onzieme annee, et avait a peine quinze ans lorsque son pere mounit. Selon^ le testament du feu^ roi, il ne de- vait etre majeur^ qu'apres avoir passe sa dix-huitieme annee, mais sur la proposition du ministre Piper, les 4tats lui defererent* le gouvernement deja en 1697. L'an 1700, Pierre I, empereur de Kussie, Frederic IV, roi de Danemark, et Augus^e, ^lecteur de Saxe, lui d^clarerent la guerre. II les attaqua I'un apres I'autre et remporta d'abord^ des victoires ^clatantes,^ entre autres celle de Narva, ou il d^fit^ avec moins de^ 8,000 Suedois, quatre-vingt mille Kusses, dont il resta plus de vingt mille sur le champ de bataille, tandis qu'il ne perdait que six cents hommes. Mais plus tard, lorsqu'il penetra en Russie, il perdit la bataille decisive de Pultawa, et fut contraint de se refugier sur le territoire turc avec une faible escorte de deux cent cuiquante Suedois. 1. Was born. 2. According to. 3. Late. 4. Of age. 5. To transfer. 6. At first. 7. Splendid. 8. To defeat. 9. Than. CONVERSATION. Oil naquit Charles XII? Ce roi naquit a Stockholm. Dans quelle annee ? En 1682, le 27 Juin. Perdit-il ses parents de bonne Oui, il perdit sa mere, quand il heure ? avait 11 ans, et son pere, quand il avait 15 ans. Quand fufc-il declare majeur ? En 1697, k Page de quinze ans et demi. Qu'arriva-t-il trois ans apres ? Pierre I, empereur de Eussie, Frederic IV, roi de Danemark, et Auguste, electeur de Saxe, lui declarerent la guerre. Que fit Charles XII ? II les attaqua I'un apres I'autre et les defit. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 239 Quelle est sa plus eclatante victoire ? Avait-il beaucoup de soldats ? Y eut-il beaucoup de tues ? A-i>-il toujours ete heureux dans ses batailles? A quoi fut-il contraiht ? Celle de Narva, oh. il battit 80,000 Russes. II n'avait que 8,000 Suedois. Les Russes perdirent plus de vingt mille hommes, les Suedois a peine six cents. Non, il perdit la bataille de Pul- tawa. II fut contraint de se refugier sur le territoire turc, avec une faiblo fiscorte. YI. SIXIEME LE9ON, POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. (See the First Part, L. XII.) 1. Possessive adjectives must be repeated : — 1 . Before every noun of the same sentence, as : — My brothers and sisters have arrived. Mes freres et mes somrs sont arrives. 2. Before two or three adjectives qualifying different things : — I love your great and your little cliildren. JTaime vos grands et vos petits enfants. Note. But when the two substantives relate to the same person, and when the two or three adjectives are of the like signification* and qualify the same object, the possessive adjective is not repeated. Ex.: — My teacher and friend, mon pr^cepteur et ami. His good and useful advice, ses bons et utiles conseils. * If they have a contrary signification, tho possessive acUective must be repeated, as : Ses bonnes et ses mauvaises pens^es (tlioughts). 240 VI. SIXIEME LEgON. 2. Custom requires the use of the possessive adjective before the names of relations in addressing them or speaking of them. Ex.: — Aunt, when do you leave ? Ma tante, quand partez-vous ? Cousin, will you go with me ? Mon cousin (ma cousine), voulez-vous alter avec moi f Father is not at home, mon pere n'est pas a la maison. 3. When in English the possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, hers, etc., preceded by the preposition of, are placed after a noun to which they relate, they are rendered in French by mes, tes, ses, etc., before the noun, which is put in the plural. Ex.: — A book of mine, un de mes livres. A friend of yours, un de vos amis. 4. When the verb to he is found before a possessive adjective fol- lowed by a noun in the possessive case, and signifies to belong, in French a must be used. Ex. : — This book is my father's, ce livre est h, mon pere. That house is our uncle's, cette maison-la est a notre oncle. * 5. When parts of the body, or physical and intellectual faculties are spoken of, the French generally use the definite article where in EngHsh the possessive adjective is used (see L. III. 5.) Ex.: — I have a pain in my head, fai mal a la tete. He has lost his senses, il a perdu V esprit. Note 1 . If, however, there were an ambiguity to be feared, the posses- sive adjective should be used in Erench as in English. Note 2. When a habitual complaint is spoken of, the possessive ad- jective is also properly used. Ex.: — His headache has returned, sa migraine Va repris. 6. After the verbs changer and redouhler the possessive adjec- tive is dropped and replaced by the preposition de, as : — He has changed his religion, il a chang€de religion. We have changed our opinion. Nous avons change d' opinion or d'avis. They redoubled their activity, ils redoublerent d'activit^. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 241 THEME 12. 1. My father, mother and sisters are in the country. 2. His uncle and aunt know it. 3. I thank you for {de} your good and useful services. 4. He is a friend of mine. 5. I found a pencil of yours. 6. Where are you, daughter? 7. Here I am, mother. 8. Come, friend, let us work. 9. He will never betray^ me, for he is my friend and protector.^ 10. We changed our mind^ when we heard that news. 11. He tens'* a falsehood* as often as (toutes les fois qu') he opens his mouth. 12. A cousin of ours came yes- terday to see us. 13. Give me my dictionary and grammar.^ 14. My mother has [a] pain in (a) her head. 15. I have [a] pain in my ear.^ 16. The man who fell from the roof^ of our house, dislo- cated (se demit) his wrist.^ 17. In (a) the last battle^ our gen- eral lost his right leg, and I was wounded^^ in my shoulder.^^ 1. Trahir. 2. Protecteur. 3. Avis, m. 4. Dire un mensonge. 5. Grammaire^ f. 6. Oreille. 7. Toit^va.. 8. Poignet,m. 9. Baiaille,f. 10. JSZcsser, reg. v. 11. JEpauleyf. 7. When in EngHsh the word own is found alone, i. e. without a noun, after a possessive adjective, the latter is rendered by a pos- sessive pronoun : le mien, le tien, le sien (^propre), etc., or in the feminine by la mienne, la tienne, la sienne (^propre), etc. Ex.: — ■ The daughter of his friend and his own. La Jiile de son ami et la sienne (propre). 8. The indefinite pronoun one's denoting a possession is trans- lated in French son, sa, ses. Ex. : — One is glad to find one's money again. On est content de retrouver son argent. ' 9. When its and their refer to a thing which is not the subject of a preposition they are rendered by en unless preceded by a prep- osition, in which case sow, sa, ses, leur,leurs must be used. Ex.: — • I like this country, its air (Nom.) is healthy, its soil fruitful, etc. J'aime ce pays ; I' air en est sain, le sol en est fertile. What plant is this ? — I do not know its name. Qudle est cette plante ? — Je n'en connais pas le nom. 16 242 VI. SIXIEME LEgON. Look at these trees ; what is their height ? Voyez ces arhres ; qudle en est la hauteur (^not leur A.) 1 But we must say : Paris a ses beaut^s. Paris has its beauties. J'admire la grandeur de ses rues. I admire the size of its streets. Ces arhres sont remarquables par leur hauteur. These trees are remarkable for their height. 10. Observe the following gallicisms : — Let me soon hear of you. Donnez-moi bientot de vos nouvdles. I shall go to meet you, j'irai a voire rencontre. They are cousins of mine, ce sont de mes cousins. With regard to me, — to you, — to us. A man €gard, a voire €gard, a noire egard. THEME 13. 1. He has worked much more for our good^ than for his own. 2. Paris is a large city, its streets are too narrow.^ 3. I particularly* admire (I adm. p.) its rich stores.* 4. Windsor is a fine town ; I admire its situatio?2, walks^ and streets. 5. London has its beau- ties. 6. I like the size^ of its streets. 7. This illness'^ is danger- ous ; I know its origin^ and effects.^ 8. This is {void) a fine tree ; its fruit is delicious.-^" 9. Every science has its principles. 10. An illustrious ( — tre") birth" receives from virtue its most shining^^ lustre. 11. Mr Dubois has sold his father's house and his own. 1. Le Men. 2. Etroit, e. 3. Surtout. 4. Magasin. m. 5. Promenade, f. 6. Grandeur, f. 7. Maladie, f, 8. Origine, f. 9. Effet, m. 10. Delicieux. 11. NaUsance, f. 12, Beau. READING LESSON. EUDAMILAS. Eudamidas de Corinthe fit, en mourant, un testament qui semble- rait ridicule h tout autre qu'a un ami. H touchait a sa derniere POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 243 heure, et laissait sa mere et sa fiUe exposees a la plus craelle indi- gence, n'ayant pour tout bien que deux fideles amis, Carixene et Arethus, Eudaraidas ne fut point alarme ; il jugea des coeurs de ses amis par le sien propre, et il fit ce testament qui ne doit jamais etre oublie. " Je legue^ a Arethus le soin de nourrir ma mere, et de I'entretenir dans sa vieillesse ; k Carixene le soin de marier ma fille, et de lui donner une dot^ convenable." Carixene etant mort quelque temps apres, Arethus ex^cuta la commission de tous les deux; et, pour rendre son action plus il- lustre, il maria la fille de son ami et la sienne en un meme jour, et leur donna a toutes deux une meme dot. Quant a (as to) la mere, il la nourrit jusqu'a la mort. Si la g^ndrosite d' Arethus est digne d'admiration, la noble hardiesse^ et la confiance du testateur* Test encore davantage; car celui qui a la resolution de faire un semblable* testament, est capable non-seulement de I'executer, mais de quelque chose encore de plus, et il n'est pas douteux qu'il n'eut nourri la mere de son ami, et mari4 sa fille, aussi bien que la sienne propre, meme sans en etre prie. 1. I bequeath. 2. Dowry, portion. 3. Boldness. 4. Testator. 5. Such, similar, CONVERSATION^. Que fit Eudamidas de Corinthe II fit un testament remarquable. en mourant ? Etait-il riche ? Au contraire, il etait tres-pauvre, mais il avait deux fideles amis. Que legua-t-il done h ses amis ? II legua a son ami Arethus le soin de nourrir sa vieille mere, et h Carixene le soin de marier sa fille. Devait-il la marier sans dot ? Non, avec une dot convenable. Les deux amis ex(5cuterent-ils L'un d'eux, Carixene, mourut ce que le testament leur im- quelque temps apres. posa ? Et I'autre que fit-il ? Arethus executa la commission de tous les deux. 244 VII. SEPTIEME LEgON. De quelle maniere I'execu- H maria la fille de son ami et la tartril ? sienne en un meme jour, et leur donna h toutes deux une dot ^gale. Et comment agit-il envers la II la nourrit jusqu'a la mort. mere d'Eudamidas ? Comment trouvez-vous la gen^- Elle est digne d'admiration. rosit^ d' Arethus ? VII. SEPTIEME LE9ON. NUMERALS. (See the First Part, L. XIII.) 1. When the cardinal numbers are used substantively they take the masculine article, as : Uh un, a one. . Le trois, the three. Ce huit est mal fait, this eight is badly made. 2. A and one before hundred and thousand are not translated. Ex.: A hundred and twenty horses, cent vingt chevaux. In the year one thousand one hundred and sixty. L'an (or simply en) mil cent soixante. 3. Observe the following expressions with numerals : Un a un, one by one. Deux a deux, two by two. , L'un apres I'autre, one after the other. Vers six heures or vers les six heures, by about six o'clock. Vers midi or vers le midi, towards (by) twelve o'clock. Une heure et demie, one hour and a half or half-past one. Deux heures moins un quaii, a quarter to two. Trois heures (et) un quart, a quarter past three. NUMERALS. 245 Tons les deux jours, every other day. D'aujourd'kui en huit, to-day week. jyaujourd'hui en quinze, to-day fortnight. Dans quinze jours, in a fortnight. Hy a huit jours, a week ago. Ily aun an, a year or a twelvemonth ago. 4. More than, and less than, before numbers are rendered plus de and moins de, instead of plus que and moins que. Ex. : I have spent more than a hundred francs. J'ai d€pens^ plus de cent francs. You have not less than ten mistakes in your exercise. Vous n'avez pas moins de dix fautes dans votre theme. 5. Nearly, before a number, is translated pres de. Ex. : It is nearly five o'clock, il est pres de cinq heures. THEME 14. 4 1. This six is well made, but this nine is badly made. 2. Henry the Fourth was one of the greatest kings of France. 3. Numa was one of the seven kings of Rome. 4. America was discovered^ in the year one thousand four hundred and ninety-two. 5. The shepherd^ has sold a hundred sheep. 6. When do you dine? 7. I dine at twelve o'clock, sometimes at one o'clock. 8. I sup^ at half-past eight, and I go to bed* at midnight. 9. Is it four o'clock? 10. No, sir ; it is a quarter to four. 11. I must go out at a quar- ter past four. 12. We wentin (ew^mmes) one by one. 13. My brother will set out this day week, and will come back in a fortnight. 14. Has Mr. L. three children? 15. No; he has {en a) more than three : he has four or five. 16. This book costs less than ten francs. 17. How old is your son Charles? 18. He is nearly fourteen years old. 19. I have a French lesson* every other day. 1. Fiet decouverte. 2. Le berger. 3. Souper. 4. Se coucher, 5. Une leqon de franqais. 246 VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. VIII. HUITIEME LE9ON. ADJECTIVES. See Part I., Lesson XVI. AQBEEMENT 01 THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE NOUN. 1. In Frencli, the adjective agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it relates : Une feuille verte, a green leaf. De bons amis, good friends. Les prunes sont mures, the plums are ripe. 1. If it belongs to two or more nouns in the singular, it must be in the plural : Le pauvre et le riche sont €gaux devant Dieu. The poor and the rich are alike before God. tPai troiwe la porte et la fenetre fermdes. I found the door and the window shut. La clemence et la majesty €taient peintes siir son front. Clemeney and majesty were imprinted on his brow. 2. If the substantives are of different genders, and joined by et, and, the adjectives must be in the masculine plural : Mon frere et ma sceur sont tres-heureux. My brother and sister are veify happy. 3. When the two adjectives are joined by ou, or, or when the conjunction is left out, the adjective agrees only with the latter noun : Un chateau ou une maison ruinee. A ruined castle or house. Le fer, lajiamme &:ait toufe prete. The sword, the flame was quite ready. 2. The adjectives demi, half; nu, bare ; excepte, except; y comr ■pris, included; suppose, supposed; ci-joint, inclosed, annexed, are invariable when they precede the noun ; demi and nu are then joined with their noun by a hyphen. Ex. : Une demi-heure, half an hour ADJECTIVES. 247 Marcher nu-pieds, to walk barefooted. Marcher nu-tete, to walk bareheaded. Excepts les deux premieres pages. Except the two first pages. Y compris la somme de cent francs. The sum of a hundred francs included. Suppose ces faits, these facts supposed. But they must agree with their noun when they follow it, as : Une heure et demie, an hour and a half. Avoir les jamhes nues, to have bare legs. Les deux premieres pages exceptees. The two first pages excepted. Copie de ma lettre est ci-jointe. A copy of my letter is annexed. 3. Feu, late, is invariable, like the preceding ones, when it is before the article or possessive pronoun ; when it follows, it varies, as : Feu la reine or la feue reine, the late queen. Feu mes tantes or mes feues tantes, my late aunts. 4. Some adjectives, as hon, vite, has, etc., may he used adverb- ially : then, of course, they are invariable. Ex. : Ces roses sentent tres-hon (not bonnes). These roses smell very sweet. Les cerfs courent tres-vite, the stags run very fast. 5. If the expression avoir Vair, to look, is followed by an adjoo- tive, this latter remains unchanged when a moral or intellectual quality is spoken of, as : Ces dames ont I' air hon. These ladies look good-natured. But if a bodily or organic quality is mentioned, or when the adjec- tive refers rather to the subject than to the word air, the adjective agrees with the subject of the sentence. In this latter case, the verb etre is understood, as ; . Ces pierres ont Vair tres-dures. These stones seem to be very hard. Madame F. a Vair mecontente (i. e. d'etre m€contente). Mrs. F. appears to be discontented. 6. If a noun is accompanied by an adjective in the superlative. 248 VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. the latter always agrees with it in gender and number. When the superlative follows, the article must be repeated : La plus belle femme, the handsomest woman. Les gens les plus riches, the richest people. THEME 15. 1. I have a good friend. 2. The leaves are green. 3. These pears are riper than those apples. 4. His brother and cousin have arrived. 5. Charles and Louisa are very industrious. 6. Men and women are mortal. 7. My son and daughter are happy. 8. pis uncle and aunt are dead. 9. Louis XIV. had in France an absolute^ power^ and authority (autorite). 10. She left her room and her trunk^ open. 11. I found the windows and the shutters* shut. 12. Give these presents to the most industrious pupils. 13. Miss Emma is the daughter of the richest man in (c?e) this town. 14. I remained there (y) [for] half an hour. 15. The child slept two hours and a half. 16. I have read the whole book, ex- cept the two last chapters.^ 17. The late queen was opposed'^ to that measure.'" 18. Why do you go barefooted ? 19. These pears appear to be ripe. 1. Absolu. 2. Pouvoir, m. 3, Coffre, m. 4. Volet, m. 6. Chapitre, m. 6. S'opposait. 7. Mesure. B. PLACE OF THE ADJECTIVE. The principal rules have already been given in the seventeenth Lesson of Part I. We have to add here only the following. When two adjectives refer to the same noun, we should examine what kind of adjectives they are. 1. If both of them are such as precede, when single, they may both remain before the noun if one of them forms with the noun, as it were, but one idea. Ex. : Une jolie petite JiUe* a pretty little girl. Z7n beau jeune homme,^ a handsome young man. * In Latin filiola. t Youth (juvenis). ADJECTIVES. 249 2. If both preceding adjectives axe taken in their full sense, they . must be joined by et, and, as : Un grand et beau jardin, a large, beautiful garden. 3. An adjective usually placed before the noun, when connected by a conjunction with another adjective which is to be put after it, is itself placed after the noun. Ex. : Une action bdle* et courageuse. A fine, courageous action. Une femme petite, mais Men faite. A short but well-made woman. 4. In English, two or more adjectives may qualify a substantive, without a conjunction ; but in French, et (or sometimes mais) is always placed before the last of the adjectives, if these follow their noun. Ex. : Une dame riche, jeune et aimahle. A young, rich, amiable lady. Un homme instrv.it, modeste et estim€ de tout le monde. A well-instructed, modest, and generally-esteemed man. THEME 16. 1. Charles is a handsome young man. 2. Henry is- a pretty little boy. 3. This is a long (and) tedious^ book. 4. My friend is an amiable and virtuous man. 5. He has a large and beautiful house. 6. This is a drowned^ man or woman. 7. For this place I want an aged man or woman. 8. Is it the elder brother or sister ? 9. The savage hved in a large, damp^ cavern. 10. Spain is a fertile country, but badly cultivated.'* 11. A plain,^ simple, and natural style is the only one to he recommended.^ 12. Brave and trusty^ men are generally humane^ and merciful.^ 13. This is an interesting^" and instructive study.^ 1. Enmiyeux. 2. Noye e. 3. Humide. 4. Cultive e. 5. Uni. 6. Recommanddble, ?. Constant. 8. Humain. 9. Misericordieux. 10. Interessant. 11. Etude, f. * ♦' A fine action " would be, Une belle action. 250 VIII. HUITIBME LEgON. C. COMPLEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. The complement of an adjective is either a substantive or a verb, preceded by one of the prepositions de, a, en, etc. 1. Adjectives and participles which denote plenty, desire, scar- city or want, and most of those followed in English by of, with and yrom, govern in French by means of the preposition de, as : La vie est pleine de miseres, life is full of miseries. Le jeune homme fut combU d'honneurs, (loaded witli honors ) . 2. The following adjectives govern also by means of de : Capable, capable. las, tired, wearied. content, contented, pleased. litre, free. digne, worthy. mecontent, discontented. exempt, free. satisfait, satisfied. honteux, ashamed. sur, sure, etc. jaloux, jealous. Ex. : H est digne de recompense, he is worthy of reward. 3.* Adjectives denoting fitness, unfitness, disposition, inclination, readiness, or any habit, require a before the object. Ex. : It est propre k tout, he is fit for anything. Le cheval est utile a Vhomme, the horse is useful to man. Note 1. The following adjectives are followed by a in French and of in English: . Attentifa, heedful of ; sensible a, sensible of; insensible a, insensible of or to. Ex. : Soyez attentifs au danger, be heedful of (the) danger. Je suis sensible h, votre bont€, I am sensible of your kindness. Note 2. Some adjectives are followed in French by the preposition a, and in English by in ; such are : Habile a, skilful in. patient a, patient in. exact a, punctual in. impatient a, impatient in. Ex. : U est habile h, tout, he is skilful in doing all. Elle est exacte k son service, she is punctual in her service. 4. The following adjectives, which are followed in English by to or towards when they express behavior, require in French the prep- osition envers : * To this rule must be excepted some words in the preceding list, $ 2. ADJECTIVES. 251 Affable envers, affable to. poli envers, polite to. bon envers, (or pour) kind to. reconnaissant envers, thankful to. juste envers, just to. respectueux envers, respectful to. cruel envers, cruel to. g€nereux envers, generous to. honnete envers, civil to. liberal envers, liberal to. Ex. : // a €t€tres-bon envers moi (or pour moi). He has been very kind to me. Soyez poli envers tout le monde. Be polite (civil) to everybody. , 5. All others not mentioned in the foregoing sections, and which take in English the preposition to, are followed in French by a. Ex.: That is easy to say, cela est facile k dire. • Religion is necessary to man, la religion est necessaire a Vhomme. He was deaf to my prayers, il €tait sourd a mes prieres. THEME 17. 1. We were loaded^ with honors. 2. The basket^ is full of fruit. 3, Do not be so greedy of (after) riches. 4. My cousin is worthy of your friendship. 5. Are you pleased with your horse ? 6. Human life^ is never free from troubles.'* 7. Voltaire was always greedy of praise and insatiable of glory. 8. I am not satisfied with your exercise. 9. That old man is not fit for that place ; he is not punctual in his engagements. 10. My servant is always ready to do his duty.^ 11. Nature^ is content with Httle. 12. Many people are dissatisfied with their condition. 13. Let ns be kind to everybody. 14. These children are inclined^ to idleness.^ 15. That is easy to say, but difficult to do. 16. Scipio Africanus^ was respectful ^0 his mother, liberal to his sisters, good to his servants, just and affable to everybody. 17. Children must^ not be cruel to animals. 18. He is insensible to all the remonstrances^^ of his friends. 1. Comble. 2. Le panier. 3. Put the article. 4. Peine, f. 5. Devoir, m. 6. Enclin. 7. Paresse, f. 8. Scipion VAfricain. 9. Doivent. 10. Bemontrance, f. D. ADJECTIVES OF DIMENSION. 1. Adjectives relating to the dimenson or size of objects are expressed in French either by an adjective or a substantive. Thus 252 VIII. HUITIEME LEgON. long can be rendered by the adjective long or tongue (f.) de, or by the noun de longueur. Observe that in the first case de follows, in the second precedes, and that these adjectives are placed after the substantive and before the dimension. Ex. : A .^ 1.1 ^ ^ . 1 ) we table lonque de dix pieds. A table ten feet long, V „ -^,. ., j , ) une table de dix pieds de long . ^ , , , - 1 . 1 7 une tour haute de cent pieds. A. tower a hundred feet nign, > , . . , , , une table de dix pieds de longueur, une tour haute de cent piedt une tour de cent pieds de hauteur. 2. The verb to be connected with such adjectives, must be ex- pressed by etre when, in French, the adjective of dimension is pre- ferred to the noun, as : This table is ten feet long. Cette table est longue de dix pieds. That tower is a hundred feet high. Cette tour-la est haute de cent pieds. 3. But the verb to he must be rendered by avoir when the dune'nsion is expressed by a noun. Ex. : This table is ten feet long. Cette table a dix pieds de longueur. That tower is a hundred feet high. Cette tour-la a cent pieds de hauteur. 4. In a similar manner age is expressed either with age de and the verb etre, or with the verb avoir without the verb age. Ex.: A boy eight years old, un gargon ag^ de huit ans. T , , 1 -, Me suis dq€de vinqt ans. I am twenty years old, V •, . . , ) J at vingt ans. (The latter is much preferred.) 5. The word hg, which is sometimes used in English after a com- parative, to denote how much a thing exceeds another, is rendered by de, not by par. Ex. : Charles is taller than I by three inches. Charles et plus grand que moi de trois pouces. ADJECTIVES. 253 THEME 18. 1. I have seen a tree ninety feet high. 2. We have a house eighty feet long and forty-five high. 3. This stick is three feet long. 4. This plank^ is two inches^ thick. ^ 5. This tree is fifty feet high. 6. London bridge'* is nine hundred and twenty feet long, fifty-five high, and fifty-six wide.^ 7. The monument of Lon- don stands (^est place) on a pedestaP twenty feet high. 8. This ditch is twelve feet deep.^ 9. The famous mine of Potosi in (dans le) Peru is more than (^de) fifteen hundred feet deep.^ 10. My room is forty feet long and thirty wide. 11. The walls of Algiers^ are fourteen feet thick and thirty feet high. 12. King Street^ is about^^ a mile^ and a half long and sixty-five feet wide. 13. My brother is elder than I by two years. 14. I am taller than Robert by seven inches. 15. Westminster bridge is forty-four feet broad f the free-way^^ under the arches of this bridge is eight hundred and seventy feet ; it consists^^ of fourteen piers,^* thirteen large arches, and two small ones ; the two middle^^ piers are each {chacun) sev- enteen feet wide, and contain two hundred tons^^ of solio? stones. 1. Planche^ f. 2. Pouce, m, 3. Epais, 4paisse. 4. Le pont de Londres. 6. Large or — largeur. 6. Piedestal. 7. Profondeur. S.Alger. 9. La rue royale. 10. Environ. 11. Mille, m. 12. The free-way = le passage. 13. II consiste. 14. PUe, f. 15. Du milieu. 16. Tonneau, m. reading lesson, l'el^iphant. L'^l^phant est le plus gros des quadrupedes ; il habite les forets epaisses,^ les bords des fleuves et les lieux humides. Ses jambes informes soutiennent un corps epais et lourd.^ On aper9oit a peine sa petite queue,^ tandis que de larges oreilles ombragent* les deux cotes de sa tete. Ses yeux sont petits en proportion de son corps enorme. Son nez, qui se prolonge de plusieurs pieds et qui est tres- flexible, lui sert de main. A I'aide de ce nez, qu'on appelle trompe,^ il puise {draws) de I'eau, cueille les herbes et les fleurs, denoue^ les cordes, ouvre et ferme les portea, debouche les bouteilles, ramasso 254 Vm. HUITIEME LEgON. par terre la plus petite piece de monnaie ; en un mot, il fait presque tout ce que nous faisons avec nos doigts. Quand il a soif, il remplit d'eau cette trompe, et boit ensuite comme s'il vidait^ une bouteille. H se nourrit d'herbes, de feuilles, de fruits et de riz (rice). II mange environ cent cinquante livres d'herbes par jour. De chaque cote de sa trompe sortent deux enormes dents qu'on appelle defenses. Ces defenses sent des armes terribles, dont il dpouvante^ les plus feroces animaux. Elles fournissent une matiere pr^cieuse, qu'on appelle ivoire, et pesent^ jusqu'a cent livres chacune. 1. Thick. 2. Heavy. 3. Tail. 4. To shade, over-shade. 5. Trunk or proboscis. 6. To untie. 7. To empty. 8. To terrify. 9. To weigh. CONVERSATION. Que savez-vous de I'^lephant ? L'eMphant est le plus gros des quadrupedes. Ou habite-t-il ? H habite les forets ^paisses, les bords des fleuves et les lieux humides. Qu'est-ce qu'il a de particulier ? II a une trompe, a I'aide de la- quelle il puise de I'eau, cueille les herbes et les fleurs, denoue des cordes, etc. H se nourrit d'herbes, de feuilles, de fruits et de riz. II remplit d'eau sa trompe et boit ensuite. Environ 150 livres d'herbes. L 'ivoire se fait des defenses de r elephant qui pesent jusqu'h cent livres chacune. De quoi se nourrit-il? Quand il a soif, que fait-il ? Combien mange-t-il par jour ? D'ou vient I'ivoire ? PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 255 IX. NEUYIEME LE9ON, I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (See Part I., L. XXIV.) 1. Conjunctive pronouns, in the first and second persons, should be repeated before every verb in a simple tense. Ex.: — Je vous aime et je vous aimerai toujours. I love you and (I) shall always love you. Vmis dites et vous direz toujours. You say and (you) will always say. Je le vois et je I'entends. I see and hear it. , II nous ennuie et nous obsede sans cesse. He wearies (us) and besets us unceasingly. Note. With a compound tense, or when the pronouns are in the third person, they are rarely repeated, though more frequently than in English, as : — Je Vai vu et entendu. I have seen and heard it. n (fcoute et ne peut comprendre, etc. He listens and cannot conceive, etc. 2. When an emphasis is laid upon the personal pronoun, it must be repeated in French, but then, the first is disjunctive. Very of- ten it is then preceded by c^est, or for the third person plural, by ce sont. Ex. : — j" moi, je le dis. ^ ' \ c*est moi, qui le dis. * __ , , , , . f ^^h ^^ ^ pr^endu cda. He has pretended this, i , ^ 7 • • ,^ 1 7 ^ ' ( c est lui qui a pr€tenau cda. __ . ( nous n'avons pas dit cela, nous. We have not said so, ^ , j-^ 7 ' -( nous, nous n avons pas dit cela. It IS not wc who said so, J , ^ • ,-. , ' ( ce nest pas nous qui avons dit cela. 256 IX. NEUVIEME LEgON. < eux, Us I'ont fait. They have done it, j ^^ ^^,^^ ^^^ ^^^ ;,^^^ f^^^ Note. Observe that in such cases the verb is put in the same number and person as the pronoun which is the antecedent of the relative qui, as : — Is it I who told this news ? Est-ce moi qui ai dit cette nouvelle ? 3. When a verb relates to subjects of different persons, it is put in the plural with nous, if one of the several subjects is in the first person, — or with vous, if the subjects are in the second and third persons. Ex.: — My brother and / shall go into the country. Mon frere et moi, nous irons a la campagne, or, Nous irons a la campagne, mon frere et moi. I told you and him or both you and him. Je vous Vai dit a toi et a lui. You and your friend will come with me. Vous et votre ami, vous viendrez avec moi. 4. When the verb governs two pronouns (both being persons) one in the Direct Objective, the other in the Indirect, the Indirect is a disjunctive (see p. 110). Ex.: — Je vais vous presenter a lui. I am going to introduce you to him. 5. A personal pronoun, used as subject, may follow the verb after aussi, peut-etre, encore, toujours, en vain, du mollis, or au moins. THEME 19. 1. I believe and shall always believe that you were {avez e^t) wrong. 2. He says so, but he does not believe it. 3. I honor and respect him, but I do not love him. 4. We come and go. 5. A passionate^ temper^ renders a man unfit^ for business,* deprives* him of his reason, and makes him unfit (makes that he is not fit) (^propre) for society.'* 6. I have always loved and esteemed her. 7. They (on) flatter® and praise us. 8. It is I who have written it. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 257 9. It is they who have seen it. 10. They and my brother have come. 11 You like the town and I the country. 1. Passionni. 2. Caractere. 3. Inepte. 4. Put the definite article. 6. Priver. 6. Flatter. 6. When two personal pronouns limit a verb, both should be dis- junctive, and therefore after the verb. Ex.: — I forgive both you and her. Je pardonne a vous et a elle.* I speak to him and not to you. Je parle h. lui et non h. vous. 7.' The pronouns himself, herself, themselves, when with a re- flective verb, are expressed in French by se ; otherwise by lm-7iieme, elle-meme, eux-memes, elles-memes. Ex.: — He (she) does not know himself (herself). II {die) ne se connait pas. They highly distinguished themselves. lis (elles) se distinguerent beaucoup. But : Has he done it himself ? Yes, himself. L'a-t-il fait lui-meme ? Oui, lui-meme. 8. Soi, self, is of both genders, and is used of things as well as of persons. Ex.: — II est sage de parler rarement de soi. It is wise to talk seldom of one's self. 9. The pronoun itself, preceded by a preposition and relating to an inanimate object, is expressed by soi, when the antecedent noun is taken in an abstract sense. Ex.: — L'aimant attire le fer a soi. The loadstone attracts iron to itself. La vertu est aimahle en soi. Virtue is amiable in itself. * This sentence may better be translated thus : Je vous pardonne ainsi qu% ellCf and the following, c'est & vous que je parle, etc. 258 IX. NEUVIEME LEgON. 10. But it IS rendered by elle, when the inanimate object is of an individual nature and of the feminine gender. Ex.: — La riviere entraina tout avec die. The river carriod everything away with itself. Ces raisons sont solides en dles-memes. Those reasons are solid in themselves. 11. The English personal pronouns are always rendered by tho disjunctive (moi, toi, lui, etc.), when they are used alone, or when after a preposition or after que, than. Ex.: — Qui a fait ceh ? Moi, lui, die, etc. Who has done that % I, he, she, etc. Vbulez-vous oiler avec moi, avec lui, avec eux ? etc. Will you go with me, with him, with them ■? etc. Je parte de toi, d'elle, d'dles, de vous, etc. I am speaking of thee, of her, of them, of you, etc. // est plus jeune que moi. He is younger than I. THEME 20. 1. I speak to you and to him. 2. I forgive [both] you and him, because I hope (that) you will behave^ better for the future (« Vave- nir). 3. The governor is your enemy; if you apply^ to him, you will never succeed.^ 4. I do not trust* (to) him, but I should trust (to) his brother. 5. That man works for himself. 6. Each acts for himself. 7. If you do this for him and for her, you will great^'" oblige me. 8. One ought not^ [to] speak of one's self, unless {qu') with modesty. 9. That man is too proud ; he does not know him- self. 10. The moon brought^ a change^ of weather with it (§ 10). 1. Se conduire. 2. S^addrsser h qn. 3. Mussir. 4. Se fier it qn. 6. On ne doit pas. 6. Amena. 7. Changement, m. II. PARTICULAR USE OF EN AND Y. 1. The pronouns it and them, used with regard to inanimate ob- jects, are rendered by en, when the French verb requires de before an object which follows, whatever preposition may be used in Eng- glish. Ex.: — PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 259 A-t- . 1 • o\ what IS life 1 Qu est-ce que c est que la vie ? > 5. -The pupil must be careful, however, not to confound qui est- ce qui, who ? with qu' est-ce qui, what ? The latter is used for the wanting Nominative of the conjunctive pronoun que. We say : — __, , no , , n ) <7W^" est-ce qui vous a offense? Who has offended you ? ^ ^ . ^ ^o ) qui vous a ojfens^? Whereas : What (iVbm.) makes you so sad? Qu' est-ce qui vous rend si triste ? „,, ^ • , . - „ 7 qu'est-ce que vous faites la ? What are you domg there ? >- -' ^ . ,, •' ) que faites vous la ? „., ^ . ^, „ 7 Q'w'v a-t-il de nouveau ? What IS the news ? r , , -, i ) qu est-ce qu il y a de nouveau t INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 265 6. Que, what ? as the conjunctive fonn, can only be used before the verb or in close connection with it; but the disjunctive form quoi, what? stands either alone or after a preposition, or is even used as an interjection. Ex. : — Vous cherchez quelque chose ; quoi done 9 You are looking for something ; what is it 1 A quoi pense-t-il, of what does he think 7 . . De quoi parle-t-on, of what do people talk ? Quoi ! vous etes mari^! what ! you are married ! Note. Quoi is also used instead of qu'i/ a-t-il, as : — Quoi de plus magnijique qu'une belle nuit d'€t€! (instead of qu'y a-t-il de plus magnijique !) What is there more splendid than a beautiful summer's night ? 7. In antithetical questions with or (as you or I?), the French usage departs very widely from the English, inasmuch as the con- trasted persons or objects, instead of standing in the Nominative as in English, usually follow de. Ex. : — Qui de vous ou de moi remportera le prix ? Who will take the prize, you or 1 1 Qui a €t€ le plus appliqud' de toi ou d'Emile ? or Qui de toi ou d'Emile a €t^ le plus applique'? Who has been the most diligent, you or Emil 1 8. De may be omitted, however, when two or more om's occur, and also when de or des with lequel precedes. Ex. : — Laquelle des deux nations €tait la plus vertueuse, les Grecs ou les Romains 9 Which of the two nations was the more virtuous, the Greeks or the Eomans 1 THEME 23. 1. Which o/ jom brothers is married? 2. Which of your sisters has (est) gonv to England ? 3. Of all these pictures, which should you lilve bestV* 4. Which of your daughters learns Italian ?^ 5. Here are two pencils; which will you take? 6. What countries did Alexander the Great conquer ? ^ 7. What are your terms ? "* 8. Who goes there ? 9. To whom do you speak ? 10. For whom does a miser^ hoard'' riches?^ 11. Who will be bold^ enough to attack him? 12. Who are these women? 13. Whose^ gloves are these? 266 X. DIXIEME LEgON. 14. Here are two grammars ; to which do you give the preference ? 15. Who sustains^^ this globe in the air? 16. What is more pleas- ant than to do good?^^ 17. What is human life? 18. What should prevent^^ your father from buying {d'acheter) this house? 19. A little more fame,^^ a little more wealth, — what does all this signify ?^^ 20. What are you speaking of? 21. Of what do you accuse me ? 22. On (sur) what will you interrogate^^ him ? 23. What ! Charles has been arrested ! ^^ 24. Which of you has been sick, Emily or Emma ? 25. Which was the greatest man, Alexan- der, Caesar, or Napoleon the First ? 1. Le mieux. 2. Put the article. 3. Put has conquered, a conquis. 4. Condition^ f. 5. L'avare, m. 6. Amasser. 7. Hichesse. 8. Hardi. 9. See p 264, $ 2, 2, a qui. 10. Soutenir. 11. Du Men. 12. Empecher. 13. Gloire. 14. Signifier. 15. Inter' roger. 16. ArrUi, KEADING LESSON.* SERViLius SE d:efend devant le PEUPLE. *' Si I'on m'a fait venu: ici pour me demander compte^ de ce qui s'est passe dans la derniere bataille oil je commandais, je suis pret k vous en instruire ; mais si ce n'est qu'un pretexte pour me faire p^rir, comme je le soupgonne,^ epargnez-moi* des paroles inutiles : voila mon corps et ma vie que je vous abandonne, vous pouvez en disposer. ''Quel est done mon crime? Quelle faute ai-je commise jus- quMci? On m'accuse d'avou: perdu beaucoup de monde dans le der- nier combat. Mais quel est le general qui puisse livrer des ba- tailles centre une nation aguerrie,^ qui se defend courageusement, sans qu'il y ait de part et d'autre^ du sang de repandu ? Quelle di- vinite s'est eiigagee envers le peuple remain, a lui faire remporter des victoires sans aucune perte ? ^ A qui fera-t-on croire que la gloire s'acquiert^ autrement que par de grands perils ? J'en suis * The Conversation on this Reading Lesson will be found at the end of the fol- lowing lesson. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 267 venu aux mains avec des troupes plus nombreuses que celles que vous m'aviez confiees ; j'ai mis en deroute leurs legions, qui, a la fin, ont pris la fuite. Que me restait-il a faire ? Qui d'entre vous eut pu se refuser a la victoire qui marchait devant moi ? Etait-il meme^ en mon pouvoir de retenir vos soldats, que leur courage em- portait, et qui poursuivaient avec ardeur un ennemi efFraye ? Que dis-je? Si j'avais fait sonner^ la retraite, si j'avais ramene nos soldats dans leur camp, de quoi ne m'accuserait-on pas aujourd'hui ? Lequel de vos tribuns aurait approuvre ma conduite ? Ne m'accu- seraient-ils pas d'intelligence avec les ennemis ? " 1. Account. 2. Suspect. 3. Spare. 4. "Warlike. 6. On both sides. 6. Loss. 7. Can be gained. 8. Even. 9. To sound. XI. ONZIEME- LEgON. EELATIVE PRONOUNS. (SeePartl., L. XXIV.) 1. The relative pronouns who, which and that are rendered by qui, when they are in the Nominative case, whether the j .refer to persons or things, as : — The man who works, Vhomme que travaille. The pen which is on the table. La plume qui est sur la table. 2. The same pronouns, when in the Direct Objective, whom, which, that, are expressed by que, as : — The man whom you know, Vhomme que vous connaissez. The book which I have lost, le livre que j'ai perdu. Note. Sometimes, however, lequel must be employed instead of qui or que, when by the use of the latter an ambiguity might arise. In such a case as this for instance : Le frere de Madame Leheau qui hahite Paris, where two persons being mentioned, it would be doubtful whether we mean 268 XI. ONZIEME LEgON. to say that the brother or the lady lives in Paris. In the first case, we must say : — Le frere de Mad. Lebeau lequd Fiabite Paris, or if the lady is meant : Le frere de Mad. Lebeau laquelle or qui habite Paris. Por the latter of the two persons qui can generally be used. 3. When the relative pronouns whom or which follow a preposi- tion, they are usually expressed by qui in speaking of persons,"* and by lequel or laquelle (pi. lesquels, lesquelles) in speaking of animals and things, as : — The little boy to whom I give the book, is diligent. JLe petit gargon a qui je donne le livre, est appliqu€. The Englishman with whom I travelled. L' Anglais avec qui fai voyag€. The glory to which heroes sacrifice, etc. La gloire a laquelle les he'ros sacrijient, etc. The cane with which he struck me, etc. La canne avec laquelle il mefrappey etc. 4:. The relative pronouns whose, of whom or of which are com- monly expressed in French by dont, both for persons and for ob- jects, as : — The Frenchman whose brother arrived yesterday. Xe Frangais dont le frere est arrive hier (see L. III., 12). I have seen the garden of which you speak. J'ai vu le jardin dont vous parlez. 5. But lequel must be employed when the noun which follows whose is governed by a preposition. We can consequently say : — The man whose merits are known. L'homme dont les m€rites (Nom.) sont connus. The author whose works you have read. . * After entre, between, andparmi, among, we must always write lesquels or les- guelles whether persons or things be spoken of. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 269 TJauteurdont vous avez lu les ouvrages (Dir. Obj.).* But we must say : The man of whose modesty people talk so much. L'homme de la modestie duqud on parle tant. The friend to whose honesty I have trusted, has deceived me. L'ami a la probity duqud je me suis fie, m'a tromp^. 6. The relative pronouns whom, which, and that, are ofiten left out in English, but in French qui and que are never omitted. Example : — The boy I saw with you yesterday. Le gargon que j'ai vu hier avec vous. I shall send you the books you have chosen. Je vous enverrai les livres que vous avez choisis. THEME 34. 1. The man who has done this is generally^ esteemed. 2. The flocks^ which graze ^ in those meadows* are mine (a moi). 3. The watch which I had is broken. 4. The books which you read are good, but difficult^ to be understood. 5. The sister of my friend who ar- rived here last week, is very ill. 6. The physician's daughter of whom I spoke to you the other day, has married Mr. B. 7. A bird whose wings have been clipped,® cannot fly any more. 8. Bees^ among which we find such admirable order,^ are very useful insects. 9. The professor^ to whom I write, is very learned. 10. The man you respect is my friend. 11. Idleness is a vice to which young people are much inclined. 12. The country we inhabit^'' is beauti- ful and fruitful. 13. The reasons upon, which I rely, ^^ are unan- swerable.^^ 14. Mr. B. is a man to whose discretio/z I dare^^ not trust. 15. He who gets^* riches, knows not for whom he gets them. 16. The daughter of Minos gave a thread ^^ to Theseus,^® by means {au moyen) of which he went out^^ of the labyrinth {le lahyrinthe), * Observe here the position of the noun. If the word depending upon dont is a Direct Objective, it must stand after the active verb. 2T0 XI. ONZIEME LEgON. 1. Generalement. 2. Troupeau, m. 3. Paitre, (see p. 178, No. 25). 4. Prairie^ f. 5. Difflciles a comprendre. 6. Eognes. 7. Les dbeilles. 8. Ordre, m. 9. Pro- fesseur. 10. Hahiter. 11. Je me fonde. 12. Sans repUque. 13. Jle n'ose me fler. 14. Amasser. 15. ?7/i j^Z. 16. T^ese'e. 17. >S'or«r. 7. Qwo/, what, is also used as a relative, but only in connection with a preposition, as : — C'est a quoi je pense le moins. This is the thing of which I think the least. Savez-vous a quoi il s'occupe a present ? Do you know what he busies himself with now 1 Apres quoi, after which. Sans quoi, otherwise. C'est pourquoi, on that account, therefore. 8. The adverbs of place oii, d'oii and par oil, are also often employed instead of the relative pronouns dans lequel, duquel, par lequel, etc., when things are spoken of, as : — L'emharras ou ("for dans lequel) se trouve mon pere. I The embarrassment in which my father finds himself. j Le village par ou (^for par lequel) nous venons de passer. The village through which we have just passed. 9. The correlative pronouns he who, fern, she who, pi. they who or those who, are rendered by celui qui, fern, celle qui, pi. masc. ceux qui, pi. fern, celles qui. Ex. : — He who is contented, is happy. Celui qui est content est heureux. They (or those) who are discontented, are unhappy. Ceux qui sont m€contents, sont malheureux. Note 1. Both or either may vary according to the verb they depend on, {celui qui, celui que, etc. ) as : — . I shall give it to him whom I love most. Je le donnerai a celui que j'aime le mieux. Note 2. In Erench both pronouns must be joined, and no inversion can take place as in English. Ex.: — He is a bad citizen who rebels against his country. Cdui qui se revoke contre sa patrie est un mauvais citoyen. 10. The English %vhat, when not an interrogative pronoun, but a RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 271 compound relative in the sense of that which, is translated by ce qui for the Nominative, ce que for the Direct Objective, and by ce dont, when the verb takes the preposition de, as : — What is fine, is not always good. Ce qui est beau n'est pas toujours bon. I shall do what I have promised. Je ferai ce que j'ai promts. I have sent him what he needed. Je lui ai envoy€ ce dont il avait besoin. 11. When ce qui, ce que or ce dont begins the sentence, c'est must be placed before the second clause, except (as in the first sen- tence above) when an adjective or a participle follows, as : — Ce que vous pouvez /aire de mieux, c'est de partir tout de suite. The best thing for you to do, is to leave immediately. Ce qui me chagrine, c'est la perte de mon dome-stique. What grieves me, is the loss of my servant. 12. Proverbial and general expressions usually commence with qui, whoever, instead of celui qui. Ex.: — Qui court deux lievres, n'en prend aucun. He who chases two hares catches none. Qui casse les verres, les paie. Who(ever) breaks the glasses must pay for them. Sauve qui peut ! let him save himself who can ! THEME 25. 1, This is the object^ at which he aims.^ 2. The study to which I am devoted,^ gives me great pleasure. 3. Nature, whose beauty we daily "* admire, is an inexhaustible^ source of enjoyment^ for us. 4. Your pupil's mother, with whom I was speaking yesterday, left^ this morning. 5. What sort of a Book is that in which you are reading? 6. It is a Eoman History. 7. There is nothing upon (a) which I think more frequently^ than the sad fate^ of my poor friend. 8. What is true is also good. 9. Virtue and freedom are the conditions without which we cannot be happy. 10. Is the house in which you live on the highway ?^'^ 11. No, it is tolerably 272 XI. ONZIEME LEgON. far ^^ from it (en). 12. That is the thing about which I would speak with you. 13. The thing the miser thinks least about (a) is to aid^^ the poor. 14. That is the thing with which he struck me. 15. It is an illness to the progress ^^ of which (§. 5) one cannot ap- ply^* too prompt remedies.^'' 16. He who cannot keep a secret, is incapable of governing.^^ 17. That which most deserves our respect is virtue. 18. What I most wish, is to see you happy. 19. What I like most, is to be alone. 1. Le but. 2. Tendre. 3. Devoud. 4. Journellement. 5. Inepuisahle. 6. Le plaisir. 7. Esipartie. 8. Souvent. 9. Le sort. 10. La route. 11. Assez eloign^. 12. Assister. 13. ProgrtSy m. H. Apporter. 15. Be trop prompts remedes. 16. De gouverner. READING LESSON. SUITE DE " SERVILIUS." *' Si vos ennemis se sont rallies, s'ils ont ete soutenus par un corps de troupes qui s'avangait h leur secours ; enfin, s'il a fallu recom- mencer tout de nouveau le combat, et si, dans cette derniere action, j'ai perdu quelques soldats, n'est-ce pas le sort^ ordinaire de la guerre? Trouverez-vous des generaux qui veuillent se charger du commandement de vos armees, h condition de ramener k Rome tous les soldats qui en seraient sortis sous leur conduite ? N'examinez done point si, a la fin d'une bataille, j'ai perdu quelques soldats, mais jugez de ma conduite par ma victoire. "S'il est vrai que j'ai chasse^ les ennemis de votre territoire, que je leur ai tue beaucoup de monde dans deux combats, que j'ai force les debris'^ de leurs armees de s'enfermer dans leurs places,* que j'ai enrichi Rome et vos soldats du butin^ qu'ils ont fait dans le pays ennemi : que {let) vos tribuns s'elevent, et qu'ils me reprochent en quoi j'ai manque^ contre les devoirs^ d'un bon gen^r^l. " Mais ce n'est pas ce que je crains : ces accusations ne servent que de pr^texte pour pouvoir exercer impunement leur haine® et leur animosite centre le senat et contre I'ordre des patriciens. Faut-il que vous ne demandiez jamais rien au senat qui ne soit prejudiciable RELATIVE PEONOUNS. 273 au bien commun de la patrie, et que vous ne le deinandiez que par des seditions ? Si un senateur ose'^ vous representer Finjustice de vos pretentions, si un consul ne parle pas le language seditieux de vos tribuns ; s'il defend avec courage la souveraine puissance dont il est revetu, on crie au tyran,^^ A peine est-il sorti de charge, qu'il se trouve accable d' accusations. C'est ainsi que, par votre injuste plebiscite, vous avez 6t^ la vie k M^nenius, aussi grand capitaine que bon citoyen. Ne devriez-vous pas mourir de honte d'avoir per- secute si cruellement le fils de ce Menenius Agrippa, a qui vous devez vos tribuns et ce pouvoir qui vous rend a present si furieux? " On m'en voudra peut-etre de la liberte avec laquelle je vous parle dans I'etat oti je me trouve k present ; mais je ne crains point la mort : ^3ondamnez-moi, si vous I'osez ; la vie ne pent etre qu'k charge k un general qui est reduit k se justifier de ses victoires. Apres tout, un sort pareil k celui de Menenius ne pent me desho- norer." 1. The fate. 2. Driven out. 3, Komains. 4. Fortresses. 5. Booty. 6. To faU. 7. Duties. 8. Hatred. 9. Dare. 10. Behold the tyrant. CONVERSATION. Qui etait Servilius? Un fameux general remain. Pourquoi I'a-t-on fait venir k Pour se justifier devant le peu- Kome ? • pie. De quoi Favait-on accuse ? On I'avait accus4 d'avoir perdu trop de soldats dans un com- bat. Est-il possible de livrer (une) Non, ce n'est pas possible. H bataille, sans qu'il y ait du doit y avoir de part et d'au- sang de repandu ? tre du sang de repandu. Peut-on remporter une victoire II est impossible de defaire un sans aucune perte ? . ennemi nombreux et aguerri sans perdre du monde. Comment se justifia Servilius du II rappela aux Remains qu'il reproche qu'on lui faisait ? avait remporte une victoire decisive, et mis en deroute IS les legions des ennemis. 274 XII. DOUZIEME LEgON. Etait-il en son pouvoir de retenir ses soldats ? Avait-il manque centre les devoirs d'un bon general ? Si Servilius avait fait sonner la retraite, de quoi I'aurait-on ac- cuse? Quels services avait-il rendus a (to) Rome ? Quand un senateur etait sorti de charge, que faisaient les tribuns du peuple ? Quel exemple d'injustice leur reprocha-t-il ? Servilius s'attendait-il a un sort semblable a celui de Menenius? Non, leur courage les emportait, et ils poursuivaient avec ar- deur I'ennemi eflfray^. Non, on ne lui put rien re- procher. Les tribuns du peuple I'auraient accuse d'intelligence avec les ennemis. II avait chasse les ennemis du territoire remain et enrichi Rome du butin qu'il rappor- tait du pays ennemi. Us I'accablaient d'accusations. Celui de Menenius. Qui, mais il dit qu'un sort pa- reil k celui de Menenius ne pourrait le deshonorer. XII. DOUZIEME LE9ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. In regard to the indefinite pronouns treated of in Lesson XXIX., Part I., the following peculiarities are to be observed : — 1. The word on derived from homme, man (Latin ^omo), serves to render all vague and general reports expressed in English by thei/ say, people say, it is said, we say, etc. The verb which follows is always in the third person singular, as : — INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 275 People say, it is said, on dit. One cannot have everything, on ne pent pas avoir tout. Note 1. When in English the passive voice is used in this sense, the verb must be changed in French into tlie active voice with on, as : — It is said, on dit. It is believed, on croit. I was told, on m'a dit. I am deceived, on me trompe. Letters have been received, on a regu des lettres. Note 2. For the cases where Von is used instead of on, see Lesson XXIX., 2. 2. Chacun, e, each, has for the English his, her, or its, which follows it, son, sa, ses, and leur, leurs, for their, as : — • Put these books each in its place. Remettez ces livres chacun a sa place. The judges have given sentence each according to his conscience. Les juges out opines chacun selon sa conscience. The bees build each their cells. Les aheilles bdtissent chacune leur cellule. When chacun means every one, everybody (including all), it is always mas- culine. Example : Chacun a son tour. But when used relatively, i. e., in reference to a part of mankind, it may be feminine. Example : Chacune de nous (f&nmes) se pr€tendait sup€neure aux autres. 3. Aucun, personne, and rien do not require ne before the verb, in a sentence interrogative or of doubt : aucun then stands for any, personne for anybody, and rien for anything. Ex. : — Je ne crois pas qu'il y ait aucun homme sans d^faut. I do not think there is any man without a fault. Je doute (ju'il y ait rien de plus beau. I doubt whether there is anything more beautiful. Note. Aucun and nul are not used in the plural, except before nouns which have no singular, or which are used in a different sense in the plural. 5. When, however, these three pronouns serve to answer a ques- tion without repeating the verb used by the inquirer, they retain their negative meaning, as : — Qu'avez vous ? Rien. Rien du tout. What is the matter with you ? Nothing. Nothing at all. 5. None, not one, are rendered by aucun ne and pas un ne. Examples: — 276 XII. DOUZIEME LEgON. None of you were there, avicun de vous n'y ^tait. I have four sisters ; none (not one) of them is married. tTai quatre soeurs, aucune or pas une n'est marine. 6. Somehody, some one, anybody, and any one, are expressed by quelqu'un singular and masculine. Ex. : — Somebody told me so, qudqu'un me Va dit. Do you know any one here ? Connaissez-vous qudqu'un id? 7. La plupart, most, is properly a collective noun, and like most other collective nouns takes the plural after it. This requires the verb and attribute which follow to be put in the plural. Ex. : — La plupart de ces pommes ne sont pas encore mures. Most of these apples are not yet ripe. 8. Another is usually expressed by un autre, and others (Nom. and Direct Obj.) by d'autres or les autres. Ex. : — ' Another would not have acted so. Un autre n'aurait pas agi ainsi. Charity is contented that others be preferred. La charite est contente que les autres soient pr€f^r€s. Buy some others, achetez-en d'autres. 9. Autrui, others, only applies to persons ; it is, however, also taken as a singular in the sense of another. It is employed only after a preposition. Consequently, when in English the indefinite pronoun others occurs in the Nom. or Dir. Obj., it must not be translated by autrui, but by d'autres or les autres (§8). Ex. : — - Charity rejoices in the happiness of others. La charite se rejouit du bonheur d' autrui. Attendez d'autrui ce que vous faites a autrui. Expect from others the same treatment which you give them. 10. When, however, the verb in the latter clause governs the Dir. Obj., en is used instead of S07i or ses. Ex.: — Souvent nous bldmons les defauts d'autrui sans en reconnaitre les bonnes qua- lit€s (without acknowledging their good qualities). 11. Tel has two significations : such and many a (rtian). In the INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. . 277 foimer, it is an adjective and agrees with its noun, in the latter it is often a pronoun, i. e. is used without a substantive. Ex.: — Telle etait la difficult€ du terrain que, etc. Such was the difficulty of the ground, etc. Tel park de choses qu'il n'entend pas. Many a man speaks of things which he does not understand. 12. Such a must be rendered by un tel, une telle. Ex.: — Un td homme, such a man. Une telle femme, such a woman. Un tel has also the meaning of so and so, as : — Chez Monsieur un td ; Madame une tdle. 13. Tel que has the meaning such as or just as, and agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it refers. Ex.: — Tdles que vous les voyez, such as you see them (fem.}. 14. Notice also the expression : Iln'y a rien de td que ... or il n'est rien tel que . . ., there is nothing like. Ex.: — II n^y a rien de tel que d^ avoir une bonne conscience. There is nothing like having a good conscience. THEME 26. 1. They speak of peace. 2. People are not always fortunate. 8. French is spoken here. 4. The inventioTi of gunpowder is at- tributed^ to to Berthold Schwarz of Friburg.^ 5. It is said that the queen is in London. 6. Everybody has his faults. 7. What is the price of each of these medals?^ 8. My children have each a good place. 9. Ev^ry one has his [own] manner of thinking* and acting. 10. I do not know any of his friends. 11. Would any- body dare^ deny^ it? 12. None of the judges were against you. 13. Of all the nations of the earth, there is none (not one) but has (^qui n'ait) an idea^ of God. 14. I expect somebody. 15. Those apples are fine, I will take some. 16. When we are in (eji) town, we have almost every day somebody to dine^ with us. 17. I have lost my stick, I must buy another. 18. Most of my books are 278 XIII. TREIZIEME LEgON. new. 19. Do not speak ill (mal) of others. 20. Do not unto (a) otters what thou wouldst not they should^ do unto thee. 21. Many a man sows^*' who does not reap.^^ 22. There is nothing like being (^que d'etre) an honest man. 23. You must take them such as they are. 1. Attribuer. 2. Fribourg. 3. Medaille, f. 4. De penser et d>agir. 5. Oser. 6. Nier. 7. Idee, f. 8. A diner. 9. QuHls te fissent a toi meme. 10. Semer. 11. Mecolter, XIII. TREIZIEME LE9ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, CONTINUED. 1. L^un et r autre, fem. Fune et V autre (plur. les uns et les au- tres, fem. les unes et les autres), both. These pronouns agree in gender and number with the noun to which they refer ; if they are preceded by a preposition in English, that preposition must be re- peated in French before each part. Ex.: — Both are gone, Vun et Vavfre sont partis. I will do it for them both. Je le ferai pour Vun et pour V autre. Note 1 . "When in English the word both is followed by a noun, it is ren- dered in French by les deux. Ex.: — • I use both hands, je me sers des deux mains. Note 2. Both followed by and is a conjunction and is commonly omit- ted in Erench, as : — She is both handsome and rich, die est belle et riche. 2. L^un ou Vautre, fem. Vune ou Vautre, either, also requires the repetition of the preposition, as : — I wiU do it for either. Je le ferai pour Vun ou pour Vautre. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 279 3. Ni Vun ni V autre, fern, ni Vune ni Vautre, neither^ requires ne before the verb, as : — Neither has obtained the prize. Ni Vun ni Vautre n'a gagn€ le prix. I will do it far neither of them (fern.). Je ne le ferai ni pour Vune ni pour Vautre. 4. L^un Vautre, fern. Vune Vautre (plur. les uns les autres, fern. les unes les autres), one another, each other. The first of the two pronouns is always the subject and consequently stands in the Nom- inative in French. Active verbs then require se, nous or vous to be prefixed, although no reflective pronoun appears in English. When they are preceded by a preposition in English, that preposi- tion must come between them in French. Ex. : — These two girls love each other tenderly. i Ces deux jeunes JUles s'aiment {Vune Vautre) tendrement. Charles and Henry speak ill of each other. Charles et Henri parlent mal Vun de Vautre (not de Vun Vautre.) 5. The word the same is expressed by le meme or la meme for the singular and by les memes for the plural of both genders, wheth- er it be connected with a noun or not, as : — Is that the same pencil which I have lent you. Est-ce le meme crayon que cdui que je vous ai pret€? Yes, it is the same, oui, c'est le meme. 6. The same, meaning the same thing, is expressed by la meme chose. Ex. : — He did the same, il a fait la meme chose. 7. When meme signifies even, it is an adverb and invariable. It may be placed before or after the nouns. Ex.: — Vos freres, vos amis, vos ennemis meme. Your brothers, your friends, your enemies even. 8. Everything, all, are expressed by tout without any article, placed, in compound tenses, between the auxiliary and the partici- ple, as : — 280 XIII. TEEIZIEME LEgON. I have lost everything, fai tout perdu. Everything falls, tout tombe. All have perished there, tons y ont p€ri. I have seen them all, je les ai toutes vues. 9. Le tout stands for a substantive singular and masculine, and answers to the English the whole, as : — Le tout est plus grand que la partie. The whole is greater than a part. Je prendrai le tout, I will take the whole. 10. The English words all that, everything that and whatever, are rendered in French by tout ce qui (Norn.), or tout ce que (Dir. Obj.), always singular and masculine. Ex.: — I like all that is fine, j'aime tout ce qui est beau. All that he says is true, tout ce qu'il dit est vrai. 11. In the sense of quite, entirely, before an adjective or a par- ticiple masculine of both numbers, and before an adjective feminine beginning with a vowel or h mute, tout remains uninflected ; but it is declinable before an adjective or a participle feminine which be- gins with a consonant, and agrees with it in gender and number. Examples : — Nous fumes tout surpris, we were quite surprised. Ma sceur ^tait tout ^tonn^e. My sister was quite astonished. EJle fut toute surprise, she was quite surprised. 12. When tout in connection with que stands for ... as, although, however, it is used as a conjunction with the Indicative mood; and in this use the above-mentioned rule (§11) also holds good (see also § 13). Ex.: — Tout riches que vous etes, rich as you are. Toutes savantes que sont ces dames. Learned as these ladies are (however learned these ladies are, etc.). THE:ME 27. 1. Both are (^ont) right. 2. Both serve the same purpose.^ 3. Do you speak of my brother or of my sister ? 4. I speak of both. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 281 5. Both his uncle and aunt are dead. 6. Either of you can do me a great favor. 7. Yesterday I expected my two best friends, but neither of them came. 8. Both suspect^ him, but neither will say why. 9. Fire and water destroy^ each other. 10. Love ^ one an- other, said our Lord.^ 11. They speak ill of one another. 12. It is rare to hear two authors^ speak well of each other. 13. This poem is the same that^ I was mentioning^ to you. 14. How much do you ask for the whole ? 15. I will not sell the whole ; I must keep^ a part for myself. 16. All is mutable ^° in this world. 17. Every- thing displeases ^^ you. 18. He has taken everything for himself. 19. All is not gold that ghtters^^ (^transl: All that (L. XI., § 10) gUtters is not gold). 20. Whatever is good in itself (e/i so^) , is not always approved.-^^ 21. His mother was {fut) quite cast down^^ at that news; however, sorry ^^ though she was, she received me kindly, and desired^^ me to dine with her. 22. This fashion^^ is quite new. 23. My friend, however learned he may be, is some- times mistaken.^^ 1. Usage, m. 2. Soupc^onner. 3. Se detruisent. 4. Aimez-vous. 5. Seigneur. 6. Auteur. 7. Que celui dont. 8. Parle. 9. Garder. 10. Variable. 11. De- plaire. 12. Brille. 13. Approuver. 14. Abattue. 15. Affligde. 16. Frier. 17. Mode, f. 18. Se tromper. 13. Quelque — que, however, though — ever so, is used in the same sense as tout — que, with this difFerenccjthat tout — que sup- poses something more true or real, whereas quelque — que implies something as possibly assumed, and on this account always governs the Subjunctive. Quelque,^ when before an adjective or participle, remains unchanged. The construction of the sentence is as fol- lows : quelque begins the clause, the second place is taken by the adjective or participle, then follows que, then the pronoun, then the verb in the Subjun(3tive mood. Ex.: — 12 8 4 5 10 Quelque habiles que vous soyez. However skilful you may be. But when the subject is not a pronoun, but a substantive, then the verb takes the fourth place and the noun the fifth. Ex.: — 282 Xni. TREIZIEME LEQON. 12 3 4 5 Quelqm louahle que soit voire conduite, elle sera condamn^e. However praiseworthy your conduct maybe — or though your conduct be ever so praiseworthy, — it will be condemned. 14. Quelque, followed by a substantive and any other verb than to he, is an adjective, and therefore takes an s before a noun plural. It corresponds with the English whatever. The construction is : 1, quelque{s)] 2, the substantive; 3, que ; 4, the pronoun; 5, the verb in the Subjunctive mood ; the rest as in English. Ex. : — 1 2 8 4 6 Quelques richesses qu'ils aient amass^es, ils ne sont pas heureiix. Whatever riches they may have collected, they are not happy. Quelques fautes qu'il ait commise^, je lui pardonnerai. Whatever faults he has committed, I will forgive him. 15. Quel que, fern, quelle que, must be divided when it is im- mediately followed by the verb to he; it agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it relates ; it likewise requires the verb to be put in 'the Subjunctive mood. Ex.: — Qudle que soit voire faute, on vous pardonnera. Whatever your fault may be, they will forgive you. Quels que soient les ialents de voire frere, il ne re'ussira pas. Whatever your brother's talents may be, he will not succeed. ,16. The English ivhoever and whosoever are usually rendered by quiconque when they mean every one who or all those who. Examples : — Quiconque n'observera pas cette hi, sera puni. Whoever does not observe this law, will be punished. Je parle a quiconque veut m'entendre. I speak to whomsoever will hear me. 17. The same two pronouns ivhoever and whosoever are ex- pressed in French by qui que ce soit (or fut) qui, when they mean whatei^ may he the person who. The verb is in the Subj. mood. Examples : Whoever has done that, he is a man of talent. Qui que ce soit qui ait fait cda, c'est un homme de talent. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 283 Whomsoever you meet with, do not say what you have seen. Qui que ce soit que (Dir. Obj.) vous rencontriez, ne dites pas ce que vous avez vu. 18. A shorter expression for qui que ce soit que (not qui^ is qui que, which is often used, except before il and ils : Qui que i^ous soyez, vous etes le bienvenu. "Whoever you may be, you are welcome. Qui que vous rencontriez, ne dites pas, etc. / Whomsoever you meet with, do not say, etc. 19. Nobody whatever, is expressed by qui que ce soit and ne before the verb. Ex.: — Let nobody whatever enter my room. Ne laissez entrer qui que ce soit dans ma chambre. I trust nobody whatever. Je ne me fie a qui que ce soit. Note. But when nobody whatever begins the sentence, personne is used, as : — Nobody whatever has spoken ill of you. Personne n'a parU mal de vous. 20. When the English indefinite pronoun whatever does not mean all that which or everything which, but whatever may be the thing which, it is rendered into French by quelque chose qui, quoi que, or quoi que ce soit (or fut) qui or que. Ex.: — Whatever may be said to you, do not believe it. Quelque chose qu'on vous disc, ne le croyez pas. Or : Quoi qu'on vous dise, ne le croyez pas. Or : Quoi que ce soit qu'on vous dise, ne le croyez pas. Whatever you may order, I will do it. Quelque chose que vous commandiez, je le ferai. Or : Quoi que ce soit que vous commandiez, je le ferai. 21. Nothing whatever, not anything whatever, is translated by quoi que ce soit or fut, and ne before the verb. Ex. : — Without application, it is impossible to succeed in anything whatever. Sans application on ne peut r€ussir en quoi que ce soit. 284 XIV. QUATORZIEME LEgON. THEME 28. 1. The wise man does not fear men, however powerful they may be. 2. Men, however great or small they may be, are never suffi- ciently^ sensible how necessary they are to each other. 3. What- ever wealth^ you may have, you will never be happy, unless you^ restrain your passions. 4. Do not lose [your] courage, whatever may happen to you. 5. Distrust^ every one who (§ 16) speaks ill of his friends. 6. The laws condemn^ all criminals,^ whoever (§ 15) they may be. 7.1 tell it to every one who will hear. 8. I hope that you will not tell my secret to anybody whatever. 9. Regulus did not allow himself to be moved,^ whatever the promises were that the Carthaginians^ made him. 10. Unfortunate [man] ! whoever (§ 18) you are, I will not betray*^ you. 11. Whatever (§ 20) may happen to you in this world, never murmur^*' against Divine Providence ; for whatever we may suffer, we deserve^^ it. 12. Of whomsoever you speak, always speak the truth. 13. I have found nothing whatever. 14. I complain^^ of nothing whatever. 15. Young men ! ^^ whatever the destiny^* may be that await*'^ you, in whatever region of the earth your days may be^^ spent, nature will continually offer to you her products^'^ and her wonders ; ^^ you will continually be sun'ounded^^ with the objects of your study. 1. Asses. 2. liichesse, f. 3. A moins que vous ne reprimiez. 4. Meflez-vous de. 6. Condamner. 6. Criminel. 7. Ne se laissa pas ebranler. 8. Carthaginois. 9. Trahir. 10. Murmurer. 11. Meriter. 12. Se plaindre de. 13. Gens. 14. Le sort 15. Attendre. 16. Doivent s^ecouler. 17. Produits, m. 18. Merveilles. 19. EntoU' res de. XIY. QUATOKZIEME LE9ON ADYEKBS. See Part I., Lessons XXI and XXXII. ' 1. As already observed, the manner or mode of the action is expressed by the adverbs of quality or manner, as : ADVERBS. 285 n agit sagement (not sage), he acts wisely. II €crit mal (not mauvais), he writes badly. 2. There are certain adjectives, however, which are used instead of the adverb. This is the case in the following expressions : — Aller vite, to walk fast. rester court, ) »^ , ^ , . J , r to stop short. couter Cher, to be expensive. aemeurer court, ) vendre cher, to sell dear. payer comptant, to pay cash. seniir bon, to smell sweet. marcher droit, to walk straight. sentir mauvais, to smell badly. chanter juste, to sing correctly. trouver bon, to approve. chanter faux, to sing false. trouver mauvais, to take ill. parler haut, to speak loud. voir clair, to see clearly. parler bas, to speak low. tenir ferme, to hold fast. /aire e^pres, to do on purpose. 3. The adjectives in this case remain, of course, unchanged. Examples : — Cette montre coute trop cher (not chere). This watch is too dear. Les enfants parlent trop haut (not hauts). The children speak too loud. La chanteuse a chants faux (not fausse). The songstress has sung false. Note 1. In speaking of the state of the health, however, the adverb bien or mal is employed. Ex. : — Je suis bien, I am well. Elle se trouve mal, she finds herself ill. Note 2. Observe also the expressions, Elle est bien, she is pretty ; and die n'est pas mal, she is not bad-looking. 4. Some adverbs take after them an object with de or a, in case the adjective from which they are derived also takes one. Ex : — Conforrriement a vos ordres. In conformity with your orders. Independamment de mes instructions. Independently of my instructions. Cette riviere coule parallelement a la Vistule. That river flows parallel with the Vistula. THE3IE 29. 1. Do not go so fast. 2. The night is approaching ; I no longer (plTis) see clearly. 3. The rose smells sweet, but the pink^ smells 286 XIV. QUATORZIEMB LEgON. better. 4. Do not speak low (in a whisper) in the presence of others. 5. How does the singer^ sing ? 6. She sings false (incor- rectly). 7. Do not speak so low ; speak louder, so that you can^ be understood. 8. You do not read well, and you write no (pas) better. 9. To-day I am not very well. 10. Do not eat so fast. 11. This merchant sells his goods'* very dear. 12. It is dark ; I do not see clearly. 13. I have distributed^ the money according to (in conformity with) your orders. 1. L^ (Billet. 2. La chanteuse. 3. Qu'on puisse vous comprendre. 4. Marchan- dises. 5. Distribuer. ADVERBS OF TIME, ETC. 1. Observe the distinction between the following adverbs : — 1. Plutot means rather (of inclination) ; plus tot, sooner (of time). 2. Tout a coup means at once, suddenly, unexpectedly ; tout (Tun coup means at once, i. e., at one time ; a la fois means altogether. 3. Immediately is translated by tout de suite, tout a Vheure, and also by sans delai. De suite means successively, one after the other. 4. V autre jour means the other day, lately, synonymous with dernier ement. On the next day is le lendemain. 5. A little while ago is tantot ; just is expressed by the verb venir (see Part I. Lesson XLVL). Ex.: — He has just gone out, il vient de sortir 2. Tres, fort, and hien, all mean very, right ; and whether one or the other is to be used before the adjective depends upon euphony alone. Very much, with verbs is generally translated by heaucoup, and sometimes also by hien ; but never by tres or tres heaucoup. Bien, with a noun in the sense of much or a great many, must be followed by de with the definite article (see Lesson lY., § 1). 3. When, in interrogative phrases, is rendered by quand. In other cases, quand refers to a possible, probable fact ; lorsque to a positive, real fact. Quand is vague ; lorsque is precise, as its ety- mology shows, alorsque, i. e., a Vheure que. ADVERBS. ' 287 4. Plus and davantage both mean more. Tlie latter always stands at the end of a sentence, and consequently can be followed neither by a noun nor by a comparison with than. Than after plus and mains is usually que, but before a numeral it is translated by de. 5. Adverbs follow the simple verb. Do not say, Ma sceur rare- ment sort le matin ; but, ma sceur sort rarement le matin, my sis- ter seldom goes out in the morning. Je pense souvent a vous, I often think of you. In connection with the compound tenses of the verb, the adverb is generally placed between the auxiliary and the Participle Past. Ex. : Ma sceur a beaucoup voyag€. My sister has travelled a great deal. 6. But adverbs of time can also be placed at the beginning of the sentence, when an emphasis it laid upon them. Ex. : — Bientot je le vis rqxiraitre, I saw him soon reappear. THEME 30. 1. "We often put off^ till the next day what we ought to do at once. 2. Fortune is so fickle^ that she often suddenly deserts* those that she has favored* the most. 3. A single* drop of vinegar con- tains more than a hundred animalculae.^ 4. This man has a great many faults. 5. Children must obey immediately. 6. This man has been very much regretted.^ 7. One does not arrive at once at the highest pinnacle® of fame. 8. Mr. M. (has) won a thousand dol- lars at one time. 9. He undertakes too many things at once. 10. Did you believe this man? 11. At first (d^ahord) I was not will- ing to believe him. 12. Good taste^ is rather a gift^^ of nature, than an acquirement^^ of ar^ 13. How much money have you lent him ? 14. I have lent him more than eighty florins. 1. Renvoyer OT differ er. 2. Inconstant. 3 Abandonner. 4. Favorises. 5. Une seule goutte. 6. Animalcule, m. 7. Eegretter, 8. Degre, m. 9. Gout, m. 10. Don, m. 11. Acquisition, f. 288 " XIV. QUATORZIEME LEgON. reading lesson. Le Connetable de Bouhbon et Bayard. (Dialogue.) Le Connetable. N'est-ce pas le pauvre Bayard que je vols au pied de cet arbre, etendu sur I'herbe,^ efc perce d'ua grand coup? Oui, e'est lui-meme. Helas ! je le plains. En voila deux qui pd- rissent aujourd'hui par nos armes : Vandenesse et lui. Ces deux Frangais etaient deux omements de leur nation par leur courage. Je sens que mon coeur est encore touche pour sa patrie. Mais avan- 90ns pour Ini parler. Ah ! mon pauvre Bayard, c'est avec douleur que je te vols en cet etat. Bayard. C'est avec douleur que je vous vols aussi. Le Con. Je comprends bien que tu es fache de te voir dans mes mains par le sort^ de la guerre ; mais je ne veux point te trailer en prisonnier, je te veux garder comme un bon ami, et prendre soin de ta guerison,^ comme si tu etais mon propre frere. Ainsi tu ne dois point etre fache de me voir. Bay. He ! croyez-vous que je ne sois point fache d'avoir obli- gation au plus grand ennemi de la France ? Ce n'est point de ma captivite, ni de ma blessure,* que je suis en peine : ^ je meurs dans un moment, la mort va me delivrer de vos mains. Le Con. Non, mon cher Bayard, j'espere que nos soins rcussi- ront a te guerir. Bay. Ce n'est point la ce que je cherche, et je suis content de mourir. ( Jb he continued.^ 1. Grass. 2. Fate. .3. Recovery. 4. Wound. 5. Sorry. SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. 289 XY. QUINZIEME LE9ON. SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. (See P. I., L. XXXII.) 1. It is necessary in the first place to distinguish whether the n^* gal ion belongs to a verb or not ; if not, the negative particle stands without ne. Not, without a verb, before nouns, is translated by non or non pas. Ex. : — His cruelty and not his pride. Sa cruaute'et non Cor non pas) son orgueil. Not in connection with other words is simply pas : — Not much, pas beaucoup. Not I, pas moi. Not so much, pas taut. Why not, pourquoi jms. Not at all, pas du tout or point du tout. N. B. Observe the following expressions : — Not (nor) — either, non plus. Nor his brother either, ni son frere non plus. Nor I either, ni moi non plus. Not only — but, non-seulement — mats. (See § 4 . ) 2. But if the negation belongs to the verb the negative particle, whatever it may be, is invariably accompanied by ne. Ex.: — Ne lui parlez pas, do not speak to him. Je n'ai rien vu, I have seen nothing. Je ne Vai plus, I have it no more. Aucun de vous n'y €tait, none of you were there. 'Le pauvre homme n'a point d' argent. The poor man has no money. Je ne connais personne ici, I know nobody here. Ni prieres ni * menaces ne purent I'attendrir. Neither prayers nor threatenings could move him. * If neither — nor come before two verbs in the Indicative mood, the former is ex- pressed simply by ne before the first, and nor by ni ne before the second. Ex. :— I neither praise nor blame him. Je ne le loue, ni ne le bldme. 19 290 XV. QUINZIEME LEgON. II ne suit ni lire ni €crire. He knows neither how to read nor write. Nous n'approuvons nullement voire dessein. We by no means approve of your design. Note. When the verb is in the simple Infinitive nepas or ne point falso ne jamais) are not separated, as : — Not to study, ne pas €ttidier or ne point dudier. But when it is in the compound Infinitive it is optional to separate them or not, as : — Not to have studied. ( ne \n\ pas (point) avoir ^udi€. avoir pas (point) €tudi€. 3. The words no more or not any more (meaning not more) are expressed by ne before tlie verb and pas plus after, when more is followed by than : — He is no more than fifteen years of age. II n'a pas plus de quinze ans. But they are rendered by ne — plus without pas, when more is not fol- lowed by than. Ex.: — I shall read no more (no longer), je ne lirai plus. 4. Non seulement, not only, takes no ne with the verb. Ex. : — Je Vai fait non seulement pour lui, mais aussi pour ses enfants. I have done it not only for his sake, but also for his children's. THEME 31. 1. I do not speak. 2. I have not spoken. 3. Have you bought this book ? 4. No, sir, I have not (P. I., L. XL VIZ.). 5. It is your friendship which I seek, not my interest.^ 6. Not I. 7. Not we. 8. Are you tired? 9. Not at all. 10. I was not there; nor my sister either. 11. This peasant^ can neither read nor write. 12. The boy has neither paper^ nor pens. 13. I have never had such a (un si) good book. 14. We have no desire at all* to do it. 15. The speaker^ has convinced® not only his friends but also his adversaries. 16. Charles XII. persisted in^ never speaking (never to speak) French. 17. I have no more hope. 1. Interet, m. 2. Paysan, m. 3. See p. 224, $ 3. 4. Nullement envie. 5. Voror teur, 6. Convaincre. 7, S'obstinaa, SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. 291 NE USED ALONE WITHOUT PAS. 5. The negative not is expressed by ne without pas or point with the three verbs : cesser^ to cease ; oser, to dare ; pouvoir, to be able ; when followed by an Infinitive, as : — Elle ne cesse de pleurer, she does not cease crying. // n'ose revenir, he dares not come back. Je ne puis le croire, I cannot believe it. Note 1 . Cesser takes pas, however, when a time is specified, as : — U ne cesse pas de travailler avant huit heures du soir. Note 2. In regard to pouvoir, use in the first person of the Present tense either : — Je ne puis (without |)as), or : Jene peux pas. 6. When the negative use of savoir means to he uncertain, i. e. in doubt, it does not take pas. In the same way pas is always omitted in the expression je ne saurais, I cannot. Ex.: — Je ne savais que dire, I did not know what to say Je ne saurais vous donner une garantie, 1 cannot give you a security. But if " not know " has the signification of not to have learned, not to know (a language, etc.), then samr always takes ne and pas. Ex.: — Je ne sais pas nager, I cannot swim. Ne savez-vous pas I'allemand, do you not know German ? 7. In sentences depending upon prendre garde, to take care, there is no pas. Ex.: — Prenez garde qu'il ne vous trompe. Pas is used however if an infinitive follows. Ex.: — Prenez garde de ne pas tomber. 8. Of two negative sentences standing in immediate connection with each other, the latter loses its pas. Ex.: — Je ne connais personne qui ne fasse quelquefois des fautes. Note 1. Also peu and sans are here regarded as a negation, as : — Peu s'en faut qu'il ne soit tomh€, he was very near falling. Sans rien faire, without doing anything. 292 XV. QUINZIEME LEgON. Note 2. The former sentence may also be interrogative if only the idea of negation be contained in it, as : — Y a-t-il Cor est-il) un liomme qui ne croie en Dieu ? 9. Do not put pcis after que ne, when used instead of pourquoi pas. Ex.: — Si vous avez froid, que ne mettez-vous votre mant&m ? If you are cold, why not put on your cloak ? 10. Nor after voila, il y a and depuis que, when the verb which has the idea of negation is in the compound of the Present or in the compound of the Imperfect. Ex. : — Hy a deux mois que je ne lui ai parle. U a bien change depuis que je ne I'ai vu. 11. Pas is not used when ne is connected with d^ autre followed by que, as : — Je n'ai d' autre ambition que de vous rendre heureux. I have no other ambition than to make you happy. 12. Further in the following idioms : — . N*avoir garde, to take care not to, to be on one's guard. JVimporte, it does not matter. Ne voir goutte, to see nothing (at all). Ne dire mot, to say not a word. a Dieu neplaise que, etc., God forbid, etc. 13. A moins que ^nd conjunctions expressing fear, take ne before the following verb (in the subjunctive). Ex.: — A moins que vous ne le fassiez, Unless you do it. THEME 32. 1. Alcibiades could not suflfer that his country should obey^ a rival.^ 2. I dare not enter^ his room. 3. It is no more than a week* since I saw (^que fai vu) your uncle ; he has gone to Amer- ica, you will see him no more. 4. I cannot (§ 6) tell you whether (s^) my father is at home or not (noji)] I have not seen him this morning. 5. Take care lest (^qtie, % 7) he steal your money. 6. SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. 293 Take care not to "be (to come) too late. 7. We dare not tell him tMs news. 8. There is no enemy who is (soit) not able^ to injure.^ 9. God forbid that I should betray^ your secret. 1. Imperf. Subj. 2. A une rivale. 3. Entrer dans. 4. HuU jours. 5. En 4tat, 6. Be nuire. 7. Trahir, NEGATION USED IN FRENCH, AND NOT IN ENGLISH.* 14. iVf? is moreover often employed in French when in English no thought of negation is to be discovered. This is the case : — With the affirmative verb of a comparative clause introduced by que, than, when the verb closely follows que. Also after verbs, nouns, and conjunctions expressing fear and apprehension. Ex.: — II est plus ag€ que je ne croyais. He is older than I thought. Je crains qu'il ne vienne. I fear he may come. II pane autrement qu'il n'agit. He speaks otherwise than he acts. A moins que vous ne le fassiez. Unless you should do it. Note. But if the first clause of the sentence be negative, que of the lat- ter clause is not followed by ne, if the compared action is not doubtful, as : II n'dcrit pas mieux qu'il parle. 15. The verbs douter, to doubt; nier and disconvenir, to deny^ contester, to contest, requne ne before the verb (in the Subjunctive) of the dependent sentence, yet only when these verbs themselves are used simply negatively or simply interrogatively. Ex. : — Je ne doute pas ) , . . ^ Doutez-vous \ ^"^ ''^^ ^' '^'^ ^'«'- ^^^ I do not doubt (do you doubt) that this is true. Niez-vous 7 Je ne me pas \ ^"'^'^ ^^ '''^ ^^"^^^^'- ^'^ Do you deny (I do not deny) that he is guilty? • The pupil should learn, in connection with this lesson, $ 6, L. XJX. 294 XV. QUINZIEME LEgON. 16. But when these verbs are aflBrmative, or negative-interroga- tive, ne is not inserted in the second clause. Also when ne pas douter has the force of etre sur. Ex. : — Je doute que cda soit vrai (without ne). Ne niez-vous pas qu'il soit coupable ? 17. If the dependent sentence in English is negative, it takes, of course, we — pas. Ex.: — I fear he will not come, je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. They fear the fortress will not have ammunition enough. On craint que la forteresse n'ait pas assez de munition. 18. Empecher, to prevent, to hinder, requires ne before the fol- lowing verb in the Subjunctive mood, as ^ — J' empecherai qu'il ne sorte. I will hinder him from going out. Empechera-t-il 7 II n'empichera pas \ ^"^ '''^' ^^ ^' /«^^^*^- Will he prevent you (he will not prevent you) from doing it ? THEME 33. 1. He is more wicked than I thougnt. 2. Henry is stronger than he was last year. 3. Ireland is more powerful, at present, than were the three kingdoms at (a) the death of queen Elizabeth. 4. A traveller often relates^ things otherwise than they are. 5. I fear lest (jque) some misfortune has befallen^ my son. 6. I fear our master will come; do you not fear he will come? 7. He denies that his brother is mixed up^ in that affair. 8. The city of Paris has become much more beautiful since* you saw (have seen) it. 9. Do you fear he will write to your father ? 10. I do not fear it. 11. We do not fear that the battle is lost. 12. Do you deny that you have procured [for] him the means of flight?^ 13. I do not deny that I have given him some clothes and some money. 14. I will hinder him from coming back. 15. I doubt whether the letter has been sent to him (see p. 275, § 1, Note 1). 16. I cannot prevent him from loving (that he loves) pleasure*' better than work.^ 1. Rapporter. 2. Etre arrivd a. 3. Meier. 4. Depuis que. 5. Fuite, f, 6. Put the def. article. SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. 295 BEADING LESSON. Le Connetable de Bourbon et Bayard. (Suite.) Le Con. Qu'as-tu done ? Est-ce que tu ne saurais te consoler d'avoir ^t6 vaincu et fait prisonnier dans la retraite de Bonnivet ? Ce n'est pas ta faute, c'est la sienne : les armes sont journalieres {changing) . Ta gloire est assez bien ^tablie par tant de belles ac- tions. Les Imperiaux^ ne pourront jamais oublier cette vigoureuse defense de M^zieres contre eux. Bay. Pour moi, je ne puis jamais oublier que vous ^tes ce grand connetable, ce prince du plus noble sang qu'il y ait dans le monde, et qui travaille h dechirer^ de ses propres mains sa patrie et le royaume de ses anc^tres. Le Con. Quoi ! Bayard, je te loue, et tu me condamnes ! Je te plains, et tu m'insultes ! Bay. Si vous me plaignez, je vous plains aussi; et je vous trouve bien plus k plaindre que moi. Je sors do la vie sans tache ; j'ai sacrifie la mienne k mon devoir, je meurs pour mon pays, pour mon roi, estime des ennemis de la France, et regrette de tous les bons Frangais. Mon etat est digne d'envie. Le Con. Et moi, je suis victorieux d'un ennemi qui m'a ou- trage, je me venge de lui ; je le chasse du Milanais ;^ je fais sentir a toute la France combien elle est malheureuse de m'avoir perdu, en me poussant k bout.* Appelles-tu cela etre h plaindre ? Bay. Oui, on est toujours k plaindre quand on agit contre son devoir. II vaut mieux perir en combattant pour la patrie, que de la vaincre et de triompher d'elle. Ah ! quelle horrible gloire que celle de d^truire^ son propre pays ! {To he continued.) 1. The Imperialists, Austrians. 2. To tear. 3. From the Milanese territory. 4. To the extreme. 5. Destroy. 296 XVI. SEIZIEME LEgON. XYI. SEIZIEME LE9ON. REMAUKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. The use of the prepositions is of too various a nature to allow of its being determined by definite rules. Their departure from the original significa- tion can only be shown by examples. Prepositions must generally be repeated before every noun. A^ de, and en must always be repeated. All prepositions except en govern the infinitive ; en is followed by the present participle. Ex. : — ^ Pour aller, in order to go. En allant, in going. I. ON THE USE OE SOME FRENCH PREPOSITIONS. a. A denotes 1st place, and is used before names of places (not countries) , and common names ; (in English at or in) : — a Paris, at Paris, a Veglise, at church. a la campagne, in the country, a Vombre, in the shade. au theatre or au spectacle, at the theatre. a la poste, at the post-office. frapper a la porte, to knock at the door. a la main, in the hand, a droite, to the right. 2. Time: — a quelle heure, at what o'clock ? a deux heures, at two o'clock, a midi, at twelve o'clock. au commencement de la legon, at the beginning of the lesson. a temps^ in time, a mon arrivee, on my arrival. a la pointe du jour, at daybreak. 3. Manner and instrument : — a la mode, in fashion, fashionably, a pied, on foot, a cheval, on horseback. a bras ouverts, with open arms. travailler a I'aiguille, to work with tjie needle. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 297 peindre a Vhuile, to paint in oil. mesurer a I'aune, to measure by the ell (yard). deux a deux, two and two. goutte a goutte, drop by drop. a bon marche, cheap. a cinq pour cent, at five per cent. a Vanglaise, after the English style. 4. Destination : — Une cuiller a th€, a teaspoon. Une montre a repetition, a repeater ("watch). 5. Direction, especially with trie verb aller or se rendre, to go, (the English to) : — Aller a Vienne, to go to Vienna. Nous allons a la campagne, we are going into the country. Aller au theatre, to go to the theatre. Alter a la chasse, to go hunting, etc. Dans, en. Dans means both in and into a (closed) place ; it is used in a more determinate sense than en, and is always followed by the article or another determinate word (such as, this, my, which, etc.) . Ex. : — Dans la {ma, votre) chamhre, in the (my, your) room. Dans ma poche, in my pocket. Dans I'hiver de 1850, in the winter of 1850. Dans une colere affreuse, in a dreadful passion. II est dans la prison, he is in (the) prison (of that place). Eire dans la ville, to be within the town (not in the country). Observe also the difference in the following expressions : — II est au jar din and il est dans son jar din. Je suis a la maison (at home) and je suis dans ma maison. Dn is used in a more vague sense, and is followed by no article. It is used for in or to before the name of a kingdom, republic, country, county, or province. Ex. : — En liberie, in liberty. En colere, in a passion. En France, in or to France. En Avril or au mois d'Avril, in April. En €t€, in summer. En hiver, in winter. 298 XVI. SEIZIEME LEgON. En automne, in autumn (T)ut au printemps, in spring. ) Eire en voyage, to travel about. En ces tennes, in these words. Vivre en paix, to live in peace. Eire en ville, to be out, to be from home. II est en prison, he is in prison (he is a prisoner). Note. There are a few expressions in which the article is retained after en ; such are, en V absence, in the absence ; en I'honneur, in honor. Only I' and la are thus found after en, never le. Dans and en, relating to time, are differently used. Dans de- notes the point of time, en the duration. Ex. : — Dans dix minutes, ten minutes hence. En dix minutes, within the space of ten minutes. Je partirai dans huit jours, I shall set out in a week. M. B. reviendra dans deux mois, Mr. B. will return in two months. J'ai appris le frangais en dix mois, I learned French in ten months. JEntre, parmi. Entre answers in general to the English between, betwixt, and ia said of two objects only. Ex. : — Entre la porte et la fenetre, between the door and the window. Entre autres, among others. La mere tenait Venfant entre ses bras. The mother held her child in her arms. Parmi is said of several objects, as : — Parmi les rochers, among the rocks. Votre grammaire se trouva parmi mes livres. Your grammar was found among my books. Devant, avant. Devant is a local preposition, and is also used for in presence of^ as: — Nous jouerons devant la maison, we will play before the house. // a paru devant le juge, he appeared before the judge. Sur le devant, in the front ; la porte de devant, the front door. Avant denotes priority of time and order, as : — Je suis arrive avant vous, I arrived before you. L'artide se met avant le nom, the article is put before the noun. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 299 Avant tout, above all. Avant is also used before an infinitive with de : — Avant de partir, before leaving. Envers, vers. JEnvers, towards, to, is used for with regard to, in a moral sense, as: — Sojjez charitables envers les pauvres, be charitable towards the poor. Comportez-vous Men envers lui, behave well towards him (with regard to him). Vers expresses motion and is put before names of places and persons : — Vers la colline, towards the hill. II s'avanga vers moi, he advanced towards me. Chez. Chez migbt be rendered in English by at the house of, withy among, etc. Ex. : — Chez voire pere, at your father's. Chez les Romains, among the Romans. Chacun est maitre chez soi, everybody is master in his own house. Je viens de chez vous, I come from your house. Ilors de, hors. 1. Bars de denotes an exclusion from a place, oitt of, outside of, without. Ex. : — Hors de la maison, out of the house. Hors du royaurne, out of the kingdom. Note. In this signification de may be left out, as : Hors la maison, hors la harriere, etc. 2. Hors de is also used in a figurative or temporal sense, as : — H est hors de danger, he is out of danger. Hors d'etat, out of condition, unable. 3. Hors (without de) signifies except, besides : — Hors cela nous sommes d' accord, with the exception of that we are agreed. Note. In this sense hormis is sometimes used for hors, more frequently 300 XVI. SEIZIEME LEgON. D^avec, d'enfre, de dessous, etc. Some prepositions are preceded by de, which serves to indicate the point from which an action proceeds, as : — Ma separation d'avec mon pere. My separation from my father. On arracha Venfant (Ventre les bras de sa mere. They tore the child from the arms of its mother. On le tira de dessous le lit. They drew him from under the bed. Sans. Sans, without, is sometimes expressed in English by hut for. Example : — Sans hi, je serai mort de faim. But for him, I shoiild have starved. Es. This word is a contraction for en les. It is used for university degrees. Ex. : — Bachdier es lettres, bachelor of arts. THEME 34. 1. Where are you going ? 2. I am going into the country. 3. My friend arrived in the beginning of summer; he was received with open arms. 4. Is this book to (a) your taste ?^ 5. No, I do not like it. {It does not please me). 6. I met that gentleman on my journey in Italy. 7. Is Mr. A. at home? 8. Yes, sir; he is in the garden. 9. In the absence of the king, who is now in Italy, these affairs must be suspended.^ 10. The poor man had to choose between slavery^ and death. 11. Why has she been so unjust towards her parents? 12. Did you arrive before or after four o'clock? 13. Before the church there are three high poplars.* 14. My neighbor was kindly disposed towards me. 15. I found this letter among my papers. 16. Brandy {Veau de vie) is the Bource of great evils among that people. 1, Chut, m. 2. Suspendre. 3. Uesclavage, m. 4. Peuplier, m. REMAEKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 301 THEME 35. 1. They (on) told me amongst other things, that the ship had been taken by the enemy (pL). 2. The old man was unable {not in a condition) to do anything for her. 3. He has sold all his horses, except one or two. 4. Now we turn to (towards) the south. 5. Among the merchants in London, there are many beneficent^ men. 6. He lives with his brother. 7. The tailor will come to your house to-morrow. 8. Where do you come from ? 9. I come from my aunt's. 10. The wooden horse was outside the walls^ of Troy. 11. The patient^ is at present out of danger. 12. Nobody besides myself was present. 13. Out of (sur) sixty soldiers who tried the attack, twenty-five fell into {entre) the hands of the enemy (pi). 14. One must distinguish true friendship from {d'avec) (the) false. 15. The dog sprang out* from under the table. 1. Bienfaisant. 2. Les murs de Troie. 3. Le malade. 4. Sauter. n. HOW TO EXPRESS SOME ENGLISH PREPOSITIONS. Above. Above, when it expresses time or number, so as to signify more than or longer than, is rendered in French by plus de. Ex. : — The fight lasted above four hours. Le combat dura plus de quatre heures. It is above twenty miles from here. II y a plus de vingt lieues d'ici. About. 1. About, in the sense of around, is to be rendered by autour de. 2. In the signification of concerning, it is touchant, concer- nant, sur, or simply de. 3. In speaking of things which people carry about them, it is translated with sur. Ex. : — 1 . All thronged about the prince. 2'out le moride se pressa autour du prince. 2. I will speak to him about our affair (business). .7e lui parlerai touchant (or sur or de) notre affaire. 3. I have no money about me, je n'ai pas d'argetU sur mm. % 302 XVI. SEIZIEME LEgON. At 1. At is most commonly rendered by a mth. or without an arti- cle. 2. After nouns or verbs denoting derision, anger, surprise, sorrow, etc., at is rendered by de. 3. It is translated chez when, in English, it precedes the word house, either expressed or under- stood. Ex. : — 1. We were at dinner, nous €tions a diner. Do you play at cards, jouez-vous aux cartes ? 2. She laughed at him, die se moqua de lui. I am surprised at what you say. Je suis surpris de ce que vous dites. 3. We were at your aunt's, nous €tions chez voire tante. By. 1. By denoting the agent or cause is translated de or par (see p. 135, 2). Ex. : — Mr. Bell is respected by everybody. M. Bell est respects de tout le monde. Troy was destroyed by the Greeks. Troie fut d€truite par les Grecs. 2. In affirmations and swearing by is translated par : He swears by his honor, il en jure par son honneur. 3. By, after the verbs to sell, to buy, to work, etc., preceding a noun of weight or measure, day, week, month, or year, is rendered in French by a with the definite article. Ex. : — I sell the tea by the pound, je vends le th€ a la livre. We work by the hour or by the day. Nous travaillons a I'heure ou a la journ€e. 4. When preceding a numeral immediately followed by an adjec- tive of dimension, hy is rendered in French by sur. Ex. : This room is fifteen feet long by ten wide. Ceite chambre a quinze pieds de longueur sur dix de largeur. 5. By, immediately following the verbs to kill, to wound, etc., is translated in French by d'un coup de, when it expresses the blow, wound, firing, etc., of an instrument by which a man was wounded, killed, etc. Ex. : — EEMAEKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 303 The officer was wounded by a bullet. L'officier fut blessed' un coup de fusil. Achilles was killed at the siege of Troy by an arrow. Achille fut tue au siege de Troie d'un coup de fleche. Note. If the blows have been repeated, a coups de is used, in which case it is most commonly rendered in English by with. Ex. : — They knocked him down with a stick. lis Vassommerent a coups de baton. THEME 36. 1. My father was not above twenty-two years old wlien he was married.^ 2. My uncle's country-house^ is very handsome ; but it cost him above eighty thousand francs. 3. It is above a year since my friend set off for^ America. 4. Rome was built by Romulus. 5. The poor man has been driven out* of his house by his creditors.* 6. I will get up to-morrow at six o'clock. 7. Were you at Mrs. D.'s ball last night? 8. I will pay you at the end of this month. 9. I rejoice greatly at your good luck.® 10. She always smiles'" at everything that is said. 11. Where was your sister this morning? 12. She was at her aunt's. 13. My box^ is a foot and a half deep by two wide and four long. 14. Harold was wounded by an arrow.^ 15. William the Second was killed by an arrow in the New-Forest. 16. He is so strong that with his fist^^ (6, J^ote) he could knock down^^ an ox. 17. They killed the dog with stones. 18. The sol- diers kill one another with bayonets.^ 1. To be married, se marier. 2. La maison de campagne. 3. Pour. i. Chassi. 6. Creancier, m. 6. Bonheur. 7. Sourire. 8. Le coffre. 9. Fleche, f. 10. Le poing. 11. Ahattre. 12. La haionette. From. 1. From, preceding the name of a person, or a possessive adjec- tive, or a personal or interrogative pronoun after the verbs to go, to come, to send, etc., is generally rendered by de la part de. Ex. : — Many compliments from Dr. O. Bien des compliments de la part de Monsieur le docteur 0. I come from him or her (from them), etc. Je viens de sa part {de leur part). 304 XVI. SEIZIEME LE9ON. 2. From, meaning jfrom some one's house, is in Freacli de chez. Example : — I come from my uncle's, aunt's, etc. Je viens de chez mon oncle, — de chez ma tante, etc. , 3. From — ^0 is rendered by c?e — en. Ex.: — He went from street to street, from town to town, etc. // alia de rue en rue, de ville en ville, etc. Note. When two names of towns or villages are mentioned, to is ren- dered by a. Ex. : — From Paris to Rouen, de Parts a Rouen. 4. From is rendered by depuis, and to hj Jusqu^a, when speak- ing of extent or time. Ex. : — Prom Easter to Christmas, depuis Pdques jusqu'a Noel. In. 1. In — dans or en, see these words in the first part of this Les- son. 2. In, after words denoting pain, hurting, etc., and preceding a possessive adjective with any part of the body, is to be rendered by a with the definite article. Ex. : — I have constantly a pain in my head. J'ai toujours mal a la tete. 3. In adverbial expressions of time, in is not expressed in French. Ex. : — In the morning, le matin. In the evening, le soir. On or upon. 1. On or upon is most generally sur. Ex. : — He climbed upon the tree, il grimpa sur I'arbre. 2. After the verbs to play, to live, to depend, and the like, on or upon is rendered by de. Ex. : — You play on the violin, and I play on the flute. Vous jouez du violon et moi, je joue de la flute. A good end often depends on a good beginning. Une bonne fin depend souvent d'un bon commencement. ^ The prisoner lives on bread and water. Le prisonnier vit de pain et d'eau. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 305 3. The preposition on, before the days of the week and with dates, is dropped in French. Ex. : — Come on Sunday, venez dimanche. On the twelfth of May, h douze mai. 4. Ow, denotmg time, in other cases is translated by en. Over. This preposition is commonly rendered in French by sur, but it must be expressed by the Part. Past of the verbs passer, jinir, achever, when it denotes an action ended, Ex. : — As soon as the rain will be over. Des que la pluie sera pass€e. Is dinner over, le diner est-il Jini? With. 1. With is rendered by de after such verbs as, to die, to meddle, to do, to dispense, to load, to cover, to fill, and after some adjec- tives, as : pleased, contented, etc. (see p. 250, § 1 and 2). Ex.: — He died with cold, il mourut de froid. The wagon is loaded with goods, la voiture est charg^e de marchandises. 2. With is expressed by a and the article before nouns denoting in what manner a thiag is done or made. Ex. : — To draw with a pencil, dessiner au crayon. To fight with pistols, se hattre au'pistolet. Note. Charger takes a, and se hattre, au, a la, a V (as the noun may require), before the names of materials or weapons generally used for loading fire-arras or for fighting ; otherwise, with is rendered by avec. Ex. : — Charger un fusil a balles, avec des pierres. Se hattre a I'dpee, au pistolet, avec des haches, avec des martaux. The ambiguous English sentence. He struck the man with a wooden leg, would be translated into French by Ilfrappa Vhomme a lajamhe de hois, if the man was crippled ; but if the wooden leg is the weapon of attack, avec is used. 3. With must not be expressed after the following verbs : to meet with, rencontrer ; to trust with, confier qch. a qn. ; to supply 306 XVI, SEIZIEME LEgON. witb, fournir qch. a qn. ; to reproacli with, reprocher qch. a qn. Examples : — We will supply htm with everything. Notts lui fournirons tout. I reproached him with his ingratitude. Je lui reprochai son ingratitude. Remark. Prepositions are placed in French before the words they gov- ern, though in English they are sometimes placed after. Ex. : — Whom do you speak to, a qui parlez-vous ? What's that for, pour quoi cda 7 The man whom you are interested in. Uhomme pour qui vous vous int&essez. THEME 37. 1. Gro from me to Mr. S., and tell him that I am expecting him. 2. From whom do you come ? 3. I come from Miss B. 4. Charles was wounded in his arm, and not {non) in his leg. 5. I have very often a pain in my teeth. 6. I will call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening (I will) go to the play. 7. Upon what instrument does your sister play? 8. She plays the piano. 9. That happened^ on the 12th [of] March. 10. I am in the habit^ of taking a cup of coffee as soon as dinner is over. 11. Do not meddle^ with my affairs ; attend to your own. 12. Is that house covered with slate^ or tiles ?^ 13. It is covered with tiles. 14. This picture seems to be done with chalk.^ 15. When you meet a poor man, never reproach him [with] his poverty. 16. France extends'^ from the Khine to the Atlantic^ Ocean. 17. What does he complain^ of? 18. We have travelled from Switzerland to Italy. 19. You spend all the day in going (a aller) from house to house, from street to street, from place to place. 20. Those labor- ers^" work from (^depuis) morning^^ to night.^ 21. I walk every day from twelve (midi) to three. » 1. Se passa. 2. To be in the habit of, avoir VTiabitude de. 3. Se meler. 4. Ar- daise, in singular. 5. Tuile, in plural. 6. Craie,f. 7. S'etendre. 8. V Ocean At' lantique. 9. Se plaindre de qch. 10. Chivrier^ m. 11. Put the article. USES OF THE CONJUNCTION QUE. 307 XVII. DIX-SEPTIEME LE9ON DIFFERENT USES OF THE CONJUNCTION QUE, I. QUE WITH THE INDICATIVE. 1. The conjunction que is used 1. to join the two terms of a comparison ; 2. in a restrictive sense, for but or only, as : Elle n'a que deux freres, she has only two brothers. 2. The que of admiration or exclamation expresses wonder or surprise; it answers to the English words how, how much, how many. Ex. : — Que vous etes heureux ! how happy you are ! Que la terre est petite en comparaison avec le soleil ! How small is the earth compared with the sun ! Que de peine vous prenez pour moi ! How much trouble you take for me ! 3. In short exclamations que is inserted after the noun when the verb is omitted. Ex. : — Quel beau pays que I'ltalie ! What a beautiful country Italy is I Quel homme que ce F€ndon ! What a man that Fenelon is [or was) ! 4. It stands for pourquoi in negative exclamations, as ; — Que ne puis-je vous aider ! why can I not assist you ! 5. The French paraphrase of a sentence with c'^est is followed by que, whereas in English this is not expressed. Ex.: — C'est une belle chose que la discretion. Discretion is a good thing. C'est une chose d^estable que la haine. Hatred is a detestable thing. If, however, an Infinitive follows, que need not be used : — 308 XYII. DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. C'est une honte (que) d'ignorer sa langue maternelle. It is a shame not to know one's mother tongue. 6. Que must be inserted after c^est-a-dire, that is to say, when a verb follows. Que is also frequently used after voila and peut-etre. Example : — Vous serez parfaitement lihres, c'est-a-dire que vous ne dependrez de personne. You will be perfectly free, that is to say, you will depend upon nobody. 7. In the expressions : que out, yes; que si! yes ! que non, no; ^-we is used pleonastically. Ex.: — Je dis que oui, I say yes. 8. Que stands for since instead of depuis que: Combien y a-t-il que votre soeur est morte ? How long is it since your sister died 1 9. Que is used for when after a peine, scarcely, and in the sig- nification of as or when, after the specification of a time, in which case the use of lorsque would be incorrect. Ex. : — A peine ^ait-il sorti, que la maison s'e'croula. Scarcely was he gone out, when the house fell. Un matin que je sortais de tres-bonne heure. One morning as I went out early. Maintenant que vous etes en France, etc. Now that you are in France. ... 10. Que corresponds to the English that after all verbs of think- ing, feeling, saying,^ as : dire, affirmer, repondre, declarer, croire, penser, sentir, etc., smd usually takes the Indicative when these words are used afiirmatively. In English the that is often omitted, but in French it must always be employed. Ex.: — Dites-lui que je V attends. Tell him that I am waiting for him. // m'a re'pondu qu'il n'en savait rien. He answered me that he knew nothing of it. On croit qu'dle est tres-riche. She is supposed to be very rich. * Where in Latin the Ace. is used with the Infinitive* USES OP THE CONJUNCTION QUE. 309 Note. Que is not only always expressed in French, but repeated before each member of the proposition. Ex.: — Je crois que vous vous trompez et que vous ne reussirez pas. I think you are mistaken, and that you will not succeed. 11. In many cases where the conjunction is repeated in English, the French, instead of repeating it, put que in the place of it. This is the case with lorsque, quand, pendant que, tandis que, parce que, tant que and des que. Ex.: — Lorsque Vempereur fat revenu et qu'il (and when he) eut visits le camp, il re'solut de Uvrer bataille. Tandis que Charles XII donnait un roi a la Pologne soumise, que le Dane- mark n'osait le troubler, et que le roi de Prusse recherchait son amitie, le czar de- venait de jour en jour plus redoutable. THEME 38. 1. I am much younger than you. 2. Caroline is only seventeen years old. 3. How pretty she is ! 4. How I hate flatterers !^ 5. How small is the part of the world which we inhabit P 6. What {que de) misfortunes you have undergone ! ^ 7. If you are (avez) cold, why (§ 4) don't you put on your cloak? 8. It is a very dif- ficult thing to know (§ 5) [how to] keep what one has. 9. Look, it rains! 10. Perhaps he will come. 11. I believe (that) you are right. 12. He told me that he had not yet received a letter from his uncle. 13. Are you ready? 14. Ono! (§7) I cannot finish before an hour. 15. Have you not been there ? 16. yes ! 17. How long is it since you lost your father? 18. One day when the two sparrows'* had flown out,^ the children took away*^ their nest. ^ 19. Tell me the day (on which, § 9) you think^ of leaving. 20. I think he is not at home. 21. Scarcely is he out of bed before he beings to work. 22. Why (§ 4) did you not tell it? 23. When you have acknowledged your faults, and (§11) have repaired* them, I will forgive you. ^ 1. Flfitteur. 2. Habiter. 3. Eprouves. 4. Le moineau. 5. Etaient sortis. 6 I Enlever. 7. Vous comptez partir. 8. Repares. 310 XYII. DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. II. QUE WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. "Que, in a conditional sense, is used in the beginning of a sen^ tence for the word whether, and in the middle, to avoid the repeti- tion of si ; in both cases it governs the Subjunctive mood. Ex. : — Whether he come or not, I do not care. Qu'il vienne ou non, je ne m'en sonde pas. If somebody calls and I am out, send for me. Si quelqu'un vient me voir et que je sois sorti, envoyez-moi chercher. If you meet her, and (if) you have time to speak to her. Si vous la rencontrez et que vous ayez le temps de lui parler. 2. For till, instead oijusqu^a ce que after attendre, to wait Example : — Wait till it gets less cold. Attendez qu'il fasse mains froid. You must wait till I am back. // faut attendre que je sois de retour. 3. For the English third person of the Imp^ative, let him or let them. Ex. : — Let him come, qu'il vienne. Let them do it, qu'ils {qu'elles) le /assent. 4. For that, instead of pour que, qfin que : — Come here that I may speak to you. Venez ici que je vous parle. 5. Que is used with ne for the English hut (or but that) after verbs expressing doubt, fear, etc. (see p. 293, § 15). Ex.: — I don't doubt but that you are right. Je ne doute pas que vous n'ayez raison. 6. In the same manner que is used for before, instead of avant que ; for unless, instead of a moins que ; for without, instead of sans que, and for yet, instead of et cependant. Ex. : — I shall not go out before you are in. Je ne soHirai pas que vous ne soyez rentr^. USES OF THE CONJUNCTION QUE. 311 X shall not pardon you unless you acknowledge your faults. Je ne vous pardonnerai pas que vous ne reconnaissiez vos fautes. He takes no trip without some accident befalling him. // ne fait pas de voyage qu'il ne lid arrive quelque accident. Though he should have all the gold in the world, yet he would not be satisfied. II aurait tout I'or du monde, qu'il ne serait pas content. (For the use of que instead of repeating compound conjunctions, and af- ter verbs governing the Subjunctive, see Lesson 19, on the Subjunqtivo Mood, § 12). THEME 39. 1. Whether it rain or not, I must go out directly. 2. If I were rich and had children, I would give them a good educatioTi. 3. Whether you be rich or poor, you should {devez) be a man of prob- ity. 4. He had not a doubt (^did not douhC) but that this was his pursuer.^ 5. Wait till the rain is over. 6. A miser^ might have all the gold in the world, he would never be satisfied. 7. You shall not go out before it is light.^ 8. Let him have his share.* 9. Come that I may tell you the reason of that thing {eri). 10. May heaven bless* you ! 11. May the earth lie lightly on him (he light^ to him). 12. Let him employ his time well. 13. I shall not leave the house {go out) before you pay me. 14. He cannot play but he hurts ^ himself. 15. If you go to Paris and (§1) will take me with you, I shall be most happy.^ 16. My friend says he will not pay the bookseller^ before he has received all the books (which) he (has) ordered. 17. I shall put oflf^" my journey; I shall wait till your time allows you to accompany me. 1. Persicuteur. 2. Avare, f. 3. To be light —/aire jour. 4. Part, i. 5. Benir, 6. Legere. 7. Se faire mat. 8. Most happy — Enchante. 9. Le libraire. 10. Eemettre. BEADING LESSON. Le CONNI^TABLE DE BoURBON ET BaYARD. (Fin.) Le Connet. Mais ma patrie a ^t^ ingrate apres tant de services que je lui avals rendus. Le roi m'a fait une injustice ^norme. En 312 XVII. DIX-SEPTIEME LE^ON. me depouillant ^ de mon bien, on a detache de moi jusqu'a (even) mes domestiques, Matignon et d'Argouges. J'ai ete contraint, pour sauver ma vie, de m'enfuir presque seul. Que voulais-tu que je fisse? Bay. Que vous soufirissiez toutes sortes de maux, plutot que de manquer a la France et a la grandeur de votre maison. Si la per- secution (Stait trop violente, vous pouviez vous retirer : mais il valait mieux etre pauvre, obscur, inutile a tout, que de prendre les armes centre nous. Votre gloire eut ete au comble'Mans la pauvrete et dans le plus miserable exil. Le Conn. Mais ne vois-tu pas que la vengeance s'est jointe a r ambition pour me jeter dans cette extremite ? J'ai voulu que le roi se repentit de m'avoir traits si mal. Bay. II fallait Ten faire repentir par une patience a toute epreuve, qui n'est pas moins la vertu d'un heros que le courage. Le Conn. Mais le roi, etant si injuste et si aveugl^^ par sa mere, meritaitril que j'eusse de si grands egards pour lui ? Bay. Si le roi ne le meritait pas, la France entiere le meritait. La dignity mdme de la couronne, dont vous etes un des h^ritiers, le meritait. Vous vous deviez* k vous-meme d'epargner^ la France, dont vous pouviez etre un jour roi. Le Conn. Eh bien 1 j'ai tort, je I'avoue ; mais ne sais-tu pas combien les meilleurs coeurs ont de peine a resistor a leur ressenti- ment ? Bay. Je le sais bien : mais le vrai courage consiste "k resistor. Si vous connaissez votre faute, hatez-vous de la reparer. Pour moi, je meurs, et je vous trouve plus a plaindre dans vos prosperites, que moi dans mes soufFrances. Quand I'empereur ne vous trompe- rait pas, quand meme il vous donnerait sa soeur en mariage, et qu'il partagerait la France avec vous, il n'efFacerait point la tache^ qui deshonore votre vie. Le connetable de Bourbon rebelle ! ah ! quelle honte ! Ecoutez Bayard mourant comme il a vecu, et ne ces- sant de dire la verite. 1. strip. 2. The highest. 3. Blinded. 4. To owe. 5. To spare. 6. The stain. USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 313 XYIII. DIX-HUITIEME LE9ON. USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. I. PRESENT TENSE. 1. The Present of the Indicative corresponds to the English pres- ent. In French there is only one form of this tense, as : Je lis, I read ; faime, I like. The English forms : I am reading, I do read, etc., must therefore always be translated as if they were : I read,ye Us. Ex. : — The childi*en are playing in the gS,rden. Les enfants jouent au jardin. Nous dinons toiijours a deux heures. 2. The Present tense is sometimes employed for the Future, when speaking of actions which are to be done at a time proximate or near, as : — Je pars demain, I (shall) set out to-morrow. 3. It is also used in a narrative, instegBd of the Preterite, in or- der to give more vivacity to the description, and to make the event, as it were, present. For this reason it is called also the historical or narrative Present. Ex.: — A cette nouvelle, qu'il repousse avec irritation, Napoleon descend de la mon- tagne du Salut et s'approcke de la MosJcwa et de la porte Dorogomilow. II s'arrete (stops) encore a Ventr€e de cette harriere, mats inutilement. Murat le presse, etc. Here repousse, descend, s'approcke, s'arrete, presse are historical Presents (m- stead of repoussa, descendit, s'approcha, s'arreta, pressa). It is particularly liked for euphony, when several Preterites of the first conjugation would bo used. Example : — Mentor range les soldats, il marche a leur tete et s'avance vers les ennemis (in- Stead of rangea, marcha, s'avanga). 4. The Present tense must also be used for the English Perfect, 314 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LE^ON. when a duration of time is expressed in which the condition is still continuing : — How long have you been here ? Depuis qiiand etes-vous id 9 Have you had this dog long? Y a-t-il longtemps que vous avez ce chien ? I have had him these two years. Je I'ai depuis deux ans. If the Compound of the Present were used in these sentences, it would imply that the condition no longer existed. II y a deux ans qu'il a d^ mart, would be absurd in French, as it would imply that he was alive again. THEME 40. 1. Do you speak French? 2. Yes, sir, I do. 3. Is it. raining? 4. No, it does not rain. 5. I do not hke lazy boys. 6. I cannot wiite with a bad pen. 7. I see a man who is asleep.^ 8. What are you doing ? 9. I am reading a very amusing book ; you must read it also ; to-morrow I shall send it to you. 10. I set out to- morrow for Germany. 11. I shall be ready in a moment. 12. How long have you been (§ 4) in Paris? 13. I have been here for {depuis^ three months. 14. Have you had this stick ^ long? 15. I have had it for more than {de) four years. 16. Has your father known that gentleman long? 17. I think he has known him for a year or two. 1. Qui dort. 2. Canne, f. II. PAST TENSES. 5. The Imperfect tense denotes continuity of an action or condi- tion, in past time. It is therefore used to express what was custom- ary or habitual. It is also used in descriptions of persons and of things, in expressing physical and moral qualities, traits of charac- ter etc.* Ex. : — * Hence it is called by some grammarians the simultaneous past^ and by some tne descriptive tense. USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 315 Henri IV €tait un hon prince, il avait de belles qualite's, il aimait son peuple ct en etait aim€. Je ne savais pas cela. Pendant mon sejour a la campagne je me levais tons les matins a cinq heures et je faisais de longues promenades. Calypso ne pouvait se consoler du depart d' Ulysse. Sa grotte ne resonnait plus de son chant. Les nymphes qui la servaient, n'osaient lui parler. Elle se promenait souvent seule, etc. Lorsquej'eiais en pleine mer, je m'amusais queJquefois a dessiner les beaux nuages, semblahles a des groupes de montagnes, qui voguaient a la suite les uns des autres, sur Vazur des deux. La grotte de la deesse ^tait sur le penchant d'une colline: de la on decouvrait la mer ; d'un autre c6t€ on voyait une riviere ou se montraient des ties bordeesde hauts peupliers qui portaient leurs tetes superbes jusque dans les nues. Les divers canaux qui formaient ces iles, semblaient se jouer dans la campagne: les uns roulaient leurs eaux claires avec rapidity ; d'autres avaient une eau paisible et dormante. On apercevait de loin des collines et des montagnes qui se perdaient dans les nues. Les montagnes voisines €laient couvertes de pampres verts qui pendaient en festons: le raisin, plus ^clatant que la pourpre, ne pouvait se cacher sous les feuilles, et la vigne €tait accabUe sous son fruit. 6. When two occurrences take place, that which is interrupted by the other and which was lasting before the other happened, must be in the Imperfect tense : — Je dormais (I was sleeping) lorsqu'il entra. Je le surpris pendant qu'il ecrivait. Erom this we see that whenever in English the Imperfect, I was, with the Part. pres. is used (I was sleeping, I was writing, etc.), in Ereuch the Imperfect tense must be employed. 7. In longer narrations, all those parts which do not form the thread of the. narrative, but serve only to illustrate the principal facts, and which are only explanatory additions or observations of the writer, are in the Imperfect tense. Ex.: — Au temps que Vltalie ^tait frangaise, une sedition €clata (broke out) dans un des regiments en garnison a Livourne. C'dait une affaire grave : c'^tait beau- coup plus qu'une mutinerie de soldats. L'ejnpereur parut extremement irrit^, lorsqu'il apprit cette nouvelle. Ses ordres €taient pr€cis et terribles; il ne voulait pas de conseils de guerre, etc. 316 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LE^ON. Etait, elaient and voidait serve as illustrative additions and explanatory observations of the writer on the facts expressed by the verbs €clata, parut, apprit^ 8. After the conjunction si, if, the Imperfect is used to denote a condition or supposition (see § 18). Ex.: — Si f avals de Vargent. Si mon frere venait, etc. II me demanda si f avals des heures lihres. He asked lite if I had some hours to spare. 9. Sometimes the Imperfect is used instead of the Conditional, to denote that something would have happened, had not another occurrence prevented it, as : — J'etals perdu, s'il ne m'avalt pas retenu. I should have been lost, if he had not held me. Note. In a similar manner the expressions : sliould have, ought to have, and could have, are often rendered in French by the Imperfects : // fallait, je devals, il pouvalt, etc. Ex.: — Vous devlez me le dire tout de suite. You ought to have told me directly. THEME 41. 1. Ca3sar was a great general. 2. Henry the Fourth was a good king, he loved his people. 3. We were at dinner when the cou- rier^ arrived {Pret.}. 4. Tranquilhty reigned throughout (^dans) the whole country. 5. The general was waiting for troops^ which were to {devaieiiC) come. 6. My father studied (used to study) much when he was young. 7. If he came now, he would find me prepared. 8. When I was at Paris, I went every morning to take a walk in the Champs-Ely sees, or in the Bois de Boulogne ; afterwards^ I came home, where I employed* myself till dinner, either in reading^ or writing, and [in] the evening, I generally went [for] amusement^ to the French Theatre or the Opera. 9. If I were in France, I would learn French. 10. If he had something, ifle would give it to you. 11. I asked him if his father was at uome. 12. He answered that he did not know it. 13. I thought you were wrong. 14. I observed that he was quite pale.^ 1. Le courier. 2. Troupes, pi. f. 3. Apres cela. 4. S^occuper. 5. A lire. 6. M amuser. 7, Pale, USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 317 THE PRETERITE. 10. Tkis tense (as : XaUai, je vis, je regus, etc.) is used in French to express a particular fact or event entirely elapsed, which has happened but once, or very seldom, at a definite time. It is the naiTative or historical tense. Ex.: — Je fits a Rome V€t€ passe. II partit le 20 Ociobre. Les Roinains chasserent Tarquin de Rome. Apres la mort d'Aristide, Clmx)n prit les renes du gouvemement. Ce fui I'epoque oil la Grece commenga a produire les grands hommes. Quand les ordres de Criton furent execute's, un domestique apporta la coupe (cup, goblet) fatale. Le premier Octobre 1714 Charles XII quitta enfin la Turquie. Les Turcs accompagnerent le roi jusqu'a la frontiere et comblerent ce monarque de tons les signes de leiir respect etde leur admiration.- Pendant cinq jours Charles sup- porta la lenteur qu'entraine naturellement un long cortege; le sixieme jour il per- dit patience et con^ut I'idee de continuer le voyage avec deux compagnons. Ac- coinpagn€ de deux colonels su€dois, il abandonna le cortege. Tous trois fran- chirent la frontiere et continuerent le voyage a cheval avec une vitesse extraordi' naire. Apres 22 jours Charles arriva devant les portes de Stralsund. 11. In longer narrations all the facts which form the thread of the relation, are expressed in the Preterite, whereas explanatory re- marks serving only to elucidate or complete the relation of the facts, are in the Imperfect (see § 7) or in the Pluperfect. Ex.: — Les onze magistrats qui veillaient a Vex€cution des criminels se rendirent a la prison de Socrate pour lui annoncer le moment de son trepas (death). Plu- sieurs de ses disciples entrerent ensuite; ils latent a peu pres au nombre de vingt ; ils trouverent aupres de lui Xantippe, son spouse, qui tenait le plus jeune de ses enfants entre ses bras. Des qu'elle les apergut, elle s'^cria : Ah ! voila vos amis. Socrate pria Criton de la /aire remener chez elle (to take her home). Here the Preterites rendirent, entrerent, trouverent, apergut, s'^cria and pria, express the facts, whereas qui veillaient, ils etaient, qui tenait, etc., are inci- dental additions. 12. "When two facts occur together so that one is interrupted by the other, the verb which expresses the interruption is in the Preter- ite, the other in the Imperfect. Ex.: — 318 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LE9ON. Je dormais quand il entra. Je d€jeunais quand vous vintes me demander. I was breakfasting when you came to ask for me. THEME 42. 1. I saw the queen of England last year. 2. My aunt died the day before yesterday. 3. Cato killed himself lest he should {de peur de) fall into the hands of Caesar. 4. Marius was ill-treated by (de) fortune ; however he did not lose [his] courage. 5. Rome was, for (pendant) more than two hundred years, the mistress^ of the world. 6. King Pepin died in 768 ; Charlemagne, his fcon, succeeded (him). 7. We set off as soon as we had^ the order for it (en). 8. My brother's servant brought me a letter this morning before I was up.^ 9. Epaminondas refused the presents of Darius. 10. The Duke of Bouillon was obhged to give the town of Sedan to Henry the Fourth ; but this prince, satisfied with his submission,** gave^ it him back* soon. 11. Napoleon was born^ in Corsica.^ 12. When some one represented to Napoleon that a thing was impossi- ble, he declared that this word was not French. 1. La maitresse. 2. Fret, of recevoir. 3. Levd. 4. Soumission, f. 5. Rendre, 6. Pret. of the verb naitre, p. 181. 7. En Corse. THE COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. 13. The Compound of the Present (fai vu, fai regu, etc.) is used to express a thing as having taken place at a time not specified, or in a period not fully elapsed. Ex.: — J'ai perdu tons mes enfants. M. Laurent a beaucoup voyag^. Nous avons renonc€ (given up) a nos droits. Alexandre le Grand a detruit V empire des Perses. L'avez vous vu aujoud'hui ? — Oui je Vai vu ce matin. Nous avous eu beaucoup de pluie celte ann€e. Note. The French Perfect corresponds to the same form in English in all cases, except that given under the Present tense, § 4, in such phrases as Depuis quand etes vous id, how long have you been here 1 But the French tense is much more frequently used than the English, as will be seen in the following paragraphs. USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 319 14. The Compound of the Present translates the English Imper- fect, whenever this does not denote continuous or habitual state or action (see §§ 5, 6, 7), or is not strictly a historical past. It is the tense most frequently used in conversation. Ex. : — Did you see him yesterday ? L'avez-vous vu hier (not le vites-vous) ? No, sir, I did not see him. Non, Monsieur, je ne I'm pas vu. Did they tell him to come at six ? Lui a-t-on dit de venir a six heures ? Yes they told him to come at six o'clock precisely. Oui, on lui a dit de venir a six heures precises. Les Frangais ont gag7i(f la hataille de Marengo. In this last sentence, gagrierent would he perfectly correct, but would refer merely to an historical event in the past, with no bearing upon the present. Ont gagn€ connects the fact stated with something present, either in the speaker or in the hearer. 15. The Compound of the Present is idiomatically used in famil- iar conversation, instead of the Compound of the Future, as : Avez-vous bientot Jini votre theme ? Oui, je I'ai Jini dans un moment. Will yoii soon have done your exercise 1 Yes, I shall have finished it in a moment ; instead of the more formal Aurez-vous Jini J'aurai Jini. THEME 43. 1. The horse, when he has run^ his course ; the bee, when it has made its honey ; ^ and the good man, when he has done good^ to others, do not make a noisy boast* about it, but go on^ repeating the action ; as the vine,^ in its season, produces new clusters^ again. 2. Fenelon preached with success from the age of nineteen, and wrote many works which are admired for their beauty of style ; but that which has gained^ him the greatest reputatio/i is his " Telma- chus,"^ where he has displayed^® all the riches of the French lan- guage. 3. No work had ever a greater reputation ; it is written in a lively,^^ simple, natural, and elegant manner ; its fictions are well imagined, the moraP^ sublime, and the political maxims (which) it contains, alP^ tend to the happiness of mankind.^* 320 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LEgON. 1. AchevL 2. Miel, m. 3. Du Men. 4. Ne s'en vantent pas. 5. Contintier. 6. Vigne, f. 7. Grappe, f. 8. Lui a fait. 9. Telemaque. 10. Deployer. 11. AnimL 12. ia morale. 13. Tevdre a. 14. Z>es hommes. THE COMPOUNDS OF THE IMPERFECT AND OF THE PRETERITE. 16. These tenses arc formed from the Imperfect and Preterite, and correspond to them fully ; only that they represent their action as having taken place previous to some other event refen-ed to, and cannot be used entirely independently, but usually stand connected with a conjunction or an adverb of time. If this conjunctive clause expresses a definite past time, the Compound of the Preterite is employed, especially after the conjunctions aussitot que, lorsque^ quand, des que, a peine, hientot, en un moment, un jour que, etc. Example : — ^ Aussitot que feus termini mes affaires, je repartis. A peine eut-il prononc€ ce mot, qu'il s'en repentit. Des que le parhment se fut assemble, l'€meute cessa. As soon as the parliament was assembled, the riot ceased. It is here not to be overlooked that in the use of the Compound Preterite a more immediate relation, a closer connection must exist between the two past events. 17. With the Compound of tTie Imperfect, this close connection fails, and this is the distinguishing feature of this tense, which is also used like the Imperfect for descriptions, for continuous events, and frequently repeated or customary previous actions. Ex. : — Platan avail regu de la nature un corps robuste. J'avais deja termini mes affaires, quand je regus votre lettre. A la campagne, quand j'avais dine, je faisais une promenade de deux lieues. 18. The Compound of the Imperfect is also used after the con- junction si, if, the same in French as in English (see § 9). Ex. ; Si vous etiez venu plus tot, vous m'auriez trouve a la maison. S'il avait parU plus haut (louder), je I'aurais compris. THEME 44. 1. The Tyrians had, by their pride,^ offended the great Sesostris, who ruled in Egypt, and who had conquered so many kingdoms. 2. The wealth which they had acquired^ by commerce, and the strength USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 321 of the impregnable^ city of Tyre, lying* in the sea, had lifted up* the heart of these people. 3. They had refused to pay Sesostris the tribute^ which he had imposed upon them (leur) on his return from his conquests ; ^ and they had furnished troops to his brother, who had attempted^ to kill him in the midst of the festivities^ of a great banquet. 4. As soon as Sesostris leamed^^ this, he deter- mined^^ to humiliate their pride and to destroy their commerce upon all seas. 5. Julius Caesar, having disembarked^^ in Africa, fell [down] as he was leaving the vessel ; this appeared to his soldiers a very inauspicious^^ omen : ^^ he, however, turned the feelings of the army to his advantage by exclaiming {en s'ecrianf), "It is now, O Africa, that I hold thee." 1. Orgueil, m. 2. Acquises. 3. Imprenable (before the noun). 4. Situee dans. 5. Enfld. 6. Le tribut, 7. Conquete, f. 8. Voulu. 9. Joies. 10. Apprendre. 11. Jl resolut d'humilier. 12. Ayant debarque. 13. Un presage de mauvaise augure, in. THE FUTURE TENSES. 19. The Future (Je parlerai, je ferai, etc.) denotes in general future events or circumstances, as : — Charles partira demain. 20. It must sometimes be used in French after adverbs of time {quandy lorsque, etc.) where the English use the Present, when the idea is one of future time. Ex. : — Vous pouvez venir quand vous voudrez. You may come when you like. 21. It is used as a softened form of the Imperxitive, implying the expectation of fulfilment. Ex. : — Vous m'€crirez demain, (do) write to me to-morrow. Vous ne tuerez point, thou shalt do no murder. Quand vous viendrez, vous apporterez mon livre. When you come you will bring my book. Note 1. When shall and will imply determination, they are rendered by vouloir, as : — I will do it, je veux le faire. You shall do it, je veux que vous le fa^siez. 21 322 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LEgON. 22. It sometimes has the sense of the Imperative in sentences like the foUowmg : — Croira qui voudra Vhistorien CapitoUn et qudques autres €crivains qui font denser les €Uphants sur la corde. Believe who will the historian Capitolinus and several other writers, who make elephants dance on a rope. Note. To be on the point of doing something is expressed in French by aller, which corresponds precisely with the English to be going, etc. { See Part I,, Lesson XL VI.) Ex. : — Are you going to write to him ? allez-vous lui ecrire ? I am coming, je vais venir. Napoleon dit a ses soldats, " Nous allons entreprendre la conquete de VEgypte. Les peuples avec lesquds nous allons vivre, sont Mahometans", etc. ^3. The Compound of the Future indicates an event which is to precede another future event specified. Ex : — Quand faurai termin€ mes affaires, je partirai tout de suite. Aussitot que je serai arrive, j'irai le voir. 24. When the conjunction si signifies whether, expressing uncer- tainty, the future can be used after it, in French as in English. Si is never followed by the future, unless it means whether. Ex. : — Je ne sais si mon frere viendra. I do not know if my brother will come. 25. When si signifies on condition that, the English Future must be rendered by the Present. Ex. : — Vous deviendrez savant, si vous €tudiez bien. You will become a learned man, if you will study. 26. The Future is sometimes used to imply surmise. Ex. : — Ou est man argent ? L'aurai-je peut-eire perdu ? Where is my money 1 Have I perhaps lost it ? 27. The Conditionals, je parlerais, faurais parle, are used in French as in English, in conditional sentences : — Je serais heureux si j'avais des amis. I should be happy if I had some friends. Note. The English I wish, when it does not relate to something past, is often translated by the Conditional of vouloir, je voudrais. Ex. : — I wish he would come soon, je voudrais qu'il vint bieniot. USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 323 28. After si, when it means suppose that, the English Condi- tional must be rendered by the Imperfect (see § 8). Ex. : — Si je continuafts mon commerce, je deviendrais riche. If I should continue my trade, I should become rich. But when si means whether, the Conditional is also used in French : — Je ne sai's si mon oncle viendrait, en cas que vous V invitassiez. 29. The compound Conditional of devoir, pouvoir, and vouloir, followed by the simple Infinitive, must be used when, in Enghsh, the auxiliaries should, ought, could, might, are followed by a com- pound Infinitive Ex. : — Vous auriez dii €crire une lettre. You ought to have written a letter. J^aurais pu lui donner de I'argent. I could have given him some money. THEME 45. 1. I shall go to London. 2. The bookseller will send you the book to-morrow. 3. When I am in the country, will you come to see me ? 4. I shall play as soon as I have finished my lesson. 5. There will always be wars among men, as long as they are (§ 20) ambitious. 6. I hope you will not refuse me this favor. 7. When you are ready, we will go [and] take a walk. 8. I do not know if my sister will consent to it (y). 9. If your person were as gigan- tic^ as your desires, the whole^ world could not contain you ; your right hand would touch the east^ and your left the west* at the (en) same time, said the Scythian^ ambassador to Alexander. 10. I could have kept^ the book ; nobody would have known it. 1. Gigantesque. 2. Entier (after the noun). 3. Uorient, m. 4. Uoccident, m. 6. Uavtibassadeur des ScytJies. 6. Garder. THEME 46. 1. My country has been ungrateful^ to me, although I have ren- dered it (lui) great service {pi.)- 2. The king has done me great injustice ; he has robbed^ me of my entire fortune, he has even 324 XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LE^ON. taken^ from me my two servants. 3. I have been compelled to flee, in order to preserve* my life, which was seriously threatened. 4. What was to be done?^ 5. You should rather ^have endured' (§ 29) all injuries than to offend'^ against France and the greatness of your house. 6. If you were persecuted, you could have retired ; ^ it would have been (valu) better to be poor and unknown* than to take up^° arms against your country. 7. Even in poverty and in the most wretched^^ exile, your fame^^ would not have been lost. 1. Ingrat. 2. Privi. 3. Wa depmdlU jusqu'a. 4. Pour sauver. 5. Que v(nt- liez-vous que je fisse ? 6. Souffrir. 7. Que de manquer a. 8. Vous retirer (reflec- tive verb). 9. Ohscur. 10. Prendre les amies. 11. Miserable. 12. Gloire, f. READING LESSON. ALEXANDRE SELKIRK. Pendant la gnierre pour la succession d'Espagne, quelques parti- culiers^ equiperent en Angleterre deux vaisseaux armateurs, destines a faire des prises^ dans la mer du sud. Le capitaine Rogers fut nomme pour les commander. lis leverent^ I'ancre de Bristol le 2 Aout, 1708. Au mois de Janvier de I'annee suivante ils se ti-ou- vaient du cote du pole antarctique.* Rogers doubla le Cap-Horn sans prendre terre en aucun lieu de ces parages^ jusqu'a I'ile de Juan Femandes, situee dans la mer du sud, a, la distance de cen<>- dix lieues du Chili. II y envoya une pinasse,^ qui revint au vais- seau avec quantite d'ecrevisses,^ et un homme vetu de peaux de chevres^ qui paraissait plus sauvage que ces animaux memes. C'^tait un Ecossais, nomme Alexandre Selkirk, qui avait ete maitre a bord du vaisseau *' Les Cinq-Ports," et que le capitaine Stradling avait abandonne sur cette lie depuis quatre ans et quatre mois. Voici le recit que ce "malheureux fit de ses aventures au capitaine Rogers. " Des mon enfance j'ai ete eleve^ dans la marine. Ayant suivi le capitaine Stradling dans son expedition, j'eus un demel^^*' avec THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 325 liii, ce qui I'engagea a me debarqner sur cette ile. Je resolus d'abord d'y rester, plutot que" de m'exposer h de nouveaux cha- grins, d'autant plus que le vaisseau etait en mauvais etat. Cepen- dant revenu h moimeme, je souhaitai d'y retoumer, mais le capitaine n'y voulut pas consentir." {To be continued.) 1. Private men. 2. Capture. 3. To weigh. 4. South. 5. Parts of the sea. 6. Pinnace. 7. Crab. 8. Goat-skins. 9. Brought up. 10. Quarrel. 11. Rather than. QUESTIONNAIRE. Que firent quelques particuliers anglais pendant la guerre de la succession d'Espagne ? Qui commanda les deux vaisseaux ? Ou prit-il terre pour la premiere fois ? Ou est situee cette ile ? Qui trouva-t-on la ? Qui etait cet homme ? Comment y etait-il venu ? Combien de temps y etait-il reste ? Pourquoi avait-il ete debarqu4 par le capitame ? XIX. DIX-NEUYIEME LE9ON. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. The Subjunctive is in most cases dependent, and is therefore used in subordinate clauses. Whenever in French a subordinate clause is depend- ent upon a leading clause which contains the idea of something not yet having an actual existence for the speaker, consequently of something pos- sible or uncertain, its verb will be in the Subjunctive. This unreality can apply as well to something external, i. e. to actions and events, as to some- thing internal, i. e. to conceptions and emotions. This is the general 326 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LE^ON. ground of distinction in the application of the French Subjunctive- The two languages by no means agree in this point. Many verbs in English are put in the Future, the Conditional, or the Present Indicative, which, in French, must be in the subjunctive. Thus for instance : — Je ne pense pas qu'il soit si ag^. • I do not think he is so old. Nous craignions qu'il ne s'en allot. We feared he would go. 2. But before- passing to the rules concerning the use of the Sub- junctive, it will be indispensably necessary to understand the relation of the tenses of the Subjunctive to those of the Indicative and Conditional, without which the clause, dependent upon them, cannot be properly trans- lated. The following rules are here applicable : — 1. If the verb of the leading clause is in the Present or Future Indica- tive, that of the dependent clause will be in the Present or Compound of the Present of the Subjunctive. Ex.: — Je veux qu'il vienne* I wish him to come. Connaissez-vous gudqu'un qui sache faire cda ? Do you know anybody who knows how to do this ? Je ferai en sorte que tout soit pret. I will have everything ready. Jattendrai que mon pere soit parti. I will wait till my father has departed. 2. If the verb of the leading clause be in a past tense of the Indicative, or in the Conditional, the Imperfect of the Subjunctive must follow in the subordinate clause ; or if the subordinate clause contain an event which has already taken place, the Compound Imperfect of the Subjunctive must be employed, according to the following scheme : — Je craignais Je craignis J'ai craint Javais craint Je craindrais Jaurais craint qu'elle n'arrivdt demain — aujourd'hui, — trop tard, — trop tot, etc. * Observe that the Present and Future are the same in the Subjunctive Mood in French; the context alone shows of which of the two we speak. Ex.: — Je ne crois pas qu'elle vienne. I do not think she is coming. Je ne crois pas qu'elle vienne. I do not think she will come. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 327 qu'ils ne f assent arrives hier — avant-hier, — la semaine derniere, etc. Je craignais Je craignis J^ai craint * J'avais craint Je craindrais J'aurais craint 3. There are a great many verbs which govern the verb of the subordinate clause in the Subjunctive mood ; they may be divided into four classes, viz. : — 1. Verbs of wishing, willing, desiring, commanding or permitting. 2. Verbs of thinking, believing, and saying. 3. Verbs expressing fear, doubt, sorrow, astonishment, denial, duty, ne- cessity, joy, or delight. 4. Impersonal verbs which do not express jcertainty or probability. 4. Verbs of wishing, willing, commanding, etc. Such are ; — Aimer, to like. permettre, to permit, allow. aimer mieux, to prefer. prier, to beg, to ask. d€fendre, to forbid. recommander, to recommend. demander, to ask. smihaiter, to wish. d^sirer, to wish for, to desire. souffrir, to suffer. exiger, to demand. supplier, to beg, request. wdonner, to order. vouloir, to be willing, etc. Examples : — Xordnnne qu'il sorte, I order him to go out. J'aime qn'il sort conrageux, I like him to be brave. 77 ve>it que je dise la v€rit^ [Pres. Subj., § 2, 1). He wishes rae to say the truth. II viPxlait que je lui disse la v&it€ {Imperf., § 2, 2). He desired me to tell him the truth. T^ roi exigea, que je partisse tout de suite. The king demanded that I should leave directly ♦As the Compound of the Present belongs to Present as well as to Past time, it can be tblJowed also by the Present of the JSubjunctlve, when the dependent clause refers to Present time. Ex. : — Dieu nous a donne la raison pour que nous nous en sermons. God has given us reason that we may make use of it. 328 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON. 6. Verbs of thinking, believing, saying, etc. These verbs, and, in general, all those which express the intel- lectual faculties of the mind, govern the Indicative when they are affirmatively used, and most commonly the Subjunctive when they are used negatively, interrogatively, or are preceded by the conjunc- tion si. If I say, for instance : Je crois que Charles est malade, I represent Charles's illness to myself as a reality, and consequently the Indicative is required. But in the sentences : Je ne crois pas que Charles soil malade, or, croyez-vous que Charles soit malade f an uncertainty is expressed in regard to Charles's illness, and the Subjunctive must be used. Ex.: — Je ne crois pas que le concert ait lieu ce soir. I do not think that the concert will take place to-night. Pensez-vous qu'il puisse apprendre tout cela. Do you think he can learn all that 1 Je ne dis pas qu'il ait tort. I do not say that he is wrong. Partons, si vous pensez qu'il fosse beau temps. Note 1 . If however we ask a question, less to be informed of a thing than to inform others of it, the second verb (having the sense : Do you know ?) is put in the Indicative, and not in the Subjunctive. Ex.: — Vous ai-je dit que mon frere est arriv€? Note 2. Observe that the verbs of knowing, being sure, resolving, etc., are not comprised among those which govern the Subjunctive. They gen- erally require the Indicative, even when used interrogatively or neg- atively : — Je savais },.,... r ■ r quit dait ici. Je ne savais pas ) ^ Je ne sais s'il le fera, I do not know if he will do it. THEME 47. 1. I wish him to come (that he c). 2. The law requires that thieves^ [should] be punished. 3. I demanded that he should pay me. 4. Has he demanded that you should pay the bill?^ 5. I forbid that he should go there. 6. God wills that we love our enemies. 7. Caligula wished that the Romans should render him divme honors.^ 8. Your father expects that you should give ^ an ac- THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 329 count of wbat you have done. 9. My aunt wishes that I should set out to-morrow. 10. Tell him to wait. 11. Augustus com- manded in his will* that they should not seek to^ extend the empire. 12. Allow me to tell you (allow that I tell y.) the truth. 13. I will be obeyed (that one ob. me). 14. Do you think your aunt will come by herself ?'^ 15. If I find that you frequent bad com- pany, you will lose my friendship. 16. Do you hope they (on) will make peace ? ^ 1. Les voleurs. 2. Le compte. 3. Bes honneurs divins. 4. To give an account, reiidre compte. 5. Testament, m. 6. A etendre. 7. Seule. 8. La paix. 6. The Subjunctive is used after verbs of fear, doubt, sorrow, joy, denial or hinderance, astonishment, etc. Such are : — Avoir peur, ") s*€tonner, to wonder. craindre, \ empecher, to hinder, prevent. dmter, to doubt. nier, to deny. And likewise after : ^tre hien aise, to be glad. itre afflig€, to be afflicted. etre charm€, "> etre fdche, to be sorry. etre enchante, j" ^ ^ ^^^ S ^ • ^^^g etonne, to be astonished. etre content, to be satisfied, etre surpris, to be surprised. se r€jouir, to rejoice. regretter, to regret. trembler, to tremble. se plaindre, to complain. Examples : — Je crains que ma mere ne soit malade. I fear my mother is ill. Je ne doutais pas qu'il n'arrivdt avant vous. I did not doubt that he would arrive before you. J'empecherai qu'il ne * sorte. I will hinder him from going out. Je regrette qu'il soit venu trop tard. Mon pere est fdcM que je ne lui aie pas ^crit plus tot. Je suis charm€ que vous soyez venu me voir. Je m'€tonne qu'il n'ait pas regu ma lettre. * Concerning the particle ne, see L. XV. $ 15 - 18. 330 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON. Note 1 . The verbs avoir peur, appr€hender, craindre and trembler require the particle ne before the verb in the Subjunctive mood, but only when these verbs themselves are affirmative or negative-interrogative. Ex.: — • Je crains qu'il ne vienne. Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il ne vienne ? But if the sentence be simply negative or simply interrogative, ne is not used, as : — Je ne crains pas qu'il vienne. Craignez-vous qu'il vienne ? Note 2, If after those verbs mentioned in § 6, we wish to express our- selves with definiteness, de ce que is used instead of the simple que, and this is followed by the Indicative : — II est fdcM de ce que vous ne lui avez pas €crit. Je me plains de ce qu'dle m'a oubli€. Note 3. If the second verb is negative in English, ne — pas must be used in French, as : — Je tremble qu'il n' arrive pas a temps. I tremble lest he may not arrive in time. 7. Subjunctive after Impersonal verbs. A verb preceded by que is always put in the Subjunctive after the following Impersonals : — U est surprenant, it is surprising. il plait, it pleases, suits. il convient, it is proper. il est fdclieux, it is sad. il faut, it must. il est juste, it is just, right. il importe, it is important, it matters, il est difficile, it is difficult, it concerns. il est possible, it is possible. il suffit, it is sufficient. il est naturel, it is a matter of course. il vaut mieux, it is better. il se peut, il peut se /aire, it may be. And likewise after : — II est temps, it is time. c'est dommage, it is a pity. c'est un malheur, it is a misfortune, etc., etc. Examples : — U faut que vous partiez tout de suite. You must leave directly. II est possible qu'il revienne. It is possible that he come back. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 331 C'est dommage que vous ne soyez pas venu plus tot. It is a pity that you have not come earlier. II suffit qu'il ait avou€ sa faute. It is enough that he has confessed his fault. II est juste que vous soyez puni. It is right that you be punished. Further, after il y a, and all impersonal verbs with an adjective denoting evidence, certainty, or probability, when they are used 'yn a negative, interrogative, or conditional manner. Ex. : — Y a-t-il un mortel qui puisse dire qu'il est toujours heureux 1 Is there a mortal who can say that he is always happy ? Est-il sur qu'il ait tort 1 Is it certain that he is in the wrong ? II n'est pas sur qu'il ait tort. It is not certain that he is in the wrong. THEME 48. 1. I doubt whether that is true. 2. I doubt whether your uncle will arrive to-morrow. 8. The Egyptians did not doubt (see Les- son XV., § 15) that certain plants and animals were divinities.-^ 4. We question whether riches can aflford^ happiness. 5. I did not know that you were to come. 6. Do you doubt that I am your friend? 7. I do not doubt that you are my friend. 8. He denies that he had been told that. 9. He does not deny that he has been told that. ■ 10. It is time for us to go (that we go) home, for it begins to (a) rain. 11. It is evident that Greece could no more defend herself, so much was she at that time sunken.^ 12. It is sufficient if you tell him this. 18. It is a pity that you did not go with us; you would have enjoyed yourself much. 14. It is not probable that they will do it. 15. I must go to (ew) town. 1. Des divinites. 2. Accorder. 3. Dechue. . 8. The Subjunctive is used in relative dependent clauses begin- ning with qui, que, lequel or oil, which depend upon a leading clause in which a wish, doubt, or condition is implied, especially after an Imperative. Ex. : — 332 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON. Lisez des ouvrages qui puissent former votre gout. Read such books as can form your taste. Choisissez un appartement ou vous soyez a votre aise. Choose an apartment where you may be comfortable. lis envoy erent des ddput^s qui consultassent Apollon. They sent deputies who were to consult Apollo. If, however, no such requirement or expectation is contained in the lead- ing clause ; if, on the contrary, the matter is rather regarded as something which is actual, or which has already taken place, then, of course, the Indicative is used. Ex. : — J'ai love un appartement ou je suis hien a mon aise. lis envoyerent des deputes qui consulterent Apollon. 9. A verb preceded by the relative qui or que is put in the Sub- junctive after the Superlative, when the relative clause only express- es an opinion, as : — C'est le plus beau jardin que je connaisse. ^ This is the most beautiful garden I know. C'est une des dernieres lettres que St. Paul ait ecrites. This is one of the last letters St. Paul has written. La meilleure garde qu'un roi puisse avoir, c'est le coeur de ses sujets. The best guard a king can have is the hearts of his subjects. If, however the thing is represented as certain or as a matter of fact, the Indicative follows. Ex. : — Souviens-toi que je suis le seul qui t'a d^plu (displeased). Ne'ron est le premier empereur qui a pers€cut^ I'Eglise. 10. The Subjunctive is used further after the ordinal numbers (as, le premier, le second, le dernier, etc.), and after unique^ seidj peu, rien, and personne. Ex. : — Vous etes le premier ami que j' aie rencontr€ a Paris. You are the first friend I have met with in Paris. C'est I'unique espoir qui me soit reste'. This is the only hope that remains to me. 11 y a peu d'hommes qui sacheiit supporter I'adversit^. There are few men who know how to bear adversity. Je ne connais personne qui soit aussi heureux que lui. I know nobody who is so happy as he is. Note. Qui and que do not govern the Subjunctive, when they are pre- ceded by de and its object, to which they refer. Ex. : — Ne dites rien de ce que je vous ai confie (Ind.). THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 333 THEME 49. I. You are the most learned man I know in this town. 2. Rob- ert is the only friend on whom I can depend.^ 3. Nero was the first emperor that (has) persecuted the Christians. 4. I seek a servant who is faithful. 5. The diamond is the most valuable^ stone we know. 6. You are the first German I have met with in China. 7. There is no one who does it more easily^ than she. 8. Is this the first time you have been mistaken ? * 9. I wish it were the first time. 10. Lucretius^ and Pliny were the only natural philosophers^ whom the Romans had. 1, Compter. 2. Precieux. 3. Aisement. 4. Se tromper. 5. Lucrece et Pline. 6. Naturalistes. II. Subjunctive after conjunctions. A verb is put in the Sub- junctive after the following conjunctions : — Avant que, before. non que, 7 . .-, ^ ^ ' ^ ' ^ not that. .,1 a moins que {ne), unless. non pas que, ajin que, in order that. pour que, in oi'der that. bien que, although. pour peu que, ) .. ... , ^ , ° , ^. ^ ^ ' yif ever so httle. ae peur que (ne), lest, si peu que, ) de crainte que {ne), for fear that. pourvu que, provided. de maniere {sorte) que, so that. que — ne, till, before. en attendant que, till. quel — que, "> however. (Seep. en {au) cas que, in case. quelque — que, ) 282.) encore que, although. quoique, although. jusqu'a ce que, until. sans que, without. loin que, far from, sinon que, but that. malgre que, for all that, notwith- si tant est que, if so be that. standing that. soit que — soit que, ) whether — or. nonobstant que, notwithstanding. soit que — ou que, ) be it that — or. suppose que, suppose that. EXAMPLES. Rentrons avant qu'il fasse nuit. Let us go home before it gets dark. AJin que {pour que) vous le sachiez. That you may know it. Je ne sortirai d'ici que je ne sois pay€. I shall not go away from here before I am paid. 334 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON. Qnoiqu'il me rait promts. Although he has promised me. Pourvu qu'il y consente. Provided he consent to it. Quelque effort que fassent les hommes, leur neant paratt partout. Whatever effort men may make, their nothingness appears everywhere. A moins que vous ne me demandiez pardon. Unless you ask me for pardon. All (§n) cos qu'il mourut. In case he should die. Note. The Indicative can sometimes be used after avant que, jusqu'a ce que, sinon que, de sorte que, hi ce n'est que, tdlement que, and de maniere que, when all doubt and uncertainty are excluded, and the clause expresses a fact. Ex. : — Je gardai mon sang froid, jusqu a ce que je Ventendis calomnier mon frere. II s'est occupy de cette affaire de maniere [de sorte) qu'on n'a pu le hldmer. 12. In the same manner the Subjunctive is employed after the simple que, when used instead of one of the conjunctions, mentioned in §11. Ex.: — Je ne puis vous pardonner avant que vous me fassiez I'aveu de vos fautes et que vous me promettiez de vous corriger. I cannot pardon you before you confess your faults and promise me to improve. Venez que (instead of ajin que) je vous en disc la raison. Come, that I may tell you the reason of it. Son esprit est toujours actif, quoiqu'il soit malade et qu'il ne puisse travailler. His mind is always active, although he is sick and cannot work. 13. The conjunction que, used to avoid the repetition of si, gov- erns the Subjunctive. Ex. : — Si je ne suis pas rentr€ a quatre heures et qu'on vienne me demander, etc. If I am not at home at four o'clock, and somebody comes for me, etc. 14. The Subjunctive is also used after attendre ; till is translated by que, and not by jusqu^h ce que, as : — Attendez qu'il revienne, wait till he comes back. 15. Aside from the instances above-mentioned, the Subjunctive also occurs in a few expressions which appear either the expression of a wish or as a kind of third person Imperative. Notice espe- THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 335 cially : Dusse-Je / should I ! Puissiez-vous ! would that you ! Puissent-ih 1 may they . . . . ! Further : — DievL veuille or plut a Dieu, would to Heaven. Vive le roi, long live the king ! Puissiez-vous etre heureux, may you be happy ! Qu'on amene I'accus^, let the culprit be brought here ! Qu'ils viennent, let them come ! Que Dieu vous b^nisse, God bless you ! Que la terre hi soil le'gere, may the earth lie lightly upon him ! A Dieu ne plaise que, may heaven not permit, etc. THEME 50. 1. Before war was declared, the Carthaginians sent once more ambassadors to Rome. 2. I cannot depend on your promise, unless you give me the necessary security.^ 3. Caesar went by forced^ marches to Vienne, on the Rhone, before the enemy {plur.) became aware^ of his approach. 4. Get up early to-morrow morning, that we may start* in good time (« temps). 5. I shall not yet pass to the perusaP of this author, unless you advise^ me [to] it. 6. Keep a strict watch^ over all your senses, lest intemperance get^ the better of you. 7. Though he is lazy, yet he improves a little {fait quel- ques progres). 8. I shall wait until (§ 14) yoa have done. 9. Wait till the rain be over (passee). 10. Although Homer ,^ ac- cording to^*' Horace, slumbers^^ at tunes,^^ he is nevertheless (^7 n'en est pas moins) the first of all poets. 11. You will succeed,^^ pro- vided you act with vigor. 12. I shall soon speak French, though I am convinced that it is a difficult language. 13. I shall not leave the house before (que — ne) you sign" this paper. 14. May God protect^^ you. 15. May Heaven preserve us from war. 1. Garantie, f. 2. A marches forcees. 3. S'apercevoir de. 4. Partir. 5. Lec- ture, f. 6. Conseiller. 7. Veillez avec soin. 8. To get the better of, maitriser qn. 9. Homere. 10. Selon. 11. Sommeiller. 12. Quelque/ois. 13. lieussir. 14, Signer, 15. Proteger. t THEME 51. 1. A thoughtless^ man knows nothing, though he have read a great many books ; in the same maimer a great many persons^ re- 336 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON. main ignorant, thougli they have travelled through the most civilized countries. 2. She will forgive you, provided you make her an apology.^ 3. If somebody comes, and I am not at home, send for me. 4, I shall be obliged* to do it. 5. We should be obliged to do it. 6. I feared you would have complained of me. 7. Our cousin set out without our knowing (w. that we knew) [of] his intentions. 8. I do not beheve he has studied history. 9. Do you think they would refuse me, if I requested it of them (s^ je les en priais) ? 10. May all nations be convinced^ of this truth ! 11. I do not think he is so old. 12. Get in^ without his seeing you (w. that he s. y.). 13. Go gently/ lest he should hear you. 14. Make haste,^ lest they should set off without you. 15. I do not deny that it may be so. 16. We do not fear that it will give you pain.^ 17. Do not let^° that child ride this horse ; I am afraid he will throw^^ him off. 18. We ought to practise what the gospeP^ teaches us. 19. Shall* I read the letter aloud? 20. Yes, if you please. 21. I doubt whether the young man would have succeeded, had it not been for^^ your assistance. 1. Insouciant, 2. Gens. 3. Vos excuses. 4. Falloir. 5. To be convinced, se convaincre. G. Entrez. 7. Doncement. 8. Depechez-vous. 9. Faire cle la peine. 10. Per mettre 11. Jeter a has. 12. L'evangile,m. 13. 5aws, see p. 300. READING LESSON. ALEXANDRE SELKIRK. (Suite.) " Abandonne sur cette ile deserte avec mes habits, un lit, un fusil,^ une livre de poudre, des balles, du tabac, une hache, un cou- teau, un chaudron,^ une bible et quelques autres livres ; je m'amusai et poui-vus^ a mes besoins* le mieux qu'il me fut possible. Mais durant les premiers huit mois j'eus beaucoup de peine h vaincre la meiancolie et a surmouter I'horreur que me causait une si affi'euse solitude. *' Je fis deux cabanes^ a quelque distance I'une de I'autre, avec THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 337 du bois de piment -^ je les couvris d'une espece de jonc^ et les doub- lai^de peaux de chevres que je tuais a mcsure que j'en avais besoin, tant que ma poudre dura. Lorsqu'elle approchait de sa fin, je trou- vai le secret de tirer du feu avec deux morceaux de bois que je frottais^ Fun centre I'autre. Je faisais la cuisine^'^ dans la plus pe- tite de mes huttes, et dans la grande je dormais, cbantais des psaumes et priais Dieu. Le malheur m'avait fait connaitre le prix de la religion. " Accable de tristesse, manquant de pain et de sel, je ne man- geais qu'a I'extr^mit^, lorsque la faim me pressait, et je n'allais me coucLer que lorsque je ne pouvais plus soutenir la veille.^^ Le bois de piment me servait k cuire la viande, et k m'eclairer, et son odeur^ aromatique r^creait^^ mes esprits abattus. ** Je ne manquais pas de poissons, mais je n'osais en manger sans sel, parce qu'ils m'incommodaient, k la reserve ^* des ecrevisses de riviere, qui sont ici d'un gout exquis, et aussi grosses que celles de mer. Tantot je les mangeais bouillies, et tantot grillees,^^ de meme que la chair des chevres, qui n'a pas le gout si fort que celle des notres, et qui donne un excellent bouillon.^^ J'en avais tue jusqu'^ cinq cents. Quand ma poudre fut finie, je les prenais k la course. Par un exercice continuel je m'^tais rendu si agile que je courais a travers les bois, sur les rochers et les collines avec une vitesse in- croyable. Peu s'en fallut un jour que mon agilit^ ne me coutat la vie. Je poursuivais une chevre avec tant d'ardeur que je la pris sur le bord d'un precipice que des buissons^^ me cachaient, et je culbutai^^ de haut en bas avec elle. Cette chute ^^ terrible me fit perdre toute connaissance. Enfin revenu a moi-meme, je trouvai la chevre morte sous moi, et j'eus assez de peine k me trainer^ a ma cabane, qui en etait a un mille,^^ et a en sortir au bout de dix jours." {To he continued.^ 1. Gun. 2. Kettle. 3. From ^owrvoir, to provide. 4. Need, want. 5. Hut. 6. Pimenta. 7. Rush. 8. To line. 9. To rub. 10. To cook. 11. Watch, watching. 12. Smell. 13. To revive. 14. Exception. 15. Broiled. 16. Broth, 17. Bushes. 18. To tumble. 19. Fall. 20. To drag. 21. A mile. 338 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. QUESTIONNAIRE. Quels efFets (things) lui avait-oa laisses ? N'avait-il pas de nourriture spirituelle ? Quel fut le premier soin de Selkirk ? De quoi couvrit-il les cabanes ? D'oii tira-t-il ces peaux? Est-ce qu'il priait aussi Dieu ? Avaitrii de quoi faire du pain ? Que mangeaitril done ? N'avait-il pas de poissou ? N'y avaitrii pas d'ecrevisses ? Comment les mangeait-il ? Eut-il toujours assez de poudre ? Comment prenait-il alors les chevres ? Etait-il done si agile ? N'eut-il pas d'accident ^heux ? N'avait-il pas remarque le precipice ? Se blessa-t-il par suite de cette chute ? Quand il revint a lui, dans quel etat se trouvait-il XX. YINGTIEME LE9ON. THE INFINITIVE. 1. Tlie Infinitive sometimes takes the place of a noun. It is used as the subject of a sentence, where in English the Part. Pres. is often found. Ex. : — Secourir les pauvres est une action louable. To relieve the poor is a praiseworthy action. M€dire est une infamie. Calumaiatinff is shameful. THE INFINITIVE. 339 Note 1 . In some instances it becomes properly a noun and takes the article with it, as : le manger, le hoire, les vivres (victuals). If such an In- finitive is amplified by means of other words, it is better to write c'est or e'^tait instead of est or e'tait, and sometimes also voila. Ex.: — N' aimer que soi, c'est miner peu de chose. To love no one but one's self is to love very little, Note 2. When this amplification is somewhat long, the Infinitive can- not remain at the beginning of the sentence, but must be placed after the the predicate, and takes de before it. In order, however, not to confuse the sense and the construction of the sentence, ce or il is employed as a merely introductory subject ; ce, if a substantive follows, il, if an adjective. Examples : — C'est un honneur d'etre utile a sa patrie. II est glorieux de mourir pour sa patrie. Note 3. If this antecedent predicate have several or long amplifications the subject-infinitive is commonly introduced by an expletive que. Ex.: — C'etaitune grand nouveaut€ pour le roi que d' entendre parler si naturelle' 2. Where two imperatives are connected in English by and, if the first is a verb of motion the second must be translated in French by the Infinitive, and the conjunction omitted. Ex.: — Go and see my brother, allez voir mon frere. Go and do it, Allez le faire. 3. A verb immediately preceded by and depending on another verb (auxiliaries excepted), or following a preposition, other than en, must be put in the Infinitive : — Je vous le ferai savoir, sans etre press€. 4. Comment, how; que, what; ou, where ; pour qiioi, why, and a few other words similarly used in interrogations, are often followed by the Infinitive instead of the Indicative, when the sense will not thereby be rendered obscure. Thus "Pourquoi aller? " may mean *' Why do you go ? " *' Que faire? " " What is to be done ? " " Que dire ?' ' " What shall I say V " 5. The Infinitive without a preposition is used in French after 340 XX. VINGTIEMB LEgON. • verbs of motion, as : aller, envoyer, etc. ; after verbs that denote a perception of the senses, as: entendre, sentir, voir, etc., and after the following verbs : — Affirmer, to aflfirm. jurer, to swear. assurer, to assure. laisser, to let, to permit. avouer, to confess. nier, to deny. compter, to reckon, intend. oser, to dare. croire, to believe. paraitre, to appear. daigner, to deign. penser, to think. declarer, to declare. pretendre, to pretend. desirer,* to wish. pouvoir, to he able. devoir, to be obliged. reconnaitre, to acknowledge. dire, to say. savoir, to know. espe'rer,* to hope. sembler, to appear, to seem. faillir, to miss. souhaiter,* to wish. ^tVe, to do. soutenir, to maintain. falloir (il faut), it must. te'moigner, to testify. s'imaginer,* to imagine. vouloir, to be willing. Examples : — Venez nous voir demain. Come and see us to-morrow. Je cours lui apprendre cette nouvdle. I hasten to tell him this news. H faut envoyer chercher le m€decin. We must send for the doctor. Vous osez, — daignez, — d€sirez, -etc. lui purler ! You dare, — deign, — wish, etc.'to speak to him ! Je croyais — , je d^sirais, etc. lui rendre un service. I thought — , I wished — , etc. to render him a service. Je compte — , j'espere, etc. aller a Paris. I intend — , I hope, etc. to go to Paris. Je ne sais pas nager. I cannot swim. Croyez-vous avoir raison ? Do you believe you are in the right ? Je I'entends venir. I hear him coming. « THE INFINITIVE. 341 Note 1. After the above four verbs marked,* de is sometimes used, especially when they themselves stand in the Infinitive. Ex. : — Peut-on esp&er de vous voir demain ? Personne ne doit s'imaginer de tout savoir. Note 2. The verb faire is used for to do, to make and to get., to cause ; in all these cases it is immediately followed, in French, by the Infinitive active without a preposition : — Je ferai hdtir une maison. I will cause a house to be built. Voulez-vous faire laver vos gants ? Will you have your gloves washed ? Je lui ferai faire un theme. I will make him write an exercise. 6. The simple Infinitive^ is governed further by the verbs: aimer,* when used in the Conditional, I should like ; preferer, to prefer ; Uimer autant, to like as much ; il vaut mieux, it is better. Examples : — tPaimerais le voir, I should like to see him. // vavt mieux c€der, it is better to yield. Je jyrifere rester a la maison, I prefer staying at home. Note. When, however, in the second member of a comparison a second Infinitive follows que, this latter takes de before it. Ex.: — Jaime mieux m,ourir que de trahir mon secret. I will rather die than betray my secret. 7. The Infinitive is used after every preposition except en. Examples : — Au lieu de jouer, instead of playing. Sans alter, without going. Pour voir, for the purpose of seeing. THEME 52. 1. To speak too much is dangerous. 2. To clothe^ the poor is a good work.^ 3. To lie is to disregard^ God and to fear men. 4. To purchase peace of an enemy is to give him the means of carry- * In regard to aimer with d consult $ 15 of this lesson. 342 XX. VINGTIEME LE^ON. ^ ing on^ war. 5. Can you inform me whether the courier has arrived? 6. He has not yet arrived. 7. One must know [how] to keep^ a secret. 8. This man thinks he knows {Jnf.') everything. 9. We hope to see the queen. 10. When do you intend to re- turn? 11. I do not know precisely f but I hope to see you again soon. 12. The king caused the brave soldiers to be rewarded. 13. It is much better to keep silent '^ than to say such things. 14. The most unfortunate of men is he who thinks himself to be such (/'). 15. He assured us that he had been there. 16. To yield* to ne- cessity is not to be [a] coward.^ 17. Eating, drinking, and sleeping were his only occupations. 18. I hastened to communicate ^° to him this intelligence.^^ 19. He came to tell me that he had won noth- ing in the lottery. 20. Who would not rather (like to) be poor than possess unjustly acquired wealth ?^^ 21. Bayard said to the Constable de Bourbon : " It is better to perish fighting {en comhat- tant) for one's (so) country/^ than to conquer and (to) triumph " over it (d'elle) . 1. Vetir. 2. (Euvre, f. 3. M^priser. 4. Continuer. 5. Taire. 6. Au juste. 7. Se taire. 8. Ceder a. 9. Ldche. 10. Communiquer. 11. Nouvelle, f. 12. Des ricJiesses mal acqinses. 13. Pairie. 14. Triompher. , THE INFINITIVE PRECEDED BY DE. 8. After a substantive which the verb limits, the English prepo- sition of with a Pres. Participle (of going, of seeing, etc.) is gen- erally expressed by de with the Infinitive. Ex. : — Le de'sir de vous voir, the desire of seeing you. Sa maniere de penser et d'agir (of thinking and acting). II est temps de partir, it is time to set out. J'ai rhonneur de vous saluer. m 9. The preposition de is placed before a verb in the Infinitive, after the adjectives : avide, content, mecontent, las, drgne, capable, incapable, etc., and in general after an adjective, whenever, by inverting the sentence, the clause containing the Infinitive might THE INFINITIVE. 343 be made the leading term of an assertion expressed as subject to some tense of ^o ^e. Ex.: — Je suis curieux de savoir. I am anxious to know. Etes-vous las de travailler ? Are you tired with working ? Cet homme est capable de vous tromper. That man is capable of deceiving you. Vous etes tres-adroit d'avoir si bien re'ussi. You are very clever to have succeeded so well. 10. De is used before the Infinitive after impersonal verba, such as : ^7 convient, it is proper ; il importe, it concerns ; '// s'agity it is the question ; il suffit, it is enough ; il me tarde, I long, and after il est, il etait or it semhle followed by an adjective, as : il est facile, il etait necessaire, etc. Ex. : — // m' importe beaucoup de lui dire cela. It concerns me much to tell him this. II est beau de pardonner a son ennemi. It is a good thing to pardon one's enemy. II suffira de lui parler. It will be enough to speak to him. 11. De is used after que, than, in a comparison of predicates. See Note, § 6, of this lesson. THEME 53. 1. You have no cause^ to be angry with (contre^ me. 2. Were you at the concert yesterday ? 3. I did not have the pleasure of seeing you. 4. The way^ to be happy is to be virtuous. 5. Have you the intention of selhng your horse ? 6. Not at all ; I intend to keep it. 7. I fear losiag (to lose) your confidence.^ 8. It is too late ; it is tune to go to bed. 9. The art of dancing was known to the ancients. 10. It is disgraceful* to obey (a) one's passions. 11. The desire of appearing clever often prevents one becoming so.* 12. We rejoice greatly to see you. 13. It is agi-eeable to hear the twitter^ of the birds. 14. It is useless to warn^ him. 15. It is a 344 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. beautiful thing to forgive one's enemies. 16. It is pleasant to live with one's friends. 17. It is the fate*^ of all human things to be of short duration.® 18. The great secret of being happy is to work and to be virtuous. 19. I don't approve [of] your project of going to Europe. 20. Gentleness^^ is the surest means of escaping every offence. 21. It is sad to have no friends and to be forsaken. ^^ 1. Avoir sujet. 2. Le moyen. 3. Conflance, f. 4. Honteux. 5. De le devenir. 6. Le gazouillement. 7. Avertir. 8. Le sort. 9. De n'avoir qvJ'une courte duree. 10. La douceur. 11. Abandonne. 12. De is further used before the Infinitive, when the latter is immediately preceded by any of the following verbs : — Abstenir (s'), to abstain. accuser, to accuse. ackever, to finish. affecter, to affect. agir (s') (unip.), to be the question. ambitionner, to aspire to. appartenir, to pertain, to become. applaudir (s'), to rejoice, exult. appr^hender, to apprehend. avertir, to warn. aviser (s'), to determine. bldmer, to blame. bruler, to wish ardently. censurer, to censure. cesser, to cease. chagiiner (se), to grieve. charger, to commission. choisir, to choose. commander, to command. conjurer, to entreat. conseiller, to advise. convenir, to become, to suit. convaincre, to convince. corriger, to correct. craindre, to fear. decourager, to discourage. d^daigner, to disdain, scorn. defendre, to forbid. to leave off. d€fendre (se), to decline. defier, to challenge. d€pecher {so,), to hasten. de'saccoutumer (se), deshabituer (se), de'sesperer, to despair. desirer, to desire. De is often omit- ted after this verb. d€soler (se), to be grieved. detester, to detest. De may be omit • - ted. d€tourner, to dissuade. devoir (se), to owe it to one's self. diff€rer, to put off. dire, to tell. disconvenir, to disown, deny. discontinuer, to discontinue. disculper, to exculpate. dispenser, to excuse from. dispenser (se), to forbear. dissuader, to dissuade. douter^ to doubt. e'crire, to write. efforcer (s'), to endeavor. effrayer (s'), to be frightened. empecher, to hinder. empresser (s'), to hasten. enrager, to be enraged. THE INFINITIVE. 345 entreprendre, to undertake. €pouvanter {&'), to be frightened. essayer, to try. dtonner (s'), to wonder. €viter, to avoid. excuser (s'), to excuse one's self. feindre, to feign. feliciter, to congratulate. Jinir, to finish. flatter (se), to flatter one's self. freinir, to shudder. garder (se), to take care. gemir, to moan, lament. glorijier (se), to pride one's self. hasarder, to hazard, to risk ; se hasar- der requires a. hater (se), to hasten. imputer, to impute. indigner (s'), to be indignant. ing&er (s'), to intermeddle. inspirer, to inspire. jurer, to swear. manquer, to fail. * m€diter, to contemplate. meler (se), to concern one's self. menacer, to threaten. m&iter, to deserve. moquer (se), to laugh at. mourir (fig.), to long. n€gliger, to neglect, wzer, to deny. o^V, to offer. (nnettre, to omit. ordonner, to order. ■cublier, to forget. pardonner, to forgive. parler, to speak, /jasser (se), to do without. permettre, to permit. persuader, to persuade. piquer (se), to take pride in. plaindre, to pity. plaindre (se), to complain. prescrire, to prescribe. presser, to urge. presser (se), to hasten. pr^sumer, to presume. joner, to pray, entreat. promettre, to promise. proposer, to propose. proposer (se), to purpose. protester, to protest. punir, to punish. rassasier (se)^ to be sated. rebuter, to discourage. rebuter (se), to be weary. recommander, to recommend. refuser, to refuse. regretter, to regret. r^jouir (se), to rejoice. remercier, to thank. repentir (se), to repent. reprendre, to censure. r^primander, to reprimand. reprocher, to reproach. reprocher (se), to reproach one's self. r€soudre, to resolve. When active, followed by c?e ; passive, by a. ressouvenir (se), to remember. nVe, to laugh. risquer, to venture. seoiV, to be becoming. rougir, to blush. scandaliser (se), to take oflfence. sommer, to summon. souffrir, to suffer. souhaiter, to wish. Z)e may be sup- soupgonner, to suspect. souvenir (se), to remember. suffire (unip.), to suflSce. sugg&er, to suggest. supplier, to beseech. tdcJier, to endeavor. 846 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. tarder, (unip.), to long. se troiiver Men, to derive benefit. tenter, to attempt. se trouver mat, to fare ill. trembler, to tremble. vanter (se), to boast. EXAMPLES. U cesse de pleuvoir, it ceases raining. Je vous conseille de pai-tir, I advise you to set out. Je crains de vous deranger, I fear to disturb you. II est d€fendu de fumer ici, smoking is forbidden here. Dites-lui de venir, tell him to come. Vous m^ritez d'etre puni, you deserve to be punished. // risque de tout perdre, he risks losing everything. La forteresse fut somm€e de se rendre, the fortress was summoned to sur- render. 13. After the following prepositions and conjunctions : — pres^ hors, avant, au lieu, loin, afin, a moins, de crainte, or dt peur, a force (by) faute (for want of) , plutot que (rather than) . Ex. : — Avant de partir, before departing. Au lieu de pleurer, instead of crying. Loin de se corriger, far from amending himself. A force de prier, by much entreaty. Dieu nous afflige afin de nous corriger, God sends us afflictions (in order) to amend us. Je sors, de crainte (or depeur) de vous ddranger, I go for fear of disturbing you. THEME 54. 1. I advise you to stay here and (to) begin your studies. 2. I beg you to come at six o'clock. 3. The first step^ towai-ds good (vers le Men) is to avoid evil. 4. It is (c'es^) the duty of a Chris- tian^ to please God, to hurt nobody, and to do good, even to his enemies. 5. He is not able to go so far. 6. You are very amiable in having come to pay^ us a visit. 7. It is dangerous to trust^ every- body. 8. The law of nature forbids us to do injustice {tort) to others. 9. A simple and temperate diet^ lays the foundation^ of firm health, [which is] capable of enduring^ the greatest hardships.^ 10. I cannot help^ recognizing in the laws of nature a wonderful THE INFINITIVE. 347 art ; and I hesitate not to say, in the language of Scripture ,^^ that every star hasteneth^^ to go whither the Lord sendeth it. 1. Le pas. 2. Chretien. 3. Faire. 4. Se fier a. 5. Nourriture. 6. Prepare. 7. Supporter. 8. Les fatigues. 9. M'empecher. 10. VEcriture Sainte. 11. Se depecher. THEME 55. 1. I was astonished, after such news, to see the man so quiet. 2. Before one writes {Inf.), one must know what one wishes to say. 3. Instead of working, he went to walk that day. 4. I longed^ to see my native country^ again ; accordingly^ I determined to embark^ for Europe. 5. By much entreaty, I induced^ my friend to accom- pany me. 6. For fear of offending him, I preferred to remain^ silent. 7. The enemy retired/ in order^ to make beheve that he had given over^ the siege. 8. -When one advised Philip to expel^'' from his dominions^^ a man who had spoken ill of him ; " I will take care^^ [not] to do it," replied Philip; '*he would go everywhere and speak ill of me." 1. II me tardait. 2. Pays natal. 3. CPest pourquoi. 4. S'embarquer pour. 5. Engager a. 6. 3fe taire. 7. Reflective vert>. 8. AJin de. 9. Henoncer a. 10. Chasser. 11. Etat. 12. -S'e garder Men. THE INFINITIVE WITH «. We place the preposition a before the Infinitive of a verb : — 14. When the English Infinitive is passive, or can be changed to the passive without altering the sense. Ex. : — La moisson a esp&er, the harvest to be hoped for. Cette maison est a vendre, this house is to be sold. Je n'ai pas de temps a perdre, I have no time to lose. 15. After a substantive, when the following verb is or may be expressed by in with the Pros. Part. Ex. : — J' aural beaucoup de plaisir a vous voir. I shall have great pleasure in seeing you. 16. After any adjectives which take a verb in the Infinitive to complete the sense, provided the verb preceding the adjective is not used impersonally. Especially after : — 348 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. Accessible, accessible. lent, slow. ais^, easy. pret, ready. attentif, attentive. prompt, quick. bon, good. propre, fit, proper. dispose, disposed, inclined. sensible, sensible. difficile, difficult, hard. sourd, deaf. docile, obedient. utile, useful. hahile, skilful. inutile, useless. facile, easy. (See also L. VIII,, Gov. of Adj.) EXAMPLES. Cd.te legon est facile a apprendre, this lesson is easy to learn. Ce fruit n'est pas bon a manger, this fruit is not good to cat. Ce theme est-il difficile a traduire ? is this exercise hard to translate ? Nous sommes disposes a croire que, etc., we are disposed (inclined) to believe that, etc. Soyez prompts a faire le bien, be quick to do good. Note. Compare the following sentences, in which the verb preceding the adjective is used impersonally (see L. XX., § 10). Ex. : — // n'est pas facile de prononcer ce mot, it is not easy to pronounce that word. II est difficile de vaincre ses passions, it is difficult to conquer one's passions. II semble difficile d' apprendre cette langue, it seems difficult to learn that language. The other way would be : — Ce mot n'est pas facile a prononcer. Cette langue parait difficile a apprendre, etc. THEME 56. 1. This wood is to be sold. 2. These rooms are to let. 3. We have not a moment to lose. 4. There is much pleasure in taking a a walk. 5. Is this house to sell or to let ? 6. It is to let. 7. I perceived in him a kind^ of repugnancy to learn Greek.^ 8. You know his courage in facing^ dangers. 9. This girl spends all her time in playing. 10. -There is more glory in dying like Nelson than in living in unmerited'' honor. 11. Is German easy to learn? 12. It is not so easy as French. 13. That is easy to say, but not so easy to do. 14. That forest^ is dangerous to pass. 15. I am ready to follow you, but I fear that you are not fit to guide® us. THE INFINITIVE. 349 16. Be attentive to seize the opportunity/ 17. The just man is slow to punish but quick to reward. 18. Are you disposed to do what I tell you? 19. I shall be quick to perform what you command me. 1. Une sorte de repugnance. 2. Le Grec. 3. Affronter. 4. Au sein des hon- neurs qu^on n'a pas merites. 5. Fortt, f. 6. Guider, conduire. 7. L^occasioth 17. The following verbs also govern the Infinitive with a : Aba{sser{s'), to stoop. aboutir, to end in. accorder{s'), to agree, to coincide. accoutumer, to accustom. achamer{s'), to strive furiously. admettre, to admit, to permit. aguerrir{s'), to become inured. aider, to help. aimer, to like (v. L. XX., § 6). consentir, to consent. consister, to consist. conspirer, to conspire. consumer, to consume. contribuer, to contribute. convier, to invite. Sometimes lowed by de. couter, to cost. When used imper- sonally it is followed by de. fol- amuser{s*), to amuse one's self with, decider, to decide. animer, to animate, to incite. appliquer{s')y to apply one's self. apprendre, to learn, to teach. appreter{s'), to prepare. aspirer, to aspire. assigner, to assign, to summon. determiner, to determine. determiner [se) , to resolve. disposer, to dispose. disposer (se), to prepare one's self. divertir[se) , to amuse one's self, donner, to give. assujettir{s'), to subject one's self to. employer, to employ. attacher{s*), to strive. attendre{s'), to rely upon, expect. atteyidre, to put off, delay. augment €r{s'), to increase. autoriser, to authorize. avder{s'), to debase one's self. avoir, to have. balancer, to hesitate. borner{se), to confine one's self to. chercher, to seek. complaire{se) , to delight in. concourir, to concur. condamner, to condemn : also the rcf. condescendre, to condescend. encourager, to encourage. engager, to induce. enhardir, to embolden. enseigner, to teach. entendre{s'), to be skilful, to be a judge. entreprendre, to undertake. essat/er{s'), to attempt. donner{s'), to wonder. etre, to be. etHdier{s'), to make it one's study. €vertaer{se) , to strive (may be fol- followed by pour), exceller, to excel. 350 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. exciter, to excite. exercer{s'), to practice. exhorter, to exhort. exposer{s') to expose one's self. hair, to hate. hahituer{s'), to become used to. hasarder[se), to venture. Msiter, to hesitate. ,, induire, to induce. instruire, to instruct. interesser, to interest. inviter, to invite. jnettre, to set, to put. mettre{se), to begin. montrer, to show, to teach. obstiner{s'), to persist in. offrir[s'), to offer one's services. opinidtrer{s' ) to insist upon. parvenu', to succeed in. passer, to spend (time, etc.). pencher, to incline. penser, to think, to intend. pers€v€rer, to persevere. per sister, to persist. plaire{se), to delight in. plier{se), to bend, bow, comply. porter, to induce. pousser, to urge, compel. prendre plaiser, to take pleasure. pr€parer{se), to prepare. pre'tendre, to lay claim, to sue. When signifying io mean, qch. a qn., to teach one permettre a qn., to allow one. enseigner ) something. plaire a qn., to please one. conseiller qch. a qn., to advise. rem^diera qch., to remedy. convenir a qn., to suite any one. renoncer a qch., to renounce, abdicate d€plaire a qn., to displease one. d€sohdr aqn., to disobey one. dire a qn., to tell some one. faire tort a qn., to wrong one. se Jier a qn., to trust one. nuire a qn., to hurt, injure one. ob^ir a qn., to obey one. ordonner a qn., to order. pardonner a, to pardon, forgive one. parvenir a qch., to attain. something. re'stgner a qch.., to resign something. r^sister a qn., to resist one. ressemhler a qn., to resemble one. subvenir a, to relieve. succe'der a, to succeed. se soustraire a, to keep out of the way. survivre a, to outlive, survive. toucher a qch., to touch something. 374 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. Examples : — Pouvez-vous enseigner le latin a mon Jils ? Can you teach my son Latin 1 U faut oh€ir a vos parents. You must obey your parents. On ne pent pas plaire a tout le monde. You cannot please everybody. Ne vous fiez pas a lui. Do not trust him. THEME 66. 1. Who teaches your brother French? 2. Mr. R., who is a very good teacher. 3. This ribbon does not please my sister. 4. You have wronged your neighbor; you have hurt his credit ;^ at least he says so Qe). 5. A good christian forgives his enemies. 6. Miss Mary resembles her mother [very] much. 7. Will you allow your pupils to to take a walk this afternoon ? 8. Yes, I will allow them to go with you. 9. Children must obey their parents. 10. The officer disobeyed the orders of the king. 11. The son succeeded his father. 12. The riches of the count would have relieved the wants ^ of the poor. 13. He who wishes to please everybody, runs the risk^ of pleasing (c?e ne plaire) nobody. 14. Louis the Fourteenth survived his son, the dauphi/i, and his grandson.* 15. Do not touch anything. 1. Credit, m. 2. Besoin, m. 3. Courir risque. 4. PetU-fils. 3. Verbs which require in English the prepositions ©/"and from are generally followed in French by de. Besides these, the follow- ing also require de : — Accahler de, to overwhelm. approcher de, ) s'acquitter de qch, to discharge. s^approcher de, j approacn. s'affliger de, to be afflicted at. s'armer de, to arm one's self with. s'apercevoir de,* to remark, to per- avoir besoin de, to want, to require. ceive. avoir pitiede, to pity. * Apercevoir, when not a pronominal verb, governs the direct object and applies to visible things, as : J^apergus une flamme. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 375 avoir or prendre soin de, to take care of. bruler de, to burn with. charger de, ) ,7 T r to load with. combler de, ) se contenter de, to be satisfied or con- tented with. couvrir de, to cover with. se dejier de, } sem^fierde,\^''^'^^'''^' d€pendre de, to be dependent on. envelopper de, to wrap up in. /aire de, to do with (to make use of). /aire present de, to present with. feiiciterqn. deqch., to congratulate on. fourmiller de, to swarm with. honorer de, to honor with. jouir de qch., to enjoy. m€dire de qn., to traduce, to slander. se meler de qch., to meddle with. se moquer de qn., to laugh at. mourir de, to die of. munir de, to furnish, provide with. se passer de qch., to do without. perir de, to perish or die of. profiler de qch., to profit by. pourvoir de, to provide with. punir de qch., to punish for. r^compenser de qch,, to reward for. regarder de, to regard with. se rejouir de, to rejoice at. remercier de qch., to thank for some- thing. remplir de, to fill with. se repentir de, to repent. rire de, to laugh at. se souvenir de, to remember, to recol- lect. sourire de, to smile at. triompher de, to triumph over. se tromper de, to mistake. Examples : — Approchez-vous du feu, come near the fire. Je me suis d€fi€ de ses promesses. I distrusted his promises. On m'accabla de reproches. They overwhelmed me with reproaches. Elle sourit de noire embarras. She smiled at our embarrassment. THEME 67. 1. He was overwhelmed with reproaches.^ 2. You must dis- charge that obligation. 3. Death pities nobody, neither rich nor poor. 4. Come near the window. 5. Nature wants few things. 6. She is contented with little. 7. Have you not perceived this mistake? 8. No, sir, I have not perceived it (en). 9. The ground'' was covered with snow. 10. The general honored me with 376 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. his friendsliip. 11. Your brother presented me with this silver pen- holder.' 12. The impious* mock at virtue and religio?z. 13. Do not meddle with my affairs. 14. Distrust that man ; he will laugh at your benefits^ when he no longer requires them. 15. Never tra- duce (slander) anybody. 16. Mr. A. is a very strong man; he enjoys good health. 17. If he repents his faults, I will pardon him. 18. I cannot do without his help.® 19. I hope (that) you will profit by this experience. 20. Remember your promise. 21. I remember that story very well. 22. Everybody rejoices at that victoiy.' 1. Jieproche, m. 2. Laterre. 3. Porte-plume, m.. 4. Jmpie. 5. Bienfait,ra.. 6. Secours, in. 7. Victoire, f. 4. Verbs with different governments. The following verbs have different governments according to their different significations : — 1. Abuser qn., to deceive. abuser de qch., to abuse, to misuse. 2. Assister qn., to assist, to help. assister a qch., to be present at. 3. Changer qch., to change, to alter, to exchange. changer de qch., to change, to change one thing for another. changer en, to turn into. 4. Convenir de qch., to agree (construed with etre). convenir a qn., to suit. 5. Croire qn., to believe some one. croire qch., to believe something. croire a qch., to believe in something. croire en, to believe in. 6. Demander qn., to ask or inquire for some one. demander qch., to ask for somothing. demander a qn., to ask a person. demander qch. a qn., to ask something of some one or to ask some one for something. 7. Echapper and s'^chapper de, to escape from, i. e. out of. €chapper a, to escape from, i. e. to avoid, to be preserved from. 8. Se fdcher de qch., to be sorry for. " " contre qn., to be angry at. 9. Insulter qn. or qch. (dir. obj.), to offend by insults. insulter a qn. or a qch., to deride, to scorn, to insult. 10. Jouer a qch., to play at a game. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 377 jouei' de I'argent, to play for money. jouer d'uji instrument, to play (on) an instrument. 86 jouer de qn., to laugh at, to deceive. 11. Manquer (neuter verb without a government), to be wanting or miss- ing. manquer qn. or qck., to miss, to fail in. manquer de qch., to be wanting in, to be short of. manquer a qn. or a qch. (also contre qch.), to fail in, to omit. 12. R^pondre a qch., to answer. r€pondre de qch., to answer for. 13. Satisfaire qn., to satisfy, to content. satisfaire a qch., to fulfil duties to . . . , to satisfy. 14. S^vir qn., to serve one, to be at one's service. servir de qch., to serve as something, for some one. 15. Souscrire qch., to subscribe, to sign. souscrire a qch., to approve of, to subscribe to. 16. User qch., to use up, to wear out. us&r de qch., to make use of, to use. Examples : — On a chang€les conditions, they have altered the conditions. Tai change de logement, I have taken other lodgings. Que demandez-vous, what do you ask for ? Demandez a voire mere, ask your mother. J'ai demands mon argent a mon oncle, I have asked my money of my uncle. R^pondez a ma question, answer my question. Pouvez-vous repondre de sa probite, can you answer for his honesty ? 5. Special remarks on some verbs. 1. Acheter qch. a qn., to buy something of some one. 2. Aider qn., to succor, to support, to give means of doing, aider a qn., to help, to aid physically in doing something. 3. Applaudir, to applaud something, governs the dir. obj. applaudir, to applaud a person, governs the ind. obj. 4. Approcher qch. (active verb), to approach, to advance, to bring or push near. approcher qn., to approach — to have free access. approcher de qn. or de qch., to approach some one or something, to go or draw nearer (see § 3). 5. Emjjrunter, to borrow, governs the indirect object of the person when 378 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEME LEgON. represented by a personal pronoun (such as lui, leur, nous, etc.). But it requires a or de when the person is expressed by a noun (as : a or de mon frere, of my brother. 6. En croire qch., to trust, to depend upon. 7. H^riter qch. de qn., to inherit something from some one. If, however, no person is mentioned, the thing follows the preposition de. 8. Persuader qn. de qch., to convince a person of the truth of a thing. persuader qch. a qn., to persuade one to do something. 9. Redoubler qch. (dir. obj.), means to redouble, i. e. to reiterate. redoubler de qch., to redouble, i. e. to augment in force. 10. Penser a means to have one's mind upon. penser de, to have an opinion of. Examples : — Approchez la table, approach the table (bring it nearer). Tout le monde pent approcher notre prince. Everybody has free access to our prince. iVe vous approchez pas tant du hord. Do not go so near the edge. Pensez a moi, think of me. • Que pensez-vous de cela, what do you think of that 1 6. On the verb faire. The verb faire when followed by an Infinitive with a dir. obj., requires the person in the ind. obj., the two verbs being considered as one verbal expression the sense of which is is always active. The reason of it is that an active verb cannot have two direct complements (see L. XXII, 10). Ex. : — Je lui ai fait €crire cinquante mots. I have made him write fifty words. Sa mere lui a fait raconter cette histoire. His mother caused him to relate that story. But if there be no direct object after the Infinitive that follows /aire, the person stands in the direct object. Ex.: — Je les ai fait partir, I have made them depart. Nous les avons fait renoncer a leur pretentions. We have made them abandon their pretentions. 7. The verbs ecouter, entendre, laisser and voir, also, are some- times used in this manner, as : — GO.YERNMENT OF VERBS. 379 Je lui at vu maltraiter son chien. I saw him ill-treat liis dog. But this ie not generally adopted, and it is better to say : — Je I'ai vu maltraiter son chien. J'ai vu le petit gargon (dir. obj.) maltraiter son chien. 8. When the Infinitive is followed by a subordinate sentence with que, the indirect object is preferred, as : — " Je lui at entendu dire qu'il partirait. I heard him say that he was going to leave. J'ai entendu dire a son pere qu'il lui pardonneratt. I heard his father say that he would forgive him. THEME 68. 1. The jailer^ has deceived the prisoner with respect to (swr) the lot^ which awaited him. 2. Have you not abused our patience ? 3. We have abused it (en). 4. The hour from 10 to 11 does not suit my sister. 6. We have agreed on the price. ^ 6. Let us always assist the poor. 7* I could not be present at the funeral.* 8. I have changed my opinion. 9. Could you change me this napoleon? 10. Industry is the true philosopher's^ stone that changes all metals into gold. 11. Whom have you asked for ? 12. I inquired for my eldest^ brother. 13. Have you asked your friend for money? 14. I have not asked him for any. 15. Do not be- lieve that man, he is a liar.^ 16. I do not believe in his promises. 17. We believe in God. 18. The little bird has escaped from his cage. 19. Can^ you play at chess ?^ 20. No, Sir, but I will play at cards with you, if you like.^^ 21. I play (on) the violin and my sister plays on the piano. 22. We often play together. 23. I was too late, I missed the train.^^ 24. A soldier must {doit) not fail in courage. 25. The pupil redoubled his applicatio?i, when he heard that a prize ^ would be given. 26. The man' is too poor, he cannot satisfy his creditors.^^ 27. Do you make use of specta- cles?^^ 28. Yes, I always wear spectacles; I am short-sighted.^* 29. Malie him read a chapter ^^ or two. 30. I made him relate^^ 380 XXV. VINGT-ClNQtJlfiME LEQCN. the story a second time. 31. Charles the XII made all that mul- titude cross ^^ the river, without retaining ^^ a single soldier prisoner. 1. Le geolier. 2. ie sort. 3. Prix, m. 4. Funerailles, f. pi. 5. Philosophe, m. 6. Aine. 7. Menteur. 8. Savoir. 9. ^wa; echecs. 10. FoMtoir. 11. ie convoi. 12. Creancier. 13. Lunettes, f. pi. 14. J'ai ia tn,goutte, f. Drunk and drunken, ivre. Dry, sec. Duck, canard, m. • " Dumb, mu^t. During, pendant. Dust, poussiere, f. Duty, devoir, m. Dwell, demeurer, habiter. Dye, teindre, irr. see p. 175. E. Ear, oreille, f. Early, de bonne heure. Earth, terre, f. Easily, facilement. Easy, aise, facile. . • Eat, manner. Edition^ edition, impression, f. Educate, clever. Education, education, f. Effort, effort, m. Egg, aetif, m. Elect, elire, irr. see p. 177. Elephant, elephant, m. Ell (measure), aune, f. Elm (tree), orme, m. Eloquently, eloquemmenf. Embarrass, embarrasser, deranger. Embellish, embellir. Employ, employer. End, n., bout, m. (object) j^w, f. hut^ m. End, v.,finir, cesser. Enemy, ennemi, m. Engine (steam), machine a vapeur. Enough, assez. Enricli, enrichir. Enter, entrer. Entertain, entretenir, am/user. Entertaining, amusant. Envy, envie, f. Equal, egal, pareil. Equality, egalite, f. Error, faufe, erreur, f. Escape, echapper, se sauver, see p. 105., fair, irr. see p. 183. Esteem, estimer. Evening, soir, m. soiree, f. 388 VOCABULARY. Event, 4v4nement, m. Ever, jamais. Everybody, cJiacun, tout le monde,— thing, timt, — where, partout. Evil, 77ial, m. Example, exemple, m. Execute, executer, s'aquitter de. Exercise, exercice, theme, m. Exhaust, epuiser. Exist, exister. Expect, attendre, s^atfendre a. Extinct, eteint. To become — s'eteindre. Extinguish, efeindre, irr. see p. 175. Extract, exfraire, irr. see p. 174. Extreme, extreme. Eye, ceil ; pi. yeux, m. Fable, fable, m. Face, face, f. visage, m. figure, f. Fail, faillir^ def. see p. 197, manquer. Faint, defatUir, def. see p. 197. Faithful, fidele. Fall, tomber, choir, dechoir, def. see p. 189. Fall, chxite, f. False, faux. Falsehood, mensonge, m. Familj^, famille, f. Fan, evantail, m. Far, loin, from far, de loin. Fat, gras. Fate, sort. Facner, pere, in-law, beau-pere, god- father, parrain. Yault, faute, f. defaut, m. Fear, peur, crainte, f. Fear, craindre, irr. see p. 175. Fearful, craintif. Feather, plume, f. February, fevrier, m. Feed, nourrir, {graze) paitre, irr. see p. 178. Feel, sentir, irr. see p. 184. Feign, feindre, irr. see p. 175. Fellow-traveller, compagnon de voyage. Ferocious, feroce. Fertilize, fertiliser. Few, peu, a , quelques. Field, champ. Fight, combattre. Fill, emplir, remplir, rassasier, combler. Find, trouver. Fine, beau. Finish, finir, terminer, achever. Fire, feu, m. Flag, pavillion, drapeau, m. Flatter, flatter. Flatterer, flatteur, m. Flee, fair, s''enfuir, irr. see p. 183. Flesh, chair, f. Florin, florin, m. F\our, farine, f. Flourish, fleurir, see p. 102. Flower, fleur, f. Fly, mouche, f. Fly, fair, s'enfuir, irr. see p. 183, voler. Fog ^ brouiUard, m. Follow, stiivre, irr. see p. 174. Folly, sottise, folie, f. Kool, sot, imbecile, fou. Foolishness, sottise, betise. Foot, pied, m. For, prep. pour. For, conj. car, as , quant a. Forbid, dsfendre, God— —I d Dieu ne plaise ! Forehead, front, m. Foreign, etranger. Foresee, prevoir, irr. see p. 192, pressen- tir, irr. see p. 184. Forest, foret, f. Forget, oublier. ^ Forgive, pardonner. Fork, fourchette. Formerly, autrefois. Forsake, abandonner. Fortnight, quinze jours. Fortune, fortune, f. Forward, and forwards, en avant, sur le decant. Found, fonder. Freeze, geler. Frequently, souvent. Fr es h , frais , fern, fraiche. Friday, vendredi. Friend, ami, m. amie, f. Friendly, amical. Friendship, amitie. ^ Fruit, frxiit, m. " . Full, plein. Fulfil, remplir, satisfaire. Furniture, meubles, pi. m. G. Gain, gagner, (a victory) rempor- ier, — (affection, hatred) attirer. Game, jeu, (chase) gibier. Gape, bdiller. Garden, jardin, m. Gardener, jardinier, m. Gate,por^e, f. Gather, cueillir, recueillir, irr. see p. 184. General, general, m. Generous, genereux. Genius, genie, m. Gentleman, gentilhomme. Gentleness, douceur, f. Get up, se lever. Gift, don, m. Girl,^Z^e, f. Give, donner. Glad, aise, content. Gladly, volontiers, avec plaisir. Glass, verre, m. Glitter, reluire, irr. see p. 171. Glory, gloire, f. Glove, gant, m. Go, alter, irr. see p. 194, —away (set out), 8'en aller, partir, irr. see p. 183, VOCABULARY. 389 — far from, s^ eloigner de, — for, aller chercher, — on, continuer, — out, sor- iir, irr. see p. 184, — out, eteiiidre, irr. see p. 175. God, Dieu, m. Gold, or, m. Good, n., le Men. Good, ad., bon, sage. To be for nothinpr, ne valoir rien. Good- will i bienveillance, f.- * Goodness, bonte, f. Govern, gouverner. Gown, robe, f. Grammar, grummaire, i. Grandfather, grand-pere, aiend. Grandmother, grand'mere. Grant, accorder. Grass, herbe, verdure, f. Graze, paltre, irr. see p. 178. Great, grand. Green, vei^t. Grief, douleur, f, peine, f. Grind, moudre, irr. see p. 174. Ground, terre. On the a, par terre. Grow, croitre, irr. see p, 178, — lean, maigrir, — old, vieillir — pale, pdllr, — red, rougir, — tall, grandir, — thin, maigrir, — worse, empirer. Guilty, coupable. Hail, n., grele, f. Hail, v., greler. Half, n., nioitie, f. Half, ad., demi. Hand, main, f. Handkerchief, mouchoir, m. Handsome, beau. Happen, arriver, survenir, irr. see p. 187. Happily, heureusement. Happiness, bonheur, m. Happy, heureux. Hard, dur, difficile. Hardly at all, ne — guere, — ever,presque jamais. Hare, lievre, m. Harvest, moisson, rdcolte. Haste, and Hasten, hater, se depecher, s'empresser. Hat, chapeau, m. To put on one's — , mettre son chapeau, se couvrir. To take off oDe's. hat, oter son cliapeau, se decouvrir. Hate, ha/ir, see p. 102. Hatred haine, f. Hay,/oftt, m. Head, tete, f. Heal guerir. Health, sanU,f. Hear, entendre, outr^ def. see p. 198. Heart, cceur, m. Heat, chaleur, f. Heaven, del, pi. ciev,x, m. Heavy, lour id, pesant. Helm, gouvernail, m. Henceforward, desormais, dor4navant. Here, id, y. Heretofore, autrefois. Hide, cacher. High, haut, elev4. Hill, colline, f. cotecm, m., montagne, f. Hinder, empecher. History, histoire, f. Hit, frapper, atteindre, irr. see p. 175. Hive, ruche, f. Hoist, hisser. Hold, tenir, irr. see p. 187. Hole, trou, m. Holiday, conge, m. Home, au logis, a la maison, chcz soi, see p. 37. Honest, honnete. Honor, honneur. m. Hope, n., espdrance, f., espoir, m. Hope, v., esperer. Horse, cheval, m. Hot, chatid. Hour, heure. f. House, maison, f. How, comment, combien, que, — long (since when)? depuis qu^ndl — many (much) combien. However, quelque. Human, humain. Hunger, /aim, f. To be hungry, avoir faim. Hunter, chasseur, m. Hunting, chasse, f. Hurt, nuire, irr. see p. 172, blesser, gdter. Husband, mariy epbux. Ice, glace, f. Idea, idee, f. Idle, pai-esseux,. If, si. Ill, adj., malade. Ill, adv.,mal. Illness, maladie, f. Image, image, f. Imagine, imaginer. Immortal, immortel. Importune, importuner. Impossible, impossible. In, en, dans, see p. 297, and p. 304. Inch, pouce, m. Increase, accroitre, croitre, irr. see p. 178, augmenter. Incredible, incroyable. Inconstant, inconstant. Incur, s^attirer, encourir, irr. see p. 184. Indeed, vraiment. Infamous, infdm,e. Infringe, enfreindre, irr. see p. 175. Inhabit, habiler^ demeurer. Inhabitant, habitant, m. Injure, nuire, irr. see p. 172. Ink, encre, f. Inkstand, encrier, m. 390 VOCABULARY. Inquire, s^enquerir, irr. see p. 188. Inquisitive, curieux. Inscribe, inscrire, irr. see p. 176. Instruct, instruire. irr, see p. 172. Interrupt, interrompre. Into, dans, see p. 297. Introduce, presenter, introduire, irr. see p. 172. Invent, inventer. Invite, inviter. Iron,/er, m. Island, lie, f. Ivory, ivoire, m. January, Janvier, m. Jealous, jaloux. Jealousy, jalousie, f. Jewel, bijou, m. Join, joindre, irr. see p. 175. Joy, joie, f. July, juillet, m. June, juin, m. Just, juste. Justice, justice, f. K. Keep, tenir, irr. see p. 187, (observe) ob- server. Kill, tuer. Kindness, bonte. King, roi, m. Kingdom, royaume, m. Kitchen, cuisine, f. Knee, genou, m. Knife, couteau, m. Know, connaitre, irr. see p. 178, savoir, irr. see p. 191. Knowledge, science, f., savoir, m., cow- naissance, f. Labor, n., travail, m., pi. aux. Labor, v., travaiUer. Laborious, laborieux. Laconic, laconiqv^. . Lady, dame, f. Lamb, agnenu, m. Language, langue, f., langage, m. Land, ^erre, f. Large, gros, grand. Last, V .durer, continuer. Last, adj., dernier, passe. Lasting, durable. Late, adj.,/eM, see p. 247. Late, adv., tard, en retard. Laugh, rire, irr. see pp. 194 and 107. Law, loi, f. Lawyer, avocat. m. IjSiZYiParesseux, Lead, n.,plomb, m. Lead, v., mener, — into, induire en, irr. see p. 172. Leaf, feuille, f. League, Ueue, f. Learn, apprendre, irr. see p. 181. Learned, savant. Least, le moindre. At the — , du moiws, (at all events), au moins, in the — , dti tout. ■ Leave (of absence), conge, m. Leave, v., quitter, laisser, cesser. Take — of, prendre conge de. Left, gauche, f. Leg, jambe, f. Lend, prefer. Less, mains. Let, laisser, — us • go, allons, — him know, faites-lui savoir, (to hire) louer. Letter, lettre, f. Liar, menteur, m. Liberty, liberie, f. Lie, gesir, def. see p. 198. Lie, mentir, irr. see p. 184. Life, vie, f. Lift up, lever, eUver. Like, parell, adv., comme. L,ike\y, probable, vraisemblable. Lily, lis, m. Limit, limiter, borner, restreindre, see p. 175. Line, ligne, f. Linen, toile, f. Unbleached—, toile ecrue. Lion, lion, m. Listen, ecotiter. Little, tidi; petit, a,6.v.,peu, ne — guere. Live, vivre, irr. see p 181, (dwell), de- meurer, habiter. Loadstone, aimant, m. Lock, serrure, f. Locksmith, serrurier, m. Long, adj., long, fem. tongue, adv., long- temps, depuis longtemps. Look at, regarder, — for, chercher. Looking-glass, miroir. Lose, perdre. Loss, perte, f. Love, n., am,our, m. Love, v., aimer, — dearly, cherir. Low, bas. Luxury, luxe, m. M. Mad,/oM, insensS. Madam, Madame. Magnificent, magnifique. Maintain, maintenir, irr. see p. 187, nourrir. Make, /aire, irr. see p. 180, — up a quar- rel, a/Ms^er une querelle, — haste, se depecher. Man, homme, m. Manners, mceurs, f. VOCABULARY. 391 Many, plusieurs, beaucoup, Men des. So — , tant, tavt rfe, autaut. As — as, au- tant que. Too — , trop. Map, carte, f. March, mars, m. Marriage, mariage, m. Marry, viarier, tpouser, se marier. Master, n., niaitre, m. Master, v., dompter, s^emparer de. Matter, matiere, i'., affaire, f., chose, t. May, 7nai, m. Meado\v, 2)re, m., prairie, f. Moal, repus, m.,farine, f. Mean, has. Means, moyen, m. Meat, viande, f. Meddle, se meler (de). Medicine, inMecine. Meet, rencontrer. Melt, fo7idre. Member, niembre, m. Memory, mtmoire. Mend, raccommoder, — a pen, tailler. Merchant, negociant. Messenger, messager. Metal, mttal, m. Middle, milieu, m. Mild, doux. Milk, lait, m. Miller, mewuier, m. Mind, esprit, m. Minute, minute, f. Miss, Mademoiselle. Misfortune, malheur, m. Mislead, egarer. induire en erreur. Mist, hrouillard, m. Mistake, v., se tromper, mdconnaitre, irr, see p. 179, meprendre, irr. see p. 181. Mistake, n., erreur, f., faute, f. Mistrust, se mcfier de, se defter de. Mock, se mx)quer de, rire de, irr. see p. 194. Modern, moderne. Modest, modeste. Modesty, modestie, f. Moment, moment, instant, m. Monday, lundi, m. Money, argent, m. Month, mois, m. Moon, lune, f. More, plus. Morning, matin, matinee. Mortal, mortel. Mother, mere, f.,— in law, belle-mere. Grandmother, grand^mere. Motive, motif, m. Mourning, deuil, m. Mouse, houris, f. Mouth, botiche, f. Move, mouvoir, emouvoir, irr. see p. 190. Much, beaucoup, bien de. Too — , trop. How — , combien. As — , tant, autant. As — as, autant que. Mud, boue, f. Murder, assassiner. Music, musique, f. Mnslin, mousseline, f. Mutton, mouton, m. N. Nail, ongle, m., (of metal) clou^xa.. Naked, nu. Name, nom, m. Napkin, serviette, f. Nature, nature, f. Naughty, mechant. Near, procJte, pres, aupres. He is pretty near it, il ne s^enfaut guere. Nearly, presque, a peu pres. Neat, propre. 'N aatly, propremenf, joliment. Necessary, micessaire, to be, — falloir, irr. see p. 190. Neglect, n., negligence, f, , Nejj^lect. v., negliger. Neighbor, voisin, m., voisine, f. Neither — nor, ni — ni. Never, ne — jamais. Now, neuf, nouveau, frais. News, nouvelle, f. Hext, prochain, suivant. 'N\ce,joli, gentil. Niece, niece, f. Night, nuit. No, non, point. No, nul, aucun. Nobility, noblesse, f. Noise, bruit. Noon, midi, m. Nose, nez, m. Not, no7i, non pas, ne — pas, — at all, point du tout, NothinT, ne — rien. Notwithstanding, nonobstant. Nourish, nourrir. November, novembre, m. Now, maintenant, a present. Number, nombre, numero, m. Oak, cTiene, m. Oats, avoine, f. Obedient, obtissant. Obey, obdir. Oblige, obliger, /aire un plaisir, rendre un ban office. Obliging, obligeant. Observe, observer. Ohifi\n, obtenir, irr. see p. 187, rempor- ter, acqudrir. Occupy, occuper. October, oriobre, m. Odious, odieux. Of, de. Oflend, offenser. Offer, n., offre, f. Ofler, v., offrir, irr. see p. 184, proposer. Often, souvent. Oil, huile. 392 VOCABULARY. Old, vieux, (vieil), age, — age, vieP^t^se, f. How — are you, quel age avez- vousl Omit, omettre, irr. see p. 180. On, sur. Once, une fois, — on a time, autrefois. At — , de suite. All at — , tout a coup, tout d'un coup. Only, adj., seul, unique. Only, adv., ne — que. Open, ouvrir, irr. see p. 185. Open, adj., ouverf, sincere, franc. Openness, sincerite, f. Opportunity, occasion, f. Oppose, s^opposer. Opposite, vis-a-vis, oppose. Or, ou. Orange, orange, f. Order, n., ordre, m. Order, v., presci'ire, irr. see p. 176. Otlier, autre. Otherwise, autrement. Ought. See Owe. Over, sur, au-dessus. To be all — mud, etre tout convert de boue. It's all over, c'est fait, or e'en est fait de. . . Overtake, atteindre, irr. see p. 175. Owe, devoir, irr. see p. 189. Owl, hibou, m. Own, propre. Owner, proprietaire. Ox, bcsuf, m. Pagan, paten, m. Pain, peine, f. On — of death, sous peine de mort. Painful, penible. Paint, peindre, irr. see p. 175. Painter, peintre, m. Painting, tableau, m. Palace, palais, m. Pale. pale. Paper, papier, m. Pardon, pardonner. Parent, pere, mere. Parents, pere et mere. Part, partie, f. To take — in, se meler de. Party, partie, m. ^ Pstss, passer. ^ Passage, passage, m. Patient, malade, m. Pay, payer. Peace, paix, f. Peach, peche, f. Pear, poire, f. Peasant, paysan, m. Pebble, caiUou, m. Peculiar, particulier. Pen, plume, f., — holder, porte-plume. Pencil, crayon, m., — case, porte- crayon. Penknife, canif, m. People, peuplCf gens. Perceive, apercevoir, irr. see p. 189. Perform, faire, s^acquitter de. Perish, pirir. Permit, permettre, irr. see p. 180. Persecute, perse'cuter. Persecutor, persecuteur, m. Person, personne, f. Persuade, /^erswarfer. Picture, tableau, m. Piece, morceau, m., piece^ f. Pierce, percer. Pig, cochon, m. Pin, epingle. Pitiless, impitoyable. Pity, n., pitie, f. It is a — , &est dom mage. Pity, v., plaindre, irr. see p. 175. Place, n,, lieu, m., place, f. Place, v., placer, mettre, irr. see p. 180, Plain, plaine, campagne, f. Plan, plan, projet, m. Plank, planche, f. Phmt, plante, i. Plate, assiette, f. Play, n., jeu., m., comedie, — thing, joujou, m. Play, v., jouer. Player, jouer, m. Please, plaire a, irr. see p. 178. If you please, s'i/ vous plait. Pleasure, plaisir, m. To take pleasure in, se plaire a . . . Plum, prune, f. Plunder, butin, m. Pocket, poche, f., — handkerchief, mour choir, m., — book, porte-feuille. Poet, poete. Poison, v., empoisonner. Polite, 2)oli. Foliteuess, politesse, f. Pond, etang, m. Poor, pauvre. Pope, pape, m. Poplar, peuplier, m. Populous, peuple. Portion, part, f., portion, f. Post-office, poste, f. Potato, pomme de terre, f. Pound, livre, f. Powerful, puissant. Praise, louer. Pray, prier. Precious, precieux. Prefer, preferer. Prescribe, prescrire, irr. see p. 1^6, o>*- donner. Presence, presence, f. Present, present. Preserve, preserver, (pickle) confire, irr. see p. 172. Pretence, pretexte, m. Pretend, feindre, irr. see p. 175. Pretty, adj., joli, gentil. Pretty, adv., a'^sez. He is pretty near it, II ne s^en faut guere. Prey, proie, f. Pride, orgueil, m. VOCABULARY. 393 Principle, principe, m. Print, imprimer. Printing, imprimerie, f. Prison, prison, f. Prodigious, jjrodigieux. Produce, lyroduire, irr. see p. 172. Project, projet, m. Promise, n., promesse, f. Promise, v., promettre, irr. see p. 180. Proper, convenable. Property, proprit'^e, f.. Men, m. Proposal, proposition, f. Propose, proposer. Prove, prouver, Punctually, ponctiiellement. Punctuality, exactitude, f. Punish, puiiir. Punishment, punition, f. Pupil, eleve, m. and f. Purchase, acheter. Purchasiy, acheteur, m. Purpose, but, m., dessein, m. On — , ex- pres, a dessein. Purse, bourse, f. Pursue, poursuivre, irr. see p. 174, Put, mettre, irr. see p. 180. Q. Quarrel, querelle, f. Queen, reine, f. Question, n., question, f. Question, v., interroger. Quiet, tranquille. Quite, toutf tout a fait. R. Railroad, chemin de fer, m. Rain, n., pluie. f. Rain, v., pleuvoir, irr. see p. 190. Rainy, pluvieux. Raise, elever, lever. Rare, rare. Rashness, temerite, i. Ray, rayon, m. Reach, mteindre, irr. see p. 175, parve- mir, irr. see p. 187. Read, lire, irr. see p. 177. To — again, retire. Ready, pret. Reaper, moissoneur. Reason, raison,f. Rebuild, reb'Hir. Recall, rappeler. To — to mind, se rap- pder. Receive, recevoir, irr. see p. 189, accueil- lir, irr. see p. 184. Recognize, reconnaitre, irr. €ee p. 178. Recollect, se rappeler. Recompense, recompense. Recover, se porter mieux, gu4rir. Red, rouge. Reduce, reduire, irr. see p. 172. Reed, roseau, m. Keel, chanceler. Reflect, rejlechir. Refuse, refuser. Regular, regulier. Keign, regne, m. Rejoice, se rejouir. Relate, rapporter, raconter. Relieve, secourir, irr. see p. 184. Rely, compter, s'appuyer. Remain, r ester, deuieurer. Remedy, reniede, m. Remember, se souvenir, irr. see p. 187, se rappeler, — me to Iiim, rappetez-moi A son souvenir. Rend, dc'chirer. Render, rendre. Renounce, renoncer d. Repair, rvparer. Kepeat, rdpiter, redire, irr. see p. 172. Repent, se repentir, irr. see p. 184. Report, n., bniit, m. Report, v., rapporter, raconter. Repose, v., se reposer. Represent, representer. Reproach, v., reprocher, bldmer. Reproduce, reproduire, irr. see p. 172. Require, demander. Resemble, ressembler. Reside, demeurer. Resolution, /erme^^, f. Resolve, resoudre, irr. see p. 175. Rest, n., repos. Rest, v., reposer, s'appuyer. Restless, inquiet. Restrain, restreindre, irr. see p. 176, Return, retourner, revenir. Reveal, reveler. Revenge, vengeance, f. Reward, n., recompense, f, Reward, v., recompenser. Ribbon, ruban, m. Rice, riz, m. Rich, riche. Riches, richesse, f.. Mens, m., pi. Ridiculous, ridicule. Right, titre, m., raison, f. You are iu the — , vous avez raison. Ring, sonner. Ripen, murir. Risp, se lever. Risk, hazarder. River, jleuve, m., riviere, f. Road, chemin, m., route, f. Rob, voler. Robber, voleur, m. Roof, toit, m. Room, chambre, f. Rose, rose, f. Rotten, pourri. Round, adv., autour. Ruler, regie, f. Run, courir, irr. see p. 184, — away, s^enfuir, irr. see p. 183, — to, accourir, — over, parcourir, — aground, echouer. 394 VOCABULARY. S. Sacred, sacre. Sad, fdcheux, triste. Sadness, tristesse, f. Sage, n , sage, m. Salt, set, m. Same, mvme. Satin, satin, m. Satisfy, satisfaire, in. see p. 180. Saturday, suinedi, m. Savage, sauvage. Sr.ucer, soucoi/pe, t. Save, sauver. Say, dire, irr. see p. 172. Scarce, scarcely, a peine. Scholar, ecolier, m., eleve, m. School, ecole, f. Scold, grander. Scratch out, rayer. Seal, cacheter. Season, saison, f. Seduce, seduire, irr. see p. 172. See, voir, irr. see p. 192. Seek, chercher. Seem, 2)araitre, irr. see p. 178, sembler. Seize, saisir. Seldom, rarement. Self, meme. Sell, vendre. Send, envoyer, irr. see p. 194, — away, renvoyer, conegdier, — for, envoger, chercher. Sense, sens, m. Sentiment, sentiment. September, septembre. Servant, domestique. Serve, servir, irr. see p. 183. Set off, out, partir, irr. see p. 183. Sew, coKdre, irr. see p. 174. Shade, shadow, ombre, f. Shame, hovte, f. Sliare, partager. Shed, verser, repandre. Sheep, mouton, ra. Sheet, feuille, f. (of a bed), drap, m. Shine,' briller, luire, irr. see p. 171. Shirt, chemise, f. Shoe, Soulier, m. Shoemaker, cordonner. Shop, boutique. Short, court. Show, montrer. Shower, ondce, f. Shrub, arbuste, m. Shun, eviter, fair, irr. see p. 183. Shut, fermer, — in, enfermer. Sick, malade. Side, cote, m. Sight, vue, f. Silence, silence, m. Silk, soie, f. Silly, niais. Silver, argent, m. Simple, simple. Since, depuis. Sincere, sincere. Sincerity, sincerite, f. Sing, chanter. Singular, singulier. Sir, monsieur. Sister, sceur, — -in law, helle-sceur. Sit (down), s'asseoir, irr. see p. 192. Skate, patiner. Skin, peau, f. Slander, v., medire (de). Sleep, v., dormir, irr. see p. 183. Slide, glis'-.er. Small, petit. Smoke, fumte, f. Snow, n., neiger, f., — flakes, des flocons de neige. Snow, v., neiger. So, ainsi, — many, tant de. Soap, savon, m. Sober, sobre. Soft, doux. Soil, v., souiller, salir. Soldier, soldat, m. Some, du, de la, des, quelque. Something, quelque chose. Son, Jils, m. Soon, bientot. Sorrow, douleur, f., chargin, m. Sorry, fdche {de). Soul, dine, f. Source, source, f. South, SM^, mifZi, m. Speak, parler, — ill of, medire (de). Spell, epeler. Spite, malice, f. In — of, en depit de, malgre. Spoil, corrompre. Spoon, cuiller, cuillere, f, Sport, jeu, m. Spread, etendre, repandre. Spring, printemps, m., ressort, m. Stagger, chanceler. Stain, n., tache, f. Stain, v., tacher. Stairs, escalier, m. Stake, pieu, m. Our life is at — , il y va de notre vie. Star, etoile. State, etat, m,, condition, f. Stay, Tester, demeurer. Step, 2ias, m. Stick, baton, m. , Still, encore, tougours. Stint?, piquer. Stocking, bas, m. Stone, pierre, f. Stop, arrefer. Storm, tempete, f. Strange, etrange. Stranger, etranger. Strawberry, /raise, f. Street, rwe, f. Strength, /orce, f. SivVke, f rapper, (of a clock) sonner. String, cordon, m. Strong, fort. Study, n. etude, f. VOCABULARY. 395 Stuff, etoffe, f. Subdue, subjuger, dompter. Submit, soumettre, irr. see p. ISO. Subtract, soustraire, irr. see p. 174. Succeed, reussir. Success, succes, m. Successful, heureux. To be — , reussir. Such, tel. Suffer, souffrir, irr. see p. 185, endurer, subir. Suffice, sufflre, irr. see p. 171. Sufficiently, assez. Su